Merge commit 'f6d56675f9f981c5464f0ca7a1fbb0162154e8c5'

250 files changed, 75530 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git
deleted file mode 160000
-Subproject b6c18b2a7c544653efbe12a1d4e8ba65e7d83c3
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9cff5b4210
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.c
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the AVRISP project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "AVRISP-MKII.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+	V2Protocol_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		#if (BOARD == BOARD_USBTINYMKII)
+		/* On the USBTINY-MKII target, there is a secondary LED which indicates the current selected power
+		   mode - either VBUS, or sourced from the VTARGET pin of the programming connectors */
+		LEDs_ChangeLEDs(LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER, (PIND & (1 << 0)) ? 0 : LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER);
+		#endif
+
+		AVRISP_Task();
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+	UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode();
+	#endif
+
+	/* USB Stack Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Setup AVRISP Data OUT endpoint */
+	ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Setup AVRISP Data IN endpoint if it is using a physically different endpoint */
+	if ((AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) != (AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))
+	  ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+	/* Indicate endpoint configuration success or failure */
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Processes incoming V2 Protocol commands from the host, returning a response when required. */
+void AVRISP_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Device must be connected and configured for the task to run */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	V2Params_UpdateParamValues();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
+		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  wValue                 Descriptor type and index to retrieve
+ *  \param[in]  wIndex                 Sub-index to retrieve (such as a localized string language)
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress      Address of the retrieved descriptor
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorMemorySpace  Memory space that the descriptor is stored in
+ *
+ *  \return Length of the retrieved descriptor in bytes, or NO_DESCRIPTOR if the descriptor was not found
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+                                    uint8_t* DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress, DescriptorMemorySpace);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..70f86f41c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AVRISP.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AVRISP_H_
+#define _AVRISP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#if defined(ADC)
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#endif
+
+		#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the target is being powered by VBUS. */
+		#define LEDMASK_VBUSPOWER         LEDS_LED3
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void AVRISP_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                                    uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..71ef387a1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISP-MKII.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,385 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage AVRISP MKII Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2) - <i>8KB versions with reduced features only</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Vendor Specific Class</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>N/A</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description
+ *
+ *  Firmware for an Atmel Studio/AVR Studio compatible AVRISP-MKII clone programmer. This project will enable the USB
+ *  AVR series of microcontrollers to act as a clone of the official Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer, usable within
+ *  Atmel Studio/AVR Studio or with any software capable of driving a real Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer. In its most
+ *  basic form, it allows for the programming of AVR TINY, MEGA and XMEGA devices aat the programmer's VCC voltage from
+ *  within Atmel Studio/AVR Studio with no special hardware other than the USB AVR and the parts needed for the USB
+ *  interface. If the user desires, more advanced circuits incorporating level conversion can be made to allow for the
+ *  programming of target AVRs running at a different voltage to the programmer.
+ *
+ *  This device spoofs Atmel's official AVRISP-MKII device PID so that it remains compatible with Atmel's AVRISP-MKII
+ *  drivers. When prompted, direct your OS to install Atmel's AVRISP-MKII drivers provided with Atmel Studio/AVR Studio.
+ *
+ *  Note that this design currently has the following limitations:
+ *    - No reversed/shorted target connector detection and notification
+ *    - A separate header is required for each of the ISP, PDI and TPI programming protocols that the user wishes to use
+ *
+ *  On AVR models with an ADC converter, the USB AVR's AVCC pin should be tied to 5V (e.g. VBUS) and the
+ *  \c VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL token should be set to an appropriate ADC channel number in the project makefile for VTARGET
+ *  detection to operate correctly. On models without an ADC converter, VTARGET will report a fixed 3.3V level at all times
+ *  which should allow the programmer to remain compatible at the protocol level with all AVR devices.
+ *
+ *  While this application can be compiled for USB AVRs with as little as 8KB of FLASH, for full functionality 16KB or more
+ *  of FLASH is required. On 8KB devices, ISP or PDI/TPI protocol programming support can be disabled to reduce program size.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_KnownIssues Known Issues:
+ *
+ *  \par Incompatible with newer AVRDUDE releases.
+ *  Due to <a href="http://savannah.nongnu.org/bugs/index.php?40831">a change in 6.0.1 and never AVRDUDE releases</a>,
+ *  these builds are incompatible with the AVRISP-MKII clone project. Use an older 5.x release until AVRDUDE is patched.
+ *
+ *  \par XMEGA EEPROM programming fails in some cases.
+ *  Several users have reported that XMEGA EEPROM programming fails unless the chip is erased first. If a non-blank EEPROM
+ *  is present, writing further EEPROM data causes corruption.
+ *  <a href="https://github.com/abcminiuser/lufa/issues/25">LUFA issue tracker entry</a>.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Installation Installation
+ *  The programmer supports multiple platforms, both Windows and Linux.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_LinuxInstallation Linux Installation
+ *  On Linux systems, the programmer should be usable out of the box with no special setup other than (on some systems)
+ *  editing of the system permissions to allow the programmer to be used from a non-elevated (root) context. The programmer
+ *  is compatible with the free open source AVRDude programming software project.
+ *
+ *  \subsection SSec_WindowsInstallation Windows Installation
+ *  On Windows systems, due to an unfortunate limitation of the USB AVR devices and the driver used in the official AVR
+ *  Studio/Atmel Studio platform, the programmer cannot be made compatible with AVRDude and AVR Studio/Atmel Studio at the
+ *  same time. Instead, the programmer will be compatible with the official Atmel software by default, with a recompilation
+ *  with the \c LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT token (see \ref Sec_Options) being required to use the alternative libUSB driver
+ *  compatibility mode that will allow the programmer to work under AVRDude on Windows.
+ *
+ *  If compiled for Atmel Studio/AVR Studio compatibility, install the Jungo device drivers that ship with the Atmel software.
+ *  If compiled in the alternative libUSB compatibility mode for AVRDude use, install the libUSB drivers that are included
+ *  with your compiled copy of AVRDude, or create them using the libUSB-Win32 (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libusb-win32)
+ *  project.
+ *
+ *  For convenience, the programmer will report two different serial numbers depending on the firmware compatibility mode, so
+ *  that the correct driver can be installed for the matching firmware. If the \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile option
+ *  is used (see \ref Sec_Options) this allows for an easy way to automatically switch device drivers along with the firmware
+ *  compatibility mode. The serials are:
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Serial Number:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Compatibility Mode:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>000200012345</td>
+ *    <td>Jungo (Atmel Studio) Compatibility</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>000200112345</td>
+ *    <td>libUSB Compatibility</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_ISP ISP Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for SPI programming (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>ISP 6 Pin Layout:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MISO</td>
+ *    <td>PDO</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SCLK</td>
+ *    <td>SCLK</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MOSI</td>
+ *    <td>PDI</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>/RESET</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  In addition, the AVR's OCR1A pin will generate a 4MHz clock, to act as an external rescue device clock if the
+ *  fuses have been mis-set. To use the recovery clock, connect the OCR1A pin of the USB AVR to the target AVR's
+ *  XTAL1 pin, and set the ISP programming speed to 125KHz (note: other ISP speeds will not work correctly).
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref Sec_Options section</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_PDI PDI Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for PDI programming (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>PDI 6 Pin Layout:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>DATA</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCK</td>
+ *    <td>CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_TPI TPI Connections
+ *  Connections to the device for TPI programming (when enabled):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Programmer Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Target Device Pin:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>TPI 6 Pin Layout:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Tx/Rx <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>DATA</td>
+ *    <td>1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ADCx <b><sup>1</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>VTARGET</td>
+ *    <td>2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCK <b><sup>2</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *    <td>4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PORTx.y <b><sup>3</sup></b></td>
+ *    <td>/RESET</td>
+ *    <td>5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  <b><sup>1</sup></b> <i>Optional, see \ref Sec_Options section - for USB AVRs with ADC modules only</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>2</sup></b> <i>The AVR's Tx and Rx become the DATA line when connected together via a pair of 220 ohm resistors</i> \n
+ *  <b><sup>3</sup></b> <i>See AUX line related tokens in the \ref Sec_Options section</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PORT register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_PIN</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PIN register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>DDR register for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AUX_LINE_MASK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the programmer's AUX target line. The use of this line varies between the programming protocols,
+ *        but is generally used for the target's /RESET line. <b>Must not be the AVR's /SS pin</b>.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>ADC channel number (on supported AVRs) to use for VTARGET level detection, if NO_VTARGET_DETECT is not defined.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to enable SPI programming protocol support.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to enable PDI and TPI programming protocol support.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for the XPLAIN board.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>NO_VTARGET_DETECT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to disable VTARGET sampling and reporting on AVR models with an ADC converter. This will cause the programmer
+ *        to report a fixed 3.3V target voltage to the host regardless of the real target voltage.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_REF_VOLTS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the programmer AVR's AVCC reference voltage when measuring the target's supply voltage. Note that the supply
+ *        voltage should never exceed the reference voltage on the programmer AVR without some form of protection to prevent damage
+ *        to the ADC.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Selects the internal 2.56V ADC reference voltage, instead of using the AVR's VREF pin. When enabled, this option will
+ *        override the VTARGET_REF_VOLTS configuration option.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the target's supply voltage scale factor when applied to the ADC. A simple resistive divider can be used on the
+ *        ADC pin for measuring the target's supply voltage, so that voltages above the programmer AVR's AVCC reference voltage can be
+ *        measured. This should be the reciprocal of the division performed - e.g. if the VTARGET voltage is halved, this should be set
+ *        to 2.
+ *        \n \n <i>Ignored when compiled for targets lacking an ADC, or when NO_VTARGET_DETECT is defined.</i></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with Atmel Studio/AVR Studio under Windows but
+ *        making the code compatible with software such as avrdude (all platforms) that use the libUSB driver.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to make the /RESET line of the AVR toggle between Jungo and libUSB driver compatibility modes. Each time the AVR is
+ *        reset externally via the reset pin, the compatibility mode will be toggled. The compatibility mode is preserved between
+ *        power cycles and is not toggled via other forms of reset such as Watchdog or Brown Out.
+ *
+ *        When this option is enabled, all board LEDs will flash twice on startup for Jungo compatibility mode, and five times for
+ *        libUSB compatibility mode.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to move the ISP rescue clock to the AVR's XCK pin instead of the OCR1A output pin. This is useful for existing programming
+ *        hardware that does not expose the OCR1A pin of the AVR, but <i>may</i> cause some issues with PDI programming mode.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>INVERTED_ISP_MISO</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to invert the received data on the ISP MISO line. This is sometimes needed depending on the level translation hardware used,
+ *        if the translator hardware inverts the received logic level.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to set the minor firmware revision nunber reported to the host on request. By default this will use a firmware version compatible
+ *        with the latest Atmel IDE version, however if desired the reported minor value can be adjusted here.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a098e7020a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,302 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+
+#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+	/** Indicates if an external reset has occurred and the compatibility mode needs to be altered */
+	static bool AVRISP_NeedCompatibilitySwitch ATTR_NO_INIT;
+
+	/** Current AVRISP data IN endpoint address. */
+	uint8_t AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress;
+
+	/** Saved AVRISP data IN endpoint address in EEPROM. */
+	uint8_t AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress_EEPROM EEMEM;
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2104,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_AVRISP,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+			.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			.EndpointAddress        = 0,
+#else
+			.EndpointAddress        = AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR,
+#endif
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+
+	.AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x0A
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"ATMEL");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM AVRISP_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"AVRISP mkII");
+
+/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
+ *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
+ */
+USB_Descriptor_String_t AVRISP_SerialString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"000200012345\0"
+    // Note: Real AVRISP-MKII has the embedded NUL byte, bug in firmware?
+);
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                              const uint8_t wIndex,
+                              const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+                              uint8_t* DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_FLASH;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &AVRISP_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_RAM;
+			#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+				/* Update the configuration descriptor with the current endpoint address */
+				AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor.AVRISP_DataInEndpoint.EndpointAddress = AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress;
+			#endif
+
+			Address = &AVRISP_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &AVRISP_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &AVRISP_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &AVRISP_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&AVRISP_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial:
+					Address = &AVRISP_SerialString;
+					Size    = AVRISP_SerialString.Header.Size;
+
+					/* Update serial number to have a different serial based on the current endpoint address */
+					((uint16_t*)&AVRISP_SerialString.UnicodeString)[6] = cpu_to_le16('0' + (AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK));
+
+					*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_RAM;
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
+#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+/** Checks the state of the system status register MCUSR and indicates via a flag if
+ *  the current AVRISP driver compatibility mode needs to be reset.
+ *
+ *  When the \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile time option is enabled, pulling
+ *  the reset line of the AVR low will toggle between Jungo and libUSB compatibility
+ *  modes. Other forms of reset (such as power on or watchdog) will not force a mode
+ *  change.
+ */
+void CheckExternalReset(void)
+{
+	/* If an external reset occurred, we need to change compatibility mode */
+	AVRISP_NeedCompatibilitySwitch = (MCUSR == (1 << EXTRF));
+
+	MCUSR = 0;
+}
+
+/** Updates the device descriptors so that the correct compatibility mode is used
+ *  when the \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT compile time option is enabled. This
+ *  configures the programmer for either Jungo or libUSB driver compatibility. Each
+ *  time the AVR is reset via pulling the reset line low the compatibility mode will
+ *  be toggled. The current mode is stored in EEPROM and preserved through power
+ *  cycles of the AVR.
+ */
+void UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode(void)
+{
+	/* Load the current IN endpoint address stored in EEPROM */
+	AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress = eeprom_read_byte(&AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress_EEPROM);
+
+	/* Check if we need to switch compatibility modes */
+	if (AVRISP_NeedCompatibilitySwitch)
+	{
+		/* Toggle between compatibility modes */
+		AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress = (AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress == AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB) ?
+				AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO : AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB;
+
+		/* Save the new mode into EEPROM */
+		eeprom_update_byte(&AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress_EEPROM, AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress);
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+
+	/* Validate IN endpoint address and indicate current mode via LED flashes */
+	switch (AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress)
+	{
+		default:
+			/* Default to Jungo compatibility mode if saved EEPROM is invalid */
+			AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress = AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO;
+		case AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO:
+			/* Two flashes for Jungo compatibility mode */
+			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 4; i++)
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				Delay_MS(100);
+			}
+			break;
+		case AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB:
+			/* Five flashes for libUSB compatibility mode */
+			for (uint8_t i = 0; i < 10; i++)
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_ALL_LEDS);
+				Delay_MS(100);
+			}
+			break;
+	}
+
+	Delay_MS(500);
+}
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..40d711387c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/AVRISPDescriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if defined(LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT) && defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			#error LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT and RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT are mutually exclusive.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data IN endpoint, when in Jungo driver compatibility mode. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO    (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data IN endpoint, when in LibUSB driver compatibility mode. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB   (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR      AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress
+		#elif defined(LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT)
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR      AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_LIBUSB
+		#else
+			/** Endpoint address of the AVRISP data IN endpoint. */
+			#define AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR      AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR_JUNGO
+		#endif
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the AVRISP data endpoint. */
+		#define AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE             64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// Atmel AVRISP-MKII Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               AVRISP_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                AVRISP_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} AVRISP_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AVRISP = 0, /**< AVRISP interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum AVRISP_StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+			AVRISP_STRING_ID_Serial       = 3, /**< Serial number string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+			extern uint8_t AVRISP_CurrDataINEndpointAddress;
+		#endif
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t AVRISP_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                              const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                              const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                              uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+		                              ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+		#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+		void CheckExternalReset(void) ATTR_NAKED ATTR_INIT_SECTION(3);
+		void UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..979b354c44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,70 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AUX_LINE_PORT              PORTB
+	#define AUX_LINE_PIN               PINB
+	#define AUX_LINE_DDR               DDRB
+	#if (BOARD == BOARD_U2S)
+		#define AUX_LINE_MASK          (1 << 0)
+	#else
+		#define AUX_LINE_MASK          (1 << 4)
+	#endif
+
+	#define ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+	#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+
+	#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL        2
+	#define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS          5
+	#define VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR       1
+//	#define VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF
+//	#define NO_VTARGET_DETECT
+//	#define XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE
+//	#define INVERTED_ISP_MISO
+
+	#define LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT
+//	#define RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT
+//	#define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR     0x11
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9c1715cedf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      16
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..60552564ef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c
@@ -0,0 +1,531 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  ISP Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped ISP commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#include "ISPProtocol.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP command, which attempts to enter programming mode on
+ *  the attached device, returning success or failure back to the host.
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t TimeoutMS;
+		uint8_t PinStabDelayMS;
+		uint8_t ExecutionDelayMS;
+		uint8_t SynchLoops;
+		uint8_t ByteDelay;
+		uint8_t PollValue;
+		uint8_t PollIndex;
+		uint8_t EnterProgBytes[4];
+	} Enter_ISP_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Enter_ISP_Params, sizeof(Enter_ISP_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_FAILED;
+
+	CurrentAddress = 0;
+
+	/* Perform execution delay, initialize SPI bus */
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ExecutionDelayMS);
+	ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP();
+
+	ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true);
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+
+	/* Continuously attempt to synchronize with the target until either the number of attempts specified
+	 * by the host has exceeded, or the the device sends back the expected response values */
+	while (Enter_ISP_Params.SynchLoops-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	{
+		uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
+
+		for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
+		{
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.ByteDelay);
+			ResponseBytes[RByte] = ISPTarget_TransferByte(Enter_ISP_Params.EnterProgBytes[RByte]);
+		}
+
+		/* Check if polling disabled, or if the polled value matches the expected value */
+		if (!(Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex) || (ResponseBytes[Enter_ISP_Params.PollIndex - 1] == Enter_ISP_Params.PollValue))
+		{
+			ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+			break;
+		}
+		else
+		{
+			ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+			ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(true);
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Enter_ISP_Params.PinStabDelayMS);
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_LEAVE_ISP command, which releases the target from programming mode. */
+void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t PreDelayMS;
+		uint8_t PostDelayMS;
+	} Leave_ISP_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Leave_ISP_Params, sizeof(Leave_ISP_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	/* Perform pre-exit delay, release the target /RESET, disable the SPI bus and perform the post-exit delay */
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PreDelayMS);
+	ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(false);
+	ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP();
+	ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Leave_ISP_Params.PostDelayMS);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP and CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP commands, writing out bytes,
+ *  words or pages of data to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint16_t BytesToWrite;
+		uint8_t  ProgrammingMode;
+		uint8_t  DelayMS;
+		uint8_t  ProgrammingCommands[3];
+		uint8_t  PollValue1;
+		uint8_t  PollValue2;
+		uint8_t  ProgData[256]; // Note, the Jungo driver has a very short ACK timeout period, need to buffer the
+	} Write_Memory_Params;      // whole page and ACK the packet as fast as possible to prevent it from aborting
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params, (sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) -
+	                                               sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)), NULL);
+	Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite = SwapEndian_16(Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite);
+
+	if (Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite > sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData))
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+		Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+		Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		return;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_Memory_Params.ProgData, Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite, NULL);
+
+	// The driver will terminate transfers that are a round multiple of the endpoint bank in size with a ZLP, need
+	// to catch this and discard it before continuing on with packet processing to prevent communication issues
+	if (((sizeof(uint8_t) + sizeof(Write_Memory_Params) - sizeof(Write_Memory_Params.ProgData)) +
+	    Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite) % AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE == 0)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t  ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+	uint8_t  PollValue         = (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) ? Write_Memory_Params.PollValue1 :
+	                                                                    Write_Memory_Params.PollValue2;
+	uint16_t PollAddress       = 0;
+	uint8_t* NextWriteByte     = Write_Memory_Params.ProgData;
+	uint16_t PageStartAddress  = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
+
+	for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Write_Memory_Params.BytesToWrite; CurrentByte++)
+	{
+		uint8_t ByteToWrite     = *(NextWriteByte++);
+		uint8_t ProgrammingMode = Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode;
+
+		/* Check to see if we need to send a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target */
+		if (MustLoadExtendedAddress)
+		{
+			ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
+			MustLoadExtendedAddress = false;
+		}
+
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0]);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(ByteToWrite);
+
+		/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the write command based on if we are writing a high
+		 * or low byte at the current word address */
+		if (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP)
+		  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[0] ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+		/* Check to see if we have a valid polling address */
+		if (!(PollAddress) && (ByteToWrite != PollValue))
+		{
+			if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) && (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP))
+			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] |=  READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+			else
+			  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2] &= ~READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+			PollAddress = (CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF);
+		}
+
+		/* If in word programming mode, commit the byte to the target's memory */
+		if (!(ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK))
+		{
+			/* If the current polling address is invalid, switch to timed delay write completion mode */
+			if (!(PollAddress) && !(ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK))
+			  ProgrammingMode = (ProgrammingMode & ~PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK) | PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK;
+
+			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
+			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS,
+			                                                  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
+
+			/* Abort the programming loop early if the byte/word programming failed */
+			if (ProgrammingStatus != STATUS_CMD_OK)
+			  break;
+
+			/* Must reset the polling address afterwards, so it is not erroneously used for the next byte */
+			PollAddress = 0;
+		}
+
+		/* EEPROM just increments the address each byte, flash needs to increment on each word and
+		 * also check to ensure that a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command is issued each time the extended
+		 * address boundary has been crossed during FLASH memory programming */
+		if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) || (V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP))
+		{
+			CurrentAddress++;
+
+			if ((V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF))
+			  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* If the current page must be committed, send the PROGRAM PAGE command to the target */
+	if (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK)
+	{
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[1]);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(PageStartAddress >> 8);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(PageStartAddress & 0xFF);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Check if polling is enabled and possible, if not switch to timed delay mode */
+		if ((Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK) && !(PollAddress))
+		{
+			Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode = (Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode & ~PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK) |
+												   PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK;
+		}
+
+		ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingMode, PollAddress, PollValue,
+		                                                  Write_Memory_Params.DelayMS,
+		                                                  Write_Memory_Params.ProgrammingCommands[2]);
+
+		/* Check to see if the FLASH address has crossed the extended address boundary */
+		if ((V2Command == CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF))
+		  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ProgrammingStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP and CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP commands, reading in bytes,
+ *  words or pages of data from the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint16_t BytesToRead;
+		uint8_t  ReadMemoryCommand;
+	} Read_Memory_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_Memory_Params, sizeof(Read_Memory_Params), NULL);
+	Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead = SwapEndian_16(Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	/* Read each byte from the device and write them to the packet for the host */
+	for (uint16_t CurrentByte = 0; CurrentByte < Read_Memory_Params.BytesToRead; CurrentByte++)
+	{
+		/* Check to see if we need to send a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target */
+		if (MustLoadExtendedAddress)
+		{
+			ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress();
+			MustLoadExtendedAddress = false;
+		}
+
+		/* Read the next byte from the desired memory space in the device */
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 8);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress & 0xFF);
+		Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_ReceiveByte());
+
+		/* Check if the endpoint bank is currently full, if so send the packet */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		}
+
+		/* AVR FLASH addressing requires us to modify the read command based on if we are reading a high
+		 * or low byte at the current word address */
+		if (V2Command == CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP)
+		  Read_Memory_Params.ReadMemoryCommand ^= READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK;
+
+		/* EEPROM just increments the address each byte, flash needs to increment on each word and
+		 * also check to ensure that a LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command is issued each time the extended
+		 * address boundary has been crossed */
+		if ((CurrentByte & 0x01) || (V2Command == CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP))
+		{
+			CurrentAddress++;
+
+			if ((V2Command != CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP) && !(CurrentAddress & 0xFFFF))
+			  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_CHI_ERASE_ISP command, clearing the target's FLASH memory. */
+void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t EraseDelayMS;
+		uint8_t PollMethod;
+		uint8_t EraseCommandBytes[4];
+	} Erase_Chip_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_Chip_Params, sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+
+	/* Send the chip erase commands as given by the host to the device */
+	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes); SByte++)
+	  ISPTarget_SendByte(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseCommandBytes[SByte]);
+
+	/* Use appropriate command completion check as given by the host (delay or busy polling) */
+	if (!(Erase_Chip_Params.PollMethod))
+	  ISPProtocol_DelayMS(Erase_Chip_Params.EraseDelayMS);
+	else
+	  ResponseStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP, CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP, CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP and CMD_READ_OSCCAL commands,
+ *  reading the requested configuration byte from the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t RetByte;
+		uint8_t ReadCommandBytes[4];
+	} Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params, sizeof(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ResponseBytes[4];
+
+	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte read commands as given by the host to the device, store response */
+	for (uint8_t RByte = 0; RByte < sizeof(ResponseBytes); RByte++)
+	  ResponseBytes[RByte] = ISPTarget_TransferByte(Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.ReadCommandBytes[RByte]);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ResponseBytes[Read_FuseLockSigOSCCAL_Params.RetByte - 1]);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_WRITE_FUSE_ISP and CMD_WRITE_LOCK_ISP commands, writing the requested configuration
+ *  byte to the device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t WriteCommandBytes[4];
+	} Write_FuseLockSig_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Write_FuseLockSig_Params, sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	/* Send the Fuse or Lock byte program commands as given by the host to the device */
+	for (uint8_t SByte = 0; SByte < sizeof(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes); SByte++)
+	  ISPTarget_SendByte(Write_FuseLockSig_Params.WriteCommandBytes[SByte]);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SPI_MULTI command, writing and reading arbitrary SPI data to and from the attached device. */
+void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t TxBytes;
+		uint8_t RxBytes;
+		uint8_t RxStartAddr;
+		uint8_t TxData[255];
+	} SPI_Multi_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params, (sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params) - sizeof(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData)), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SPI_Multi_Params.TxData, SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes, NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_SPI_MULTI);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	uint8_t CurrTxPos = 0;
+	uint8_t CurrRxPos = 0;
+
+	/* Write out bytes to transmit until the start of the bytes to receive is met */
+	while (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxStartAddr)
+	{
+		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
+		  ISPTarget_SendByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos]);
+		else
+		  ISPTarget_SendByte(0);
+
+		CurrTxPos++;
+	}
+
+	/* Transmit remaining bytes with padding as needed, read in response bytes */
+	while (CurrRxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.RxBytes)
+	{
+		if (CurrTxPos < SPI_Multi_Params.TxBytes)
+		  Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_TransferByte(SPI_Multi_Params.TxData[CurrTxPos++]));
+		else
+		  Endpoint_Write_8(ISPTarget_ReceiveByte());
+
+		/* Check to see if we have filled the endpoint bank and need to send the packet */
+		if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+		{
+			Endpoint_ClearIN();
+			Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		}
+
+		CurrRxPos++;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+
+	bool IsEndpointFull = !(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed());
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Ensure last packet is a short packet to terminate the transfer */
+	if (IsEndpointFull)
+	{
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+		Endpoint_ClearIN();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Blocking delay for a given number of milliseconds. This provides a simple wrapper around
+ *  the avr-libc provided delay function, so that the delay function can be called with a
+ *  constant value (to prevent run-time floating point operations being required).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] DelayMS  Number of milliseconds to delay for
+ */
+void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS)
+{
+	while (DelayMS-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	  Delay_MS(1);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..29d2bf747a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h
@@ -0,0 +1,81 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ISPProtocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ISP_PROTOCOL_
+#define _ISP_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Mask for the reading or writing of the high byte in a FLASH word when issuing a low-level programming command. */
+		#define READ_WRITE_HIGH_BYTE_MASK       (1 << 3)
+
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK     (1 << 0)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK   (1 << 1)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK       (1 << 2)
+		#define PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK   (1 << 3)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK  (1 << 4)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK      (1 << 5)
+		#define PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK  (1 << 6)
+		#define PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK      (1 << 7)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_ChipErase(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(const uint8_t V2Command);
+		void ISPProtocol_SPIMulti(void);
+		void ISPProtocol_DelayMS(uint8_t DelayMS);
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6cfe01708d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the ISP Protocol decoder.
+ */
+
+#include "ISPTarget.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** List of hardware SPI prescaler masks for possible AVRStudio ISP programming speeds.
+ *
+ *  \hideinitializer
+ */
+static const uint8_t SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[] PROGMEM =
+{
+#if (F_CPU == 8000000)
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
+#elif (F_CPU == 16000000)
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_2,    // AVRStudio =   8MHz SPI, Actual =   8MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_4,    // AVRStudio =   4MHz SPI, Actual =   4MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_8,    // AVRStudio =   2MHz SPI, Actual =   2MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_16,   // AVRStudio =   1MHz SPI, Actual =   1MHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_32,   // AVRStudio = 500KHz SPI, Actual = 500KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_64,   // AVRStudio = 250KHz SPI, Actual = 250KHz SPI
+	SPI_SPEED_FCPU_DIV_128   // AVRStudio = 125KHz SPI, Actual = 125KHz SPI
+#else
+	#error No SPI prescaler masks for chosen F_CPU speed.
+#endif
+};
+
+/** Lookup table to convert the slower ISP speeds into a compare value for the software SPI driver.
+ *
+ *  \hideinitializer
+ */
+static const uint16_t TimerCompareFromSCKDuration[] PROGMEM =
+{
+	TIMER_COMP(96386), TIMER_COMP(89888), TIMER_COMP(84211), TIMER_COMP(79208), TIMER_COMP(74767),
+	TIMER_COMP(70797), TIMER_COMP(67227), TIMER_COMP(64000), TIMER_COMP(61069), TIMER_COMP(58395),
+	TIMER_COMP(55945), TIMER_COMP(51613), TIMER_COMP(49690), TIMER_COMP(47905), TIMER_COMP(46243),
+	TIMER_COMP(43244), TIMER_COMP(41885), TIMER_COMP(39409), TIMER_COMP(38278), TIMER_COMP(36200),
+	TIMER_COMP(34335), TIMER_COMP(32654), TIMER_COMP(31129), TIMER_COMP(29740), TIMER_COMP(28470),
+	TIMER_COMP(27304), TIMER_COMP(25724), TIMER_COMP(24768), TIMER_COMP(23461), TIMER_COMP(22285),
+	TIMER_COMP(21221), TIMER_COMP(20254), TIMER_COMP(19371), TIMER_COMP(18562), TIMER_COMP(17583),
+	TIMER_COMP(16914), TIMER_COMP(16097), TIMER_COMP(15356), TIMER_COMP(14520), TIMER_COMP(13914),
+	TIMER_COMP(13224), TIMER_COMP(12599), TIMER_COMP(12031), TIMER_COMP(11511), TIMER_COMP(10944),
+	TIMER_COMP(10431), TIMER_COMP(9963),  TIMER_COMP(9468),  TIMER_COMP(9081),  TIMER_COMP(8612),
+	TIMER_COMP(8239),  TIMER_COMP(7851),  TIMER_COMP(7498),  TIMER_COMP(7137),  TIMER_COMP(6809),
+	TIMER_COMP(6478),  TIMER_COMP(6178),  TIMER_COMP(5879),  TIMER_COMP(5607),  TIMER_COMP(5359),
+	TIMER_COMP(5093),  TIMER_COMP(4870),  TIMER_COMP(4633),  TIMER_COMP(4418),  TIMER_COMP(4209),
+	TIMER_COMP(4019),  TIMER_COMP(3823),  TIMER_COMP(3645),  TIMER_COMP(3474),  TIMER_COMP(3310),
+	TIMER_COMP(3161),  TIMER_COMP(3011),  TIMER_COMP(2869),  TIMER_COMP(2734),  TIMER_COMP(2611),
+	TIMER_COMP(2484),  TIMER_COMP(2369),  TIMER_COMP(2257),  TIMER_COMP(2152),  TIMER_COMP(2052),
+	TIMER_COMP(1956),  TIMER_COMP(1866),  TIMER_COMP(1779),  TIMER_COMP(1695),  TIMER_COMP(1615),
+	TIMER_COMP(1539),  TIMER_COMP(1468),  TIMER_COMP(1398),  TIMER_COMP(1333),  TIMER_COMP(1271),
+	TIMER_COMP(1212),  TIMER_COMP(1155),  TIMER_COMP(1101),  TIMER_COMP(1049),  TIMER_COMP(1000),
+	TIMER_COMP(953),   TIMER_COMP(909),   TIMER_COMP(866),   TIMER_COMP(826),   TIMER_COMP(787),
+	TIMER_COMP(750),   TIMER_COMP(715),   TIMER_COMP(682),   TIMER_COMP(650),   TIMER_COMP(619),
+	TIMER_COMP(590),   TIMER_COMP(563),   TIMER_COMP(536),   TIMER_COMP(511),   TIMER_COMP(487),
+	TIMER_COMP(465),   TIMER_COMP(443),   TIMER_COMP(422),   TIMER_COMP(402),   TIMER_COMP(384),
+	TIMER_COMP(366),   TIMER_COMP(349),   TIMER_COMP(332),   TIMER_COMP(317),   TIMER_COMP(302),
+	TIMER_COMP(288),   TIMER_COMP(274),   TIMER_COMP(261),   TIMER_COMP(249),   TIMER_COMP(238),
+	TIMER_COMP(226),   TIMER_COMP(216),   TIMER_COMP(206),   TIMER_COMP(196),   TIMER_COMP(187),
+	TIMER_COMP(178),   TIMER_COMP(170),   TIMER_COMP(162),   TIMER_COMP(154),   TIMER_COMP(147),
+	TIMER_COMP(140),   TIMER_COMP(134),   TIMER_COMP(128),   TIMER_COMP(122),   TIMER_COMP(116),
+	TIMER_COMP(111),   TIMER_COMP(105),   TIMER_COMP(100),   TIMER_COMP(95.4),  TIMER_COMP(90.9),
+	TIMER_COMP(86.6),  TIMER_COMP(82.6),  TIMER_COMP(78.7),  TIMER_COMP(75.0),  TIMER_COMP(71.5),
+	TIMER_COMP(68.2),  TIMER_COMP(65.0),  TIMER_COMP(61.9),  TIMER_COMP(59.0),  TIMER_COMP(56.3),
+	TIMER_COMP(53.6),  TIMER_COMP(51.1)
+};
+
+/** Currently selected SPI driver, either hardware (for fast ISP speeds) or software (for slower ISP speeds). */
+bool HardwareSPIMode = true;
+
+/** Software SPI data register for sending and receiving */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftSPI_Data;
+
+/** Number of bits left to transfer in the software SPI driver */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftSPI_BitsRemaining;
+
+
+/** ISR to handle software SPI transmission and reception */
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Check if rising edge (output next bit) or falling edge (read in next bit) */
+	if (!(PINB & (1 << 1)))
+	{
+		if (SoftSPI_Data & (1 << 7))
+		  PORTB |=  (1 << 2);
+		else
+		  PORTB &= ~(1 << 2);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		SoftSPI_Data <<= 1;
+
+		if (!(--SoftSPI_BitsRemaining))
+		{
+			TCCR1B = 0;
+			TIFR1  = (1 << OCF1A);
+		}
+
+		if (PINB & (1 << 3))
+		  SoftSPI_Data |= (1 << 0);
+	}
+
+	/* Fast toggle of PORTB.1 via the PIN register (see datasheet) */
+	PINB |= (1 << 1);
+}
+
+/** Initializes the appropriate SPI driver (hardware or software, depending on the selected ISP speed) ready for
+ *  communication with the attached target.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP(void)
+{
+	uint8_t SCKDuration = V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_SCK_DURATION);
+
+	if (SCKDuration < sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration))
+	{
+		HardwareSPIMode = true;
+
+		SPI_Init(pgm_read_byte(&SPIMaskFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration]) | SPI_ORDER_MSB_FIRST |
+		                       SPI_SCK_LEAD_RISING | SPI_SAMPLE_LEADING | SPI_MODE_MASTER);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		HardwareSPIMode = false;
+
+		DDRB  |= ((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+		PORTB |= ((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
+
+		ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(SCKDuration);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Shuts down the current selected SPI driver (hardware or software, depending on the selected ISP speed) so that no
+ *  further communications can occur until the driver is re-initialized.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP(void)
+{
+	if (HardwareSPIMode)
+	{
+		SPI_Disable();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		DDRB  &= ~((1 << 1) | (1 << 2));
+		PORTB &= ~((1 << 0) | (1 << 3));
+
+		/* Must re-enable rescue clock once software ISP has exited, as the timer for the rescue clock is
+		 * re-purposed for software SPI */
+		ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the AVR to produce a 4MHz rescue clock out of the OCR1A pin of the AVR, so
+ *  that it can be fed into the XTAL1 pin of an AVR whose fuses have been mis-configured for
+ *  an external clock rather than a crystal. When used, the ISP speed must be 125KHz for this
+ *  functionality to work correctly.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(void)
+{
+	#if defined(XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE)
+		/* Configure XCK as an output for the specified AVR model */
+		DDRD  |= (1 << 5);
+
+		/* Start USART to generate a 4MHz clock on the XCK pin */
+		UBRR1  = ((F_CPU / 2 / ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED) - 1);
+		UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+		UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+	#else
+		/* Configure OCR1A as an output for the specified AVR model */
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_2_AVR)
+		DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+		#else
+		DDRB |= (1 << 5);
+		#endif
+
+		/* Start Timer 1 to generate a 4MHz clock on the OCR1A pin */
+		TIMSK1 = 0;
+		TCNT1  = 0;
+		OCR1A  = ((F_CPU / 2 / ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED) - 1);
+		TCCR1A = (1 << COM1A0);
+		TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS10));
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Configures the AVR's timer ready to produce software SPI for the slower ISP speeds that
+ *  cannot be obtained when using the AVR's hardware SPI module.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] SCKDuration  Duration of the desired software ISP SCK clock
+ */
+void ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(const uint8_t SCKDuration)
+{
+	/* Configure Timer 1 for software SPI using the specified SCK duration */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
+	TCNT1  = 0;
+	OCR1A  = pgm_read_word(&TimerCompareFromSCKDuration[SCKDuration - sizeof(SPIMaskFromSCKDuration)]);
+	TCCR1A = 0;
+	TCCR1B = 0;
+}
+
+/** Sends and receives a single byte of data to and from the attached target via software SPI.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the attached target
+ *
+ *  \return Received byte of data from the attached target
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	SoftSPI_Data          = Byte;
+	SoftSPI_BitsRemaining = 8;
+
+	/* Set initial MOSI pin state according to the byte to be transferred */
+	if (SoftSPI_Data & (1 << 7))
+	  PORTB |=  (1 << 2);
+	else
+	  PORTB &= ~(1 << 2);
+
+	TCNT1  = 0;
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS11));
+	while (SoftSPI_BitsRemaining && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+	TCCR1B = 0;
+
+	return SoftSPI_Data;
+}
+
+/** Asserts or deasserts the target's reset line, using the correct polarity as set by the host using a SET PARAM command.
+ *  When not asserted, the line is tristated so as not to interfere with normal device operation.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ResetTarget  Boolean true when the target should be held in reset, \c false otherwise
+ */
+void ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget)
+{
+	if (ResetTarget)
+	{
+		AUX_LINE_DDR |= AUX_LINE_MASK;
+
+		if (!(V2Params_GetParameterValue(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)))
+		  AUX_LINE_PORT |=  AUX_LINE_MASK;
+		else
+		  AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+		AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Waits until the target has completed the last operation, by continuously polling the device's
+ *  BUSY flag until it is cleared, or until the command timeout period has expired.
+ *
+ *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void)
+{
+	do
+	{
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0xF0);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+		ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+	while ((ISPTarget_ReceiveByte() & 0x01) && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT;
+}
+
+/** Sends a low-level LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS command to the target, for addressing of memory beyond the
+ *  64KB boundary. This sends the command with the correct address as indicated by the current address
+ *  pointer variable set by the host when a SET ADDRESS command is issued.
+ */
+void ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void)
+{
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD);
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(CurrentAddress >> 16);
+	ISPTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+}
+
+/** Waits until the last issued target memory programming command has completed, via the check mode given and using
+ *  the given parameters.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ProgrammingMode  Programming mode used and completion check to use, a mask of \c PROG_MODE_* constants
+ *  \param[in] PollAddress      Memory address to poll for completion if polling check mode used
+ *  \param[in] PollValue        Poll value to check against if polling check mode used
+ *  \param[in] DelayMS          Milliseconds to delay before returning if delay check mode used
+ *  \param[in] ReadMemCommand   Device low-level READ MEMORY command to send if value check mode used
+ *
+ *  \return V2 Protocol status \ref STATUS_CMD_OK if the no timeout occurred, \ref STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT or
+ *          \ref STATUS_CMD_TOUT otherwise
+ */
+uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode,
+                                      const uint16_t PollAddress,
+                                      const uint8_t PollValue,
+                                      const uint8_t DelayMS,
+                                      const uint8_t ReadMemCommand)
+{
+	uint8_t ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_OK;
+
+	/* Determine method of Programming Complete check */
+	switch (ProgrammingMode & ~(PROG_MODE_PAGED_WRITES_MASK | PROG_MODE_COMMIT_PAGE_MASK))
+	{
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_TIMEDELAY_MASK:
+			ISPProtocol_DelayMS(DelayMS);
+			break;
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_VALUE_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_VALUE_MASK:
+			do
+			{
+				ISPTarget_SendByte(ReadMemCommand);
+				ISPTarget_SendByte(PollAddress >> 8);
+				ISPTarget_SendByte(PollAddress & 0xFF);
+			}
+			while ((ISPTarget_TransferByte(0x00) == PollValue) && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+
+			if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+			  ProgrammingStatus = STATUS_CMD_TOUT;
+
+			break;
+		case PROG_MODE_WORD_READYBUSY_MASK:
+		case PROG_MODE_PAGED_READYBUSY_MASK:
+			ProgrammingStatus = ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy();
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Program complete - reset timeout */
+	TimeoutTicksRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS;
+
+	return ProgrammingStatus;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1687abac18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h
@@ -0,0 +1,147 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ISPTarget.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _ISP_TARGET_
+#define _ISP_TARGET_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "ISPProtocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Low level device command to issue an extended FLASH address, for devices with over 128KB of FLASH. */
+		#define LOAD_EXTENDED_ADDRESS_CMD     0x4D
+
+		/** Macro to convert an ISP frequency to a number of timer clock cycles for the software SPI driver. */
+		#define TIMER_COMP(freq)              (((F_CPU / 8) / 2 / freq) - 1)
+
+		/** ISP rescue clock speed in Hz, for clocking targets with incorrectly set fuses. */
+		#define ISP_RESCUE_CLOCK_SPEED        4000000
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern bool HardwareSPIMode;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    ISPTarget_EnableTargetISP(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_DisableTargetISP(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_ConfigureSoftwareSPI(const uint8_t SCKDuration);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(const uint8_t Byte);
+		void    ISPTarget_ChangeTargetResetLine(const bool ResetTarget);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitWhileTargetBusy(void);
+		void    ISPTarget_LoadExtendedAddress(void);
+		uint8_t ISPTarget_WaitForProgComplete(const uint8_t ProgrammingMode,
+		                                      const uint16_t PollAddress,
+		                                      const uint8_t PollValue,
+		                                      const uint8_t DelayMS,
+		                                      const uint8_t ReadMemCommand);
+
+	/* Inline Functions: */
+		/** Sends a byte of ISP data to the attached target, using the appropriate SPI hardware or
+		 *  software routines depending on the selected ISP speed.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the attached target
+		 */
+		static inline void ISPTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+		{
+			if (HardwareSPIMode)
+			  SPI_SendByte(Byte);
+			else
+			  ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(Byte);
+		}
+
+		/** Receives a byte of ISP data from the attached target, using the appropriate
+		 *  SPI hardware or software routines depending on the selected ISP speed.
+		 *
+		 *  \return Received byte of data from the attached target
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t ISPTarget_ReceiveByte(void)
+		{
+			uint8_t ReceivedByte;
+
+			if (HardwareSPIMode)
+			  ReceivedByte = SPI_ReceiveByte();
+			else
+			  ReceivedByte = ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(0x00);
+
+			#if defined(INVERTED_ISP_MISO)
+			return ~ReceivedByte;
+			#else
+			return  ReceivedByte;
+			#endif
+		}
+
+		/** Sends and receives a byte of ISP data to and from the attached target, using the
+		 *  appropriate SPI hardware or software routines depending on the selected ISP speed.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Byte  Byte of data to send to the attached target
+		 *
+		 *  \return Received byte of data from the attached target
+		 */
+		static inline uint8_t ISPTarget_TransferByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+		{
+			uint8_t ReceivedByte;
+
+			if (HardwareSPIMode)
+			  ReceivedByte = SPI_TransferByte(Byte);
+			else
+			  ReceivedByte = ISPTarget_TransferSoftSPIByte(Byte);
+
+			#if defined(INVERTED_ISP_MISO)
+			return ~ReceivedByte;
+			#else
+			return  ReceivedByte;
+			#endif
+		}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a4fada724b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.c
@@ -0,0 +1,267 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  V2Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C
+#include "V2Protocol.h"
+
+/** Current memory address for FLASH/EEPROM memory read/write commands */
+uint32_t CurrentAddress;
+
+/** Flag to indicate that the next read/write operation must update the device's current extended FLASH address */
+bool MustLoadExtendedAddress;
+
+
+/** ISR to manage timeouts whilst processing a V2Protocol command */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_NOBLOCK)
+{
+	if (TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	  TimeoutTicksRemaining--;
+	else
+	  TCCR0B = 0;
+}
+
+/** Initializes the hardware and software associated with the V2 protocol command handling. */
+void V2Protocol_Init(void)
+{
+	#if defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT)
+	/* Initialize the ADC converter for VTARGET level detection on supported AVR models */
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
+	ADC_SetupChannel(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL);
+	ADC_StartReading(VTARGET_REF_MASK | ADC_RIGHT_ADJUSTED | VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK);
+	#endif
+
+	/* Timeout timer initialization (~10ms period) */
+	OCR0A  = (((F_CPU / 1024) / 100) - 1);
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+
+	V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues();
+
+	#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
+	ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock();
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Master V2 Protocol packet handler, for received V2 Protocol packets from a connected host.
+ *  This routine decodes the issued command and passes off the handling of the command to the
+ *  appropriate function.
+ */
+void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void)
+{
+	uint8_t V2Command = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	/* Reset timeout counter duration and start the timer */
+	TimeoutTicksRemaining = COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS;
+	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS02) | (1 << CS00));
+
+	switch (V2Command)
+	{
+		case CMD_SIGN_ON:
+			V2Protocol_SignOn();
+			break;
+		case CMD_SET_PARAMETER:
+		case CMD_GET_PARAMETER:
+			V2Protocol_GetSetParam(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS:
+			V2Protocol_LoadAddress();
+			break;
+		case CMD_RESET_PROTECTION:
+			V2Protocol_ResetProtection();
+			break;
+#if defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
+		case CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_EnterISPMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_LeaveISPMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP:
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ProgramMemory(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ReadMemory(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ChipErase();
+			break;
+		case CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP:
+		case CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_ReadFuseLockSigOSCCAL(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP:
+		case CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP:
+			ISPProtocol_WriteFuseLock(V2Command);
+			break;
+		case CMD_SPI_MULTI:
+			ISPProtocol_SPIMulti();
+			break;
+#endif
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+		case CMD_XPROG_SETMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_SetMode();
+			break;
+		case CMD_XPROG:
+			XPROGProtocol_Command();
+			break;
+#endif
+		default:
+			V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(V2Command);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Disable the timeout management timer */
+	TCCR0B = 0;
+
+	Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT);
+}
+
+/** Handler for unknown V2 protocol commands. This discards all sent data and returns a
+ *  STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN status back to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	/* Discard all incoming data */
+	while (Endpoint_BytesInEndpoint() == AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SIGN_ON command, returning the programmer ID string to the host. */
+static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_SIGN_ON);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(PROGRAMMER_ID, (sizeof(PROGRAMMER_ID) - 1), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_RESET_PROTECTION command, implemented as a dummy ACK function as
+ *  no target short-circuit protection is currently implemented.
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_RESET_PROTECTION);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_SET_PARAMETER and CMD_GET_PARAMETER commands from the host, setting or
+ *  getting a device parameter's value from the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] V2Command  Issued V2 Protocol command byte from the host
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command)
+{
+	uint8_t ParamID = Endpoint_Read_8();
+	uint8_t ParamValue;
+
+	if (V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER)
+	  ParamValue = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(V2Command);
+
+	uint8_t ParamPrivs = V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(ParamID);
+
+	if ((V2Command == CMD_SET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_WRITE))
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+		V2Params_SetParameterValue(ParamID, ParamValue);
+	}
+	else if ((V2Command == CMD_GET_PARAMETER) && (ParamPrivs & PARAM_PRIV_READ))
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+		Endpoint_Write_8(V2Params_GetParameterValue(ParamID));
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS command, loading the given device address into a
+ *  global storage variable for later use, and issuing LOAD EXTENDED ADDRESS commands
+ *  to the attached device as required.
+ */
+static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_BE(&CurrentAddress, sizeof(CurrentAddress), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (CurrentAddress & (1UL << 31))
+	  MustLoadExtendedAddress = true;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(STATUS_CMD_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..143e6965d4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2Protocol.h
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for V2Protocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+		#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
+		#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
+		#include "ISP/ISPProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(USB_SERIES_4_AVR) && ((VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL == 2) || (VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL == 3)) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT)
+			#error The U4 AVR chips do not contain ADC channels 2 or 3. Please change VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL or define NO_VTARGET_DETECT in the makefile.
+		#endif
+
+		#if defined(VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF)
+			#undef  VTARGET_REF_VOLTS
+			#define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS 2.56
+
+			#define VTARGET_REF_MASK ADC_REFERENCE_INT2560MV
+		#else
+			#define VTARGET_REF_MASK ADC_REFERENCE_AVCC
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Programmer ID string, returned to the host during the CMD_SIGN_ON command processing. */
+		#define PROGRAMMER_ID              "AVRISP_MK2"
+
+		/** Timeout period for each issued command from the host before it is aborted (in 10ms ticks). */
+		#define COMMAND_TIMEOUT_TICKS      100
+
+		/** Command timeout ticks remaining counter, GPIOR for speed. */
+		#define TimeoutTicksRemaining      GPIOR1
+
+		/** MUX mask for the VTARGET ADC channel number. */
+		#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL_MASK   ADC_GET_CHANNEL_MASK(VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL)
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint32_t CurrentAddress;
+		extern bool     MustLoadExtendedAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void V2Protocol_Init(void);
+		void V2Protocol_ProcessCommand(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_C)
+			static void V2Protocol_UnknownCommand(const uint8_t V2Command);
+			static void V2Protocol_SignOn(void);
+			static void V2Protocol_GetSetParam(const uint8_t V2Command);
+			static void V2Protocol_ResetProtection(void);
+			static void V2Protocol_LoadAddress(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..efa8ee6749
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Macros for the V2 Protocol Packet Commands and Responses.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_CONSTANTS_
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define CMD_SIGN_ON                 0x01
+		#define CMD_SET_PARAMETER           0x02
+		#define CMD_GET_PARAMETER           0x03
+		#define CMD_OSCCAL                  0x05
+		#define CMD_LOAD_ADDRESS            0x06
+		#define CMD_FIRMWARE_UPGRADE        0x07
+		#define CMD_RESET_PROTECTION        0x0A
+		#define CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE_ISP      0x10
+		#define CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE_ISP      0x11
+		#define CMD_CHIP_ERASE_ISP          0x12
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FLASH_ISP       0x13
+		#define CMD_READ_FLASH_ISP          0x14
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_EEPROM_ISP      0x15
+		#define CMD_READ_EEPROM_ISP         0x16
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_FUSE_ISP        0x17
+		#define CMD_READ_FUSE_ISP           0x18
+		#define CMD_PROGRAM_LOCK_ISP        0x19
+		#define CMD_READ_LOCK_ISP           0x1A
+		#define CMD_READ_SIGNATURE_ISP      0x1B
+		#define CMD_READ_OSCCAL_ISP         0x1C
+		#define CMD_SPI_MULTI               0x1D
+		#define CMD_XPROG                   0x50
+		#define CMD_XPROG_SETMODE           0x51
+
+		#define STATUS_CMD_OK               0x00
+		#define STATUS_CMD_TOUT             0x80
+		#define STATUS_RDY_BSY_TOUT         0x81
+		#define STATUS_SET_PARAM_MISSING    0x82
+		#define STATUS_CMD_FAILED           0xC0
+		#define STATUS_CMD_UNKNOWN          0xC9
+		#define STATUS_CMD_ILLEGAL_PARAM    0xCA
+		#define STATUS_ISP_READY            0x00
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_MOSI       0x01
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_RST        0x02
+		#define STATUS_CONN_FAIL_SCK        0x04
+		#define STATUS_TGT_NOT_DETECTED     0x10
+		#define STATUS_TGT_REVERSE_INSERTED 0x20
+
+		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW      0x80
+		#define PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH     0x81
+		#define PARAM_HW_VER                0x90
+		#define PARAM_SW_MAJOR              0x91
+		#define PARAM_SW_MINOR              0x92
+		#define PARAM_VTARGET               0x94
+		#define PARAM_SCK_DURATION          0x98
+		#define PARAM_RESET_POLARITY        0x9E
+		#define PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN       0xA1
+		#define PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY        0xA4
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2f287060c9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  V2Protocol parameter handler, to process V2 Protocol device parameters.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C
+#include "V2ProtocolParams.h"
+
+/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */
+static uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_Reset_Polarity = 0x01;
+
+/* Non-Volatile Parameter Values for EEPROM storage */
+static uint8_t EEMEM EEPROM_SCK_Duration   = 0x06;
+
+/* Volatile Parameter Values for RAM storage */
+static ParameterItem_t ParameterTable[] =
+	{
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_LOW,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0                                  },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_BUILD_NUMBER_HIGH,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0                                  },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_HW_VER,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MAJOR,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x01                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SW_MINOR,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR             },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_VTARGET,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = (uint8_t)(3.3 * 10)                },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_SCK_DURATION,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 6                                  },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_RESET_POLARITY,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x01                               },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_STATUS_TGT_CONN,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ,
+		  .ParamValue       = STATUS_ISP_READY                   },
+
+		{ .ParamID          = PARAM_DISCHARGEDELAY,
+		  .ParamPrivileges  = PARAM_PRIV_READ | PARAM_PRIV_WRITE,
+		  .ParamValue       = 0x00                               },
+	};
+
+
+/** Loads saved non-volatile parameter values from the EEPROM into the parameter table, as needed. */
+void V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void)
+{
+	/* Read parameter values that are stored in non-volatile EEPROM */
+	uint8_t ResetPolarity = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_Reset_Polarity);
+	uint8_t SCKDuration   = eeprom_read_byte(&EEPROM_SCK_Duration);
+
+	/* Update current parameter table if the EEPROM contents was not blank */
+	if (ResetPolarity != 0xFF)
+	  V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)->ParamValue = ResetPolarity;
+
+	/* Update current parameter table if the EEPROM contents was not blank */
+	if (SCKDuration != 0xFF)
+	  V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_SCK_DURATION)->ParamValue   = SCKDuration;
+}
+
+/** Updates any parameter values that are sourced from hardware rather than explicitly set by the host, such as
+ *  VTARGET levels from the ADC on supported AVR models.
+ */
+void V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void)
+{
+	#if (defined(ADC) && !defined(NO_VTARGET_DETECT))
+	/* Update VTARGET parameter with the latest ADC conversion of VTARGET on supported AVR models */
+	V2Params_GetParamFromTable(PARAM_VTARGET)->ParamValue = (((uint16_t)(VTARGET_REF_VOLTS * 10 * VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR) * ADC_GetResult()) / 1024);
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the host PC read/write privileges for a given parameter in the parameter table. This should
+ *  be called before calls to \ref V2Params_GetParameterValue() or \ref V2Params_SetParameterValue() when
+ *  getting or setting parameter values in response to requests from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose privileges are to be retrieved from the table
+ *
+ *  \return Privileges for the requested parameter, as a mask of \c PARAM_PRIV_* masks
+ */
+uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return 0;
+
+	return ParamInfo->ParamPrivileges;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the current value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \note This function does not first check for read privileges - if the value is being sent to the host via a
+ *        GET PARAM command, \ref V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges() should be called first to ensure that the
+ *        parameter is host-readable.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be retrieved from the table
+ *
+ *  \return Current value of the parameter in the table, or 0 if not found
+ */
+uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return 0;
+
+	return ParamInfo->ParamValue;
+}
+
+/** Sets the value for a given parameter in the parameter table.
+ *
+ *  \note This function does not first check for write privileges - if the value is being sourced from the host
+ *        via a SET PARAM command, \ref V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges() should be called first to ensure that the
+ *        parameter is host-writable.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID whose value is to be set in the table
+ *  \param[in] Value    New value to set the parameter to
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+void V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID,
+                                const uint8_t Value)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* const ParamInfo = V2Params_GetParamFromTable(ParamID);
+
+	if (ParamInfo == NULL)
+	  return;
+
+	ParamInfo->ParamValue = Value;
+
+	/* The target RESET line polarity is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */
+	if (ParamID == PARAM_RESET_POLARITY)
+	  eeprom_update_byte(&EEPROM_Reset_Polarity, Value);
+
+	/* The target SCK line period is a non-volatile parameter, save to EEPROM when changed */
+	if (ParamID == PARAM_SCK_DURATION)
+	  eeprom_update_byte(&EEPROM_SCK_Duration, Value);
+}
+
+/** Retrieves a parameter entry (including ID, value and privileges) from the parameter table that matches the given
+ *  parameter ID.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ParamID  Parameter ID to find in the table
+ *
+ *  \return Pointer to the associated parameter information from the parameter table if found, NULL otherwise
+ */
+static ParameterItem_t* const V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID)
+{
+	ParameterItem_t* CurrTableItem = ParameterTable;
+
+	/* Find the parameter in the parameter table if present */
+	for (uint8_t TableIndex = 0; TableIndex < TABLE_PARAM_COUNT; TableIndex++)
+	{
+		if (ParamID == CurrTableItem->ParamID)
+		  return CurrTableItem;
+
+		CurrTableItem++;
+	}
+
+	return NULL;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1155dbe4da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h
@@ -0,0 +1,91 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for V2ProtocolParams.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
+#define _V2_PROTOCOL_PARAMS_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/eeprom.h>
+
+		#if defined(ADC)
+			#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#endif
+
+		#include "V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "V2ProtocolConstants.h"
+		#include "ISP/ISPTarget.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to read the parameter's value. */
+		#define PARAM_PRIV_READ     (1 << 0)
+
+		/** Parameter privilege mask to allow the host PC to change the parameter's value. */
+		#define PARAM_PRIV_WRITE    (1 << 1)
+
+		/** Total number of parameters in the parameter table */
+		#define TABLE_PARAM_COUNT   (sizeof(ParameterTable) / sizeof(ParameterTable[0]))
+
+		#if (!defined(FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR) || defined(__DOXYGEN__))
+			/** Minor firmware version, reported to the host on request; must match the version
+			 *  the host is expecting, or it (may) reject further communications with the programmer. */
+			#define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR   0x17
+		#endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a parameter table entry indicating a PC readable or writable device parameter. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			const uint8_t ParamID; /**< Parameter ID number to uniquely identify the parameter within the device */
+			const uint8_t ParamPrivileges;  /**< Parameter privileges to allow the host to read or write the parameter's value */
+			uint8_t ParamValue; /**< Current parameter's value within the device */
+		} ParameterItem_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    V2Params_LoadNonVolatileParamValues(void);
+		void    V2Params_UpdateParamValues(void);
+
+		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterPrivileges(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		uint8_t V2Params_GetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		void    V2Params_SetParameterValue(const uint8_t ParamID,
+		                                   const uint8_t Value);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_V2PROTOCOL_PARAMS_C)
+			static ParameterItem_t* const V2Params_GetParamFromTable(const uint8_t ParamID);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..277e58f2f4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the TINY target's NVM module.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C
+#include "TINYNVM.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sends the given pointer address to the target's TPI pointer register */
+static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress)
+{
+	/* Send the given 16-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 0);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress & 0xFF);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTPR | 1);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 8);
+}
+
+/** Sends a SIN command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be written.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to write to in the target's I/O memory space
+ */
+static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
+{
+	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
+	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once - use function to reduce code size */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SIN(Address));
+}
+
+/** Sends a SOUT command to the target with the specified I/O address, ready for the data byte to be read.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Address  6-bit I/O address to read from in the target's I/O memory space
+ */
+static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address)
+{
+	/* The TPI command for reading from the I/O space uses strange addressing, where the I/O address's upper
+	 * two bits of the 6-bit address are shifted left once - use function to reduce code size */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SOUT(Address));
+}
+
+/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Send the SLDCS command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPI_REG_STATUS));
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
+		if (StatusRegister & TPI_STATUS_NVM)
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
+ *  timeout period expires.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Send the SIN command to read the TPI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is busy */
+		TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr);
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
+		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Enables the physical TPI interface on the target and enables access to the internal NVM controller.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the TPI interface was enabled successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_EnableTPI(void)
+{
+	/* Enable TPI programming mode with the attached target */
+	XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI();
+
+	/* Lower direction change guard time to 32 USART bits */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPI_REG_CTRL));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x02);
+
+	/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SKEY);
+	for (uint8_t i = sizeof(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
+	  XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
+	return TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+}
+
+/** Removes access to the target's NVM controller and physically disables the target's physical TPI interface. */
+void TINYNVM_DisableTPI(void)
+{
+	TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+
+	do
+	{
+		/* Clear the NVMEN bit in the TPI STATUS register to disable TPI mode */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPI_REG_STATUS));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Read back the STATUS register, check to see if it took effect */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPI_REG_STATUS));
+	} while (XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte() != 0x00);
+
+	XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI();
+}
+
+/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
+ *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
+ *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Length of the data to read from the device
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress,
+                        uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+                        uint16_t ReadSize)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the NO OP command for memory reading */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP);
+
+	/* Send the address of the location to read from */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(ReadAddress);
+
+	while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Read the byte of data from the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SLD(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI));
+		*(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	}
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0);
+}
+
+/** Writes word addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] WriteAddress  Start address to write to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in] WriteBuffer   Buffer to source data from
+ *  \param[in] WriteLength   Total number of bytes to write to the device (must be an integer multiple of 2)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress,
+                         uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+                         uint16_t WriteLength)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Must have an integer number of words to write - if extra byte, word-align via a dummy high byte */
+	if (WriteLength & 0x01)
+	  WriteBuffer[WriteLength++] = 0xFF;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the WORD WRITE command for memory writing */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE);
+
+	/* Send the address of the location to write to */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(WriteAddress);
+
+	while (WriteLength)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Write the low byte of data to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+
+		/* Write the high byte of data to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+
+		/* Need to decrement the write length twice, since we wrote a whole two-byte word */
+		WriteLength -= 2;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Erases the target's memory space.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Address       Address inside the memory space to erase
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+                         const uint16_t Address)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM control register to the target memory erase command */
+	TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+	/* Write to a high byte location within the target address space to start the erase process */
+	TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(Address | 0x0001);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(TPI_CMD_SST(TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..915c00cc50
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TINYNVM.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TINY_NVM_
+#define _TINY_NVM_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_NOOP              0x00
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE         0x10
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE      0x14
+		#define TINY_NVM_CMD_WORDWRITE         0x1D
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_EnableTPI(void);
+		void TINYNVM_DisableTPI(void);
+		bool TINYNVM_ReadMemory(const uint16_t ReadAddress,
+		                        uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+		                        uint16_t ReadLength);
+		bool TINYNVM_WriteMemory(const uint16_t WriteAddress,
+		                         uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+		                         uint16_t WriteLength);
+		bool TINYNVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+		                         const uint16_t Address);
+
+		#if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TINYNVM_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL))
+			static void TINYNVM_SendReadNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
+			static void TINYNVM_SendWriteNVMRegister(const uint8_t Address);
+			static void TINYNVM_SendPointerAddress(const uint16_t AbsoluteAddress);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d0b5752fad
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c
@@ -0,0 +1,468 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the XMEGA target's NVM module.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGA_NVM_C
+#include "XMEGANVM.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sends the given 32-bit absolute address to the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] AbsoluteAddress  Absolute address to send to the target
+ */
+static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress)
+{
+	/* Send the given 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress &  0xFF);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 8);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 16);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(AbsoluteAddress >> 24);
+}
+
+/** Sends the given NVM register address to the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Register  NVM register whose absolute address is to be sent
+ */
+static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register)
+{
+	/* Determine the absolute register address from the NVM base memory address and the NVM register address */
+	uint32_t Address = XPROG_Param_NVMBase | Register;
+
+	/* Send the calculated 32-bit address to the target, LSB first */
+	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+}
+
+/** Busy-waits while the NVM controller is busy performing a NVM operation, such as a FLASH page read or CRC
+ *  calculation.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Poll the STATUS register to check to see if NVM access has been enabled */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Send the LDCS command to read the PDI STATUS register to see the NVM bus is active */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDI_REG_STATUS));
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check the status register read response to see if the NVM bus is enabled */
+		if (StatusRegister & PDI_STATUS_NVM)
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Waits while the target's NVM controller is busy performing an operation, exiting if the
+ *  timeout period expires.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the NVM controller became ready within the timeout period, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void)
+{
+	/* Preload the pointer register with the NVM STATUS register address to check the BUSY flag */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS);
+
+	/* Poll the NVM STATUS register while the NVM controller is busy */
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Fetch the current status value via the pointer register (without auto-increment afterwards) */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+
+		uint8_t StatusRegister = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+		/* We might have timed out waiting for the status register read response, check here */
+		if (!(TimeoutTicksRemaining))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Check to see if the BUSY flag is still set */
+		if (!(StatusRegister & (1 << 7)))
+		  return true;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Enables the physical PDI interface on the target and enables access to the internal NVM controller.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the PDI interface was enabled successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_EnablePDI(void)
+{
+	/* Enable PDI programming mode with the attached target */
+	XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI();
+
+	/* Store the RESET key into the RESET PDI register to keep the XMEGA in reset */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_RESET));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_RESET_KEY);
+
+	/* Lower direction change guard time to 32 USART bits */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_CTRL));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x02);
+
+	/* Enable access to the XPROG NVM bus by sending the documented NVM access key to the device */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_KEY);
+	for (uint8_t i = sizeof(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY); i > 0; i--)
+	  XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY[i - 1]);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus becomes active */
+	return XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+}
+
+/** Removes access to the target's NVM controller and physically disables the target's physical PDI interface. */
+void XMEGANVM_DisablePDI(void)
+{
+	XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy();
+
+	/* Clear the RESET key in the RESET PDI register to allow the XMEGA to run - must perform this until the
+	 * change takes effect, as in some cases it takes multiple writes (silicon bug?).
+	 */
+	do
+	{
+		/* Clear reset register */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STCS(PDI_REG_RESET));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Read back the reset register, check to see if it took effect */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDI_REG_RESET));
+	} while (XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte() != 0x00);
+
+	XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI();
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the CRC value of the given memory space.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  CRCCommand  NVM CRC command to issue to the target
+ *  \param[out] CRCDest     CRC Destination when read from the target
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand,
+                           uint32_t* const CRCDest)
+{
+	*CRCDest = 0;
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Set the NVM command to the correct CRC read command */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(CRCCommand);
+
+	/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the CRC generation */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Load the PDI pointer register with the DAT0 register start address */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0);
+
+	/* Send the REPEAT command to grab the CRC bytes */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES - 1);
+
+	/* Read in the CRC bytes from the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES; i++)
+	  ((uint8_t*)CRCDest)[i] = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0);
+}
+
+/** Reads memory from the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  ReadAddress  Start address to read from within the target's address space
+ *  \param[out] ReadBuffer   Buffer to store read data into
+ *  \param[in]  ReadSize     Number of bytes to read
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress,
+                         uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+                         uint16_t ReadSize)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Send the READNVM command to the NVM controller for reading of an arbitrary location */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM);
+
+	if (ReadSize > 1)
+	{
+		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to read from */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress);
+
+		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to read */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(ReadSize - 1);
+
+		/* Send a LD command with indirect access and post-increment to read out the bytes */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LD(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		while (ReadSize-- && TimeoutTicksRemaining)
+		  *(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Send a LDS command with the read address to read out the requested byte */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_LDS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(ReadAddress);
+		*(ReadBuffer++) = XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte();
+	}
+
+	return (TimeoutTicksRemaining > 0);
+}
+
+/** Writes byte addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  WriteCommand  Command to send to the device to write each memory byte
+ *  \param[in]  WriteAddress  Address to write to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in]  Byte          Byte to write to the target
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand,
+                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+                              const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* Send the memory write command to the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteCommand);
+
+	/* Send new memory byte to the memory of the target */
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+	XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+	XPROGTarget_SendByte(Byte);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Writes page addressed memory to the target's memory spaces.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  WriteBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to write a byte to the memory page buffer
+ *  \param[in]  EraseBuffCommand  Command to send to the device to erase the memory page buffer
+ *  \param[in]  WritePageCommand  Command to send to the device to write the page buffer to the destination memory
+ *  \param[in]  PageMode          Bitfield indicating what operations need to be executed on the specified page
+ *  \param[in]  WriteAddress      Start address to write the page data to within the target's address space
+ *  \param[in]  WriteBuffer       Buffer to source data from
+ *  \param[in]  WriteSize         Number of bytes to write
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand,
+                              const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
+                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand,
+                              const uint8_t PageMode,
+                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+                              uint16_t WriteSize)
+{
+	if (PageMode & XPROG_PAGEMODE_ERASE)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory buffer erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseBuffCommand);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+	}
+
+	if (WriteSize)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory buffer write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteBuffCommand);
+
+		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the start address we want to write to */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+
+		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WriteSize - 1);
+
+		/* Send a ST command with indirect access and post-increment to write the bytes */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		while (WriteSize--)
+		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(*(WriteBuffer++));
+	}
+
+	if (PageMode & XPROG_PAGEMODE_WRITE)
+	{
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the memory write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(WritePageCommand);
+
+		/* Send the address of the first page location to write the memory page */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(WriteAddress);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Erases a specific memory space of the target.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] EraseCommand  NVM erase command to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] Address       Address inside the memory space to erase
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command sequence complete successfully
+ */
+bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+                          const uint32_t Address)
+{
+	/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	/* EEPROM and Chip erasures are triggered differently to FLASH section erasures */
+	if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE)
+	{
+		/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the erase sequence */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+	}
+	else if (EraseCommand == XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM)
+	{
+		/* Send the EEPROM page buffer erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the buffer erase */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+
+		/* Wait until the NVM controller is no longer busy */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy()))
+		  return false;
+
+		/* Send the EEPROM memory buffer write command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF);
+
+		/* Load the PDI pointer register with the EEPROM page start address */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_DIRECT, PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+
+		/* Send the REPEAT command with the specified number of bytes to write */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_REPEAT(PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XPROG_Param_EEPageSize - 1);
+
+		/* Send a ST command with indirect access and post-increment to tag each byte in the EEPROM page buffer */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_ST(PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		for (uint8_t PageByte = 0; PageByte < XPROG_Param_EEPageSize; PageByte++)
+		  XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+
+		/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+		/* Set CMDEX bit in NVM CTRLA register to start the EEPROM erase sequence */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Send the memory erase command to the target */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(EraseCommand);
+
+		/* Other erase modes just need us to address a byte within the target memory space */
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(PDI_CMD_STS(PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES, PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE));
+		XMEGANVM_SendAddress(Address);
+		XPROGTarget_SendByte(0x00);
+	}
+
+	/* Wait until the NVM bus is ready again */
+	if (!(XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy()))
+	  return false;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d038b6c0b5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XMEGANVM.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XMEGA_NVM_
+#define _XMEGA_NVM_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		#define XMEGA_CRC_LENGTH_BYTES               3
+
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR0                  0x00
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR1                  0x01
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_ADDR2                  0x02
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT0                   0x04
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT1                   0x05
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_DAT2                   0x06
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CMD                    0x0A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLA                  0x0B
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_CTRLB                  0x0C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_INTCTRL                0x0D
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_STATUS                 0x0F
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_REG_LOCKBITS               0x10
+
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_BIT_CTRLA_CMDEX            (1 << 0)
+
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP                   0x00
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE              0x40
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READNVM                0x43
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF      0x23
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF     0x26
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGE         0x2B
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE         0x2E
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEFLASH        0x2F
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC               0x78
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC            0x20
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE        0x22
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE        0x24
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEAPPSECPAGE   0x25
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC                 0x38
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC           0x68
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE       0x2C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEBOOTSECPAGE  0x2D
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC                0x39
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READUSERSIG            0x03
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG           0x18
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG           0x1A
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READCALIBRATION        0x02
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READFUSE               0x07
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE              0x4C
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK              0x08
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF     0x33
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF    0x36
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM            0x30
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE        0x32
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEEEPROMPAGE        0x34
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE   0x35
+		#define XMEGA_NVM_CMD_READEEPROM             0x06
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WaitWhileNVMControllerBusy(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_EnablePDI(void);
+		void XMEGANVM_DisablePDI(void);
+		bool XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(const uint8_t CRCCommand,
+			                       uint32_t* const CRCDest);
+		bool XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(const uint32_t ReadAddress,
+		                         uint8_t* ReadBuffer,
+		                         uint16_t ReadSize);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(const uint8_t WriteCommand,
+		                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+		                              const uint8_t Byte);
+		bool XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(const uint8_t WriteBuffCommand,
+		                              const uint8_t EraseBuffCommand,
+		                              const uint8_t WritePageCommand,
+		                              const uint8_t PageMode,
+		                              const uint32_t WriteAddress,
+		                              const uint8_t* WriteBuffer,
+		                              uint16_t WriteSize);
+		bool XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(const uint8_t EraseCommand,
+		                          const uint32_t Address);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XMEGANVM_C)
+			static void XMEGANVM_SendNVMRegAddress(const uint8_t Register);
+			static void XMEGANVM_SendAddress(const uint32_t AbsoluteAddress);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0915f97cc6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c
@@ -0,0 +1,480 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  XPROG Protocol handler, to process V2 Protocol wrapped XPROG commands used in Atmel programmer devices.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C
+#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+/** Base absolute address for the target's NVM controller for PDI programming */
+uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase       = 0x010001C0;
+
+/** Size in bytes of the target's EEPROM page */
+uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize    = 32;
+
+/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCMD register for TPI programming */
+uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = 0x33;
+
+/** Address of the TPI device's NVMCSR register for TPI programming */
+uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = 0x32;
+
+/** Currently selected XPROG programming protocol */
+uint8_t  XPROG_SelectedProtocol    = XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI;
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG_SETMODE command, which sets the programmer-to-target protocol used for PDI/TPI
+ *  programming.
+ */
+void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void)
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t Protocol;
+	} SetMode_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&SetMode_XPROG_Params, sizeof(SetMode_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	XPROG_SelectedProtocol = SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG_SETMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8((SetMode_XPROG_Params.Protocol != XPROG_PROTOCOL_JTAG) ? STATUS_CMD_OK : STATUS_CMD_FAILED);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the CMD_XPROG command, which wraps up XPROG commands in a V2 wrapper which need to be
+ *  removed and processed so that the underlying XPROG command can be handled.
+ */
+void XPROGProtocol_Command(void)
+{
+	uint8_t XPROGCommand = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	switch (XPROGCommand)
+	{
+		case XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE:
+			XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_ERASE:
+			XPROGProtocol_Erase();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM:
+			XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM:
+			XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_CRC:
+			XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM:
+			XPROGProtocol_SetParam();
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG ENTER_PROGMODE command to establish a connection with the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	bool NVMBusEnabled = false;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	  NVMBusEnabled = XMEGANVM_EnablePDI();
+	else if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_TPI)
+	  NVMBusEnabled = TINYNVM_EnableTPI();
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(NVMBusEnabled ? XPROG_ERR_OK : XPROG_ERR_FAILED);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG LEAVE_PROGMODE command to terminate the PDI programming connection with
+ *  the attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void)
+{
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	  XMEGANVM_DisablePDI();
+	else
+	  TINYNVM_DisableTPI();
+
+	#if defined(XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE) && defined(ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL)
+	/* If the XCK rescue clock option is enabled, we need to restart it once the
+	 * XPROG mode has been exited, since the XPROG protocol stops it after use. */
+	ISPTarget_ConfigureRescueClock();
+	#endif
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_ERR_OK);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPRG ERASE command to erase a specific memory address space in the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint32_t Address;
+	} Erase_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&Erase_XPROG_Params, sizeof(Erase_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+	Erase_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(Erase_XPROG_Params.Address);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t EraseCommand;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to erase */
+		switch (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
+		{
+			case XPROG_ERASE_CHIP:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_APP:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSEC;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_BOOT:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSEC;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROM;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_APP_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEAPPSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEBOOTSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_ERASE_USERSIG:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEUSERSIG;
+				break;
+			default:
+				EraseCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_NOOP;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		if (Erase_XPROG_Params.MemoryType == XPROG_ERASE_CHIP)
+		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_CHIPERASE;
+		else
+		  EraseCommand = TINY_NVM_CMD_SECTIONERASE;
+
+		/* Erase the target memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_EraseMemory(EraseCommand, Erase_XPROG_Params.Address)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_ERASE);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG WRITE_MEMORY command to write to a specific memory space within the attached device. */
+static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint8_t  PageMode;
+		uint32_t Address;
+		uint16_t Length;
+		uint8_t  ProgData[256];
+	} WriteMemory_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params, (sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) -
+	                                                    sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params).ProgData), NULL);
+	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
+	WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NULL);
+
+	// The driver will terminate transfers that are a round multiple of the endpoint bank in size with a ZLP, need
+	// to catch this and discard it before continuing on with packet processing to prevent communication issues
+	if (((sizeof(uint8_t) + sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params) - sizeof(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData)) +
+	    WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length) % AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE == 0)
+	{
+		Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+		Endpoint_WaitUntilReady();
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Assume FLASH page programming by default, as it is the common case */
+		uint8_t WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFLASHPAGE;
+		uint8_t WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADFLASHPAGEBUFF;
+		uint8_t EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEFLASHPAGEBUFF;
+		bool    PagedMemory      = true;
+
+		switch (WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.MemoryType)
+		{
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_APPL:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEAPPSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEBOOTSECPAGE;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEWRITEEEPROMPAGE;
+				WriteBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_LOADEEPROMPAGEBUFF;
+				EraseBuffCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_ERASEEEPROMPAGEBUFF;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEUSERSIG;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITEFUSE;
+				PagedMemory      = false;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS:
+				WriteCommand     = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_WRITELOCK;
+				PagedMemory      = false;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Send the appropriate memory write commands to the device, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if ((PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WritePageMemory(WriteBuffCommand, EraseBuffCommand, WriteCommand,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.PageMode, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length))) ||
+		   (!PagedMemory && !(XMEGANVM_WriteByteMemory(WriteCommand, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address,
+													   WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData[0]))))
+		{
+			ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+		}
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Send write command to the TPI device, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_WriteMemory(WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.ProgData,
+		      WriteMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		{
+			ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+		}
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG READ_MEMORY command to read data from a specific address space within the
+ *  attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  MemoryType;
+		uint32_t Address;
+		uint16_t Length;
+	} ReadMemory_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadMemory_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address = SwapEndian_32(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address);
+	ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length  = SwapEndian_16(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint8_t ReadBuffer[256];
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		/* Read the PDI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Read the TPI target's memory, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(TINYNVM_ReadMemory(ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Address, ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+
+	if (ReturnStatus == XPROG_ERR_OK)
+	  Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(ReadBuffer, ReadMemory_XPROG_Params.Length, NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG CRC command to read a specific memory space's CRC value for comparison between the
+ *  attached device's memory and a data set on the host.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t CRCType;
+	} ReadCRC_XPROG_Params;
+
+	Endpoint_Read_Stream_LE(&ReadCRC_XPROG_Params, sizeof(ReadCRC_XPROG_Params), NULL);
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	uint32_t MemoryCRC;
+
+	if (XPROG_SelectedProtocol == XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI)
+	{
+		uint8_t CRCCommand;
+
+		/* Determine which NVM command to send to the device depending on the memory to CRC */
+		switch (ReadCRC_XPROG_Params.CRCType)
+		{
+			case XPROG_CRC_APP:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_APPCRC;
+				break;
+			case XPROG_CRC_BOOT:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_BOOTCRC;
+				break;
+			default:
+				CRCCommand = XMEGA_NVM_CMD_FLASHCRC;
+				break;
+		}
+
+		/* Perform and retrieve the memory CRC, indicate timeout if occurred */
+		if (!(XMEGANVM_GetMemoryCRC(CRCCommand, &MemoryCRC)))
+		  ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* TPI does not support memory CRC */
+		ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_FAILED;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_CRC);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+
+	if (ReturnStatus == XPROG_ERR_OK)
+	{
+		Endpoint_Write_8(MemoryCRC >> 16);
+		Endpoint_Write_16_LE(MemoryCRC & 0xFFFF);
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+/** Handler for the XPROG SET_PARAM command to set a XPROG parameter for use when communicating with the
+ *  attached device.
+ */
+static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_OK;
+
+	uint8_t XPROGParam = Endpoint_Read_8();
+
+	/* Determine which parameter is being set, store the new parameter value */
+	switch (XPROGParam)
+	{
+		case XPROG_PARAM_NVMBASE:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMBase       = Endpoint_Read_32_BE();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE:
+			XPROG_Param_EEPageSize    = Endpoint_Read_16_BE();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_8();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG:
+			XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr = Endpoint_Read_8();
+			break;
+		case XPROG_PARAM_UNKNOWN_1:
+			/* TODO: Undocumented parameter added in AVRStudio 5.1, purpose unknown. Must ACK and discard or
+			         the communication with AVRStudio 5.1 will fail.
+			*/
+			Endpoint_Discard_16();
+			break;
+		default:
+			ReturnStatus = XPROG_ERR_FAILED;
+			break;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR);
+	Endpoint_SetEndpointDirection(ENDPOINT_DIR_IN);
+
+	Endpoint_Write_8(CMD_XPROG);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(ReturnStatus);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..830abc26da
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPROGProtocol.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
+#define _XPROG_PROTOCOL_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "XMEGANVM.h"
+		#include "TINYNVM.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			/* On the XPLAIN board, we only need PDI programming
+			   for the ATXMEGA128A1 - disable ISP to prevent hardware
+			   damage and force-enable XPROG.
+			 */
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define XPROG_CMD_ENTER_PROGMODE             0x01
+		#define XPROG_CMD_LEAVE_PROGMODE             0x02
+		#define XPROG_CMD_ERASE                      0x03
+		#define XPROG_CMD_WRITE_MEM                  0x04
+		#define XPROG_CMD_READ_MEM                   0x05
+		#define XPROG_CMD_CRC                        0x06
+		#define XPROG_CMD_SET_PARAM                  0x07
+
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_APPL                  1
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_BOOT                  2
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_EEPROM                3
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FUSE                  4
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_LOCKBITS              5
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_USERSIG               6
+		#define XPROG_MEM_TYPE_FACTORY_CALIBRATION   7
+
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_CHIP                     1
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_APP                      2
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_BOOT                     3
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM                   4
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_APP_PAGE                 5
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_BOOT_PAGE                6
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_EEPROM_PAGE              7
+		#define XPROG_ERASE_USERSIG                  8
+
+		#define XPROG_MEM_WRITE_ERASE                0
+		#define XPROG_MEM_WRITE_WRITE                1
+
+		#define XPROG_CRC_APP                        1
+		#define XPROG_CRC_BOOT                       2
+		#define XPROG_CRC_FLASH                      3
+
+		#define XPROG_ERR_OK                         0
+		#define XPROG_ERR_FAILED                     1
+		#define XPROG_ERR_COLLISION                  2
+		#define XPROG_ERR_TIMEOUT                    3
+
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_NVMBASE                  0x01
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_EEPPAGESIZE              0x02
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_NVMCMD_REG               0x03
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_NVMCSR_REG               0x04
+		#define XPROG_PARAM_UNKNOWN_1                0x05
+
+		#define XPROG_PROTOCOL_PDI                   0x00
+		#define XPROG_PROTOCOL_JTAG                  0x01
+		#define XPROG_PROTOCOL_TPI                   0x02
+
+		#define XPROG_PAGEMODE_WRITE                 (1 << 1)
+		#define XPROG_PAGEMODE_ERASE                 (1 << 0)
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern uint32_t XPROG_Param_NVMBase;
+		extern uint16_t XPROG_Param_EEPageSize;
+		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCSRRegAddr;
+		extern uint8_t  XPROG_Param_NVMCMDRegAddr;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void XPROGProtocol_SetMode(void);
+		void XPROGProtocol_Command(void);
+
+		#if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGPROTOCOL_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL))
+			static void XPROGProtocol_EnterXPROGMode(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_LeaveXPROGMode(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_SetParam(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_Erase(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_WriteMemory(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadMemory(void);
+			static void XPROGProtocol_ReadCRC(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..75b43f0fed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c
@@ -0,0 +1,209 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Target-related functions for the PDI Protocol decoder.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C
+#include "XPROGTarget.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Flag to indicate if the USART is currently in Tx or Rx mode. */
+bool IsSending;
+
+/** Enables the target's PDI interface, holding the target in reset until PDI mode is exited. */
+void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void)
+{
+	IsSending = false;
+
+	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
+	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
+	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
+
+	/* Set DATA line high for at least 90ns to disable /RESET functionality */
+	PORTD |= (1 << 3);
+	_delay_us(100);
+
+	/* Set up the synchronous USART for XMEGA communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
+	UBRR1  = ((F_CPU / 2 / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED) - 1);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+
+	/* Send two IDLEs of 12 bits each to enable PDI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+}
+
+/** Enables the target's TPI interface, holding the target in reset until TPI mode is exited. */
+void XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void)
+{
+	IsSending = false;
+
+	/* Set /RESET line low for at least 400ns to enable TPI functionality */
+	AUX_LINE_DDR  |=  AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	_delay_us(100);
+
+	/* Set Tx and XCK as outputs, Rx as input */
+	DDRD |=  (1 << 5) | (1 << 3);
+	DDRD &= ~(1 << 2);
+
+	/* Set up the synchronous USART for TPI communications - 8 data bits, even parity, 2 stop bits */
+	UBRR1  = ((F_CPU / 2 / XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED) - 1);
+	UCSR1B = (1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1C = (1 << UMSEL10) | (1 << UPM11) | (1 << USBS1) | (1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10) | (1 << UCPOL1);
+
+	/* Send two IDLEs of 12 bits each to enable TPI interface (need at least 16 idle bits) */
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+	XPROGTarget_SendIdle();
+}
+
+/** Disables the target's PDI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
+void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
+	if (IsSending)
+	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
+	UCSR1A  = ((1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1));
+	UCSR1B  = 0;
+	UCSR1C  = 0;
+
+	/* Tristate all pins */
+	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
+	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
+}
+
+/** Disables the target's TPI interface, exits programming mode and starts the target's application. */
+void XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode to ensure that all pending transmissions are complete */
+	if (IsSending)
+	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Turn off receiver and transmitter of the USART, clear settings */
+	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1) | (1 << RXC1);
+	UCSR1B  = 0;
+	UCSR1C  = 0;
+
+	/* Set all USART lines as inputs, tristate */
+	DDRD  &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3));
+	PORTD &= ~((1 << 5) | (1 << 3) | (1 << 2));
+
+	/* Tristate target /RESET line */
+	AUX_LINE_DDR  &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+	AUX_LINE_PORT &= ~AUX_LINE_MASK;
+}
+
+/** Sends a byte via the USART.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Byte  Byte to send through the USART
+ */
+void XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte)
+{
+	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
+	if (!(IsSending))
+	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
+
+	/* Wait until there is space in the hardware Tx buffer before writing */
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)));
+	UCSR1A |= (1 << TXC1);
+	UDR1    = Byte;
+}
+
+/** Receives a byte via the hardware USART, blocking until data is received or timeout expired.
+ *
+ *  \return Received byte from the USART
+ */
+uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Rx mode if currently in Tx mode */
+	if (IsSending)
+	  XPROGTarget_SetRxMode();
+
+	/* Wait until a byte has been received before reading */
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << RXC1)) && TimeoutTicksRemaining);
+
+	return UDR1;
+}
+
+/** Sends an IDLE via the USART to the attached target, consisting of a full frame of idle bits. */
+void XPROGTarget_SendIdle(void)
+{
+	/* Switch to Tx mode if currently in Rx mode */
+	if (!(IsSending))
+	  XPROGTarget_SetTxMode();
+
+	/* Need to do nothing for a full frame to send an IDLE */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < BITS_IN_USART_FRAME; i++)
+	{
+		/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
+		while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+		while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
+		while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+	}
+}
+
+static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void)
+{
+	/* Wait for a full cycle of the clock */
+	while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+	while (!(PIND & (1 << 5)));
+	while (PIND & (1 << 5));
+
+	PORTD  |=  (1 << 3);
+	DDRD   |=  (1 << 3);
+
+	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << RXEN1);
+	UCSR1B |=  (1 << TXEN1);
+
+	IsSending = true;
+}
+
+static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void)
+{
+	while (!(UCSR1A & (1 << TXC1)));
+	UCSR1A |=  (1 << TXC1);
+
+	UCSR1B &= ~(1 << TXEN1);
+	UCSR1B |=  (1 << RXEN1);
+
+	DDRD   &= ~(1 << 3);
+	PORTD  &= ~(1 << 3);
+
+	IsSending = false;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..560d39d967
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h
@@ -0,0 +1,136 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPROGTarget.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPROG_TARGET_
+#define _XPROG_TARGET_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+		#include "../V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "XPROGProtocol.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if ((BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN) || (BOARD == BOARD_XPLAIN_REV1))
+			#undef ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+
+			#if !defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL)
+				#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+			#endif
+		#endif
+
+		/** Serial carrier TPI/PDI speed in Hz, when hardware TPI/PDI mode is used. */
+		#define XPROG_HARDWARE_SPEED       2000000
+
+		/** Total number of bits in a single USART frame. */
+		#define BITS_IN_USART_FRAME        12
+
+ 		/** \name PDI Related Constants
+ 		 * @{
+ 		 */
+		#define PDI_CMD_LDS(AddressSize, DataSize)  (0x00 | (  AddressSize << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_LD(PointerAccess, DataSize) (0x20 | (PointerAccess << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_STS(AddressSize, DataSize)  (0x40 | (  AddressSize << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_ST(PointerAccess, DataSize) (0x60 | (PointerAccess << 2) | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_LDCS(PDIReg)                (0x80 | PDIReg)
+		#define PDI_CMD_REPEAT(DataSize)            (0xA0 | DataSize)
+		#define PDI_CMD_STCS(PDIReg)                (0xC0 | PDIReg)
+		#define PDI_CMD_KEY                         0xE0
+
+		#define PDI_REG_STATUS             0
+		#define PDI_REG_RESET              1
+		#define PDI_REG_CTRL               2
+
+		#define PDI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
+
+		#define PDI_RESET_KEY              0x59
+		#define PDI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
+
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_1BYTE         0
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_2BYTES        1
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_3BYTES        2
+		#define PDI_DATASIZE_4BYTES        3
+
+		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
+		#define PDI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    1
+		#define PDI_POINTER_DIRECT         2
+ 		/** @} */
+
+ 		/** \name TPI Related Constants
+ 		 * @{
+ 		 */
+ 		#define TPI_CMD_SLD(PointerAccess) (0x20 | PointerAccess)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SST(PointerAccess) (0x60 | PointerAccess)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SSTPR              0x68
+		#define TPI_CMD_SIN(Address)       (0x10 | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F))
+		#define TPI_CMD_SOUT(Address)      (0x90 | ((Address & 0x30) << 1) | (Address & 0x0F))
+		#define TPI_CMD_SLDCS(TPIReg)      (0x80 | TPIReg)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SSTCS(TPIReg)      (0xC0 | TPIReg)
+		#define TPI_CMD_SKEY               0xE0
+
+		#define TPI_REG_STATUS             0x00
+		#define TPI_REG_CTRL               0x02
+		#define TPI_REG_ID                 0x0F
+
+		#define TPI_STATUS_NVM             (1 << 1)
+
+		#define TPI_NVMENABLE_KEY          (uint8_t[]){0x12, 0x89, 0xAB, 0x45, 0xCD, 0xD8, 0x88, 0xFF}
+
+		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT       0
+		#define TPI_POINTER_INDIRECT_PI    4
+ 		/** @} */
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetPDI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_EnableTargetTPI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetPDI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_DisableTargetTPI(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_SendByte(const uint8_t Byte);
+		uint8_t XPROGTarget_ReceiveByte(void);
+		void    XPROGTarget_SendIdle(void);
+		bool    XPROGTarget_WaitWhileNVMBusBusy(void);
+
+		#if (defined(INCLUDE_FROM_XPROGTARGET_C) && defined(ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL))
+			static void XPROGTarget_SetTxMode(void);
+			static void XPROGTarget_SetRxMode(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d89b8852f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.avr8">

+ 		<require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<!-- Required by the XPLAIN Bridge project as well, so split into a meta module -->

+	<module type="meta" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src" caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer">

+		<info type="gui-flag" value="hidden"/>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="."/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AVRISPDescriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AVRISPDescriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib"/>

+

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2ProtocolConstants.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/V2Protocol.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2Protocol.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/V2ProtocolParams.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+	</module>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone" caption="AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Clone firmware of the Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="AVRISP-MKII.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="AVRISP-MKII.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="AVRISP-MKII.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6c8698751a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "AVRISP-MKII Clone Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c89648d5a4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/AVRISP-MKII/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = AVRISP-MKII
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c AVRISPDescriptors.c Lib/V2Protocol.c Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c \
+               Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b5a0560f7f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.c
@@ -0,0 +1,311 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Benito project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Benito.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+static RingBuffer_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** Pulse generation counters to keep track of the number of milliseconds remaining for each pulse type */
+volatile struct
+{
+	uint8_t ResetPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for target /RESET pulse */
+	uint8_t TxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Tx LED pulse */
+	uint8_t RxLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for data Rx LED pulse */
+	uint8_t PingPongLEDPulse; /**< Milliseconds remaining for enumeration Tx/Rx ping-pong LED pulse */
+} PulseMSRemaining;
+
+/** Milliseconds remaining until the receive buffer is flushed to the USB host */
+uint8_t FlushPeriodRemaining = RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS;
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data));
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Echo bytes from the host to the target via the hardware USART */
+		if ((UCSR1A & (1 << UDRE1)) && CDC_Device_BytesReceived(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface))
+		{
+			UDR1 = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+			LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+			PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;
+		}
+
+		/* Check if the millisecond timer has elapsed */
+		if (TIFR0 & (1 << OCF0A))
+		{
+			/* Clear flush timer expiry flag */
+			TIFR0 |= (1 << TOV0);
+
+			/* Check if the reset pulse period has elapsed, if so tristate the target reset line */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse))
+			{
+				LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+				AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if the LEDs should be ping-ponging (during enumeration) */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDMASK_TX | LEDMASK_RX);
+				PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
+			}
+
+			/* Turn off TX LED(s) once the TX pulse period has elapsed */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.TxLEDPulse))
+			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+
+			/* Turn off RX LED(s) once the RX pulse period has elapsed */
+			if (PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse && !(--PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse))
+			  LEDs_TurnOffLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
+
+			/* Check if the receive buffer flush period has expired */
+			uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+			if (!(--FlushPeriodRemaining) || (BufferCount > 200))
+			{
+				FlushPeriodRemaining = RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS;
+
+				/* Start RX LED indicator pulse */
+				if (BufferCount)
+				{
+					LEDs_TurnOnLEDs(LEDMASK_RX);
+					PulseMSRemaining.RxLEDPulse = TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS;
+				}
+
+				/* Echo bytes from the target to the host via the virtual serial port */
+				while (BufferCount--)
+				{
+					/* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */
+					if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+											RingBuffer_Peek(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+					{
+						break;
+					}
+
+					/* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */
+					RingBuffer_Remove(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Millisecond Timer Interrupt */
+	OCR0A  = (F_CPU / 64 / 1000);
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TCCR0B = ((1 << CS01) | (1 << CS00));
+
+	/* Tristate target /RESET Line */
+	AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+	AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR  &= ~AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS;
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_TX);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+	PulseMSRemaining.PingPongLEDPulse = 0;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDS_NO_LEDS : LEDMASK_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_ControlRequest event. This is used to catch and process control requests sent to
+ *  the device from the USB host before passing along unhandled control requests to the library for processing
+ *  internally.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
+	{
+		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
+			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));
+			break;
+		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
+			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
+	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
+	{
+		case 6:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
+			break;
+		case 7:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
+			break;
+		case 8:
+			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Must turn off USART before reconfiguring it, otherwise incorrect operation may occur */
+	UCSR1B = 0;
+	UCSR1A = 0;
+	UCSR1C = 0;
+
+	/* Set the new baud rate before configuring the USART */
+	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+
+	/* Reconfigure the USART in double speed mode for a wider baud rate range at the expense of accuracy */
+	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;
+	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);
+	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
+ *  for later transmission to the host.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
+
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  RingBuffer_Insert(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Host-to-Device Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	static bool PreviousDTRState = false;
+	bool        CurrentDTRState  = (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.ControlLineStates.HostToDevice & CDC_CONTROL_LINE_OUT_DTR);
+
+	/* Check if the DTR line has been asserted - if so, start the target AVR's reset pulse */
+	if (!(PreviousDTRState) && CurrentDTRState)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR |= AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK;
+		PulseMSRemaining.ResetPulse = AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS;
+	}
+
+	PreviousDTRState = CurrentDTRState;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b77409bd03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.h
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Benito.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _BENITO_H_
+#define _BENITO_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate TX activity. */
+		#define LEDMASK_TX               LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate RX activity. */
+		#define LEDMASK_RX               LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_ControLineStateChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..07bec52b3a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Benito.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Benito Arduino Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard \n
+ *       Arduino Bootloader Specification</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered programmer for Arduino boards using the official Arduino bootloader. This
+ *  project acts like a regular USB to Serial bridge, except that asserting the DTR line will cause a pulse
+ *  to appear on a given port pin, to control the target's /RESET pin.
+ *
+ *  This is primarily designed to fit the Benito board from www.dorkbotpdx.org, but will suit all USB AVRs.
+ *
+ *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file located
+ *  in this project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use
+ *  its inbuilt CDC drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should
+ *  automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the PORT register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the DDR register of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Indicates the mask of the pin used to generate the target /RESET line pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the target /RESET pulse.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the activity Tx/Rx LEDs.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Pulse length in milliseconds for the enumeration LED ping-ponging between toggles.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Period between flushings of received data buffer to the attached USB host.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..85bf57938a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AVR_RESET_LINE_PORT            PORTD
+	#define AVR_RESET_LINE_DDR             DDRD
+	#define AVR_RESET_LINE_MASK            (1 << 4)
+
+	#define AVR_RESET_PULSE_MS             10
+
+	#define TX_RX_LED_PULSE_MS             30
+	#define PING_PONG_LED_PULSE_MS         100
+
+	#define RECEIVE_BUFFER_FLUSH_MS        10
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1bf1f19e65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e21a6ee540
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,244 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2060,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Benito Arduino Programmer");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..95223ee2dc
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..75e93a8a9a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/LUFA Benito Programmer.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA Benito Programmer.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2060
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA Benito Programmer"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6f36da7671
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Benito Programmer" id="lufa.projects.benito.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.benito"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.benito" caption="Benito Programmer">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Benito AVR programmer.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Benito.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA Benito Programmer.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Benito.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Benito.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..487c43c80b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Benito Arduino Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a1fa59e350
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Benito/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = atmega32u2
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = BENITO
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Benito
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5d657a214b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..924fe1dd2b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the HIDReportViewer project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "HIDReportViewer.h"
+
+/** Processed HID report descriptor items structure, containing information on each HID report element */
+static HID_ReportInfo_t HIDReportInfo;
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Host_t Device_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HIDInterfaceProtocol   = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+				.HIDParserData          = &HIDReportInfo
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	puts_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_CYAN "HID Device Report Viewer Running.\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		RetrieveDeviceData();
+
+		HID_Host_USBTask(&Device_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Task to retrieve the HID device information from an attached device, and output
+ *  the relevant data to the serial port for analysis.
+ */
+void RetrieveDeviceData(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	OutputReportSizes();
+	OutputParsedReportItems();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+}
+
+/** Prints a summary of the device's HID report sizes from the HID parser output to the serial port
+ *  for display to the user.
+ */
+void OutputReportSizes(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\n\r\nTotal Device Reports: %" PRId8 "\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports);
+
+	for (uint8_t ReportIndex = 0; ReportIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalDeviceReports; ReportIndex++)
+	{
+		const HID_ReportSizeInfo_t* CurrReportIDInfo = &HIDReportInfo.ReportIDSizes[ReportIndex];
+
+		uint8_t ReportSizeInBits      = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_In];
+		uint8_t ReportSizeOutBits     = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out];
+		uint8_t ReportSizeFeatureBits = CurrReportIDInfo->ReportSizeBits[HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature];
+
+		/* Print out the byte sizes of each report within the device */
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + Report ID 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Input Data:   %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"
+					  "    - Output Data:  %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"
+					  "    - Feature Data: %" PRId8 " bits (%" PRId8 " bytes)\r\n"),
+				 CurrReportIDInfo->ReportID,
+				 ReportSizeInBits,
+				 ((ReportSizeInBits      >> 3) + ((ReportSizeInBits      & 0x07) != 0)),
+				 ReportSizeOutBits,
+				 ((ReportSizeOutBits     >> 3) + ((ReportSizeOutBits     & 0x07) != 0)),
+				 ReportSizeFeatureBits,
+				 ((ReportSizeFeatureBits >> 3) + ((ReportSizeFeatureBits & 0x07) != 0)));
+	}
+}
+
+/** Prints a summary of the device's parsed and stored report items along with their attributes
+ *  to the serial port for display to the user.
+ */
+void OutputParsedReportItems(void)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR("\r\nReport Items (%" PRId8 " in Table):\r\n"), HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems);
+
+	for (uint8_t ItemIndex = 0; ItemIndex < HIDReportInfo.TotalReportItems; ItemIndex++)
+	{
+		const HID_ReportItem_t* RItem = &HIDReportInfo.ReportItems[ItemIndex];
+
+		printf_P(PSTR("  + Item %" PRId8 ":\r\n"
+					  "    - Report ID:          0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Data Direction:     %s\r\n"
+					  "    - Item Flags:         0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Item Offset (Bits): 0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Item Size (Bits):   0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Usage Page:         0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Usage:              0x%04" PRIX16 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Unit Type:          0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Unit Exponent:      0x%02" PRIX8  "\r\n"
+					  "    - Logical Minimum:    0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Logical Maximum:    0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Physical Minimum:   0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Physical Maximum:   0x%08" PRIX32 "\r\n"
+					  "    - Collection Path:\r\n"),
+				 ItemIndex,
+				 RItem->ReportID,
+				 ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_In) ? "IN" : ((RItem->ItemType == HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out) ? "OUT" : "FEATURE")),
+				 RItem->ItemFlags,
+				 RItem->BitOffset,
+				 RItem->Attributes.BitSize,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Usage.Page,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Usage.Usage,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Unit.Type,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Unit.Exponent,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Logical.Minimum,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Logical.Maximum,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Physical.Minimum,
+				 RItem->Attributes.Physical.Maximum);
+
+		OutputCollectionPath(RItem->CollectionPath);
+	}
+}
+
+/** Prints the HID Collection path (along with each node's attributes) to the serial port
+ *  for display to the user, from the given starting node to the root node.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CollectionPath  Starting HID Collection node to print
+ */
+void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath)
+{
+	const HID_CollectionPath_t* CurrentNode = CollectionPath;
+
+	while (CurrentNode != NULL)
+	{
+		printf_P(PSTR("      |\r\n"
+					  "      - Type:  0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"
+					  "      - Usage: 0x%02" PRIX8 "\r\n"),
+					  CurrentNode->Type, CurrentNode->Usage);
+
+		CurrentNode = CurrentNode->Parent;
+	}
+
+	printf_P(PSTR("      |\r\n"
+				  "      END\r\n"));
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Serial_Init(9600, false);
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Create a stdio stream for the serial port for stdin and stdout */
+	Serial_CreateStream(NULL);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("Device Attached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	puts_P(PSTR("\r\nDevice Unattached.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Retrieving Configuration Descriptor.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Device_HID_Interface,
+	                            ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != HID_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Attached Device Not a Valid HID Device.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Device Configuration.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (HID_Host_SetReportProtocol(&Device_HID_Interface) != 0)
+	{
+		puts_P(PSTR("Error Setting Report Protocol Mode.\r\n"));
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	puts_P(PSTR("HID Device Enumerated.\r\n"));
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Host Mode Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	printf_P(PSTR(ESC_FG_RED "Dev Enum Error\r\n"
+	                         " -- Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- Sub Error Code %d\r\n"
+	                         " -- In State %d\r\n" ESC_FG_WHITE), ErrorCode, SubErrorCode, USB_HostState);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Callback for the HID Report Parser. This function is called each time the HID report parser is about to store
+ *  an IN, OUT or FEATURE item into the HIDReportInfo structure. To save on RAM, we are able to filter out items
+ *  we aren't interested in (preventing us from being able to extract them later on, but saving on the RAM they would
+ *  have occupied).
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CurrentItem  Pointer to the item the HID report parser is currently working with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the item should be stored into the HID report structure, \c false if it should be discarded
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem)
+{
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2b4edc39bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HIDReportViewer.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_
+#define _HID_REPORT_VIEWER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+		#include <inttypes.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/TerminalCodes.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void RetrieveDeviceData(void);
+		void OutputReportSizes(void);
+		void OutputParsedReportItems(void);
+		void OutputCollectionPath(const HID_CollectionPath_t* const CollectionPath);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HIDParser_FilterHIDReportItem(HID_ReportItem_t* const CurrentItem);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fccc892c6c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/HIDReportViewer.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage HID Device Report Viewer Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Host</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a HID Report viewer. This project is designed to aid in the debugging of USB HID Hosts, where the contents of an
+ *  unknown HID device's HID Report need to be examined. Once a HID device has been plugged into this application, the HID report
+ *  descriptor will be parsed using the internal LUFA HID report parser, and the results dumped to the serial port in a human
+ *  readable format. This output will contain information on the sizes of the reports within the device's HID interface, as well as
+ *  information on each report element (size, usage, minimum/maximum values, etc.).
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7819aabf87
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="HID Report Viewer" id="lufa.projects.hid_viewer.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.hid_viewer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.hid_viewer" caption="HID Report Viewer">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		HID device report viewer project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="HIDReportViewer.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="HIDReportViewer.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="HIDReportViewer.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ansi"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3a5ac56926
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "HID Device Report Viewer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7336a7edf9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/HIDReportViewer/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = HIDReportViewer
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2b189943a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,131 @@
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    partial class frmCPU
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
+            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
+            this.tmrCPUTimer = new System.Windows.Forms.Timer(this.components);
+            this.cmbComPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
+            this.pcCPUUsage = new System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter();
+            this.lblCPU = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon = new System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon(this.components);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.btnExit = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // tmrCPUTimer
+            // 
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Enabled = true;
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Interval = 1000;
+            this.tmrCPUTimer.Tick += new System.EventHandler(this.tmrCPUTimer_Tick);
+            // 
+            // cmbComPort
+            // 
+            this.cmbComPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
+            this.cmbComPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(48, 12);
+            this.cmbComPort.Name = "cmbComPort";
+            this.cmbComPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(156, 21);
+            this.cmbComPort.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.cmbComPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
+            // 
+            // pcCPUUsage
+            // 
+            this.pcCPUUsage.CategoryName = "Processor";
+            this.pcCPUUsage.CounterName = "% Processor Time";
+            this.pcCPUUsage.InstanceName = "_Total";
+            // 
+            // lblCPU
+            // 
+            this.lblCPU.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 14.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblCPU.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(44, 36);
+            this.lblCPU.Name = "lblCPU";
+            this.lblCPU.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(160, 28);
+            this.lblCPU.TabIndex = 1;
+            this.lblCPU.Text = "0%";
+            this.lblCPU.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleCenter;
+            // 
+            // nicoNotifyIcon
+            // 
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
+            this.nicoNotifyIcon.Visible = true;
+            // 
+            // btnMinimizeToTray
+            // 
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(12, 67);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Name = "btnMinimizeToTray";
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Text = "Minimize to Tray";
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnMinimizeToTray.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnMinimizeToTray_Click);
+            // 
+            // btnExit
+            // 
+            this.btnExit.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(126, 67);
+            this.btnExit.Name = "btnExit";
+            this.btnExit.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(111, 28);
+            this.btnExit.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.btnExit.Text = "Exit";
+            this.btnExit.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnExit.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnExit_Click);
+            // 
+            // frmCPU
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(249, 106);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnExit);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnMinimizeToTray);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblCPU);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.cmbComPort);
+            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "frmCPU";
+            this.Text = "CPU Usage Monitor";
+            this.WindowState = System.Windows.Forms.FormWindowState.Minimized;
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.Form1_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.pcCPUUsage)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Timer tmrCPUTimer;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cmbComPort;
+        private System.Diagnostics.PerformanceCounter pcCPUUsage;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblCPU;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.NotifyIcon nicoNotifyIcon;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnMinimizeToTray;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnExit;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..32543fc59b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+using Microsoft.Win32;
+
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    public partial class frmCPU : Form
+    {
+        private RegistryKey AppRegKey;
+
+        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
+
+        public frmCPU()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+
+            nicoNotifyIcon.Icon = this.Icon;
+            nicoNotifyIcon.MouseClick += new MouseEventHandler(TrayIconClick);        
+        }
+
+        private void Form1_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            AppRegKey = Registry.CurrentUser.CreateSubKey("Software\\CPUMonitor");
+
+            String[] PortNames = System.IO.Ports.SerialPort.GetPortNames();
+            Array.Sort<String>(PortNames, delegate(string strA, string strB) { return int.Parse(strA.Substring(3)).CompareTo(int.Parse(strB.Substring(3))); });
+            cmbComPort.Items.Clear();
+            cmbComPort.Items.AddRange(PortNames);
+
+            cmbComPort.SelectedIndex = System.Convert.ToInt32(AppRegKey.GetValue("Port", "1")) - 1;
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+
+            Hide();
+        }
+
+        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
+        {
+            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
+            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
+
+            try
+            {
+                serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+                serSerialPort.Open();
+                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
+                serSerialPort.Close();
+            }
+            catch (Exception e)
+            {
+
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void tmrCPUTimer_Tick(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            float CPUUsage = pcCPUUsage.NextValue();
+
+            int Red = 0;
+            int Green = 0;
+            int Blue = 0;
+
+            if (CPUUsage < 25)
+            {
+                Green = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * CPUUsage);
+            }
+            else if (CPUUsage < 50)
+            {
+                Blue = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 25));
+                Green = LIGHT_MAX - Blue;
+            }
+            else if (CPUUsage < 75)
+            {
+                Red = (int)((LIGHT_MAX / 25) * (CPUUsage - 50));
+                Blue = LIGHT_MAX - Red;
+            }
+            else
+            {
+                Red = LIGHT_MAX;
+            }
+
+            NotifyLight(Red, Green, Blue);
+            lblCPU.Text = ((int)CPUUsage).ToString() + "%";
+        }
+
+        private void btnExit_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            Application.Exit();
+        }
+
+        private void btnMinimizeToTray_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Hide();
+        }
+
+        private void TrayIconClick(object sender, MouseEventArgs e)
+        {
+            this.Show();
+            this.WindowState = FormWindowState.Normal;
+        }
+
+        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            AppRegKey.SetValue("Port", cmbComPort.SelectedIndex + 1);
+            serSerialPort.PortName = cmbComPort.Text;
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d568a9dc48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.csproj
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003">
+  <PropertyGroup>
+    <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration>
+    <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform>
+    <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion>
+    <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion>
+    <ProjectGuid>{6040B049-4241-4FFD-B388-AACDA78D1469}</ProjectGuid>
+    <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType>
+    <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder>
+    <RootNamespace>CPUMonitor</RootNamespace>
+    <AssemblyName>CPUMonitor</AssemblyName>
+    <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion>
+    <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment>
+    <FileUpgradeFlags>
+    </FileUpgradeFlags>
+    <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion>
+    <UpgradeBackupLocation />
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols>
+    <DebugType>full</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>false</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>true</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Reference Include="System" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Core">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Deployment" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Drawing" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml" />
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Compile Include="CPUMonitor.cs">
+      <SubType>Form</SubType>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="CPUMonitor.Designer.cs">
+      <DependentUpon>CPUMonitor.cs</DependentUpon>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="Program.cs" />
+    <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" />
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="CPUMonitor.resx">
+      <DependentUpon>CPUMonitor.cs</DependentUpon>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx">
+      <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTime>True</DesignTime>
+    </Compile>
+    <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings">
+      <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+    </None>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput>
+    </Compile>
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" />
+  <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. 
+       Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets.
+  <Target Name="BeforeBuild">
+  </Target>
+  <Target Name="AfterBuild">
+  </Target>
+  -->
+</Project>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c62b1b0203
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/CPUMonitor.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,132 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" />
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <metadata name="serSerialPort.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>17, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+  <metadata name="tmrCPUTimer.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>137, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+  <metadata name="pcCPUUsage.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>262, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+  <metadata name="nicoNotifyIcon.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>383, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..cb4fd89f23
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Program.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace CPUMonitor
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new frmCPU());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..85d31fcba7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("CPUMonitor")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("CPUMonitor")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("3e4a61da-cdde-46de-848b-b5206d225e21")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bf80e05fc5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace CPUMonitor.Properties {
+    using System;
+    
+    
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources {
+        
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+        
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+        
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources() {
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
+            get {
+                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("CPUMonitor.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
+            get {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..af7dbebbac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Resources.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..690fde3ba2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace CPUMonitor.Properties {
+    
+    
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
+        
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+        
+        public static Settings Default {
+            get {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..39645652af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/CPUUsageApp/Properties/Settings.settings
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)">
+  <Profiles>
+    <Profile Name="(Default)" />
+  </Profiles>
+  <Settings />
+</SettingsFile>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..078f7e6753
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..aed252fe91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2044,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LED Notifier");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ce014c632a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..595083a4a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    partial class LEDMixer
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.components = new System.ComponentModel.Container();
+            this.tbRed = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.tbGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.tbBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar();
+            this.serSerialPort = new System.IO.Ports.SerialPort(this.components);
+            this.cbPort = new System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox();
+            this.lblRed = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblBlue = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblGreen = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).BeginInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).BeginInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // tbRed
+            // 
+            this.tbRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 64);
+            this.tbRed.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbRed.Name = "tbRed";
+            this.tbRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbRed.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.tbRed.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbRed_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // tbGreen
+            // 
+            this.tbGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 115);
+            this.tbGreen.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbGreen.Name = "tbGreen";
+            this.tbGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbGreen.TabIndex = 1;
+            this.tbGreen.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbGreen_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // tbBlue
+            // 
+            this.tbBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(54, 163);
+            this.tbBlue.Maximum = 512;
+            this.tbBlue.Name = "tbBlue";
+            this.tbBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(230, 45);
+            this.tbBlue.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.tbBlue.Scroll += new System.EventHandler(this.tbBlue_Scroll);
+            // 
+            // cbPort
+            // 
+            this.cbPort.FormattingEnabled = true;
+            this.cbPort.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(97, 12);
+            this.cbPort.Name = "cbPort";
+            this.cbPort.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(99, 21);
+            this.cbPort.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.cbPort.SelectedIndexChanged += new System.EventHandler(this.cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged);
+            // 
+            // lblRed
+            // 
+            this.lblRed.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblRed.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 64);
+            this.lblRed.Name = "lblRed";
+            this.lblRed.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(48, 29);
+            this.lblRed.TabIndex = 4;
+            this.lblRed.Text = "Red";
+            this.lblRed.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // lblBlue
+            // 
+            this.lblBlue.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblBlue.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 115);
+            this.lblBlue.Name = "lblGreen";
+            this.lblBlue.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 27);
+            this.lblBlue.TabIndex = 5;
+            this.lblBlue.Text = "Green";
+            this.lblBlue.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // lblGreen
+            // 
+            this.lblGreen.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 9.75F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblGreen.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(3, 163);
+            this.lblGreen.Name = "lblBlue";
+            this.lblGreen.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(50, 25);
+            this.lblGreen.TabIndex = 6;
+            this.lblGreen.Text = "Blue";
+            this.lblGreen.TextAlign = System.Drawing.ContentAlignment.MiddleRight;
+            // 
+            // LEDMixer
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(284, 207);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblGreen);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblBlue);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblRed);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.cbPort);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbBlue);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbGreen);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.tbRed);
+            this.FormBorderStyle = System.Windows.Forms.FormBorderStyle.FixedSingle;
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.MinimizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "LEDMixer";
+            this.Text = "LED Mixer";
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.LEDMixer_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbRed)).EndInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbGreen)).EndInit();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.tbBlue)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+            this.PerformLayout();
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbRed;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbGreen;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.TrackBar tbBlue;
+        private System.IO.Ports.SerialPort serSerialPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.ComboBox cbPort;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblRed;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblBlue;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblGreen;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dfaffed309
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,75 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    public partial class LEDMixer : Form
+    {
+        private const int LIGHT_MAX = 0x1F;
+        
+        public LEDMixer()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+        }
+
+        private void LEDMixer_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            String[] PortNames = System.IO.Ports.SerialPort.GetPortNames();
+            Array.Sort<String>(PortNames, delegate(string strA, string strB) { return int.Parse(strA.Substring(3)).CompareTo(int.Parse(strB.Substring(3))); });
+            cbPort.Items.Clear();
+            cbPort.Items.AddRange(PortNames);
+
+            cbPort.SelectedIndex = 0;
+
+            tbRed.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+            tbGreen.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+            tbBlue.Maximum = LIGHT_MAX;
+        }
+
+        private void tbRed_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+
+        private void tbGreen_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+
+        private void tbBlue_Scroll(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+        
+        private void NotifyLight(int Red, int Green, int Blue)
+        {
+            byte[] buffer = new byte[3];
+            buffer[0] = (byte)(0x80 | (Red & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[1] = (byte)(0x40 | (Green & LIGHT_MAX));
+            buffer[2] = (byte)(0x20 | (Blue & LIGHT_MAX));
+
+            try
+            {
+                serSerialPort.PortName = cbPort.Text;
+                serSerialPort.Open();
+                serSerialPort.Write(buffer, 0, buffer.Length);
+                serSerialPort.Close();
+            }
+            catch (Exception e)
+            {
+
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void cbPort_SelectedIndexChanged(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            NotifyLight(tbRed.Value, tbGreen.Value, tbBlue.Value);
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6287ddcff1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.csproj
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003">
+  <PropertyGroup>
+    <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration>
+    <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform>
+    <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion>
+    <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion>
+    <ProjectGuid>{A7814DA7-FA30-4A3D-878F-2E1975F9B27D}</ProjectGuid>
+    <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType>
+    <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder>
+    <RootNamespace>LEDMixer</RootNamespace>
+    <AssemblyName>LEDMixer</AssemblyName>
+    <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion>
+    <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment>
+    <FileUpgradeFlags>
+    </FileUpgradeFlags>
+    <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion>
+    <UpgradeBackupLocation />
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols>
+    <DebugType>full</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>false</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>true</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Reference Include="System" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Core">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Deployment" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Drawing" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml" />
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Compile Include="LEDMixer.cs">
+      <SubType>Form</SubType>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="LEDMixer.Designer.cs">
+      <DependentUpon>LEDMixer.cs</DependentUpon>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="Program.cs" />
+    <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" />
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="LEDMixer.resx">
+      <DependentUpon>LEDMixer.cs</DependentUpon>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx">
+      <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTime>True</DesignTime>
+    </Compile>
+    <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings">
+      <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+    </None>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput>
+    </Compile>
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" />
+  <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. 
+       Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets.
+  <Target Name="BeforeBuild">
+  </Target>
+  <Target Name="AfterBuild">
+  </Target>
+  -->
+</Project>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0601840d7b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/LEDMixer.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" />
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <metadata name="serSerialPort.TrayLocation" type="System.Drawing.Point, System.Drawing, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b03f5f7f11d50a3a">
+    <value>17, 17</value>
+  </metadata>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8958f86d2a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Program.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace LEDMixer
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new LEDMixer());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c88194381e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("LEDMixer")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Microsoft")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("LEDMixer")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Microsoft 2009")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("335c1112-9aa6-42a0-9765-5cc6deb78c88")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..53e3f2e0b9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace LEDMixer.Properties {
+    using System;
+    
+    
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources {
+        
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+        
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+        
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources() {
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
+            get {
+                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("LEDMixer.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
+            get {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..af7dbebbac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Resources.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d79f28b804
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace LEDMixer.Properties {
+    
+    
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
+        
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+        
+        public static Settings Default {
+            get {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..39645652af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDMixerApp/Properties/Settings.settings
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)">
+  <Profiles>
+    <Profile Name="(Default)" />
+  </Profiles>
+  <Settings />
+</SettingsFile>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..07455764df
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.c
@@ -0,0 +1,176 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the LEDNotfier project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "LEDNotifier.h"
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Counter for the software PWM. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Count;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the first software PWM channel. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the second software PWM channel. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty;
+
+/** Duty cycle for the third software PWM channel. */
+static volatile uint8_t SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty;
+
+/** Standard file stream for the CDC interface when set up, so that the virtual CDC COM port can be
+ *  used like any regular character stream in the C APIs.
+ */
+static FILE USBSerialStream;
+
+
+/** Interrupt handler for managing the software PWM channels for the LEDs */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDS_ALL_LEDS;
+
+	if (++SoftPWM_Count == 0b00011111)
+	  SoftPWM_Count = 0;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED1;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED2;
+
+	if (SoftPWM_Count >= SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty)
+	  LEDMask &= ~LEDS_LED3;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Create a regular blocking character stream for the interface so that it can be used with the stdio.h functions */
+	CDC_Device_CreateBlockingStream(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface, &USBSerialStream);
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Read in next LED colour command from the host */
+		uint8_t ColourUpdate = fgetc(&USBSerialStream);
+
+		/* Top 3 bits select the LED, bottom 5 control the brightness */
+		uint8_t Channel = (ColourUpdate & 0b11100000);
+		uint8_t Duty    = (ColourUpdate & 0b00011111);
+
+		if (Channel & (1 << 5))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel1_Duty = Duty;
+
+		if (Channel & (1 << 6))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel2_Duty = Duty;
+
+		if (Channel & (1 << 7))
+		  SoftPWM_Channel3_Duty = Duty;
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Timer Initialization */
+	OCR0A  = 100;
+	TCCR0A = (1 << WGM01);
+	TCCR0B = (1 << CS00);
+	TIMSK0 = (1 << OCIE0A);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7a0a9ae46b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for LEDNotifier.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
+#define _LEDNOTIFIER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..53728f448f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LEDNotifier.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage USB LED Notifier Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB646
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  USB LED Notifier Project. This project is designed for the Busware BUI board, however it can run easily on any
+ *  USB AVR. It is a generic RGB LED controller (via a three channel software PWM) which listens for commands from the
+ *  host on a CDC virtual serial port. When new commands are received, it updates the board LEDs.
+ *
+ *  This can be controlled with any host application that can write to the virtual serial port, allowing it to become
+ *  a visual notification system for any number of custom host applications, such as a new unread email notifier.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dc3f0e74aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/LUFA LED Notifier.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA LED Notifier.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2044
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA CDC-ACM Virtual Serial Port"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..01f3468381
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="LED Notifier Widget" id="lufa.projects.led_notifier.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.led_notifier"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.led_notifier" caption="LED Notifier Widget">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		RGB LED notification widget project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LEDNotifier.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA LED Notifier.inf"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="CPUUsageApp"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="LEDMixerApp"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="LEDNotifier.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="LEDNotifier.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1a1e500f43
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2366 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB LED Notifier Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         CPUUsageApp/ \
+                         LEDMixerApp/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c4e0334785
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/LEDNotifier/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = BUI
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = LEDNotifier
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2e249cf1fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES     3
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..078f7e6753
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f7138ca59c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2048,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize   = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces          = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber      = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex    = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes         = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption      = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 0,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_ControlProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_ControlInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.ACSpecification          = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+			.TotalLength              = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t),
+
+			.InCollection             = 1,
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber          = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+			.AlternateSetting         = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints           = 2,
+
+			.Class                    = AUDIO_CSCP_AudioClass,
+			.SubClass                 = AUDIO_CSCP_MIDIStreamingSubclass,
+			.Protocol                 = AUDIO_CSCP_StreamingProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex        = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.Audio_StreamInterface_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_General,
+
+			.AudioSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,0,0),
+
+			.TotalLength              = (sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t) -
+			                             offsetof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t, Audio_StreamInterface_SPC))
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x01,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_InputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x02,
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_Embedded,
+			.JackID                   = 0x03,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x02},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_OutputTerminal,
+
+			.JackType                 = MIDI_JACKTYPE_External,
+			.JackID                   = 0x04,
+
+			.NumberOfPins             = 1,
+			.SourceJackID             = {0x01},
+			.SourcePinID              = {0x01},
+
+			.JackStrIndex             = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x01}
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint =
+		{
+			.Endpoint =
+				{
+					.Header              = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+					.EndpointAddress     = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+					.Attributes          = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+					.EndpointSize        = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+					.PollingIntervalMS   = 0x05
+				},
+
+			.Refresh                  = 0,
+			.SyncEndpointNumber       = 0
+		},
+
+	.MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC =
+		{
+			.Header                   = {.Size = sizeof(USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSEndpoint},
+			.Subtype                  = AUDIO_DSUBTYPE_CSEndpoint_General,
+
+			.TotalEmbeddedJacks       = 0x01,
+			.AssociatedJackID         = {0x03}
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA MIDI Demo");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9a0d6414e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data IN endpoint, for device-to-host data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR       (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the MIDI streaming data OUT endpoint, for host-to-device data transfers. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR      (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint size in bytes of the Audio isochronous streaming data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE          64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t     Config;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_ControlInterface;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_Interface_AC_t       Audio_ControlInterface_SPC;
+
+			// MIDI Audio Streaming Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t                Audio_StreamInterface;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_AudioInterface_AS_t   Audio_StreamInterface_SPC;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_InputJack_t           MIDI_In_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Emb;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_OutputJack_t          MIDI_Out_Jack_Ext;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_In_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+			USB_Audio_Descriptor_StreamEndpoint_Std_t MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint;
+			USB_MIDI_Descriptor_Jack_Endpoint_t       MIDI_Out_Jack_Endpoint_SPC;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioControl = 0, /**< Audio control interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream  = 1, /**< Audio stream interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dd4529adc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.c
@@ -0,0 +1,252 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MIDI demo. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MIDIToneGenerator.h"
+
+/** LUFA MIDI Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all MIDI Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MIDI_Device_t Keyboard_MIDI_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.StreamingInterfaceNumber = INTERFACE_ID_AudioStream,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = MIDI_STREAM_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = MIDI_STREAM_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** 8-bit 256 entry Sine Wave lookup table */
+static const uint8_t SineTable[256] =
+{
+	128, 131, 134, 137, 140, 143, 146, 149, 152, 156, 159, 162, 165, 168, 171, 174,
+	176, 179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 193, 196, 199, 201, 204, 206, 209, 211, 213, 216,
+	218, 220, 222, 224, 226, 228, 230, 232, 234, 236, 237, 239, 240, 242, 243, 245,
+	246, 247, 248, 249, 250, 251, 252, 252, 253, 254, 254, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255,
+	255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 255, 254, 254, 253, 252, 252, 251, 250, 249, 248, 247,
+	246, 245, 243, 242, 240, 239, 237, 236, 234, 232, 230, 228, 226, 224, 222, 220,
+	218, 216, 213, 211, 209, 206, 204, 201, 199, 196, 193, 191, 188, 185, 182, 179,
+	176, 174, 171, 168, 165, 162, 159, 156, 152, 149, 146, 143, 140, 137, 134, 131,
+	128, 124, 121, 118, 115, 112, 109, 106, 103,  99,  96,  93,  90,  87,  84,  81,
+	 79,  76,  73,  70,  67,  64,  62,  59,  56,  54,  51,  49,  46,  44,  42,  39,
+	 37,  35,  33,  31,  29,  27,  25,  23,  21,  19,  18,  16,  15,  13,  12,  10,
+	  9,   8,   7,   6,   5,   4,   3,   3,   2,   1,   1,   0,   0,   0,   0,   0,
+	  0,   0,   0,   0,   0,   0,   1,   1,   2,   3,   3,   4,   5,   6,   7,   8,
+	  9,  10,  12,  13,  15,  16,  18,  19,  21,  23,  25,  27,  29,  31,  33,  35,
+	 37,  39,  42,  44,  46,  49,  51,  54,  56,  59,  62,  64,  67,  70,  73,  76,
+	 79,  81,  84,  87,  90,  93,  96,  99, 103, 106, 109, 112, 115, 118, 121, 124,
+};
+
+/** Array of structures describing each note being generated */
+static DDSNoteData NoteData[MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MIDI_EventPacket_t ReceivedMIDIEvent;
+		if (MIDI_Device_ReceiveEventPacket(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface, &ReceivedMIDIEvent))
+		{
+			if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_ON)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
+			{
+				DDSNoteData* LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[0];
+
+				/* Find a free entry in the note table to use for the note being turned on */
+				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+				{
+					/* Check if the note is unused */
+					if (!(NoteData[i].Pitch))
+					{
+						/* If a note is unused, it's age is essentially infinite - always prefer unused note entries */
+						LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i];
+						break;
+					}
+					else if (NoteData[i].LRUAge >= LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge)
+					{
+						/* If an older entry that the current entry has been found, prefer overwriting that one */
+						LRUNoteStruct = &NoteData[i];
+					}
+
+					NoteData[i].LRUAge++;
+				}
+
+				/* Update the oldest note entry with the new note data and reset its age */
+				LRUNoteStruct->Pitch          = ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2;
+				LRUNoteStruct->TableIncrement = (uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * SCALE_FACTOR) +
+						                         ((uint32_t)(BASE_INCREMENT * NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO * SCALE_FACTOR) *
+						                          (ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2 - BASE_PITCH_INDEX));
+				LRUNoteStruct->TablePosition  = 0;
+				LRUNoteStruct->LRUAge         = 0;
+
+				/* Turn on indicator LED to indicate note generation activity */
+				LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+			}
+			else if ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Event == MIDI_EVENT(0, MIDI_COMMAND_NOTE_OFF)) && ((ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data1 & 0x0F) == 0))
+			{
+				bool FoundActiveNote = false;
+
+				/* Find the note in the note table to turn off */
+				for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+				{
+					if (NoteData[i].Pitch == ReceivedMIDIEvent.Data2)
+					  NoteData[i].Pitch = 0;
+					else if (NoteData[i].Pitch)
+					  FoundActiveNote   = true;
+				}
+
+				/* If all notes off, turn off the indicator LED */
+				if (!(FoundActiveNote))
+				  LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDS_NO_LEDS);
+			}
+		}
+
+		MIDI_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to handle the reloading of the PWM timer with the next sample. */
+ISR(TIMER0_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint16_t MixedSample = 0;
+
+	/* Sum together all the active notes to form a single sample */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+	{
+		/* A non-zero pitch indicates the note is active */
+		if (NoteData[i].Pitch)
+		{
+			/* Use the top 8 bits of the table position as the sample table index */
+			uint8_t TableIndex = (NoteData[i].TablePosition >> 24);
+
+			/* Add the new tone sample to the accumulator and increment the table position */
+			MixedSample += SineTable[TableIndex];
+			NoteData[i].TablePosition += NoteData[i].TableIncrement;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Output clamped mixed sample value to the PWM */
+	OCR3A = (MixedSample <= 0xFF) ? MixedSample : 0xFF;
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Sample reload timer initialization */
+	TIMSK0  = (1 << OCIE0A);
+	OCR0A   = (VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 8);
+	TCCR0A  = (1 << WGM01);  // CTC mode
+	TCCR0B  = (1 << CS01);   // Fcpu/8 speed
+
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+
+	/* PWM speaker timer initialization */
+	TCCR3A  = ((1 << WGM31) | (1 << COM3A1) | (1 << COM3A0)); // Set on match, clear on TOP
+	TCCR3B  = ((1 << WGM32) | (1 << CS30));  // Fast 8-Bit PWM, Fcpu speed
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Set speaker as output */
+	DDRC |= (1 << 6);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	/* Disable any notes currently being played */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES; i++)
+	  NoteData[i].Pitch = 0;
+
+	/* Set speaker as input to reduce current draw */
+	DDRC &= ~(1 << 6);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= MIDI_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MIDI_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_MIDI_Interface);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b0661c3f85
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.h
@@ -0,0 +1,105 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for AudioOutput.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+#define _AUDIO_OUTPUT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** Scale factor used to convert the floating point frequencies and ratios into a fixed point number */
+		#define SCALE_FACTOR               65536
+
+		/** Base (lowest) allowable MIDI note frequency */
+		#define BASE_FREQUENCY             27.5
+
+		/** Ratio between each note in an octave */
+		#define NOTE_OCTIVE_RATIO          1.05946
+
+		/** Lowest valid MIDI pitch index */
+		#define BASE_PITCH_INDEX           21
+
+		/** Number of samples in the virtual sample table (can be expanded to lower maximum frequency, but allow for
+		 *  more simultaneous notes due to the reduced amount of processing time needed when the samples are spaced out)
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE  512
+
+		/** Sample table increments per period for the base MIDI note frequency */
+		#define BASE_INCREMENT             (((F_CPU / VIRTUAL_SAMPLE_TABLE_SIZE / 2) / BASE_FREQUENCY))
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t  LRUAge;
+			uint8_t  Pitch;
+			uint32_t TableIncrement;
+			uint32_t TablePosition;
+		} DDSNoteData;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_UnhandledControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7d0f019ee5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/MIDIToneGenerator.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage MIDI Tone Generator Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Audio Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Standard Audio Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Audio Class Specification \n
+ *        USB-MIDI Audio Class Extension Specification \n
+ *        General MIDI Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  MIDI note synthesiser project. This project implements a basic DDS frequency synthesiser, capable of producing 8-bit PWM sine
+ *  waves of variable frequency. When attached to a USB host, this project will allow for multiple MIDI notes to be synthesised into
+ *  audiable sound via PWM, using the notes sent to MIDI channel 1.
+ *
+ *  Outgoing audio will output in 8-bit PWM onto the timer 3 output compare channel A. Decouple the audio output with a capacitor
+ *  and attach to a speaker to hear the audio.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_SIMULTANEOUS_NOTES</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Sets the maximum number of MIDI notes that can be generated simultaneously. More notes require more processing time,
+ *        and thus a value that is too high will cause audiable sound distortion due to insufficient CPU time.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6795c1bb8e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="MIDI Tone Generator" id="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.midi_tone_gen" caption="MIDI Tone Generator">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		MIDI tone generator project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="MIDI Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MIDIToneGenerator.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MIDIToneGenerator.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MIDIToneGenerator.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3c623c8153
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - MIDI Tone Generator Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..77d771b711
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MIDIToneGenerator/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MIDIToneGenerator
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..da41133238
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,58 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define MAG_T1_CLOCK         (1 << 0)
+	#define MAG_T1_DATA          (1 << 1)
+	#define MAG_T2_CLOCK         (1 << 2)
+	#define MAG_T2_DATA          (1 << 3)
+	#define MAG_T3_CLOCK         (1 << 4)
+	#define MAG_T3_DATA          (1 << 5)
+	#define MAG_CARDPRESENT      (1 << 6)
+
+	#define MAG_PORT             PORTC
+	#define MAG_PIN              PINC
+	#define MAG_DDR              DDRC
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a7decf5a07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1c6e9f043e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,216 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID report descriptor. This is a HID class specific descriptor, which defines the structure of the
+ *  reports sent and received by the HID device to and from the USB host. It indicates what data is sent,
+ *  where in the report each element is located and exactly how the data should be interpreted and used.
+ *
+ *  See the HID class specification for more information on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM KeyboardReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Keyboard report.
+	 *   Max simultaneous keys: 6
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_KEYBOARD(6)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2042,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_BootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_KeyboardBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_KeyboardHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(KeyboardReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors. */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera and Denver Gingerich");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Magnetic Card Reader");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_KeyboardHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &KeyboardReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(KeyboardReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..54436fc18a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config; /**< Configuration descriptor header structure */
+
+			// Keyboard HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface; /**< Keyboard interface descriptor */
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_KeyboardHID; /**< Keyboard HID descriptor */
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint; /**< Keyboard key report endpoint descriptor */
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard = 0, /**< Keyboard interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the keyboard key press reporting endpoint. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size of the keyboard report endpoints, in bytes. */
+		#define KEYBOARD_EPSIZE              8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fbd511b813
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** Circular bit buffer library. This will allow for individual bits
+ *  to be stored in packed form inside circular buffers, to reduce
+ *  overall RAM usage.
+ */
+
+#include "CircularBitBuffer.h"
+
+/** Function to initialize or reset a bit buffer, ready for data to be stored into it. */
+void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	/* Reset the number of stored bits in the buffer */
+	Buffer->Elements        = 0;
+
+	/* Reset the data in and out pointer structures in the buffer to the first buffer bit */
+	Buffer->In.CurrentByte  = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->In.ByteMask     = (1 << 0);
+	Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+	Buffer->Out.ByteMask    = (1 << 0);
+}
+
+/** Function to store the given bit into the given bit buffer. */
+void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer,
+                            const bool Bit)
+{
+	/* If the bit to store is true, set the next bit in the buffer */
+	if (Bit)
+	  *Buffer->In.CurrentByte |= Buffer->In.ByteMask;
+
+	/* Increment the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements++;
+
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is full of stored bits */
+	if (Buffer->In.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->In.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->In.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+
+		/* Reset the storage bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current storage bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->In.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Function to retrieve the next bit stored in the given bit buffer. */
+bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer)
+{
+	/* Retrieve the value of the next bit stored in the buffer */
+	bool Bit = ((*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte & Buffer->Out.ByteMask) != 0);
+
+	/* Clear the buffer bit */
+	*Buffer->Out.CurrentByte &= ~Buffer->Out.ByteMask;
+
+	/* Decrement the number of stored bits in the buffer counter */
+	Buffer->Elements--;
+
+	/* Check if the current buffer byte is empty of stored bits */
+	if (Buffer->Out.ByteMask == (1 << 7))
+	{
+		/* Check if the end of the buffer has been reached, if so reset to start of buffer, otherwise advance to next bit */
+		if (Buffer->Out.CurrentByte != &Buffer->Data[sizeof(Buffer->Data) - 1])
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte++;
+		else
+		  Buffer->Out.CurrentByte = Buffer->Data;
+
+		/* Reset the retrieval bit mask in the current buffer byte to the first bit */
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask = (1 << 0);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Shift the current retrieval bit mask to the next bit in the current byte */
+		Buffer->Out.ByteMask <<= 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Return the retrieved bit from the buffer */
+	return Bit;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..918c825337
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,97 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for CircularBitBuffer.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+#define _CIRCULARBITBUFFER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#if (defined(__AVR_AT90USB1287__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB647__) || \
+		     defined(__AVR_AT90USB1286__) || defined(__AVR_AT90USB646__)) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+			/** Maximum number of bits which can be stored into a bit buffer. The memory usage is one eighth of this value per buffer. */
+			#define MAX_BITS 8192
+		#else
+			#define MAX_BITS 1024
+		#endif
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a pointer to a bit in a bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t* CurrentByte; /**< Pointer to the current byte in the buffer */
+			uint8_t  ByteMask; /**< Mask of the current bit in the buffer */
+		} BitBufferPointer_t;
+
+		/** Type define for a circular packet bit buffer. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t            Data[MAX_BITS / 8]; /**< Buffer to hold the stored bits in packed form */
+			uint16_t           Elements; /**< Number of stored bits in the bit buffer */
+
+			BitBufferPointer_t In; /**< Bit pointer to the next storage location in the buffer */
+			BitBufferPointer_t Out; /**< Bit pointer to the next retrieval location in the buffer */
+		} BitBuffer_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		/** Initializes or resets a given bit buffer, ready to store new bits.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to initialize
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_Init(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+		/** Stores a bit into the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to store a bit into
+		 *  \param[in] Bit  Bit to store into the buffer
+		 */
+		void BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer,
+		                            const bool Bit) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+		/** Retrieves a bit from the next location inside a given bit buffer.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in,out] Buffer  Bit buffer to retrieve a bit from
+		 *
+		 *  \return Next bit from the buffer
+		 */
+		bool BitBuffer_GetNextBit(BitBuffer_t* const Buffer) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(1);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..45c040eec6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Lib/MagstripeHW.h
@@ -0,0 +1,102 @@
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+	NOTE: The user of this include file MUST define the following macros
+	prior to including the file:
+
+	MAG_T1_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 1 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC1)
+	MAG_T1_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 1 data wire (i.e.. PORTC2)
+	MAG_T2_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 2 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC3)
+	MAG_T2_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 2 data wire (i.e.. PORTC0)
+	MAG_T3_CLOCK_PIN   Pin connected to Track 3 clock wire (i.e.. PORTC5)
+	MAG_T3_DATA_PIN    Pin connected to Track 3 data wire (i.e.. PORTC6)
+	MAG_CLS_PIN        Pin connected to card loaded wire (i.e.. PORTC4)
+	MAG_PIN            PIN macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PINC)
+	MAG_DDR            DDR macro for the reader's port (i.e.. DDRC)
+	MAG_PORT           PORT macro for the reader's port (i.e.. PORTC)
+
+	The example macros listed above assume that the Track 2 data wire is
+	connected to pin 0 on port C, the Track 2 clock wire is connected to
+	pin 3 on port C (similarly for Tracks 1 and 3), and the card loaded
+	wire is connected to pin 4 on port C.
+
+	If the mag-stripe reader you are using only reads one or two tracks,
+	then set the clock and data pins for the tracks it doesn't read to a
+	pin that is unused.  For example, on the AT90USBKey, any of the pins on
+	port C that do not have wires attached will be unused since they are
+	not connected to any onboard devices (such as the joystick or
+	temperature sensor).
+
+	Connecting wires to pins on different ports (i.e.. a data wire to pin 0
+	on port C and a clock wire to pin 0 on port D) is currently
+	unsupported.  All pins specified above must be on the same port.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Driver header for a TTL Magnetic Card reader device (such as the Omron V3B-4K).
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPEHW_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Private Interface - For use in library only: */
+		/* Macros: */
+			/** Mask of the track data, clock and card detection pins. */
+			#define MAG_MASK    (MAG_T1_DATA | MAG_T1_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T2_DATA | MAG_T2_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_T3_DATA | MAG_T3_CLOCK | \
+			                     MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+
+	/* Public Interface - May be used in end-application: */
+		/* Inline Functions: */
+			/** Initializes the magnetic stripe card reader ports and pins so that the card reader
+			 *  device can be controlled and read by the card reader driver. This must be called before
+			 *  trying to read any of the card reader's status lines.
+			 */
+			static inline void Magstripe_Init(void)
+			{
+				MAG_DDR  &= ~MAG_MASK;
+				MAG_PORT |=  MAG_MASK;
+			};
+
+			/** Returns the status of all the magnetic card reader's outputs.
+			 *
+			 *  \return A mask indicating which card lines are high or low
+			 */
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void) ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT;
+			static inline uint8_t Magstripe_GetStatus(void)
+			{
+				/* Mag-stripe IOs are active low and must be inverted when read */
+				return ((uint8_t)~MAG_PIN & MAG_MASK);
+			}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7cf7373a2e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.c
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MagStripe reader program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Magstripe.h"
+
+/** Bit buffers to hold the read bits for each of the three magnetic card tracks before they are transmitted
+ *  to the host as keyboard presses.
+ */
+static BitBuffer_t TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
+
+/** Pointer to the current track buffer being sent to the host. */
+static BitBuffer_t* CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS];
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Keyboard HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Keyboard_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber            = INTERFACE_ID_Keyboard,
+				.ReportINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address            = KEYBOARD_EPADDR,
+						.Size               = KEYBOARD_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks              = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer         = PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize     = sizeof(PrevKeyboardHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	for (uint8_t Buffer = 0; Buffer < TOTAL_TRACKS; Buffer++)
+	  BitBuffer_Init(&TrackDataBuffers[Buffer]);
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (Magstripe_GetStatus() & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+		  ReadMagstripeData();
+
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Magstripe_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Determines if a card has been inserted, and if so reads in each track's contents into the bit buffers
+ *  until they are read out to the host as a series of keyboard presses.
+ */
+void ReadMagstripeData(void)
+{
+	/* Arrays to hold the buffer pointers, clock and data bit masks for the separate card tracks */
+	const struct
+	{
+		uint8_t ClockMask;
+		uint8_t DataMask;
+	} TrackInfo[] = {{MAG_T1_CLOCK, MAG_T1_DATA},
+	                 {MAG_T2_CLOCK, MAG_T2_DATA},
+	                 {MAG_T3_CLOCK, MAG_T3_DATA}};
+
+	uint8_t Magstripe_Prev = 0;
+	uint8_t Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+
+	while (Magstripe_LCL & MAG_CARDPRESENT)
+	{
+		for (uint8_t Track = 0; Track < TOTAL_TRACKS; Track++)
+		{
+			bool DataPinLevel      = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].DataMask) != 0);
+			bool ClockPinLevel     = ((Magstripe_LCL & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+			bool ClockLevelChanged = (((Magstripe_LCL ^ Magstripe_Prev) & TrackInfo[Track].ClockMask) != 0);
+
+			/* Sample data on rising clock edges from the card reader */
+			if (ClockPinLevel && ClockLevelChanged)
+			  BitBuffer_StoreNextBit(&TrackDataBuffers[Track], DataPinLevel);
+		}
+
+		Magstripe_Prev = Magstripe_LCL;
+		Magstripe_LCL  = Magstripe_GetStatus();
+	}
+
+	CurrentTrackBuffer = &TrackDataBuffers[0];
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&Keyboard_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t* KeyboardReport = (USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	static bool IsKeyReleaseReport;
+
+	/* Key reports must be interleaved with key release reports, or repeated keys will be ignored */
+	IsKeyReleaseReport = !IsKeyReleaseReport;
+
+	if ((IsKeyReleaseReport) || (CurrentTrackBuffer == &TrackDataBuffers[TOTAL_TRACKS]))
+	{
+		/* No more data to send, or key release report between key presses */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_NONE;
+	}
+	else if (!(CurrentTrackBuffer->Elements))
+	{
+		/* End of current track, send an enter press and change to the next track's buffer */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = KEY_ENTER;
+		CurrentTrackBuffer++;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Still data in the current track; convert next bit to a 1 or 0 keypress */
+		KeyboardReport->KeyCode[0] = BitBuffer_GetNextBit(CurrentTrackBuffer) ? KEY_1 : KEY_0;
+	}
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_KeyboardReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID Class driver callback function for the processing of a received HID report from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID interface structure for the HID interface being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID          Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType        The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData        Pointer to the report buffer where the received report is stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize        Size in bytes of the report received from the host
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Ignore keyboard LED reports from the host, but still need to declare the callback routine
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..79a0f126f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.h
@@ -0,0 +1,90 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  Denver Gingerich (denver [at] ossguy [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Magstripe.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+#define _MAGSTRIPE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/MagstripeHW.h"
+		#include "Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Total number of tracks which can be read from the card, between 1 and 3. */
+		#define TOTAL_TRACKS       3
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that no is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_NONE           0
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "1" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_1              30
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the "0" key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_0              39
+
+		/** HID keyboard keycode to indicate that the enter key is currently pressed. */
+		#define KEY_ENTER          40
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void ReadMagstripeData(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a11dfaf804
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/Magstripe.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Denver Gingerich's USBSnoop Magnetic Card Reader Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB1287
+ *  \li AT90USB1286
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Keyboard</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USBIF HID Standard, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB AVR powered USB TTL magnetic stripe reader (using a card
+ *  reader such as the Omron V3B-4K) by Denver Gingerich. This project is designed
+ *  to be used with the open source Stripe Snoop project at <a>http://stripesnoop.sourceforge.net/</a>.
+ *
+ *  See <a>http://ossguy.com/ss_usb/</a> for the USB reader hardware project website,
+ *  including construction and support details.
+ *
+ *  To use, connect your magnetic card reader device to the USB AVR as follows (pin and port mapping may be adjusted
+ *  from the project makefile):
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Signal:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>AVR Port:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 1</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 1 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 2</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 3</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 2 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 0</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Data</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Track 3 Clock</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Card Detect</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  This project is based on the LUFA Keyboard project demonstration application, written by Denver Gingerich.
+ *
+ *  This application uses a keyboard HID driver to communicate the data collected a TTL magnetic stripe reader
+ *  to the connected computer. The raw bitstream obtained from the magnetic stripe reader is "typed" through
+ *  the keyboard driver as 0's and 1's. After every card swipe, the project will send a return key.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_BITS</td>
+ *    <td>CircularBitBuffer.h</td>
+ *    <td>Gives the maximum number of bits per track which can be buffered by the device for later transmission to a host.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T1_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T1_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 1 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T2_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T2_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 2 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T3_CLOCK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's CLOCK line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_T3_DATA</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's DATA line for the reader's track 3 output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_CARDPRESENT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Mask for the magnetic card reader's card detection output.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_PIN</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PIN register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_PORT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>PORT register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAG_DDR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>DDR register that the magnetic card reader device is attached to.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9fc5311e26
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Magnetic Strip Card Reader" id="lufa.projects.magstripe.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.magstripe"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.magstripe" caption="Magnetic Strip Card Reader">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Magnetic strip card reader project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Magstripe.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Magstripe.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Magstripe.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/CircularBitBuffer.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/MagstripeHW.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7f112e1dc0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Denver Gingerich's Stripe Snoop Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b45917fbf1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Magstripe/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = NONE
+F_CPU        = 16000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Magstripe
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/CircularBitBuffer.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..078f7e6753
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..678ab6a942
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM MediaControlReport[] =
+{
+	HID_RI_USAGE_PAGE(8, 0x0C), /* Consumer Page */
+	HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0x01), /* Consumer Controls */
+	HID_RI_COLLECTION(8, 0x01), /* Application */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB0), /* Play */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB1), /* Pause */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB3), /* Fast Forward */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB4), /* Rewind */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB5), /* Next Track */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB6), /* Previous Track */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xB7), /* Stop */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xCD), /* Play/Pause (toggle) */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xE2), /* Mute */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xE9), /* Volume Up */
+		HID_RI_USAGE(8, 0xEA), /* Volume Down */
+		HID_RI_REPORT_SIZE(8, 0x01),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x0B),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MINIMUM(8, 0),
+		HID_RI_LOGICAL_MAXIMUM(8, 1),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_DATA | HID_IOF_VARIABLE | HID_IOF_RELATIVE),
+		HID_RI_REPORT_COUNT(8, 0x05),
+		HID_RI_INPUT(8, HID_IOF_CONSTANT),
+	HID_RI_END_COLLECTION(0),
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x206A,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0x00,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_MediaControlHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(MediaControlReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Media Controller");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_MediaControlHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &MediaControlReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(MediaControlReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b8c0b88594
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Media Controller HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_MediaControlHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_HID = 0, /**< HID interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Media Control HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR           (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Media Control HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE           8
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..70522e7b20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.c
@@ -0,0 +1,184 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MediaControl project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the demo and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "MediaController.h"
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated Media Control HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer[sizeof(USB_MediaReport_Data_t)];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t MediaControl_HID_Interface =
+ 	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = MEDIACONTROL_HID_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevMediaControlHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+    };
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware()
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Joystick_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+
+	USB_Device_EnableSOFEvents();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB device Start Of Frame event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void)
+{
+	HID_Device_MillisecondElapsed(&MediaControl_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	USB_MediaReport_Data_t* MediaReport = (USB_MediaReport_Data_t*)ReportData;
+
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL    = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t ButtonStatus_LCL = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	/* Update the Media Control report with the user button presses */
+	MediaReport->Mute          = ((ButtonStatus_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1) ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->PlayPause     = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_PRESS) ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->VolumeUp      = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)    ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->VolumeDown    = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)  ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->PreviousTrack = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)  ? true : false);
+	MediaReport->NextTrack     = ((JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT) ? true : false);
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(USB_MediaReport_Data_t);
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	// Unused (but mandatory for the HID class driver) in this demo, since there are no Host->Device reports
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6a36d44219
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MediaControl.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MEDIACONTROL_H_
+#define _MEDIACONTROL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a Media Control HID report. This report contains the bits to match the usages defined
+		 *  in the HID report of the device. When set to a true value, the relevant media controls on the host will
+		 *  be triggered.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			unsigned Play           : 1;
+			unsigned Pause          : 1;
+			unsigned FForward       : 1;
+			unsigned Rewind         : 1;
+			unsigned NextTrack      : 1;
+			unsigned PreviousTrack  : 1;
+			unsigned Stop           : 1;
+			unsigned PlayPause      : 1;
+			unsigned Mute           : 1;
+			unsigned VolumeUp       : 1;
+			unsigned VolumeDown     : 1;
+			unsigned RESERVED       : 5;
+		} ATTR_PACKED USB_MediaReport_Data_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_StartOfFrame(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dece2132a1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/MediaController.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Media Controller Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode \n
+ *        Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Media Controller project. This project implements a basic Media Control device, to signal the host to play, pause, toggle playback,
+ *  mute and/or adjust the host volume, in addition to other such media commands. This project may be extended to create a dedicated
+ *  media playback control device, for home media centers or other equipment. By default, some of the most commonly used playback controls
+ *  are controlled by the board joystick and LEDs, however this may be altered as desired.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2d476da51a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Media Controller" id="lufa.projects.media_control.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.media_control"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.media_control" caption="Media Controller">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Magnetic strip card reader project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MediaController.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MediaController.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MediaController.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f6fff73549
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - Media Controller Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7db3338100
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MediaController/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MediaController
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..38f4dca9e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+//		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a90e25548e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,185 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Configuration Descriptor processing routines, to determine the correct pipe configurations
+ *  needed to communication with an attached USB device. Descriptors are special  computer-readable structures
+ *  which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+/** Reads and processes an attached device's descriptors, to determine compatibility and pipe configurations. This
+ *  routine will read in the entire configuration descriptor, and configure the hosts pipes to correctly communicate
+ *  with compatible devices.
+ *
+ *  This routine searches for a HID interface descriptor containing at least one Interrupt type IN endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return An error code from the GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t enum.
+ */
+uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void)
+{
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+	void*    CurrConfigLocation = ConfigDescriptorData;
+	uint16_t CurrConfigBytesRem;
+
+	USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* HIDInterface    = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataINEndpoint  = NULL;
+	USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t*  DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+	/* Retrieve the entire configuration descriptor into the allocated buffer */
+	switch (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &CurrConfigBytesRem, ConfigDescriptorData, sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)))
+	{
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful:
+			break;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_InvalidData:
+			return InvalidConfigDataReturned;
+		case HOST_GETCONFIG_BuffOverflow:
+			return DescriptorTooLarge;
+		default:
+			return ControlError;
+	}
+
+	while (!(DataINEndpoint) || !(DataOUTEndpoint))
+	{
+		/* See if we've found a likely compatible interface, and if there is an endpoint within that interface */
+		if (!(HIDInterface) ||
+		    USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+		                              DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+		{
+			/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint - if we've reached the end of the HID descriptor
+			 * but only found the mandatory IN endpoint, it's safe to continue with the device enumeration */
+			if (DataINEndpoint)
+			  break;
+
+			/* Get the next HID interface from the configuration descriptor */
+			if (USB_GetNextDescriptorComp(&CurrConfigBytesRem, &CurrConfigLocation,
+			                              DComp_NextHIDInterface) != DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_COMP_Found)
+			{
+				/* Descriptor not found, error out */
+				return NoCompatibleInterfaceFound;
+			}
+
+			/* Save the interface in case we need to refer back to it later */
+			HIDInterface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+			/* Clear any found endpoints */
+			DataOUTEndpoint = NULL;
+
+			/* Skip the remainder of the loop as we have not found an endpoint yet */
+			continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Retrieve the endpoint address from the endpoint descriptor */
+		USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t* EndpointData = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrConfigLocation, USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t);
+
+		/* If the endpoint is a IN type endpoint */
+		if ((EndpointData->EndpointAddress & ENDPOINT_DIR_MASK) == ENDPOINT_DIR_IN)
+		  DataINEndpoint  = EndpointData;
+		else
+		  DataOUTEndpoint = EndpointData;
+	}
+
+	/* Configure the HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataINEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataINEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	Pipe_SetInterruptPeriod(DataINEndpoint->PollingIntervalMS);
+
+	/* Check if the HID interface contained an optional OUT data endpoint */
+	if (DataOUTEndpoint)
+	{
+		/* Configure the HID data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_ConfigurePipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE, EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointAddress, DataOUTEndpoint->EndpointSize, 1);
+	}
+
+	/* Valid data found, return success */
+	return SuccessfulConfigRead;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Interface descriptor of the correct HID Class value.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine if the current descriptor is an interface descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		USB_Descriptor_Interface_t* Interface = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Interface_t);
+
+		/* Check the HID descriptor class and protocol, break out if correct class/protocol interface found */
+		if (Interface->Class == HID_CLASS)
+		{
+			/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+			return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+	return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+}
+
+/** Descriptor comparator function. This comparator function is can be called while processing an attached USB device's
+ *  configuration descriptor, to search for a specific sub descriptor. It can also be used to abort the configuration
+ *  descriptor processing if an incompatible descriptor configuration is found.
+ *
+ *  This comparator searches for the next Endpoint descriptor inside the current interface descriptor,
+ *  aborting the search if another interface descriptor is found before the required endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \return A value from the DSEARCH_Return_ErrorCodes_t enum
+ */
+uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor)
+{
+	USB_Descriptor_Header_t* Header = DESCRIPTOR_PCAST(CurrentDescriptor, USB_Descriptor_Header_t);
+
+	/* Determine the type of the current descriptor */
+	if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Endpoint)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the descriptor being searched for has been found */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Found;
+	}
+	else if (Header->Type == DTYPE_Interface)
+	{
+		/* Indicate that the search has failed prematurely and should be aborted */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_Fail;
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Current descriptor does not match what this comparator is looking for */
+		return DESCRIPTOR_SEARCH_NotFound;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..50481340d8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/ConfigDescriptor.h
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for ConfigDescriptor.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+#define _CONFIGDESCRIPTOR_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "MissileLauncher.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Interface Class value for the Human Interface Device class. */
+		#define HID_CLASS                 0x03
+
+		/** Pipe address for the HID data IN pipe. */
+		#define HID_DATA_IN_PIPE          (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Pipe address for the HID data OUT pipe. */
+		#define HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE         (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** Enum for the possible return codes of the \ref ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() function. */
+		enum GenericHIDHost_GetConfigDescriptorDataCodes_t
+		{
+			SuccessfulConfigRead            = 0, /**< Configuration Descriptor was processed successfully */
+			ControlError                    = 1, /**< A control request to the device failed to complete successfully */
+			DescriptorTooLarge              = 2, /**< The device's Configuration Descriptor is too large to process */
+			InvalidConfigDataReturned       = 3, /**< The device returned an invalid Configuration Descriptor */
+			NoCompatibleInterfaceFound      = 4, /**< A compatible interface with the required endpoints was not found */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t ProcessConfigurationDescriptor(void);
+
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterface(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+		uint8_t DComp_NextHIDInterfaceDataEndpoint(void* CurrentDescriptor);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a33c4cf7e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.c
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+/*
+            USB Missile Launcher Demo
+        Copyright (C) Dave Fletcher, 2010.
+         fletch at fletchtronics dot net
+
+       Based on research by Scott Weston at
+        http://code.google.com/p/pymissile
+ */
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2010  Dave Fletcher (fletch [at] fletchtronics [dot] net)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/*
+ *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
+ *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
+ *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
+ */
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the MissileLauncher application. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the application and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration as well
+ *  as the sending of commands to the attached launcher toy.
+ */
+
+#include "MissileLauncher.h"
+
+/** Launcher first init command report data sequence */
+static const uint8_t CMD_INITA[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0,  0,  4,  0  };
+
+/** Launcher second init command report data sequence */
+static const uint8_t CMD_INITB[8]     = {  85, 83, 66, 67,  0, 64,  2,  0  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to stop all movement */
+static const uint8_t CMD_STOP[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left */
+static const uint8_t CMD_LEFT[8]      = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right */
+static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHT[8]     = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move up */
+static const uint8_t CMD_UP[8]        = {   0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move down */
+static const uint8_t CMD_DOWN[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and up */
+static const uint8_t CMD_LEFTUP[8]    = {   0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and up */
+static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHTUP[8]   = {   0,  0,  1,  1,  0,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move left and down */
+static const uint8_t CMD_LEFTDOWN[8]  = {   0,  1,  0,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to move right and down */
+static const uint8_t CMD_RIGHTDOWN[8] = {   0,  0,  1,  0,  1,  0,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Launcher command report data sequence to fire a missile */
+static const uint8_t CMD_FIRE[8]      = {   0,  0,  0,  0,  0,  1,  8,  8  };
+
+/** Last command sent to the launcher, to determine what new command (if any) must be sent */
+static const uint8_t* CmdState;
+
+/** Buffer to hold a command to send to the launcher */
+static uint8_t CmdBuffer[LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	CmdState = CMD_STOP;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		Read_Joystick_Status();
+		DiscardNextReport();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	Joystick_Init();
+	Buttons_Init();
+}
+
+/** Reads the joystick and button status, sending commands to the launcher as needed. */
+void Read_Joystick_Status(void)
+{
+	uint8_t JoyStatus_LCL = Joystick_GetStatus();
+	uint8_t Buttons_LCL   = Buttons_GetStatus();
+
+	if (Buttons_LCL & BUTTONS_BUTTON1)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_FIRE);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_UP)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_UP);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_DOWN)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_DOWN);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_LEFT)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_LEFT);
+	else if (JoyStatus_LCL & JOY_RIGHT)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_RIGHT);
+	else if (CmdState != CMD_STOP)
+	  Send_Command(CMD_STOP);
+}
+
+/** Lower level send routine, copies report into a larger buffer and sends.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Report  Report data to send.
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Report length in bytes.
+ */
+void Send_Command_Report(const uint8_t* const Report,
+                         const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	memcpy(CmdBuffer, Report, 8);
+	WriteNextReport(CmdBuffer, ReportSize);
+}
+
+/** Sends one of the \c CMD_* command constants to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] Command  One of the command constants.
+ */
+void Send_Command(const uint8_t* const Command)
+{
+	if ((CmdState == CMD_STOP && Command != CMD_STOP) ||
+		(CmdState != CMD_STOP && Command == CMD_STOP))
+	{
+		LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED4);
+
+		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITA, 8);
+		Send_Command_Report(CMD_INITB, 8);
+		Send_Command_Report(Command, LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE);
+	}
+
+	CmdState = Command;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Get and process the configuration descriptor data */
+	if (ProcessConfigurationDescriptor() != SuccessfulConfigRead)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Set the device configuration to the first configuration (rarely do devices use multiple configurations) */
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Reads in and discards the next report from the attached device. */
+void DiscardNextReport(void)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_IN_PIPE);
+	Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+	/* Check to see if a packet has been received */
+	if (!(Pipe_IsINReceived()))
+	{
+		/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Clear the IN endpoint, ready for next data packet */
+	Pipe_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Refreeze HID data IN pipe */
+	Pipe_Freeze();
+}
+
+/** Writes a report to the attached device.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] ReportOUTData  Buffer containing the report to send to the device
+ *  \param[in] ReportLength  Length of the report to send
+ */
+void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData,
+                     const uint16_t ReportLength)
+{
+	if (USB_HostState != HOST_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Select and unfreeze HID data OUT pipe */
+	Pipe_SelectPipe(HID_DATA_OUT_PIPE);
+
+	/* Not all HID devices have an OUT endpoint (some require OUT reports to be sent over the
+	 * control endpoint instead) - check to see if the OUT endpoint has been initialized */
+	if (Pipe_IsConfigured())
+	{
+		Pipe_Unfreeze();
+
+		/* Ensure pipe is ready to be written to before continuing */
+		if (!(Pipe_IsOUTReady()))
+		{
+			/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+			Pipe_Freeze();
+
+			return;
+		}
+
+		/* Write out HID report data */
+		Pipe_Write_Stream_LE(ReportOUTData, ReportLength, NULL);
+
+		/* Clear the OUT endpoint, send last data packet */
+		Pipe_ClearOUT();
+
+		/* Refreeze the data OUT pipe */
+		Pipe_Freeze();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Class specific request to send a HID report to the device */
+		USB_ControlRequest = (USB_Request_Header_t)
+			{
+				.bmRequestType = (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE),
+				.bRequest      = HID_REQ_SetReport,
+				.wValue        = 0x02,
+				.wIndex        = 0x01,
+				.wLength       = ReportLength,
+			};
+
+		/* Select the control pipe for the request transfer */
+		Pipe_SelectPipe(PIPE_CONTROLPIPE);
+
+		/* Send the request to the device */
+		USB_Host_SendControlRequest(ReportOUTData);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3a50573223
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.h
@@ -0,0 +1,92 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for MissileLauncher.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
+#define _MISSILELAUNCHER_HOST_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Buttons.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Joystick.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "ConfigDescriptor.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING   (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY         (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR         (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** Size of the Launcher report command buffer. */
+		#define LAUNCHER_CMD_BUFFER_SIZE  64
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void Read_Joystick_Status(void);
+        void Send_Command_Report(const uint8_t* const Report,
+		                         const uint16_t ReportSize);
+        void Send_Command(const uint8_t* const Command);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+		void DiscardNextReport(void);
+		void WriteNextReport(uint8_t* const ReportOUTData,
+		                     const uint16_t ReportLength);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a0ddd15cd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/MissileLauncher.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage David Fletcher's Missile Launcher
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Host</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Human Interface Device (HID)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Missile Launcher host. This is a host driver for the popular USB-controller table top toy missile launchers,
+ *  which can typically aim and fire small foam "missiles" from a spring-loaded turret. This project controls the
+ *  launcher via a joystick and button to aim and fire missiles at targets without a PC.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1b8ac1bd56
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,49 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Missile Launcher" id="lufa.projects.missile_launcher.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.missile_launcher"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.missile_launcher" caption="Missile Launcher">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Missile launcher project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Host"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="MissileLauncher.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="MissileLauncher.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="ConfigDescriptor.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="MissileLauncher.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="ConfigDescriptor.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.buttons"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.joystick"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..37f91e4e90
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Dave Fletcher's Missile Launcher Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..635f5d5a82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/MissileLauncher/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = MissileLauncher
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c ConfigDescriptor.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f561bf68f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d5951867a8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x04B4,
+	.ProductID              = 0xFD11,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(2,0,0),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = STRING_ID_Serial,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 1,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(500)
+		},
+
+	.RelayBoardInterface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_RelayBoard,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 0,
+
+			.Class                  = USB_CSCP_VendorSpecificClass,
+			.SubClass               = 0x00,
+			.Protocol               = 0x00,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_LanguageString =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = USB_STRING_LEN(1), .Type = DTYPE_String},
+
+	.UnicodeString          = {LANGUAGE_ID_ENG}
+};
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"SISPM");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"RelayBoard");
+
+/** Serial number string. This is a Unicode string containing the device's unique serial number, expressed as a
+ *  series of uppercase hexadecimal digits.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM RelayBoard_SerialString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"00001");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &RelayBoard_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &RelayBoard_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Serial:
+					Address = &RelayBoard_SerialString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&RelayBoard_SerialString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..33790dc69e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Relay Board Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            RelayBoardInterface;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_RelayBoard = 0, /**< Relay board interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Serial       = 3, /**< Serial number string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..dccfe11a49
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.c
@@ -0,0 +1,145 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the RelayBoard program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "RelayBoard.h"
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	  USB_USBTask();
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the project's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Initialize Relays */
+	DDRC  |=  ALL_RELAYS;
+	PORTC &= ~ALL_RELAYS;
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+    const uint8_t SerialNumber[5] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1 };
+	uint8_t ControlData[2]        = { 0, 0 };
+
+    switch (USB_ControlRequest.bRequest)
+	{
+		case 0x09:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_HOSTTODEVICE | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				Endpoint_Read_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
+				{
+					case 0x303:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY1; else PORTC |= RELAY1;
+						break;
+					case 0x306:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY2; else PORTC |= RELAY2;
+						break;
+					case 0x309:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY3; else PORTC |= RELAY3;
+						break;
+					case 0x30c:
+						if (ControlData[1]) PORTC &= ~RELAY4; else PORTC |= RELAY4;
+						break;
+				}
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case 0x01:
+			if (USB_ControlRequest.bmRequestType == (REQDIR_DEVICETOHOST | REQTYPE_CLASS | REQREC_INTERFACE))
+			{
+				LEDs_ToggleLEDs(LEDS_LED1);
+
+				Endpoint_ClearSETUP();
+
+				switch (USB_ControlRequest.wValue)
+				{
+					case 0x301:
+						Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(SerialNumber, sizeof(SerialNumber));
+						break;
+					case 0x303:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY1) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x306:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY2) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x309:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY3) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+					case 0x30c:
+						ControlData[1] = (PORTC & RELAY4) ? 2 : 3;
+						break;
+				}
+
+				if (ControlData[1])
+				  Endpoint_Write_Control_Stream_LE(ControlData, sizeof(ControlData));
+
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c2269224f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.h
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  OBinou (obconseil [at] gmail [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for RelayBoard.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _RELAYBOARD_H_
+#define _RELAYBOARD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define RELAY1      (1 << 7)
+		#define RELAY2      (1 << 6)
+		#define RELAY3      (1 << 5)
+		#define RELAY4      (1 << 4)
+		#define ALL_RELAYS  (RELAY1 | RELAY2 | RELAY3 | RELAY4)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4b190dfe32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/RelayBoard.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,106 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage OB's Quad-Relay outlet control using a Teensy2++
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB1286
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ * <table>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Device</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *   <td>None</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *   <td>USB Standards</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ *  <tr>
+ *   <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *   <td>Low Speed Mode, Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *  </tr>
+ * </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a Teensy2++ AVR-based miniboard to control four relays, using the
+ *  same protocol used by the commercially available Silver Shield PM power outlets
+ *  ( http://sourceforge.net/projects/sispmctl ) sold for some time. Because this
+ *  project mimics the original device, it can be controlled using the "sismpctl"
+ *  package included in many Linux distributions - including router-orientated
+ *  versions such as OpenWRT - to control the board's relays.
+ *
+ *  Relays 1 to 4 are respectively wired to pins C4, C5, C6 and C7 of the Teensy++ V2,
+ *  which are the PORTC bits 4 to 7 of the AT90USB1286. The relays MUST be wired through
+ *  a transistor, and a diode must be added in antiparallel on the relay's coil pins to
+ *  protect the transistor from back EMF generated from the relay when the coil is turned off.
+ *  The transistor base pin is wired to the Teensy data port through a 10K resistor. A
+ *  LED may be also be added as a relay status indicator on each channel.
+ *
+ *  The Relay coil will be driven by the transistor, but the power will come from
+ *  the 5V from the PC's USB port: Be careful in choosing the relay to avoid overloading
+ *  the PC, as the maximum current used MUST remains under ~450mA @ 5V.
+ *
+ *  The author's tested relays are 2 Finder 32.21.7.005.2000, coil il 125ohm, which can
+ *  handle 5A @ 250VAC. Be careful to use proper isolation if high voltages are manipulated.
+ *  The author used Hotglue to isolate all parts of the PCB in contact with high voltage.
+ *
+ *  See <a>http://www.pjrc.com/teensy/</a> for the Teensy2++ website.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Signal:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>AVR Port:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 1</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 2</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 3</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Relay 4</td>
+ *    <td>PORTC, Pin 7</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>Teensy2++ Yellow Led</td>
+ *    <td>PORTD, pin 6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e3a2ef4b20
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Relay Board Controller" id="lufa.projects.relay_board.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.relay_board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.relay_board" caption="Relay Board Controller">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Relay Board Controller project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Low Level APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="RelayBoard.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="RelayBoard.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="RelayBoard.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6c119a5559
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "OB's Dual-Relay Outlet Control Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bde15357ee
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/RelayBoard/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = RelayBoard
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1bf1f19e65
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f6ee88e21c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+/* On some devices, there is a factory set internal serial number which can be automatically sent to the host as
+ * the device's serial number when the Device Descriptor's .SerialNumStrIndex entry is set to USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL.
+ * This allows the host to track a device across insertions on different ports, allowing them to retain allocated
+ * resources like COM port numbers and drivers. On demos using this feature, give a warning on unsupported devices
+ * so that the user can supply their own serial number descriptor instead or remove the USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL value
+ * from the Device Descriptor (forcing the host to generate a serial number for each device from the VID, PID and
+ * port location).
+ */
+#if (USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL == NO_DESCRIPTOR)
+	#warning USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL is not available on this AVR - please manually construct a device serial descriptor.
+#endif
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Simon Foster");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"USB-HD44780 Adapter");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ed26aeed1f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,111 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a91e79310b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.c
@@ -0,0 +1,127 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+#include "HD44780.h"
+
+static void HD44780_WriteNibble(const uint8_t nib)
+{
+	/* Read PORTD and clear the ENABLE and PD0..3 bits
+	   then OR in the data */
+
+	PORTD = (PORTD & ~(ENABLE | LO4_MASK)) | (nib & LO4_MASK);
+
+	/* Enforce address setup time (tAS) 60ns
+	   60 @ 16MHz = <1
+	   Let's us a few NOPs for good measure */
+	asm volatile("nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             :: );
+
+	/* Take enable high and enforce Enable High time (tEH=450ns)
+	   450ns @ 16MHz = 7.2 => 7 NOPs */
+
+	PORTD |= ENABLE;
+
+	asm volatile("nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             :: );
+
+	/* Take enable low and enforce Enable Low time (tEL=500ns)
+	   500ns @ 16MHz = 8.0 => 7 NOPs */
+	PORTD &= ~ENABLE;
+
+	asm volatile("nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             "nop\n\t"
+	             :: );
+}
+
+static void HD44780_WriteByte(const uint8_t c)
+{
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(HI4(c));
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(LO4(c));
+}
+
+static void HD44780_PowerUp4Bit(void)
+{
+	/* Wait for more than 40 ms after VCC rises to 2.7 V */
+	_delay_ms(40);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03);        // FN_SET 8-bit
+
+	/* Wait for more than 4.1 ms */
+	_delay_ms(5);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03);        // FN_SET 8-bit
+
+	/* Wait for more than 100 µs */
+	_delay_us(100);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x03);        // FN_SET 8-bit
+
+	/* From now on we must allow 40us for each command */
+	_delay_us(50);
+	HD44780_WriteNibble(0x02);        // FN_SET 4-bit
+
+	/* The LCD is now in 4-bit mode so we can continue
+	   using the 4-bit API */
+	_delay_us(50);
+}
+
+void HD44780_Initialize(void)
+{
+	PORTD &= ~ALL_BITS;
+	DDRD  |=  ALL_BITS;
+	HD44780_PowerUp4Bit();
+}
+
+void HD44780_WriteCommand(const uint8_t c)
+{
+	PORTD &= ~RS;
+	HD44780_WriteByte(c);
+	_delay_us(50);
+}
+
+void HD44780_WriteData(const uint8_t c)
+{
+	PORTD |=  RS;
+	HD44780_WriteByte(c);
+	PORTD &= ~RS;
+	_delay_us(50);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b6dbe905e0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/Lib/HD44780.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HD44780.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HD44780_H_
+#define _HD44780_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define RS                  (1 << 4)    /* PD4 */
+		#define ENABLE              (1 << 7)    /* PD7 */
+
+		#define HI4_MASK            0xF0
+		#define LO4_MASK            0x0F        /* PD0-PD3 */
+
+		#define ALL_BITS            (RS | ENABLE | LO4_MASK)
+
+		#define HI4(c)              ((c & HI4_MASK) >> 4)
+		#define LO4(c)              ((c & LO4_MASK) >> 0)
+
+		#define CMD_DISPLAY_ON      0x0C
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void HD44780_Initialize(void);
+		void HD44780_WriteData(const uint8_t c);
+		void HD44780_WriteCommand(const uint8_t c);
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..21588c947a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.c
@@ -0,0 +1,170 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the SerialToLCD program. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "SerialToLCD.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the LCD */
+static RingBuffer_t FromHost_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref FromHost_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      FromHost_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint =
+					{
+						.Address          = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size             = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks            = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&FromHost_Buffer, FromHost_Buffer_Data, sizeof(FromHost_Buffer_Data));
+
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */
+		if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&FromHost_Buffer)))
+		{
+			int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+			/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the USART transmit buffer */
+			if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+			  RingBuffer_Insert(&FromHost_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+		}
+
+		while (RingBuffer_GetCount(&FromHost_Buffer) > 0)
+		{
+			static uint8_t EscapePending = 0;
+			int16_t HD44780Byte = RingBuffer_Remove(&FromHost_Buffer);
+
+			if (HD44780Byte == COMMAND_ESCAPE)
+			{
+				if (EscapePending)
+				{
+					HD44780_WriteData(HD44780Byte);
+					EscapePending = 0;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Next received character is the command byte */
+					EscapePending = 1;
+				}
+			}
+			else
+			{
+				if (EscapePending)
+				{
+					HD44780_WriteCommand(HD44780Byte);
+					EscapePending = 0;
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					HD44780_WriteData(HD44780Byte);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the application's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+
+	/* Power up the HD44780 Interface */
+	HD44780_Initialize();
+	HD44780_WriteCommand(CMD_DISPLAY_ON);
+
+	/* Start the flush timer so that overflows occur rapidly to push received bytes to the USB interface */
+	TCCR0B = (1 << CS02);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..73455b1d40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+  Copyright 2012  Simon Foster (simon.foster [at] inbox [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SerialToLCD.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SERIALTOLCD_H_
+#define _SERIALTOLCD_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/HD44780.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define COMMAND_ESCAPE     0x1B
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a2f3396489
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/SerialToLCD.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Simon Foster's USB Serial to HD44780 LCD Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB162
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Firmware for a USB Virtual Serial to HD44780 LCD controller project, by Simon Foster. This
+ *  project connects a standard HD7780 compatible LCD controller to a PC via a virtual serial
+ *  link, so that data supplied by the host can be written to the display. This project is
+ *  designed to use the Minimum USB AVR board, however it can be modified to suit other hardware
+ *  if desired.
+ *
+ *  LCD Datasheet:    http://www.sparkfun.com/datasheets/LCD/HD44780.pdf \n
+ *  More Information: http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/HD44780_Character_LCD \n
+ *
+ *  Below are the connections between the AVR Minimus board and LCD.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>AVR Pin:</b></td>
+ *    <td><b>HD44780 LCD Pin:</b></td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>VCC</td>
+ *    <td>VCC</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD0</td>
+ *    <td>DB4</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD1</td>
+ *    <td>DB5</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD2</td>
+ *    <td>DB6</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD3</td>
+ *    <td>DB7</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD4</td>
+ *    <td>/RS</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>GND</td>
+ *    <td>/RW</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>PD7</td>
+ *    <td>/E</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..07c2419035
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,50 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="USB Serial to LCD Display" id="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.serial_to_lcd" caption="USB Serial to LCD Display">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		USB Serial to LCD Controller project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="SerialToLCD.txt"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="SerialToLCD.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="SerialToLCD.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/HD44780.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/HD44780.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..38ac031ff5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Simon Foster's USB Serial to HD44780 LCD Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b7e6d4211c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/SerialToLCD/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb162
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = MINIMUS
+F_CPU        = 16000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = SerialToLCD
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/HD44780.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5ac7011f0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define DUMMY_RTC
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4d5f58a4ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c5ff3e1468
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,257 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** HID class report descriptor. This is a special descriptor constructed with values from the
+ *  USBIF HID class specification to describe the reports and capabilities of the HID device. This
+ *  descriptor is parsed by the host and its contents used to determine what data (and in what encoding)
+ *  the device will send, and what it may be sent back from the host. Refer to the HID specification for
+ *  more details on HID report descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_HIDReport_Datatype_t PROGMEM GenericReport[] =
+{
+	/* Use the HID class driver's standard Vendor HID report.
+	 *  Vendor Usage Page: 1
+	 *  Vendor Collection Usage: 1
+	 *  Vendor Report IN Usage: 2
+	 *  Vendor Report OUT Usage: 3
+	 *  Vendor Report Size: GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE
+	 */
+	HID_DESCRIPTOR_VENDOR(0x00, 0x01, 0x02, 0x03, GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE)
+};
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_NoDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2063,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.HID_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = HID_CSCP_HIDClass,
+			.SubClass               = HID_CSCP_NonBootSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = HID_CSCP_NonBootProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.HID_GenericHID =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t), .Type = HID_DTYPE_HID},
+
+			.HIDSpec                = VERSION_BCD(1,1,1),
+			.CountryCode            = 0x00,
+			.TotalReportDescriptors = 1,
+			.HIDReportType          = HID_DTYPE_Report,
+			.HIDReportLength        = sizeof(GenericReport)
+		},
+
+	.HID_ReportINEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Temperature Datalogger");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_HID:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor.HID_GenericHID;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t);
+			break;
+		case HID_DTYPE_Report:
+			Address = &GenericReport;
+			Size    = sizeof(GenericReport);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..42d4ca2f37
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Generic HID reporting IN endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_IN_EPADDR              (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reporting endpoint. */
+		#define GENERIC_EPSIZE                 16
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Generic HID reports (including report ID byte). */
+		#define GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE            sizeof(Device_Report_t)
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t Config;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+
+			// Settings Management Generic HID Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t            HID_Interface;
+			USB_HID_Descriptor_HID_t              HID_GenericHID;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t             HID_ReportINEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 0, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_HID         = 1, /**< HID interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d8dc54dad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d93130d3b1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..80d8843d13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+FatFs Module Source Files R0.09a                       (C)ChaN, 2012
+
+
+FILES
+
+  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
+  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
+  ff.c       FatFs module.
+  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
+  diskio.c   An example of glue function to attach existing disk I/O module to FatFs.
+  integer.h  Integer type definitions for FatFs.
+  option     Optional external functions.
+
+  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
+  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
+  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
+  to control your storage device.
+
+
+
+AGREEMENTS
+
+ FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+
+  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+
+ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+
+
+
+REVISION HISTORY
+
+  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
+
+  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
+
+  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
+                       Removed unbuffered mode.
+                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+
+  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
+
+  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
+                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+
+  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+
+  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
+                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
+                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
+                       Added minimization level 3.
+                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
+                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
+                       Added FSInfo support.
+                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
+
+  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
+                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
+
+  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
+                       Added f_utime().
+                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+
+  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
+
+  Apr 01, 2009, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+                       Added long file name support.
+                       Added multiple code page support.
+                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+                       Changed result code of critical errors.
+                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+
+  Apr 14, 2009, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+                       Added multiple sector size support.
+
+  Jun 21, 2009, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
+                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+                       Added relative path feature.
+                       Added f_chdir().
+                       Added f_chdrive().
+                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
+
+  Nov 03, 2009 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+
+  May 15, 2010, R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN)
+                       Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+                       Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+                       Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+                       Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+                       String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+
+  Aug 16,'10 R0.08a    Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+                       Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+                       Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+                       Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+                       Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+
+  Jan 15,'11 R0.08b    Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+                       f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+                       Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+                       Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path names.
+
+  Sep 06,'11 R0.09     f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+                       Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+
+  Aug 27,'12 R0.09a    Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16.
+                       Changed API rejects null object pointer to avoid crash.
+                       Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8cc8cd4049
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
@@ -0,0 +1,98 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
+/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "diskio.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Initialize a Drive                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (
+	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_status (
+	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
+
+DRESULT disk_read (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
+	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
+
+#if _READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
+	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+#endif /* _READONLY */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Miscellaneous Functions                                               */
+
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	BYTE ctrl,		/* Control code */
+	void *buff		/* Buffer to send/receive control data */
+)
+{
+	if (ctrl == CTRL_SYNC)
+	  return RES_OK;
+	else
+	  return RES_PARERR;
+}
+
+
+DWORD get_fattime (void)
+{
+	TimeDate_t CurrTimeDate;
+
+	RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrTimeDate);
+
+
+	return ((DWORD)(20 + CurrTimeDate.Year) << 25) |
+	             ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Month << 21) |
+	               ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Day << 16) |
+	              ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Hour << 11) |
+	             ((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Minute << 5) |
+	      (((DWORD)CurrTimeDate.Second >> 1) << 0);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d3c3149a59
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/  Low level disk interface module include file
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _DISKIO_DEFINED
+#define _DISKIO_DEFINED
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"
+
+#include "../DataflashManager.h"
+
+
+/* Status of Disk Functions */
+typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
+
+/* Results of Disk Functions */
+typedef enum {
+	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
+	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
+	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
+	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
+	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
+} DRESULT;
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------*/
+/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
+DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#if	_READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+#endif
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
+
+
+/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
+
+#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
+#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
+#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
+
+/* Generic command */
+#define CTRL_SYNC			0	/* Mandatory for write functions */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..059b5885ae
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
@@ -0,0 +1,4139 @@
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.09a                 (C)ChaN, 2012
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
+/
+/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
+/
+/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
+/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
+/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) partition.
+/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
+/
+/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
+/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algorithm to write files fast.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+/
+/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
+/                   Added f_mkfs().
+/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a physical drive.
+/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
+/                   Added minimization level 3.
+/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
+/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
+/                   Added FSInfo support.
+/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
+/
+/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
+/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
+/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same or following cluster.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a configuration option. (_FS_TINY)
+/                   Added long file name feature.
+/                   Added multiple code page feature.
+/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
+/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+/                   Added multiple sector size feature.
+/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
+/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+/                   Added relative path feature.
+/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
+/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
+/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+/
+/ May 15,'10 R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN = 3)
+/                   Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+/                   Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+/                   Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+/                   Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+/                   String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+/ Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+/                   Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+/                   Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+/                   Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+/ Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+/                   f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+/                   Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+/                   Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path name.
+/
+/ Sep 06,'11 R0.09  f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+/                   Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+/ Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16 volume.
+/                   Changed f_open() and f_opendir reject null object pointer to avoid crash.
+/                   Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
+/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
+#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Definitions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FATFS != 4004	/* Revision ID */
+#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
+#endif
+
+
+/* Definitions on sector size */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512 && _MAX_SS != 1024 && _MAX_SS != 2048 && _MAX_SS != 4096
+#error Wrong sector size.
+#endif
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->ssize)	/* Variable sector size */
+#else
+#define	SS(fs)	512U			/* Fixed sector size */
+#endif
+
+
+/* Reentrancy related */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+#if _USE_LFN == 1
+#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
+#endif
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
+#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
+#else
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
+#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
+#endif
+
+#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
+
+
+/* File access control feature */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+#if _FS_READONLY
+#error _FS_LOCK must be 0 on read-only cfg.
+#endif
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS *fs;				/* File ID 1, volume (NULL:blank entry) */
+	DWORD clu;				/* File ID 2, directory */
+	WORD idx;				/* File ID 3, directory index */
+	WORD ctr;				/* File open counter, 0:none, 0x01..0xFF:read open count, 0x100:write mode */
+} FILESEM;
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
+
+#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
+#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
+#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
+#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
+#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
+#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
+#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
+#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
+#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0x80
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x41
+#define _DS1E	0x5A
+#define _DS2S	0x61
+#define _DS2E	0x7A
+#define _DS3S	0x81
+#define _DS3E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0xA1
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
+				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
+				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
+				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+#error Cannot use LFN feature without valid code page.
+#endif
+#define _DF1S	0
+
+#else
+#error Unknown code page
+
+#endif
+
+
+/* Character code support macros */
+#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
+#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
+#define IsDigit(c)	(((c)>='0')&&((c)<='9'))
+
+#if _DF1S		/* Code page is DBCS */
+
+#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
+#else			/* One 1st byte area */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
+#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
+#endif
+
+#else			/* Code page is SBCS */
+
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
+
+#endif /* _DF1S */
+
+
+/* Name status flags */
+#define NS			11		/* Index of name status byte in fn[] */
+#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
+#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
+#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
+#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
+#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
+
+
+/* FAT sub-type boundaries */
+/* Note that the FAT spec by Microsoft says 4085 but Windows works with 4087! */
+#define MIN_FAT16	4086	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT16 */
+#define	MIN_FAT32	65526	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT32 */
+
+
+/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures as byte array instead of
+/ structure member because the structure is not binary compatible between
+/ different platforms */
+
+#define BS_jmpBoot			0	/* Jump instruction (3) */
+#define BS_OEMName			3	/* OEM name (8) */
+#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11	/* Sector size [byte] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerClus		13	/* Cluster size [sector] (1) */
+#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14	/* Size of reserved area [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumFATs			16	/* Number of FAT copies (1) */
+#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17	/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 (2) */
+#define BPB_TotSec16		19	/* Volume size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_Media			21	/* Media descriptor (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz16			22	/* FAT size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24	/* Track size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumHeads		26	/* Number of heads (2) */
+#define BPB_HiddSec			28	/* Number of special hidden sectors (4) */
+#define BPB_TotSec32		32	/* Volume size [sector] (4) */
+#define BS_DrvNum			36	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig			38	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID			39	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab			43	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType		54	/* File system type (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz32			36	/* FAT size [sector] (4) */
+#define BPB_ExtFlags		40	/* Extended flags (2) */
+#define BPB_FSVer			42	/* File system version (2) */
+#define BPB_RootClus		44	/* Root dir first cluster (4) */
+#define BPB_FSInfo			48	/* Offset of FSInfo sector (2) */
+#define BPB_BkBootSec		50	/* Offset of backup boot sector (2) */
+#define BS_DrvNum32			64	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig32		66	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID32			67	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab32			71	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType32		82	/* File system type (1) */
+#define	FSI_LeadSig			0	/* FSI: Leading signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_StrucSig		484	/* FSI: Structure signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_Free_Count		488	/* FSI: Number of free clusters (4) */
+#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492	/* FSI: Last allocated cluster (4) */
+#define MBR_Table			446	/* MBR: Partition table offset (2) */
+#define	SZ_PTE				16	/* MBR: Size of a partition table entry */
+#define BS_55AA				510	/* Boot sector signature (2) */
+
+#define	DIR_Name			0	/* Short file name (11) */
+#define	DIR_Attr			11	/* Attribute (1) */
+#define	DIR_NTres			12	/* NT flag (1) */
+#define DIR_CrtTimeTenth	13	/* Created time sub-second (1) */
+#define	DIR_CrtTime			14	/* Created time (2) */
+#define	DIR_CrtDate			16	/* Created date (2) */
+#define DIR_LstAccDate		18	/* Last accessed date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20	/* Higher 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtTime			22	/* Modified time (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtDate			24	/* Modified date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Lower 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_FileSize		28	/* File size (4) */
+#define	LDIR_Ord			0	/* LFN entry order and LLE flag (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Attr			11	/* LFN attribute (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Type			12	/* LFN type (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Chksum			13	/* Sum of corresponding SFN entry */
+#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Filled by zero (0) */
+#define	SZ_DIR				32		/* Size of a directory entry */
+#define	LLE					0x40	/* Last long entry flag in LDIR_Ord */
+#define	DDE					0xE5	/* Deleted directory entry mark in DIR_Name[0] */
+#define	NDDE				0x05	/* Replacement of the character collides with DDE */
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Module private work area                                   */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Note that uninitialized variables with static duration are
+/  zeroed/nulled at start-up. If not, the compiler or start-up
+/  routine is out of ANSI-C standard.
+*/
+
+#if _VOLUMES
+static
+FATFS *FatFs[_VOLUMES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
+#else
+#error Number of volumes must not be 0.
+#endif
+
+static
+WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+static
+BYTE CurrVol;			/* Current drive */
+#endif
+
+#if _FS_LOCK
+static
+FILESEM	Files[_FS_LOCK];	/* File lock semaphores */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN == 0			/* No LFN feature */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		(dobj).fn = sfn
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 1			/* LFN feature with static working buffer */
+static WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN+1];
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = LfnBuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 2 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the stack */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN+1]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = lbuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 3 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the heap */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR *lfn
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ lfn = ff_memalloc((_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2); \
+							  if (!lfn) LEAVE_FF((dobj).fs, FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE); \
+							  (dobj).lfn = lfn;	(dobj).fn = sfn; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()			ff_memfree(lfn)
+
+#else
+#error Wrong LFN configuration.
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Functions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* String functions                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Copy memory to memory */
+static
+void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+	const BYTE *s = (const BYTE*)src;
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1
+	while (cnt >= sizeof (int)) {
+		*(int*)d = *(int*)s;
+		d += sizeof (int); s += sizeof (int);
+		cnt -= sizeof (int);
+	}
+#endif
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = *s++;
+}
+
+/* Fill memory */
+static
+void mem_set (void* dst, int val, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = (BYTE)val;
+}
+
+/* Compare memory to memory */
+static
+int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	const BYTE *d = (const BYTE *)dst, *s = (const BYTE *)src;
+	int r = 0;
+
+	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
+	return r;
+}
+
+/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
+static
+int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
+	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
+	return *str;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+
+static
+int lock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
+}
+
+
+static
+void unlock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
+)
+{
+	if (fs &&
+		res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
+		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
+		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* File lock control functions                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_LOCK
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_lock (	/* Check if the file can be accessed */
+	DIR* dj,		/* Directory object pointing the file to be checked */
+	int acc			/* Desired access (0:Read, 1:Write, 2:Delete/Rename) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, be;
+
+	/* Search file semaphore table */
+	for (i = be = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs) {	/* Existing entry */
+			if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&	 	/* Check if the file matched with an open file */
+				Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+				Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+		} else {			/* Blank entry */
+			be++;
+		}
+	}
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK)	/* The file is not opened */
+		return (be || acc == 2) ? FR_OK : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;	/* Is there a blank entry for new file? */
+
+	/* The file has been opened. Reject any open against writing file and all write mode open */
+	return (acc || Files[i].ctr == 0x100) ? FR_LOCKED : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+static
+int enq_lock (void)	/* Check if an entry is available for a new file */
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+	return (i == _FS_LOCK) ? 0 : 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+UINT inc_lock (	/* Increment file open counter and returns its index (0:int error) */
+	DIR* dj,	/* Directory object pointing the file to register or increment */
+	int acc		/* Desired access mode (0:Read, !0:Write) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {	/* Find the file */
+		if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&
+			Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+			Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+	}
+
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK) {				/* Not opened. Register it as new. */
+		for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+		if (i == _FS_LOCK) return 0;	/* No space to register (int err) */
+		Files[i].fs = dj->fs;
+		Files[i].clu = dj->sclust;
+		Files[i].idx = dj->index;
+		Files[i].ctr = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (acc && Files[i].ctr) return 0;	/* Access violation (int err) */
+
+	Files[i].ctr = acc ? 0x100 : Files[i].ctr + 1;	/* Set semaphore value */
+
+	return i + 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+FRESULT dec_lock (	/* Decrement file open counter */
+	UINT i			/* Semaphore index */
+)
+{
+	WORD n;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (--i < _FS_LOCK) {
+		n = Files[i].ctr;
+		if (n == 0x100) n = 0;
+		if (n) n--;
+		Files[i].ctr = n;
+		if (!n) Files[i].fs = 0;
+		res = FR_OK;
+	} else {
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+static
+void clear_lock (	/* Clear lock entries of the volume */
+	FATFS *fs
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs == fs) Files[i].fs = 0;
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change window offset                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT move_window (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make appearance in the fs->win[] */
+)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
+{
+	DWORD wsect;
+
+
+	wsect = fs->winsect;
+	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->wflag = 0;
+			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->fsize)) {	/* In FAT area */
+				BYTE nf;
+				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Reflect the change to all FAT copies */
+					wsect += fs->fsize;
+					disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		if (sector) {
+			if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->winsect = sector;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
+	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = move_window(fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
+		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
+			fs->winsect = 0;
+			/* Create FSInfo structure */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
+			/* Write it into the FSInfo sector */
+			disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
+			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		}
+		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
+		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) != RES_OK)
+			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
+)
+{
+	clst -= 2;
+	if (clst >= (fs->n_fatent - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
+	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Internal error, Else:Cluster status */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
+)
+{
+	UINT wc, bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent)	/* Check range */
+		return 1;
+
+	switch (fs->fs_type) {
+	case FS_FAT12 :
+		bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc = fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; bc++;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc |= fs->win[bc % SS(fs)] << 8;
+		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
+
+	case FS_FAT16 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_WORD(p);
+
+	case FS_FAT32 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occurred at the disk I/O layer */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+
+FRESULT put_fat (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->n_fatent - 1 */
+	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
+)
+{
+	UINT bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		switch (fs->fs_type) {
+		case FS_FAT12 :
+			bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
+			bc++;
+			fs->wflag = 1;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT16 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+			ST_WORD(p, (WORD)val);
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT32 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+			val |= LD_DWORD(p) & 0xF0000000;
+			ST_DWORD(p, val);
+			break;
+
+		default :
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		}
+		fs->wflag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT remove_chain (
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD nxt;
+#if _USE_ERASE
+	DWORD scl = clst, ecl = clst, rt[2];
+#endif
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		res = FR_OK;
+		while (clst < fs->n_fatent) {			/* Not a last link? */
+			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
+			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
+			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
+			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
+			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
+				fs->free_clust++;
+				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			}
+#if _USE_ERASE
+			if (ecl + 1 == nxt) {	/* Is next cluster contiguous? */
+				ecl = nxt;
+			} else {				/* End of contiguous clusters */ 
+				rt[0] = clust2sect(fs, scl);					/* Start sector */
+				rt[1] = clust2sect(fs, ecl) + fs->csize - 1;	/* End sector */
+				disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, rt);		/* Erase the block */
+				scl = ecl = nxt;
+			}
+#endif
+			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cs, ncl, scl;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create a new chain */
+		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
+		if (!scl || scl >= fs->n_fatent) scl = 1;
+	}
+	else {					/* Stretch the current chain */
+		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
+		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
+		if (cs < fs->n_fatent) return cs;	/* It is already followed by next cluster */
+		scl = clst;
+	}
+
+	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
+		if (ncl >= fs->n_fatent) {		/* Wrap around */
+			ncl = 2;
+			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free cluster */
+		}
+		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
+		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
+		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occurred */
+			return cs;
+		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free cluster */
+	}
+
+	res = put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Mark the new cluster "last link" */
+	if (res == FR_OK && clst != 0) {
+		res = put_fat(fs, clst, ncl);	/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		fs->last_clust = ncl;			/* Update FSINFO */
+		if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
+			fs->free_clust--;
+			fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+		}
+	} else {
+		ncl = (res == FR_DISK_ERR) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 1;
+	}
+
+	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number or error code */
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Convert offset into cluster with link map table        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+static
+DWORD clmt_clust (	/* <2:Error, >=2:Cluster number */
+	FIL* fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File offset to be converted to cluster# */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl, ncl, *tbl;
+
+
+	tbl = fp->cltbl + 1;	/* Top of CLMT */
+	cl = ofs / SS(fp->fs) / fp->fs->csize;	/* Cluster order from top of the file */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl = *tbl++;			/* Number of cluters in the fragment */
+		if (!ncl) return 0;		/* End of table? (error) */
+		if (cl < ncl) break;	/* In this fragment? */
+		cl -= ncl; tbl++;		/* Next fragment */
+	}
+	return cl + *tbl;	/* Return the cluster number */
+}
+#endif	/* _USE_FASTSEEK */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Set directory index                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_sdi (
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	WORD idx		/* Index of directory table */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD ic;
+
+
+	dj->index = idx;
+	clst = dj->sclust;
+	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Check start cluster range */
+		return FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
+		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
+
+	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table (root-dir in FAT12/16) */
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
+			return FR_INT_ERR;
+		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+	else {				/* Dynamic table (sub-dirs or root-dir in FAT32) */
+		ic = SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
+		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
+			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
+			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
+			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
+				return FR_INT_ERR;
+			idx -= ic;
+		}
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
+
+	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Move directory table index next                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not stretch */
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	int stretch		/* 0: Do not stretch table, 1: Stretch table if needed */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD i;
+
+
+	stretch = stretch;		/* To suppress warning on read-only cfg. */
+	i = dj->index + 1;
+	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR))) {	/* Sector changed? */
+		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
+
+		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
+			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
+				return FR_NO_FILE;
+		}
+		else {					/* Dynamic table */
+			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
+				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
+				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) {					/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					BYTE c;
+					if (!stretch) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not stretch, report EOT */
+					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Stretch cluster chain */
+					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
+					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+					/* Clean-up stretched table */
+					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
+					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
+					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
+					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
+						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+						dj->fs->winsect++;
+					}
+					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
+#else
+					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
+#endif
+				}
+				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
+				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	dj->index = i;
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Load/Store start cluster number                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+DWORD ld_clust (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* Pointer to the fs object */
+	BYTE *dir	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl;
+
+	cl = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+	if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)
+		cl |= (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16;
+
+	return cl;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void st_clust (
+	BYTE *dir,	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	DWORD cl	/* Value to be set */
+)
+{
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, cl);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, cl >> 16);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
+
+
+static
+int cmp_lfn (			/* 1:Matched, 0:Not matched */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & ~LLE) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
+				return 0;				/* Not matched */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;	/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
+
+	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;						/* The part of LFN matched */
+}
+
+
+
+static
+int pick_lfn (			/* 1:Succeeded, 0:Buffer overflow */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
+
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);		/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;			/* Store it */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;		/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
+
+	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
+		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;		/* Buffer overflow? */
+		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
+	}
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void fit_lfn (
+	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
+	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc;
+
+
+	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
+	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
+	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+
+	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = wc = 0;
+	do {
+		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
+		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
+		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
+	} while (++s < 13);
+	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= LLE;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
+	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
+}
+
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create numbered name                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+void gen_numname (
+	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to generated SFN */
+	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
+	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
+	WORD seq			/* Sequence number */
+)
+{
+	BYTE ns[8], c;
+	UINT i, j;
+
+
+	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
+
+	if (seq > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequential number */
+		do seq = (seq >> 1) + (seq << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
+	}
+
+	/* itoa (hexdecimal) */
+	i = 7;
+	do {
+		c = (seq % 16) + '0';
+		if (c > '9') c += 7;
+		ns[i--] = c;
+		seq /= 16;
+	} while (seq);
+	ns[i] = '~';
+
+	/* Append the number */
+	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
+		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
+			if (j == i - 1) break;
+			j++;
+		}
+	}
+	do {
+		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
+	} while (j < 8);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+BYTE sum_sfn (
+	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
+)
+{
+	BYTE sum = 0;
+	UINT n = 11;
+
+	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
+	return sum;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_find (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord, sum;
+#endif
+
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	ord = sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (dj->lfn) {
+					if (c & LLE) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+						c &= ~LLE; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
+						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+					}
+					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
+					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+				}
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
+				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
+				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+FRESULT dir_read (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+	res = FR_NO_FILE;
+	while (dj->sect) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (c & LLE) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+					c &= ~LLE; ord = c;
+					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+				}
+				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
+				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
+					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (c != DDE && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);				/* Next entry */
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+	}
+
+	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD n, ne, is;
+	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
+	WCHAR *lfn;
+
+
+	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
+	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
+
+	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT))		/* Cannot create dot entry */
+		return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
+		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = 0;			/* Find only SFN */
+		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
+			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		}
+		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
+		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
+	}
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
+		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
+		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
+	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
+		ne = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+	n = is = 0;
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
+		if (c == DDE || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contiguous entry */
+			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that required count is found */
+		} else {
+			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
+		}
+		res = dir_next(dj, 1);		/* Next entry with table stretch */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, is);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
+			ne--;
+			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
+				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
+				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);	/* Next entry */
+			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
+		}
+	}
+
+#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			c = *dj->dir;
+			if (c == DDE || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 1);			/* Next entry with table stretch */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			mem_set(dir, 0, SZ_DIR);	/* Clean the entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
+#if _USE_LFN
+			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
+#endif
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
+static
+FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD i;
+
+	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+
+#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, dj->index);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT create_name (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	const TCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
+)
+{
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+	static const BYTE excvt[] = _EXCVT;	/* Upper conversion table for extended chars */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, cf;
+	WCHAR w, *lfn;
+	UINT i, ni, si, di;
+	const TCHAR *p;
+
+	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	lfn = dj->lfn;
+	si = di = 0;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
+		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+		w &= 0xFF;
+		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			b = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(b))
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid sequence */
+			w = (w << 8) + b;			/* Create a DBC */
+		}
+		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert ANSI/OEM to Unicode */
+		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
+#endif
+		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di-1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		(di == 2 && lfn[di-1] == '.' && lfn[di-2] == '.')) {
+		lfn[di] = 0;
+		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
+			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
+		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
+		w = lfn[di-1];
+		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
+		di--;
+	}
+	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject nul string */
+
+	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
+
+	/* Create SFN in directory form */
+	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
+	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
+	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
+	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
+
+	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
+		if (!w) break;					/* Break on end of the LFN */
+		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
+			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
+			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
+			}
+			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
+			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
+			if (w) w = excvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
+#else
+			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
+#endif
+			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
+		}
+
+		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			if (i >= ni - 1) {
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
+			}
+			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
+		} else {						/* Single byte char */
+			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;=[]", w)) {	/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
+				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;/* Lossy conversion */
+			} else {
+				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
+					b |= 2;
+				} else {
+					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
+						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
+	}
+
+	if (dj->fn[0] == DDE) dj->fn[0] = NDDE;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
+		cf |= NS_LFN;
+	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
+		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+	}
+
+	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+
+
+#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
+	UINT ni, si, i;
+	const char *p;
+
+	/* Create file name in directory form */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	sfn = dj->fn;
+	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
+	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		for (;;) {
+			c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		*path = &p[si];									/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	for (;;) {
+		c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
+			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			i = 8; ni = 11;
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char? */
+			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			c = excvt[c - 0x80];		/* Upper conversion (SBCS) */
+#else
+#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#endif
+#endif
+		}
+		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			d = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+			sfn[i++] = d;
+		} else {						/* Single byte code */
+			if (chk_chr("\"*+,:;<=>\?[]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
+				b |= 2;
+			} else {
+				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
+					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
+				}
+			}
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+
+	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject nul string */
+	if (sfn[0] == DDE) sfn[0] = NDDE;	/* When first char collides with DDE, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Name extension has only small capital) */
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Name body has only small capital) */
+
+	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE nt, *dir;
+	TCHAR *p, c;
+
+
+	p = fno->fname;
+	if (dj->sect) {
+		dir = dj->dir;
+		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
+			c = dir[i];
+			if (c == ' ') break;
+			if (c == NDDE) c = (TCHAR)DDE;
+			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+			if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 7 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+				c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+			c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+			if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+			*p++ = c;
+		}
+		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
+			*p++ = '.';
+			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
+				c = dir[i];
+				if (c == ' ') break;
+				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+				if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 10 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+					c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+				c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+				if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+				*p++ = c;
+			}
+		}
+		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
+		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
+		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
+		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
+	}
+	*p = 0;		/* Terminate SFN str by a \0 */
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	if (fno->lfname && fno->lfsize) {
+		TCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
+		WCHAR w, *lfn;
+
+		i = 0;
+		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
+			lfn = dj->lfn;
+			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
+				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
+				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+					tp[i++] = (TCHAR)(w >> 8);
+#endif
+				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overflow, no LFN */
+				tp[i++] = (TCHAR)w;
+			}
+		}
+		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminate the LFN str by a \0 */
+	}
+#endif
+}
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Follow a file path                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE *dir, ns;
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
+		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
+	} else {							/* No heading separator */
+		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
+	}
+#else
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
+		path++;
+	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
+#endif
+
+	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Nul path means the start directory itself */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+		dj->dir = 0;
+	} else {							/* Follow path */
+		for (;;) {
+			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
+			ns = *(dj->fn+NS);
+			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Failed to find the object */
+				if (res != FR_NO_FILE) break;	/* Abort if any hard error occurred */
+				/* Object not found */
+				if (_FS_RPATH && (ns & NS_DOT)) {	/* If dot entry is not exit */
+					dj->sclust = 0; dj->dir = 0;	/* It is the root dir */
+					res = FR_OK;
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) continue;
+				} else {							/* Could not find the object */
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+				break;
+			}
+			if (ns & NS_LAST) break;			/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
+			dir = dj->dir;						/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
+			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot follow because it is a file */
+				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
+			}
+			dj->sclust = ld_clust(dj->fs, dir);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Load a sector and check if it is an FAT Volume Boot Record            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:FAT-VBR, 1:Any BR but not FAT, 2:Not a BR, 3:Disk error */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
+)
+{
+	if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
+		return 3;
+	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
+		return 2;
+
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
+		return 0;
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file system object is valid or not                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occurred */
+	const TCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
+	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
+	BYTE wmode			/* !=0: Check write protection for write access */
+)
+{
+	BYTE fmt, b, pi, *tbl;
+	UINT vol;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD bsect, fasize, tsect, sysect, nclst, szbfat;
+	WORD nrsv;
+	const TCHAR *p = *path;
+	FATFS *fs;
+
+
+	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
+	vol = p[0] - '0';					/* Is there a drive number? */
+	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {		/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
+		p += 2; *path = p;				/* Return pointer to the path name */
+	} else {							/* No drive number is given */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+		vol = CurrVol;					/* Use current drive */
+#else
+		vol = 0;						/* Use drive 0 */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the file system object is valid or not */
+	*rfs = 0;
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES) 				/* Is the drive number valid? */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	fs = FatFs[vol];					/* Get corresponding file system object */
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Is the file system object available? */
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);						/* Lock file system */
+
+	*rfs = fs;							/* Return pointer to the corresponding file system object */
+	if (fs->fs_type) {					/* If the volume has been mounted */
+		stat = disk_status(fs->drv);
+		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {		/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
+			if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
+				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+			return FR_OK;				/* The file system object is valid */
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* The file system object is not valid. */
+	/* Following code attempts to mount the volume. (analyze BPB and initialize the fs object) */
+
+	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
+	fs->drv = LD2PD(vol);				/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
+	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drv);	/* Initialize the physical drive */
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the initialization succeeded */
+		return FR_NOT_READY;			/* Failed to initialize due to no medium or hard error */
+	if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
+		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size (variable sector size cfg only) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &fs->ssize) != RES_OK)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	/* Search FAT partition on the drive. Supports only generic partitions, FDISK and SFD. */
+	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Load sector 0 and check if it is an FAT-VBR (in SFD) */
+	if (LD2PT(vol) && !fmt) fmt = 1;	/* Force non-SFD if the volume is forced partition */
+	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT-VBR, the physical drive can be partitioned */
+		/* Check the partition listed in the partition table */
+		pi = LD2PT(vol);
+		if (pi) pi--;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + pi * SZ_PTE];/* Partition table */
+		if (tbl[4]) {						/* Is the partition existing? */
+			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);		/* Partition offset in LBA */
+			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);		/* Check the partition */
+		}
+	}
+	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* No FAT volume is found */
+
+	/* An FAT volume is found. Following code initializes the file system object */
+
+	if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))		/* (BPB_BytsPerSec must be equal to the physical sector size) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+	fasize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+	if (!fasize) fasize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
+	fs->fsize = fasize;
+
+	fs->n_fats = b = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];				/* Number of FAT copies */
+	if (b != 1 && b != 2) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Must be 1 or 2) */
+	fasize *= b;										/* Number of sectors for FAT area */
+
+	fs->csize = b = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];			/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (!b || (b & (b - 1))) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (Must be power of 2) */
+
+	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Number of root directory entries */
+	if (fs->n_rootdir % (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR)) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be sector aligned) */
+
+	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
+	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
+
+	nrsv = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt);				/* Number of reserved sectors */
+	if (!nrsv) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;					/* (BPB_RsvdSecCnt must not be 0) */
+
+	/* Determine the FAT sub type */
+	sysect = nrsv + fasize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* RSV+FAT+DIR */
+	if (tsect < sysect) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	nclst = (tsect - sysect) / fs->csize;				/* Number of clusters */
+	if (!nclst) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;				/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Boundaries and Limits */
+	fs->n_fatent = nclst + 2;							/* Number of FAT entries */
+	fs->database = bsect + sysect;						/* Data start sector */
+	fs->fatbase = bsect + nrsv; 						/* FAT start sector */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		if (fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
+		szbfat = fs->n_fatent * 4;						/* (Required FAT size) */
+	} else {
+		if (!fs->n_rootdir)	return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must not be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fasize;				/* Root directory start sector */
+		szbfat = (fmt == FS_FAT16) ?					/* (Required FAT size) */
+			fs->n_fatent * 2 : fs->n_fatent * 3 / 2 + (fs->n_fatent & 1);
+	}
+	if (fs->fsize < (szbfat + (SS(fs) - 1)) / SS(fs))	/* (BPB_FATSz must not be less than required) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Initialize cluster allocation information */
+	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	fs->last_clust = 0;
+
+	/* Get fsinfo if available */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
+		if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
+			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
+				fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
+				fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
+	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
+	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
+	fs->wflag = 0;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK				/* Clear file lock semaphores */
+	clear_lock(fs);
+#endif
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
+	void* obj		/* Pointer to the object FIL/DIR to check validity */
+)
+{
+	FIL *fil;
+
+
+	fil = (FIL*)obj;	/* Assuming offset of fs and id in the FIL/DIR is identical */
+	if (!fil->fs || !fil->fs->fs_type || fil->fs->id != fil->id)
+		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	ENTER_FF(fil->fs);		/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (disk_status(fil->fs->drv) & STA_NOINIT)
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Public Functions
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Mount/Unmount a Logical Drive                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mount (
+	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
+	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
+)
+{
+	FATFS *rfs;
+
+
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES)		/* Check if the drive number is valid */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	rfs = FatFs[vol];			/* Get current fs object */
+
+	if (rfs) {
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		clear_lock(rfs);
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
+		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		rfs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear old fs object */
+	}
+
+	if (fs) {
+		fs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear new fs object */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Create sync object for the new volume */
+		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+	}
+	FatFs[vol] = fs;			/* Register new fs object */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_open (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
+	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+	fp->fs = 0;			/* Clear file object */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	mode &= FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & ~FA_READ));
+#else
+	mode &= FA_READ;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		dir = dj.dir;
+#if !_FS_READONLY	/* R/W configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (!dir)	/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			else
+				res = chk_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+#endif
+		}
+		/* Create or Open a file */
+		if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
+			DWORD dw, cl;
+
+			if (res != FR_OK) {					/* No file, create new */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE)			/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+					res = enq_lock() ? dir_register(&dj) : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;
+#else
+					res = dir_register(&dj);
+#endif
+				mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;		/* File is created */
+				dir = dj.dir;					/* New entry */
+			}
+			else {								/* Any object is already existing */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
+					res = FR_DENIED;
+				} else {
+					if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)	/* Cannot create as new file */
+						res = FR_EXIST;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK && (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)) {	/* Truncate it if overwrite mode */
+				dw = get_fattime();					/* Created time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, dw);
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);		/* size = 0 */
+				cl = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);			/* Get start cluster */
+				st_clust(dir, 0);					/* cluster = 0 */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				if (cl) {							/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+					dw = dj.fs->winsect;
+					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
+						res = move_window(dj.fs, dw);
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		else {	/* Open an existing file */
+			if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow succeeded */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+				} else {
+					if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
+						res = FR_DENIED;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)			/* Set file change flag if created or overwritten */
+				mode |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+			fp->dir_ptr = dir;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			fp->lockid = inc_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+			if (!fp->lockid) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		}
+
+#else				/* R/O configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow succeeded */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		FREE_BUF();
+
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
+			fp->sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);	/* File start cluster */
+			fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
+			fp->fptr = 0;						/* File pointer */
+			fp->dsect = 0;
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+			fp->cltbl = 0;						/* Normal seek mode */
+#endif
+			fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Validate file object */
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read File                                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_read (
+	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
+	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
+	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
+	UINT rcnt, cc;
+	BYTE csect, *rbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*br = 0;	/* Clear read byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);							/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)					/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 					/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;		/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr;								/* Repeat until all data read */
+		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {		/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {						/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {			/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;			/* Follow from the origin */
+				} else {						/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst < 2) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);				/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {							/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2			/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
+#else
+				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
+#endif
+#endif
+				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;			/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if !_FS_TINY
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Load data sector if not in cache */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+					if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))		/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#else
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_write (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
+	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
+	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect;
+	UINT wcnt, cc;
+	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bw = 0;	/* Clear write byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)				/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))				/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	if ((DWORD)(fp->fsize + btw) < fp->fsize) btw = 0;	/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
+
+	for ( ;  btw;							/* Repeat until all data written */
+		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {	/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {					/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {		/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;		/* Follow from the origin */
+					if (clst == 0)			/* When no cluster is allocated, */
+						fp->sclust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
+				} else {					/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow or stretch cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst == 0) break;		/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;			/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write-back sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#else
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);			/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {						/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
+				}
+#else
+				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;		/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {	/* Avoid silly cache filling at growing edge */
+				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
+			}
+#else
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {		/* Fill sector cache with file data */
+				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
+					disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
+		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))	/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+#else
+		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
+#endif
+	}
+
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
+	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file change flag */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_sync (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD tim;
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
+#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			/* Update the directory entry */
+			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
+				st_clust(dir, fp->sclust);					/* Update start cluster */
+				tim = get_fattime();						/* Update updated time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_LstAccDate, 0);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
+				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(fp->fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Close File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_close (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+#if _FS_READONLY
+	res = validate(fp);
+	{
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+		LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+	}
+#else
+	res = f_sync(fp);		/* Flush cached data */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Decrement open counter */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;;
+		res = validate(fp);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);	
+			unlock_fs(fs, FR_OK);
+		}
+#else
+		res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);
+#endif
+	}
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+	return res;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Current Drive/Directory Handlings                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 1
+
+FRESULT f_chdrive (
+	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
+)
+{
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+
+	CurrVol = drv;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+FRESULT f_chdir (
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
+			if (!dj.dir) {
+				dj.fs->cdir = dj.sclust;	/* Start directory itself */
+			} else {
+				if (dj.dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the directory */
+					dj.fs->cdir = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);
+				else
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Reached but a file */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 2
+FRESULT f_getcwd (
+	TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+	UINT sz_path	/* Size of path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	UINT i, n;
+	DWORD ccl;
+	TCHAR *tp;
+	FILINFO fno;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	*path = 0;
+	res = chk_mounted((const TCHAR**)&path, &dj.fs, 0);	/* Get current volume */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		i = sz_path;		/* Bottom of buffer (dir stack base) */
+		dj.sclust = dj.fs->cdir;			/* Start to follow upper dir from current dir */
+		while ((ccl = dj.sclust) != 0) {	/* Repeat while current dir is a sub-dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 1);			/* Get parent dir */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_read(&dj);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			dj.sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);	/* Goto parent dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 0);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			do {							/* Find the entry links to the child dir */
+				res = dir_read(&dj);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				if (ccl == ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir)) break;	/* Found the entry */
+				res = dir_next(&dj, 0);	
+			} while (res == FR_OK);
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;/* It cannot be 'not found'. */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+#if _USE_LFN
+			fno.lfname = path;
+			fno.lfsize = i;
+#endif
+			get_fileinfo(&dj, &fno);		/* Get the dir name and push it to the buffer */
+			tp = fno.fname;
+			if (_USE_LFN && *path) tp = path;
+			for (n = 0; tp[n]; n++) ;
+			if (i < n + 3) {
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; break;
+			}
+			while (n) path[--i] = tp[--n];
+			path[--i] = '/';
+		}
+		tp = path;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*tp++ = '0' + CurrVol;			/* Put drive number */
+			*tp++ = ':';
+			if (i == sz_path) {				/* Root-dir */
+				*tp++ = '/';
+			} else {						/* Sub-dir */
+				do		/* Add stacked path str */
+					*tp++ = path[i++];
+				while (i < sz_path);
+			}
+		}
+		*tp = 0;
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 2 */
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 1 */
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_lseek (
+	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	if (fp->cltbl) {	/* Fast seek */
+		DWORD cl, pcl, ncl, tcl, dsc, tlen, ulen, *tbl;
+
+		if (ofs == CREATE_LINKMAP) {	/* Create CLMT */
+			tbl = fp->cltbl;
+			tlen = *tbl++; ulen = 2;	/* Given table size and required table size */
+			cl = fp->sclust;			/* Top of the chain */
+			if (cl) {
+				do {
+					/* Get a fragment */
+					tcl = cl; ncl = 0; ulen += 2;	/* Top, length and used items */
+					do {
+						pcl = cl; ncl++;
+						cl = get_fat(fp->fs, cl);
+						if (cl <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+						if (cl == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					} while (cl == pcl + 1);
+					if (ulen <= tlen) {		/* Store the length and top of the fragment */
+						*tbl++ = ncl; *tbl++ = tcl;
+					}
+				} while (cl < fp->fs->n_fatent);	/* Repeat until end of chain */
+			}
+			*fp->cltbl = ulen;	/* Number of items used */
+			if (ulen <= tlen)
+				*tbl = 0;		/* Terminate table */
+			else
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE;	/* Given table size is smaller than required */
+
+		} else {						/* Fast seek */
+			if (ofs > fp->fsize)		/* Clip offset at the file size */
+				ofs = fp->fsize;
+			fp->fptr = ofs;				/* Set file pointer */
+			if (ofs) {
+				fp->clust = clmt_clust(fp, ofs - 1);
+				dsc = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (!dsc) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				dsc += (ofs - 1) / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1);
+				if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && dsc != fp->dsect) {	/* Refill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+						if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+							ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+						fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+					}
+#endif
+					if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, dsc, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load current sector */
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+					fp->dsect = dsc;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	} else
+#endif
+
+	/* Normal Seek */
+	{
+		DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
+
+		if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
+#endif
+			) ofs = fp->fsize;
+
+		ifptr = fp->fptr;
+		fp->fptr = nsect = 0;
+		if (ofs) {
+			bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
+			if (ifptr > 0 &&
+				(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
+				fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
+				ofs -= fp->fptr;
+				clst = fp->clust;
+			} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
+				clst = fp->sclust;						/* start from the first cluster */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
+					if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->sclust = clst;
+				}
+#endif
+				fp->clust = clst;
+			}
+			if (clst != 0) {
+				while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force stretch if in write mode */
+						if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
+							ofs = bcs; break;
+						}
+					} else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->n_fatent) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					fp->clust = clst;
+					fp->fptr += bcs;
+					ofs -= bcs;
+				}
+				fp->fptr += ofs;
+				if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
+					nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
+					if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					nsect += ofs / SS(fp->fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {	/* Fill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = nsect;
+		}
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set file change flag if the file size is extended */
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+		}
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory Object                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_opendir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!dj) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
+	fs = dj->fs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(*dj);
+		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj->dir) {						/* It is not the root dir */
+				if (dj->dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
+					dj->sclust = ld_clust(fs, dj->dir);
+				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dj->id = fs->id;
+				res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+		if (res != FR_OK) dj->fs = 0;			/* Invalidate the dir object if function faild */
+	} else {
+		dj->fs = 0;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Directory Entry in Sequence                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_readdir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = validate(dj);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (!fno) {
+			res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind the directory object */
+		} else {
+			INIT_BUF(*dj);
+			res = dir_read(dj);				/* Read an directory item */
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {		/* Reached end of dir */
+				dj->sect = 0;
+				res = FR_OK;
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
+				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Increment index for next */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+					dj->sect = 0;
+					res = FR_OK;
+				}
+			}
+			FREE_BUF();
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get File Status                                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_stat (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj.dir)		/* Found an object */
+				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
+			else			/* It is root dir */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_getfree (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
+	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
+	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE fat, *p;
+
+
+	/* Get drive number */
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
+	fs = *fatfs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* If free_clust is valid, return it without full cluster scan */
+		if (fs->free_clust <= fs->n_fatent - 2) {
+			*nclst = fs->free_clust;
+		} else {
+			/* Get number of free clusters */
+			fat = fs->fs_type;
+			n = 0;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
+				clst = 2;
+				do {
+					stat = get_fat(fs, clst);
+					if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 0) n++;
+				} while (++clst < fs->n_fatent);
+			} else {
+				clst = fs->n_fatent;
+				sect = fs->fatbase;
+				i = 0; p = 0;
+				do {
+					if (!i) {
+						res = move_window(fs, sect++);
+						if (res != FR_OK) break;
+						p = fs->win;
+						i = SS(fs);
+					}
+					if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
+						if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
+						p += 2; i -= 2;
+					} else {
+						if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
+						p += 4; i -= 4;
+					}
+				} while (--clst);
+			}
+			fs->free_clust = n;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT32) fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			*nclst = n;
+		}
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Truncate File                                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_truncate (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD ncl;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) {			/* Check abort flag */
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		} else {
+			if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))		/* Check access mode */
+				res = FR_DENIED;
+		}
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
+				res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->sclust);
+				fp->sclust = 0;
+			} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
+				ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				res = FR_OK;
+				if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->n_fatent) {
+					res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_unlink (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj, sdj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DWORD dclst;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;			/* Cannot remove dot entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&dj, 2);	/* Cannot remove open file */
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* The object is accessible */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Cannot remove the start directory */
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)
+					res = FR_DENIED;		/* Cannot remove R/O object */
+			}
+			dclst = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);
+			if (res == FR_OK && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Is it a sub-dir? */
+				if (dclst < 2) {
+					res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				} else {
+					mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof (DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
+					sdj.sclust = dclst;
+					res = dir_sdi(&sdj, 2);		/* Exclude dot entries */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						res = dir_read(&sdj);
+						if (res == FR_OK		/* Not empty dir */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+						|| dclst == dj.fs->cdir	/* Current dir */
+#endif
+						) res = FR_DENIED;
+						if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_OK;	/* Empty */
+					}
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				res = dir_remove(&dj);		/* Remove the directory entry */
+				if (res == FR_OK) {
+					if (dclst)				/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+						res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mkdir (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir, n;
+	DWORD dsc, dcl, pcl, tim = get_fattime();
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any object with same name is already existing */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {				/* Can create a new directory */
+			dcl = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);		/* Allocate a cluster for the new directory table */
+			res = FR_OK;
+			if (dcl == 0) res = FR_DENIED;		/* No space to allocate a new cluster */
+			if (dcl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+			if (dcl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+			if (res == FR_OK)					/* Flush FAT */
+				res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Initialize the new directory table */
+				dsc = clust2sect(dj.fs, dcl);
+				dir = dj.fs->win;
+				mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);	/* Create "." entry */
+				dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);
+				mem_cpy(dir+SZ_DIR, dir, SZ_DIR); 	/* Create ".." entry */
+				dir[33] = '.'; pcl = dj.sclust;
+				if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pcl == dj.fs->dirbase)
+					pcl = 0;
+				st_clust(dir+SZ_DIR, pcl);
+				for (n = dj.fs->csize; n; n--) {	/* Write dot entries and clear following sectors */
+					dj.fs->winsect = dsc++;
+					dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+					res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+					if (res != FR_OK) break;
+					mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) res = dir_register(&dj);	/* Register the object to the directoy */
+			if (res != FR_OK) {
+				remove_chain(dj.fs, dcl);			/* Could not register, remove cluster chain */
+			} else {
+				dir = dj.dir;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;				/* Attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);		/* Created time */
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);					/* Table start cluster */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Attribute                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_chmod (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
+	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
+				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_utime (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
+	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the time stamp to be set */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {					/* Root directory */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {					/* File or sub-directory */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_rename (
+	const TCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
+	const TCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR djo, djn;
+	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
+	DWORD dw;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &djo.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		djn.fs = djo.fs;
+		INIT_BUF(djo);
+		res = follow_path(&djo, path_old);		/* Check old object */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (djo.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&djo, 2);
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Old object is found */
+			if (!djo.dir) {						/* Is root dir? */
+				res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			} else {
+				mem_cpy(buf, djo.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information except for name */
+				mem_cpy(&djn, &djo, sizeof (DIR));		/* Check new object */
+				res = follow_path(&djn, path_new);
+				if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* The new object name is already existing */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 				/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
+/* Start critical section that an interruption or error can cause cross-link */
+					res = dir_register(&djn);			/* Register the new entry */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dir = djn.dir;					/* Copy object information except for name */
+						mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
+						dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
+						djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (djo.sclust != djn.sclust && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
+							dw = clust2sect(djo.fs, ld_clust(djo.fs, dir));
+							if (!dw) {
+								res = FR_INT_ERR;
+							} else {
+								res = move_window(djo.fs, dw);
+								dir = djo.fs->win+SZ_DIR;	/* .. entry */
+								if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
+									dw = (djo.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && djn.sclust == djo.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : djn.sclust;
+									st_clust(dir, dw);
+									djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+								}
+							}
+						}
+						if (res == FR_OK) {
+							res = dir_remove(&djo);		/* Remove old entry */
+							if (res == FR_OK)
+								res = sync(djo.fs);
+						}
+					}
+/* End critical section */
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(djo.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Forward data to the stream directly (available on only tiny cfg)      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
+
+FRESULT f_forward (
+	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
+	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
+	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
+	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
+	UINT rcnt;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bf = 0;	/* Clear transfer byte counter */
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);								/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(0, 0);					/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
+		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (!csect) {							/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->sclust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;					/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+		}
+		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);		/* Get current data sector */
+		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		sect += csect;
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		fp->dsect = sect;
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
+		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
+
+
+
+#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define N_ROOTDIR	512		/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 */
+#define N_FATS		1		/* Number of FAT copies (1 or 2) */
+
+
+FRESULT f_mkfs (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Logical drive number */
+	BYTE sfd,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
+	UINT au			/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
+)
+{
+	static const WORD vst[] = { 1024,   512,  256,  128,   64,    32,   16,    8,    4,    2,   0};
+	static const WORD cst[] = {32768, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 1024, 512};
+	BYTE fmt, md, sys, *tbl, pdrv, part;
+	DWORD n_clst, vs, n, wsect;
+	UINT i;
+	DWORD b_vol, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;	/* LBA */
+	DWORD n_vol, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;	/* Size */
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+
+
+	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	if (sfd > 1) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	if (au & (au - 1)) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	fs = FatFs[drv];
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	fs->fs_type = 0;
+	pdrv = LD2PD(drv);	/* Physical drive */
+	part = LD2PT(drv);	/* Partition (0:auto detect, 1-4:get from partition table)*/
+
+	/* Get disk statics */
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512					/* Get disk sector size */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Get partition information from partition table in the MBR */
+		if (disk_read(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) != 0xAA55) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		if (!tbl[4]) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* No partition? */
+		b_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+8);	/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+12);	/* Volume size */
+	} else {
+		/* Create a partition in this function */
+		if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_vol) != RES_OK || n_vol < 128)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		b_vol = (sfd) ? 0 : 63;		/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol -= b_vol;				/* Volume size */
+	}
+
+	if (!au) {				/* AU auto selection */
+		vs = n_vol / (2000 / (SS(fs) / 512));
+		for (i = 0; vs < vst[i]; i++) ;
+		au = cst[i];
+	}
+	au /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (au == 0) au = 1;
+	if (au > 128) au = 128;
+
+	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = n_vol / au;
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 32;
+		n_dir = 0;
+	} else {
+		n_fat = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? (n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 : (n_clst * 2) + 4;
+		n_fat = (n_fat + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1;
+		n_dir = (DWORD)N_ROOTDIR * SZ_DIR / SS(fs);
+	}
+	b_fat = b_vol + n_rsv;				/* FAT area start sector */
+	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;		/* Directory area start sector */
+	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;				/* Data area start sector */
+	if (n_vol < b_data + au - b_vol) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* Too small volume */
+
+	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK || !n || n > 32768) n = 1;
+	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);	/* Next nearest erase block from current data start */
+	n = (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {		/* FAT32: Move FAT offset */
+		n_rsv += n;
+		b_fat += n;
+	} else {					/* FAT12/16: Expand FAT size */
+		n_fat += n;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine number of clusters and final check of validity of the FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = (n_vol - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / au;
+	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < MIN_FAT16)
+		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < MIN_FAT32))
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	switch (fmt) {	/* Determine system ID for partition table */
+	case FS_FAT12:	sys = 0x01; break;
+	case FS_FAT16:	sys = (n_vol < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06; break;
+	default: 		sys = 0x0C;
+	}
+
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Update system ID in the partition table */
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		tbl[4] = sys;
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		md = 0xF8;
+	} else {
+		if (sfd) {	/* No partition table (SFD) */
+			md = 0xF0;
+		} else {	/* Create partition table (FDISK) */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
+			tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;	/* Create partition table for single partition in the drive */
+			tbl[1] = 1;						/* Partition start head */
+			tbl[2] = 1;						/* Partition start sector */
+			tbl[3] = 0;						/* Partition start cylinder */
+			tbl[4] = sys;					/* System type */
+			tbl[5] = 254;					/* Partition end head */
+			n = (b_vol + n_vol) / 63 / 255;
+			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n >> 2) | 63);	/* Partition end sector */
+			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n;				/* End cylinder */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_vol);		/* Partition size in LBA */
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);	/* MBR signature */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the MBR sector */
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			md = 0xF8;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Create BPB in the VBR */
+	tbl = fs->win;							/* Clear sector */
+	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
+	mem_cpy(tbl, "\xEB\xFE\x90" "MSDOS5.0", 11);/* Boot jump code, OEM name */
+	i = SS(fs);								/* Sector size */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, i);
+	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)au;			/* Sectors per cluster */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);		/* Reserved sectors */
+	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;				/* Number of FATs */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 0 : N_ROOTDIR;	/* Number of rootdir entries */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, i);
+	if (n_vol < 0x10000) {					/* Number of total sectors */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_vol);
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_vol);
+	}
+	tbl[BPB_Media] = md;					/* Media descriptor */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);			/* Number of sectors per track */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);			/* Number of heads */
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_vol);		/* Hidden sectors */
+	n = get_fattime();						/* Use current time as VSN */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);		/* VSN */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);		/* Root directory start cluster (2) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);			/* FSInfo record offset (VBR+1) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);		/* Backup boot record offset (VBR+6) */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;			/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;			/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    " "FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);			/* VSN */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    " "FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	}
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);			/* Signature (Offset is fixed here regardless of sector size) */
+	if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the VBR sector */
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)							/* Write backup VBR if needed (VBR+6) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 6, 1);
+
+	/* Initialize FAT area */
+	wsect = b_fat;
+	for (i = 0; i < N_FATS; i++) {		/* Initialize each FAT copy */
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
+		n = md;								/* Media descriptor byte */
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+			n |= (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
+		} else {
+			n |= 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
+		}
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* Fill following FAT entries with zero */
+		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {		/* This loop may take a time on FAT32 volume due to many single sector writes */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize root directory */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? au : n_dir;
+	do {
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	} while (--i);
+
+#if _USE_ERASE	/* Erase data area if needed */
+	{
+		DWORD eb[2];
+
+		eb[0] = wsect; eb[1] = wsect + (n_clst - ((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 1 : 0)) * au - 1;
+		disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, eb);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	/* Create FSInfo if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);	/* Number of free clusters */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 2);				/* Last allocated cluster# */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 1, 1);	/* Write original (VBR+1) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 7, 1);	/* Write backup (VBR+7) */
+	}
+
+	return (disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
+}
+
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION == 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Divide Physical Drive                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_fdisk (
+	BYTE pdrv,			/* Physical drive number */
+	const DWORD szt[],	/* Pointer to the size table for each partitions */
+	void* work			/* Pointer to the working buffer */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, n, sz_cyl, tot_cyl, b_cyl, e_cyl, p_cyl;
+	BYTE s_hd, e_hd, *p, *buf = (BYTE*)work;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD sz_disk, sz_part, s_part;
+
+
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &sz_disk)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+
+	/* Determine CHS in the table regardless of the drive geometry */
+	for (n = 16; n < 256 && sz_disk / n / 63 > 1024; n *= 2) ;
+	if (n == 256) n--;
+	e_hd = n - 1;
+	sz_cyl = 63 * n;
+	tot_cyl = sz_disk / sz_cyl;
+
+	/* Create partition table */
+	mem_set(buf, 0, _MAX_SS);
+	p = buf + MBR_Table; b_cyl = 0;
+	for (i = 0; i < 4; i++, p += SZ_PTE) {
+		p_cyl = (szt[i] <= 100) ? (DWORD)tot_cyl * szt[i] / 100 : szt[i] / sz_cyl;
+		if (!p_cyl) continue;
+		s_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * b_cyl;
+		sz_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * p_cyl;
+		if (i == 0) {	/* Exclude first track of cylinder 0 */
+			s_hd = 1;
+			s_part += 63; sz_part -= 63;
+		} else {
+			s_hd = 0;
+		}
+		e_cyl = b_cyl + p_cyl - 1;
+		if (e_cyl >= tot_cyl) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+
+		/* Set partition table */
+		p[1] = s_hd;						/* Start head */
+		p[2] = (BYTE)((b_cyl >> 2) + 1);	/* Start sector */
+		p[3] = (BYTE)b_cyl;					/* Start cylinder */
+		p[4] = 0x06;						/* System type (temporary setting) */
+		p[5] = e_hd;						/* End head */
+		p[6] = (BYTE)((e_cyl >> 2) + 63);	/* End sector */
+		p[7] = (BYTE)e_cyl;					/* End cylinder */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 8, s_part);			/* Start sector in LBA */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 12, sz_part);			/* Partition size */
+
+		/* Next partition */
+		b_cyl += p_cyl;
+	}
+	ST_WORD(p, 0xAA55);
+
+	/* Write it to the MBR */
+	return (disk_write(pdrv, buf, 0, 1) || disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0)) ? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+#endif /* _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 */
+#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get a string from the file                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+TCHAR* f_gets (
+	TCHAR* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
+	int len,		/* Size of string buffer (characters) */
+	FIL* fil		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n = 0;
+	TCHAR c, *p = buff;
+	BYTE s[2];
+	UINT rc;
+
+
+	while (n < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
+		f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break on EOF or error */
+		c = s[0];
+#if _LFN_UNICODE					/* Read a character in UTF-8 encoding */
+		if (c >= 0x80) {
+			if (c < 0xC0) continue;	/* Skip stray trailer */
+			if (c < 0xE0) {			/* Two-byte sequence */
+				f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+				if (rc != 1) break;
+				c = ((c & 0x1F) << 6) | (s[0] & 0x3F);
+				if (c < 0x80) c = '?';
+			} else {
+				if (c < 0xF0) {		/* Three-byte sequence */
+					f_read(fil, s, 2, &rc);
+					if (rc != 2) break;
+					c = (c << 12) | ((s[0] & 0x3F) << 6) | (s[1] & 0x3F);
+					if (c < 0x800) c = '?';
+				} else {			/* Reject four-byte sequence */
+					c = '?';
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+		if (c == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
+#endif
+		*p++ = c;
+		n++;
+		if (c == '\n') break;		/* Break on EOL */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+	return n ? buff : 0;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#include <stdarg.h>
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a character to the file                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_putc (
+	TCHAR c,	/* A character to be output */
+	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	UINT bw, btw;
+	BYTE s[3];
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+	if (c == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
+#endif
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE	/* Write the character in UTF-8 encoding */
+	if (c < 0x80) {			/* 7-bit */
+		s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+		btw = 1;
+	} else {
+		if (c < 0x800) {	/* 11-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xC0 | (c >> 6));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 2;
+		} else {			/* 16-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xE0 | (c >> 12));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | ((c >> 6) & 0x3F));
+			s[2] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 3;
+		}
+	}
+#else				/* Write the character without conversion */
+	s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+	btw = 1;
+#endif
+	f_write(fil, s, btw, &bw);		/* Write the char to the file */
+	return (bw == btw) ? 1 : EOF;	/* Return the result */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a string to the file                                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_puts (
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
+	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n;
+
+
+	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
+		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
+	}
+	return n;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_printf (
+	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
+	...					/* Optional arguments... */
+)
+{
+	va_list arp;
+	BYTE f, r;
+	UINT i, j, w;
+	ULONG v;
+	TCHAR c, d, s[16], *p;
+	int res, chc, cc;
+
+
+	va_start(arp, str);
+
+	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
+		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape character */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		w = f = 0;
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
+			f = 1; c = *str++;
+		} else {
+			if (c == '-') {			/* Flag: left justified */
+				f = 2; c = *str++;
+			}
+		}
+		while (IsDigit(c)) {		/* Precision */
+			w = w * 10 + c - '0';
+			c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 'l' || c == 'L') {	/* Prefix: Size is long int */
+			f |= 4; c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (!c) break;
+		d = c;
+		if (IsLower(d)) d -= 0x20;
+		switch (d) {				/* Type is... */
+		case 'S' :					/* String */
+			p = va_arg(arp, TCHAR*);
+			for (j = 0; p[j]; j++) ;
+			chc = 0;
+			if (!(f & 2)) {
+				while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			}
+			chc += (cc = f_puts(p, fil));
+			while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = chc;
+			continue;
+		case 'C' :					/* Character */
+			cc = f_putc((TCHAR)va_arg(arp, int), fil); continue;
+		case 'B' :					/* Binary */
+			r = 2; break;
+		case 'O' :					/* Octal */
+			r = 8; break;
+		case 'D' :					/* Signed decimal */
+		case 'U' :					/* Unsigned decimal */
+			r = 10; break;
+		case 'X' :					/* Hexdecimal */
+			r = 16; break;
+		default:					/* Unknown type (pass-through) */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil); continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Get an argument and put it in numeral */
+		v = (f & 4) ? (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long) : ((d == 'D') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int));
+		if (d == 'D' && (v & 0x80000000)) {
+			v = 0 - v;
+			f |= 8;
+		}
+		i = 0;
+		do {
+			d = (TCHAR)(v % r); v /= r;
+			if (d > 9) d += (c == 'x') ? 0x27 : 0x07;
+			s[i++] = d + '0';
+		} while (v && i < sizeof s / sizeof s[0]);
+		if (f & 8) s[i++] = '-';
+		j = i; d = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
+		res = 0;
+		while (!(f & 2) && j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(d, fil));
+		do res += (cc = f_putc(s[--i], fil)); while(i);
+		while (j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+		if (cc != EOF) cc = res;
+	}
+
+	va_end(arp);
+	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..627cbaabe6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.09a    (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _FATFS
+#define _FATFS	4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
+#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
+
+#if _FATFS != _FFCONF
+#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Definitions of volume management */
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE pt;	/* Partition: 0:Auto detect, 1-4:Forced partition) */
+} PARTITION;
+extern PARTITION VolToPart[];	/* Volume - Partition resolution table */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pd)	/* Get physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pt)	/* Get partition index */
+
+#else							/* Single partition configuration */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (BYTE)(vol)	/* Each logical drive is bound to the same physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) 0			/* Always mounts the 1st partition or in SFD */
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Type of path name strings on FatFs API */
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE			/* Unicode string */
+#if !_USE_LFN
+#error _LFN_UNICODE must be 0 in non-LFN cfg.
+#endif
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef WCHAR TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) L ## x
+#define _TEXT(x) L ## x
+#endif
+
+#else						/* ANSI/OEM string */
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef char TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) x
+#define _TEXT(x) x
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* File system object structure (FATFS) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE	fs_type;		/* FAT sub-type (0:Not mounted) */
+	BYTE	drv;			/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE	csize;			/* Sectors per cluster (1,2,4...128) */
+	BYTE	n_fats;			/* Number of FAT copies (1,2) */
+	BYTE	wflag;			/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	BYTE	fsi_flag;		/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID */
+	WORD	n_rootdir;		/* Number of root directory entries (FAT12/16) */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+	WORD	ssize;			/* Bytes per sector (512, 1024, 2048 or 4096) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+	_SYNC_t	sobj;			/* Identifier of sync object */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	last_clust;		/* Last allocated cluster */
+	DWORD	free_clust;		/* Number of free clusters */
+	DWORD	fsi_sector;		/* fsinfo sector (FAT32) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	DWORD	cdir;			/* Current directory start cluster (0:root) */
+#endif
+	DWORD	n_fatent;		/* Number of FAT entries (= number of clusters + 2) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* Sectors per FAT */
+	DWORD	fatbase;		/* FAT start sector */
+	DWORD	dirbase;		/* Root directory start sector (FAT32:Cluster#) */
+	DWORD	database;		/* Data start sector */
+	DWORD	winsect;		/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
+	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];	/* Disk access window for Directory, FAT (and Data on tiny cfg) */
+} FATFS;
+
+
+
+/* File object structure (FIL) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the related file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID of the related file system object */
+	BYTE	flag;			/* File status flags */
+	BYTE	pad1;
+	DWORD	fptr;			/* File read/write pointer (0ed on file open) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* File data start cluster (0:no data cluster, always 0 when fsize is 0) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster of fpter */
+	DWORD	dsect;			/* Current data sector of fpter */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	dir_sect;		/* Sector containing the directory entry */
+	BYTE*	dir_ptr;		/* Pointer to the directory entry in the window */
+#endif
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	DWORD*	cltbl;			/* Pointer to the cluster link map table (null on file open) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	UINT	lockid;			/* File lock ID (index of file semaphore table Files[]) */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_TINY
+	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];	/* File data read/write buffer */
+#endif
+} FIL;
+
+
+
+/* Directory object structure (DIR) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	WORD	index;			/* Current read/write index number */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* Table start cluster (0:Root dir) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	sect;			/* Current sector */
+	BYTE*	dir;			/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
+	BYTE*	fn;				/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	WCHAR*	lfn;			/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
+	WORD	lfn_idx;		/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
+#endif
+} DIR;
+
+
+
+/* File status structure (FILINFO) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	WORD	fdate;			/* Last modified date */
+	WORD	ftime;			/* Last modified time */
+	BYTE	fattrib;		/* Attribute */
+	TCHAR	fname[13];		/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	TCHAR*	lfname;			/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	UINT 	lfsize;			/* Size of LFN buffer in TCHAR */
+#endif
+} FILINFO;
+
+
+
+/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
+
+typedef enum {
+	FR_OK = 0,				/* (0) Succeeded */
+	FR_DISK_ERR,			/* (1) A hard error occurred in the low level disk I/O layer */
+	FR_INT_ERR,				/* (2) Assertion failed */
+	FR_NOT_READY,			/* (3) The physical drive cannot work */
+	FR_NO_FILE,				/* (4) Could not find the file */
+	FR_NO_PATH,				/* (5) Could not find the path */
+	FR_INVALID_NAME,		/* (6) The path name format is invalid */
+	FR_DENIED,				/* (7) Access denied due to prohibited access or directory full */
+	FR_EXIST,				/* (8) Access denied due to prohibited access */
+	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,		/* (9) The file/directory object is invalid */
+	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,		/* (10) The physical drive is write protected */
+	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,		/* (11) The logical drive number is invalid */
+	FR_NOT_ENABLED,			/* (12) The volume has no work area */
+	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,		/* (13) There is no valid FAT volume */
+	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,		/* (14) The f_mkfs() aborted due to any parameter error */
+	FR_TIMEOUT,				/* (15) Could not get a grant to access the volume within defined period */
+	FR_LOCKED,				/* (16) The operation is rejected according to the file sharing policy */
+	FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE,		/* (17) LFN working buffer could not be allocated */
+	FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES,	/* (18) Number of open files > _FS_SHARE */
+	FR_INVALID_PARAMETER	/* (19) Given parameter is invalid */
+} FRESULT;
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FatFs module application interface                           */
+
+FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
+FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const TCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
+FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
+FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
+FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
+FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const TCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
+FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
+FRESULT f_stat (const TCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
+FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
+FRESULT f_getfree (const TCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
+FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
+FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
+FRESULT f_unlink (const TCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
+FRESULT	f_mkdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
+FRESULT f_chmod (const TCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attribute of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_utime (const TCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change times-tamp of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_rename (const TCHAR*, const TCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
+FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
+FRESULT f_chdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
+FRESULT f_getcwd (TCHAR*, UINT);					/* Get current directory */
+FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
+FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, UINT);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
+FRESULT	f_fdisk (BYTE, const DWORD[], void*);		/* Divide a physical drive into some partitions */
+int f_putc (TCHAR, FIL*);							/* Put a character to the file */
+int f_puts (const TCHAR*, FIL*);					/* Put a string to the file */
+int f_printf (FIL*, const TCHAR*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
+TCHAR* f_gets (TCHAR*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
+
+#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_tell(fp) ((fp)->fptr)
+#define f_size(fp) ((fp)->fsize)
+
+#ifndef EOF
+#define EOF (-1)
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Additional user defined functions                            */
+
+/* RTC function */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+DWORD get_fattime (void);
+#endif
+
+/* Unicode support functions */
+#if _USE_LFN						/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
+WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);		/* OEM-Unicode bidirectional conversion */
+WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);			/* Unicode upper-case conversion */
+#if _USE_LFN == 3					/* Memory functions */
+void* ff_memalloc (UINT);			/* Allocate memory block */
+void ff_memfree (void*);			/* Free memory block */
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/* Sync functions */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+int ff_cre_syncobj (BYTE, _SYNC_t*);/* Create a sync object */
+int ff_req_grant (_SYNC_t);			/* Lock sync object */
+void ff_rel_grant (_SYNC_t);		/* Unlock sync object */
+int ff_del_syncobj (_SYNC_t);		/* Delete a sync object */
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flags and offset address                                     */
+
+
+/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
+
+#define	FA_READ				0x01
+#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
+#define FA__ERROR			0x80
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
+#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
+#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
+#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
+#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
+#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
+#endif
+
+
+/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
+
+#define FS_FAT12	1
+#define FS_FAT16	2
+#define FS_FAT32	3
+
+
+/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
+
+#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
+#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
+#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
+#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
+#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
+#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
+#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
+#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
+
+
+/* Fast seek feature */
+#define CREATE_LINKMAP	0xFFFFFFFF
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------*/
+/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
+#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..63a4e78236
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/
+/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
+/ the configuration options.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef _FFCONF
+#define _FFCONF 4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Function and Buffer Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0:Normal or 1:Tiny */
+/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
+/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
+/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
+
+
+#define _FS_READONLY	0	/* 0:Read/Write or 1:Read only */
+/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
+/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
+/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
+
+
+#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0 to 3 */
+/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
+/
+/   0: Full function.
+/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
+/      are removed.
+/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to 1.
+/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0:Disable or 1-2:Enable */
+/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FASTSEEK	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable fast seek feature, set _USE_FASTSEEK to 1. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _CODE_PAGE	932
+/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
+/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
+/
+/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
+/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
+/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
+/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
+/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
+/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
+/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
+/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
+/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
+/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
+/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
+/   737  - Greek (OEM)
+/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
+/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
+/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
+/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
+/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
+/   866  - Russian (OEM)
+/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
+/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
+/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
+/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
+*/
+
+
+#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0 to 3 */
+#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
+/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
+/
+/   0: Disable LFN feature. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
+/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the BSS. Always NOT reentrant.
+/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
+/   3: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the HEAP.
+/
+/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. To enable LFN,
+/  Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
+/  to the project. When enable to use heap, memory control functions
+/  ff_memalloc() and ff_memfree() must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0:ANSI/OEM or 1:Unicode */
+/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
+/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1. */
+
+
+#define _FS_RPATH		0	/* 0 to 2 */
+/* The _FS_RPATH option configures relative path feature.
+/
+/   0: Disable relative path feature and remove related functions.
+/   1: Enable relative path. f_chdrive() and f_chdir() are available.
+/   2: f_getcwd() is available in addition to 1.
+/
+/  Note that output of the f_readdir fnction is affected by this option. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Physical Drive Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _VOLUMES	1
+/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
+
+
+#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
+/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
+/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
+/  required for on-board flash memory, floppy disk and optical disk.
+/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, it configures FatFs to variable sector size
+/  and GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implememted to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0:Single partition, 1/2:Enable multiple partition */
+/* When set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical drive number and
+/ it can mount only first primaly partition. When it is set to 1, each volume
+/ is tied to the partitions listed in VolToPart[]. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_ERASE	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable sector erase feature, set _USE_ERASE to 1. CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR command
+/  should be added to the disk_ioctl functio. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ System Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* Set 0 first and it is always compatible with all platforms. The _WORD_ACCESS
+/  option defines which access method is used to the word data on the FAT volume.
+/
+/   0: Byte-by-byte access.
+/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
+/
+/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned word
+/  access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
+/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
+/  performance and code size.
+*/
+
+
+/* A header file that defines sync object types on the O/S, such as
+/  windows.h, ucos_ii.h and semphr.h, must be included prior to ff.h. */
+
+#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
+#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
+
+/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy (thread safe) of the FatFs module.
+/
+/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
+/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
+/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
+/      function must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_FS_LOCK	0	/* 0:Disable or >=1:Enable */
+/* To enable file lock control feature, set _FS_LOCK to 1 or greater.
+   The value defines how many files can be opened simultaneously. */
+
+
+#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5408fe6b3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _INTEGER
+#define _INTEGER
+
+#ifdef _WIN32	/* FatFs development platform */
+
+#include <windows.h>
+#include <tchar.h>
+
+#else			/* Embedded platform */
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
+typedef int				INT;
+typedef unsigned int	UINT;
+
+/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
+typedef char			CHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
+typedef short			SHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	WORD;
+typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
+
+/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
+typedef long			LONG;
+typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
+typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a5a0f911d6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.c
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/*
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+#include "RTC.h"
+
+#if defined(DUMMY_RTC)
+
+/** Current dummy RTC time and date */
+static volatile TimeDate_t DummyRTC_Count;
+
+void RTC_Init(void)
+{
+	DummyRTC_Count.Hour   = 0;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Minute = 0;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Second = 0;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Day    = 1;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Month  = 1;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Year   = 00;
+}
+
+void RTC_Tick500ms(void)
+{
+	static bool HalfSecondElapsed = false;
+
+	HalfSecondElapsed = !HalfSecondElapsed;
+	if (HalfSecondElapsed == false)
+	  return;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Second < 60)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Second = 0;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Minute < 60)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Minute = 0;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Hour < 24)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Hour = 0;
+
+	static const char MonthLength[12] = {31, 28, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31, 31, 30, 31, 30, 31};
+	uint8_t DaysInMonth = MonthLength[DummyRTC_Count.Month - 1];
+
+	/* Check if we need to account for a leap year */
+	if ((DummyRTC_Count.Month == 2) &&
+	    ((!(DummyRTC_Count.Year % 400)) || ((DummyRTC_Count.Year % 100) && !(DummyRTC_Count.Year % 4))))
+	{
+		DaysInMonth++;
+	}
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Day <= DaysInMonth)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Day = 1;
+
+	if (++DummyRTC_Count.Month <= 12)
+	  return;
+
+	DummyRTC_Count.Month = 1;
+	DummyRTC_Count.Year++;
+}
+
+bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate)
+{
+	GlobalInterruptDisable();
+	DummyRTC_Count = *NewTimeDate;
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate)
+{
+	GlobalInterruptDisable();
+	*TimeDate = DummyRTC_Count;
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#else
+
+void RTC_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Unused for a real external DS1307 RTC device */
+}
+
+void RTC_Tick500ms(void)
+{
+	/* Unused for a real external DS1307 RTC device */
+}
+
+bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate)
+{
+	DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t NewRegValues;
+	const uint8_t         WriteAddress = 0;
+
+	// Convert new time data to the DS1307's time register layout
+	NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.TenSec    = (NewTimeDate->Second / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.Sec       = (NewTimeDate->Second % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte1.Fields.CH        = false;
+	NewRegValues.Byte2.Fields.TenMin    = (NewTimeDate->Minute / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte2.Fields.Min       = (NewTimeDate->Minute % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TenHour   = (NewTimeDate->Hour / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.Hour      = (NewTimeDate->Hour % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TwelveHourMode = false;
+
+	// Convert new date data to the DS1307's date register layout
+	NewRegValues.Byte4.Fields.DayOfWeek = 0;
+	NewRegValues.Byte5.Fields.TenDay    = (NewTimeDate->Day / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte5.Fields.Day       = (NewTimeDate->Day % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte6.Fields.TenMonth  = (NewTimeDate->Month / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte6.Fields.Month     = (NewTimeDate->Month % 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte7.Fields.TenYear   = (NewTimeDate->Year / 10);
+	NewRegValues.Byte7.Fields.Year      = (NewTimeDate->Year % 10);
+
+	// Write the new Time and Date into the DS1307
+	if (TWI_WritePacket(DS1307_ADDRESS, 10, &WriteAddress, sizeof(WriteAddress),
+	                   (uint8_t*)&NewRegValues, sizeof(DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t)) != TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate)
+{
+	DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t CurrentRegValues;
+	const uint8_t         ReadAddress = 0;
+
+	// Read in the stored Time and Date from the DS1307
+	if (TWI_ReadPacket(DS1307_ADDRESS, 10, &ReadAddress, sizeof(ReadAddress),
+	                   (uint8_t*)&CurrentRegValues, sizeof(DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t)) != TWI_ERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	// Convert stored time value into decimal
+	TimeDate->Second  = (CurrentRegValues.Byte1.Fields.TenSec  * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte1.Fields.Sec;
+	TimeDate->Minute  = (CurrentRegValues.Byte2.Fields.TenMin  * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte2.Fields.Min;
+	TimeDate->Hour    = (CurrentRegValues.Byte3.Fields.TenHour * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte3.Fields.Hour;
+
+	// Convert stored date value into decimal
+	TimeDate->Day    = (CurrentRegValues.Byte5.Fields.TenDay   * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte5.Fields.Day;
+	TimeDate->Month  = (CurrentRegValues.Byte6.Fields.TenMonth * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte6.Fields.Month;
+	TimeDate->Year   = (CurrentRegValues.Byte7.Fields.TenYear  * 10) + CurrentRegValues.Byte7.Fields.Year;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ae4fbfe16f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/RTC.h
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/*
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+#ifndef _RTC_H_
+#define _RTC_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/TWI.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t Hour;
+			uint8_t Minute;
+			uint8_t Second;
+			uint8_t Day;
+			uint8_t Month;
+			uint8_t Year;
+		} TimeDate_t;
+
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Sec            : 4;
+					unsigned TenSec         : 3;
+					unsigned CH             : 1;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte1;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Min            : 4;
+					unsigned TenMin         : 3;
+					unsigned Reserved       : 1;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte2;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Hour            : 4;
+					unsigned TenHour         : 2;
+					unsigned TwelveHourMode  : 1;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 1;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte3;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned DayOfWeek       : 3;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 5;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte4;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Day             : 4;
+					unsigned TenDay          : 2;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 2;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte5;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Month           : 4;
+					unsigned TenMonth        : 1;
+					unsigned Reserved        : 3;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte6;
+
+			union
+			{
+				struct
+				{
+					unsigned Year            : 4;
+					unsigned TenYear         : 4;
+				} Fields;
+
+				uint8_t IntVal;
+			} Byte7;
+		} DS1307_DateTimeRegs_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TWI address of the DS1307 device on the bus. */
+		#define DS1307_ADDRESS       0xD0
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void RTC_Init(void);
+		void RTC_Tick500ms(void);
+		bool RTC_SetTimeDate(const TimeDate_t* NewTimeDate);
+		bool RTC_GetTimeDate(TimeDate_t* const TimeDate);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..315f2e3a3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ec9c3e2a4f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,89 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../TempDataLogger.h"
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..44904fbe1e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.c
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the TemperatureDataLogger project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "TempDataLogger.h"
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber           = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint            =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address           = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size              = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks             = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Buffer to hold the previously generated HID report, for comparison purposes inside the HID class driver. */
+static uint8_t PrevHIDReportBuffer[GENERIC_REPORT_SIZE];
+
+/** LUFA HID Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all HID Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t Generic_HID_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber              = INTERFACE_ID_HID,
+				.ReportINEndpoint             =
+					{
+						.Address              = GENERIC_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                 = GENERIC_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                = 1,
+					},
+				.PrevReportINBuffer           = PrevHIDReportBuffer,
+				.PrevReportINBufferSize       = sizeof(PrevHIDReportBuffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Non-volatile Logging Interval value in EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
+static uint8_t EEMEM LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM = DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL;
+
+/** SRAM Logging Interval value fetched from EEPROM, stored as a number of 500ms ticks */
+static uint8_t LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
+
+/** Total number of 500ms logging ticks elapsed since the last log value was recorded */
+static uint16_t CurrentLoggingTicks;
+
+/** FAT Fs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the Dataflash contents. */
+static FATFS DiskFATState;
+
+/** FAT Fs structure to hold a FAT file handle for the log data write destination. */
+static FIL TempLogFile;
+
+
+/** ISR to handle the 500ms ticks for sampling and data logging */
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Signal a 500ms tick has elapsed to the RTC */
+	RTC_Tick500ms();
+
+	/* Check to see if the logging interval has expired */
+	if (++CurrentLoggingTicks < LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Reset log tick counter to prepare for next logging interval */
+	CurrentLoggingTicks = 0;
+
+	uint8_t LEDMask = LEDs_GetLEDs();
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+	/* Only log when not connected to a USB host */
+	if (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Unattached)
+	{
+		TimeDate_t CurrentTimeDate;
+		RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrentTimeDate);
+
+		char     LineBuffer[100];
+		uint16_t BytesWritten;
+
+		BytesWritten = sprintf(LineBuffer, "%02d/%02d/20%02d, %02d:%02d:%02d, %d Degrees\r\n",
+		                       CurrentTimeDate.Day, CurrentTimeDate.Month, CurrentTimeDate.Year,
+		                       CurrentTimeDate.Hour, CurrentTimeDate.Minute, CurrentTimeDate.Second,
+		                       Temperature_GetTemperature());
+
+		f_write(&TempLogFile, LineBuffer, BytesWritten, &BytesWritten);
+		f_sync(&TempLogFile);
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMask);
+}
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	/* Fetch logging interval from EEPROM */
+	LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = eeprom_read_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM);
+
+	/* Check if the logging interval is invalid (0xFF) indicating that the EEPROM is blank */
+	if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM == 0xFF)
+	  LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL;
+
+	/* Mount and open the log file on the Dataflash FAT partition */
+	OpenLogFile();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+		HID_Device_USBTask(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Opens the log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition according to the current date */
+void OpenLogFile(void)
+{
+	char LogFileName[12];
+
+	/* Get the current date for the filename as "DDMMYY.csv" */
+	TimeDate_t CurrentTimeDate;
+	RTC_GetTimeDate(&CurrentTimeDate);
+	sprintf(LogFileName, "%02d%02d%02d.csv", CurrentTimeDate.Day, CurrentTimeDate.Month, CurrentTimeDate.Year);
+
+	/* Mount the storage device, open the file */
+	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
+	f_open(&TempLogFile, LogFileName, FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_WRITE);
+	f_lseek(&TempLogFile, TempLogFile.fsize);
+}
+
+/** Closes the open data log file on the Dataflash's FAT formatted partition */
+void CloseLogFile(void)
+{
+	/* Sync any data waiting to be written, unmount the storage device */
+	f_sync(&TempLogFile);
+	f_close(&TempLogFile);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	ADC_Init(ADC_FREE_RUNNING | ADC_PRESCALE_128);
+	Temperature_Init();
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+	TWI_Init(TWI_BIT_PRESCALE_4, TWI_BITLENGTH_FROM_FREQ(4, 50000));
+	RTC_Init();
+
+	/* 500ms logging interval timer configuration */
+	OCR1A   = (((F_CPU / 256) / 2) - 1);
+	TCCR1B  = (1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12);
+	TIMSK1  = (1 << OCIE1A);
+
+	/* Check if the Dataflash is working, abort if not */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		for(;;);
+	}
+
+	/* Clear Dataflash sector protections, if enabled */
+	DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	/* Close the log file so that the host has exclusive file system access */
+	CloseLogFile();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+
+	/* Mount and open the log file on the Dataflash FAT partition */
+	OpenLogFile();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= HID_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+	HID_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Generic_HID_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the creation of HID reports to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]     HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in,out] ReportID    Report ID requested by the host if non-zero, otherwise callback should set to the generated report ID
+ *  \param[in]     ReportType  Type of the report to create, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_In or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[out]    ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the created report should be stored
+ *  \param[out]    ReportSize  Number of bytes written in the report (or zero if no report is to be sent)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true to force the sending of the report, \c false to let the library determine if it needs to be sent
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                         void* ReportData,
+                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize)
+{
+	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
+
+	RTC_GetTimeDate(&ReportParams->TimeDate);
+
+	ReportParams->LogInterval500MS = LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM;
+
+	*ReportSize = sizeof(Device_Report_t);
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** HID class driver callback function for the processing of HID reports from the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] HIDInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the HID class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ *  \param[in] ReportID    Report ID of the received report from the host
+ *  \param[in] ReportType  The type of report that the host has sent, either HID_REPORT_ITEM_Out or HID_REPORT_ITEM_Feature
+ *  \param[in] ReportData  Pointer to a buffer where the received report has been stored
+ *  \param[in] ReportSize  Size in bytes of the received HID report
+ */
+void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+                                          const void* ReportData,
+                                          const uint16_t ReportSize)
+{
+	Device_Report_t* ReportParams = (Device_Report_t*)ReportData;
+
+	RTC_SetTimeDate(&ReportParams->TimeDate);
+
+	/* If the logging interval has changed from its current value, write it to EEPROM */
+	if (LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM != ReportParams->LogInterval500MS)
+	{
+		LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM = ReportParams->LogInterval500MS;
+		eeprom_update_byte(&LoggingInterval500MS_EEPROM, LoggingInterval500MS_SRAM);
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..70d17f4daf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempDataLogger.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TempDataLogger.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
+#define _TEMP_DATALOGGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Lib/DataflashManager.h"
+		#include "Lib/FATFs/ff.h"
+		#include "Lib/RTC.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Temperature.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/ADC.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY          LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** Default log interval when the EEPROM is blank, in 500ms ticks. */
+		#define DEFAULT_LOG_INTERVAL     10
+
+		/** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */
+		#define DISK_READ_ONLY           false
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			TimeDate_t TimeDate;
+			uint8_t    LogInterval500MS;
+		} Device_Report_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void OpenLogFile(void);
+		void CloseLogFile(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		bool CALLBACK_HID_Device_CreateHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                         uint8_t* const ReportID,
+		                                         const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                         void* ReportData,
+		                                         uint16_t* const ReportSize);
+		void CALLBACK_HID_Device_ProcessHIDReport(USB_ClassInfo_HID_Device_t* const HIDInterfaceInfo,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportID,
+		                                          const uint8_t ReportType,
+		                                          const void* ReportData,
+		                                          const uint16_t ReportSize);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bdf8db0eed
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.LESSER.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,166 @@
+		   GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+
+  This version of the GNU Lesser General Public License incorporates
+the terms and conditions of version 3 of the GNU General Public
+License, supplemented by the additional permissions listed below.
+
+  0. Additional Definitions.
+
+  As used herein, "this License" refers to version 3 of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, and the "GNU GPL" refers to version 3 of the GNU
+General Public License.
+
+  "The Library" refers to a covered work governed by this License,
+other than an Application or a Combined Work as defined below.
+
+  An "Application" is any work that makes use of an interface provided
+by the Library, but which is not otherwise based on the Library.
+Defining a subclass of a class defined by the Library is deemed a mode
+of using an interface provided by the Library.
+
+  A "Combined Work" is a work produced by combining or linking an
+Application with the Library.  The particular version of the Library
+with which the Combined Work was made is also called the "Linked
+Version".
+
+  The "Minimal Corresponding Source" for a Combined Work means the
+Corresponding Source for the Combined Work, excluding any source code
+for portions of the Combined Work that, considered in isolation, are
+based on the Application, and not on the Linked Version.
+
+  The "Corresponding Application Code" for a Combined Work means the
+object code and/or source code for the Application, including any data
+and utility programs needed for reproducing the Combined Work from the
+Application, but excluding the System Libraries of the Combined Work.
+
+  1. Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  You may convey a covered work under sections 3 and 4 of this License
+without being bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.
+
+  2. Conveying Modified Versions.
+
+  If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your modifications, a
+facility refers to a function or data to be supplied by an Application
+that uses the facility (other than as an argument passed when the
+facility is invoked), then you may convey a copy of the modified
+version:
+
+   a) under this License, provided that you make a good faith effort to
+   ensure that, in the event an Application does not supply the
+   function or data, the facility still operates, and performs
+   whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful, or
+
+   b) under the GNU GPL, with none of the additional permissions of
+   this License applicable to that copy.
+
+  3. Object Code Incorporating Material from Library Header Files.
+
+  The object code form of an Application may incorporate material from
+a header file that is part of the Library.  You may convey such object
+code under terms of your choice, provided that, if the incorporated
+material is not limited to numerical parameters, data structure
+layouts and accessors, or small macros, inline functions and templates
+(ten or fewer lines in length), you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the object code that the
+   Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the object code with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+  4. Combined Works.
+
+  You may convey a Combined Work under terms of your choice that,
+taken together, effectively do not restrict modification of the
+portions of the Library contained in the Combined Work and reverse
+engineering for debugging such modifications, if you also do each of
+the following:
+
+   a) Give prominent notice with each copy of the Combined Work that
+   the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are
+   covered by this License.
+
+   b) Accompany the Combined Work with a copy of the GNU GPL and this license
+   document.
+
+   c) For a Combined Work that displays copyright notices during
+   execution, include the copyright notice for the Library among
+   these notices, as well as a reference directing the user to the
+   copies of the GNU GPL and this license document.
+
+   d) Do one of the following:
+
+       0) Convey the Minimal Corresponding Source under the terms of this
+       License, and the Corresponding Application Code in a form
+       suitable for, and under terms that permit, the user to
+       recombine or relink the Application with a modified version of
+       the Linked Version to produce a modified Combined Work, in the
+       manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying
+       Corresponding Source.
+
+       1) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the
+       Library.  A suitable mechanism is one that (a) uses at run time
+       a copy of the Library already present on the user's computer
+       system, and (b) will operate properly with a modified version
+       of the Library that is interface-compatible with the Linked
+       Version.
+
+   e) Provide Installation Information, but only if you would otherwise
+   be required to provide such information under section 6 of the
+   GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such information is
+   necessary to install and execute a modified version of the
+   Combined Work produced by recombining or relinking the
+   Application with a modified version of the Linked Version. (If
+   you use option 4d0, the Installation Information must accompany
+   the Minimal Corresponding Source and Corresponding Application
+   Code. If you use option 4d1, you must provide the Installation
+   Information in the manner specified by section 6 of the GNU GPL
+   for conveying Corresponding Source.)
+
+  5. Combined Libraries.
+
+  You may place library facilities that are a work based on the
+Library side by side in a single library together with other library
+facilities that are not Applications and are not covered by this
+License, and convey such a combined library under terms of your
+choice, if you do both of the following:
+
+   a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based
+   on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities,
+   conveyed under the terms of this License.
+
+   b) Give prominent notice with the combined library that part of it
+   is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the
+   accompanying uncombined form of the same work.
+
+  6. Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the
+Library as you received it specifies that a certain numbered version
+of the GNU Lesser General Public License "or any later version"
+applies to it, you have the option of following the terms and
+conditions either of that published version or of any later version
+published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library as you
+received it does not specify a version number of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License, you may choose any version of the GNU Lesser
+General Public License ever published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Library as you received it specifies that a proxy can decide
+whether future versions of the GNU Lesser General Public License shall
+apply, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of any version is
+permanent authorization for you to choose that version for the
+Library.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..10926e87f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/COPYING.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,675 @@
+                    GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
+                       Version 3, 29 June 2007
+
+ Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation, Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
+ Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+ of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+
+                            Preamble
+
+  The GNU General Public License is a free, copyleft license for
+software and other kinds of works.
+
+  The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed
+to take away your freedom to share and change the works.  By contrast,
+the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to
+share and change all versions of a program--to make sure it remains free
+software for all its users.  We, the Free Software Foundation, use the
+GNU General Public License for most of our software; it applies also to
+any other work released this way by its authors.  You can apply it to
+your programs, too.
+
+  When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not
+price.  Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you
+have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for
+them if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you
+want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new
+free programs, and that you know you can do these things.
+
+  To protect your rights, we need to prevent others from denying you
+these rights or asking you to surrender the rights.  Therefore, you have
+certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software, or if
+you modify it: responsibilities to respect the freedom of others.
+
+  For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether
+gratis or for a fee, you must pass on to the recipients the same
+freedoms that you received.  You must make sure that they, too, receive
+or can get the source code.  And you must show them these terms so they
+know their rights.
+
+  Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps:
+(1) assert copyright on the software, and (2) offer you this License
+giving you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify it.
+
+  For the developers' and authors' protection, the GPL clearly explains
+that there is no warranty for this free software.  For both users' and
+authors' sake, the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as
+changed, so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to
+authors of previous versions.
+
+  Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run
+modified versions of the software inside them, although the manufacturer
+can do so.  This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of
+protecting users' freedom to change the software.  The systematic
+pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to
+use, which is precisely where it is most unacceptable.  Therefore, we
+have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those
+products.  If such problems arise substantially in other domains, we
+stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions
+of the GPL, as needed to protect the freedom of users.
+
+  Finally, every program is threatened constantly by software patents.
+States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of
+software on general-purpose computers, but in those that do, we wish to
+avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could
+make it effectively proprietary.  To prevent this, the GPL assures that
+patents cannot be used to render the program non-free.
+
+  The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and
+modification follow.
+
+                       TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+  0. Definitions.
+
+  "This License" refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License.
+
+  "Copyright" also means copyright-like laws that apply to other kinds of
+works, such as semiconductor masks.
+
+  "The Program" refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this
+License.  Each licensee is addressed as "you".  "Licensees" and
+"recipients" may be individuals or organizations.
+
+  To "modify" a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work
+in a fashion requiring copyright permission, other than the making of an
+exact copy.  The resulting work is called a "modified version" of the
+earlier work or a work "based on" the earlier work.
+
+  A "covered work" means either the unmodified Program or a work based
+on the Program.
+
+  To "propagate" a work means to do anything with it that, without
+permission, would make you directly or secondarily liable for
+infringement under applicable copyright law, except executing it on a
+computer or modifying a private copy.  Propagation includes copying,
+distribution (with or without modification), making available to the
+public, and in some countries other activities as well.
+
+  To "convey" a work means any kind of propagation that enables other
+parties to make or receive copies.  Mere interaction with a user through
+a computer network, with no transfer of a copy, is not conveying.
+
+  An interactive user interface displays "Appropriate Legal Notices"
+to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible
+feature that (1) displays an appropriate copyright notice, and (2)
+tells the user that there is no warranty for the work (except to the
+extent that warranties are provided), that licensees may convey the
+work under this License, and how to view a copy of this License.  If
+the interface presents a list of user commands or options, such as a
+menu, a prominent item in the list meets this criterion.
+
+  1. Source Code.
+
+  The "source code" for a work means the preferred form of the work
+for making modifications to it.  "Object code" means any non-source
+form of a work.
+
+  A "Standard Interface" means an interface that either is an official
+standard defined by a recognized standards body, or, in the case of
+interfaces specified for a particular programming language, one that
+is widely used among developers working in that language.
+
+  The "System Libraries" of an executable work include anything, other
+than the work as a whole, that (a) is included in the normal form of
+packaging a Major Component, but which is not part of that Major
+Component, and (b) serves only to enable use of the work with that
+Major Component, or to implement a Standard Interface for which an
+implementation is available to the public in source code form.  A
+"Major Component", in this context, means a major essential component
+(kernel, window system, and so on) of the specific operating system
+(if any) on which the executable work runs, or a compiler used to
+produce the work, or an object code interpreter used to run it.
+
+  The "Corresponding Source" for a work in object code form means all
+the source code needed to generate, install, and (for an executable
+work) run the object code and to modify the work, including scripts to
+control those activities.  However, it does not include the work's
+System Libraries, or general-purpose tools or generally available free
+programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but
+which are not part of the work.  For example, Corresponding Source
+includes interface definition files associated with source files for
+the work, and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically
+linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require,
+such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those
+subprograms and other parts of the work.
+
+  The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users
+can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding
+Source.
+
+  The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that
+same work.
+
+  2. Basic Permissions.
+
+  All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of
+copyright on the Program, and are irrevocable provided the stated
+conditions are met.  This License explicitly affirms your unlimited
+permission to run the unmodified Program.  The output from running a
+covered work is covered by this License only if the output, given its
+content, constitutes a covered work.  This License acknowledges your
+rights of fair use or other equivalent, as provided by copyright law.
+
+  You may make, run and propagate covered works that you do not
+convey, without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains
+in force.  You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose
+of having them make modifications exclusively for you, or provide you
+with facilities for running those works, provided that you comply with
+the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do
+not control copyright.  Those thus making or running the covered works
+for you must do so exclusively on your behalf, under your direction
+and control, on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of
+your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you.
+
+  Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under
+the conditions stated below.  Sublicensing is not allowed; section 10
+makes it unnecessary.
+
+  3. Protecting Users' Legal Rights From Anti-Circumvention Law.
+
+  No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological
+measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article
+11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996, or
+similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such
+measures.
+
+  When you convey a covered work, you waive any legal power to forbid
+circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention
+is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to
+the covered work, and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or
+modification of the work as a means of enforcing, against the work's
+users, your or third parties' legal rights to forbid circumvention of
+technological measures.
+
+  4. Conveying Verbatim Copies.
+
+  You may convey verbatim copies of the Program's source code as you
+receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
+appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice;
+keep intact all notices stating that this License and any
+non-permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code;
+keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty; and give all
+recipients a copy of this License along with the Program.
+
+  You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey,
+and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee.
+
+  5. Conveying Modified Source Versions.
+
+  You may convey a work based on the Program, or the modifications to
+produce it from the Program, in the form of source code under the
+terms of section 4, provided that you also meet all of these conditions:
+
+    a) The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified
+    it, and giving a relevant date.
+
+    b) The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is
+    released under this License and any conditions added under section
+    7.  This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to
+    "keep intact all notices".
+
+    c) You must license the entire work, as a whole, under this
+    License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy.  This
+    License will therefore apply, along with any applicable section 7
+    additional terms, to the whole of the work, and all its parts,
+    regardless of how they are packaged.  This License gives no
+    permission to license the work in any other way, but it does not
+    invalidate such permission if you have separately received it.
+
+    d) If the work has interactive user interfaces, each must display
+    Appropriate Legal Notices; however, if the Program has interactive
+    interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices, your
+    work need not make them do so.
+
+  A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent
+works, which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work,
+and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program,
+in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium, is called an
+"aggregate" if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not
+used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation's users
+beyond what the individual works permit.  Inclusion of a covered work
+in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other
+parts of the aggregate.
+
+  6. Conveying Non-Source Forms.
+
+  You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms
+of sections 4 and 5, provided that you also convey the
+machine-readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License,
+in one of these ways:
+
+    a) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by the
+    Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium
+    customarily used for software interchange.
+
+    b) Convey the object code in, or embodied in, a physical product
+    (including a physical distribution medium), accompanied by a
+    written offer, valid for at least three years and valid for as
+    long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product
+    model, to give anyone who possesses the object code either (1) a
+    copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the
+    product that is covered by this License, on a durable physical
+    medium customarily used for software interchange, for a price no
+    more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this
+    conveying of source, or (2) access to copy the
+    Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge.
+
+    c) Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the
+    written offer to provide the Corresponding Source.  This
+    alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially, and
+    only if you received the object code with such an offer, in accord
+    with subsection 6b.
+
+    d) Convey the object code by offering access from a designated
+    place (gratis or for a charge), and offer equivalent access to the
+    Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no
+    further charge.  You need not require recipients to copy the
+    Corresponding Source along with the object code.  If the place to
+    copy the object code is a network server, the Corresponding Source
+    may be on a different server (operated by you or a third party)
+    that supports equivalent copying facilities, provided you maintain
+    clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the
+    Corresponding Source.  Regardless of what server hosts the
+    Corresponding Source, you remain obligated to ensure that it is
+    available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements.
+
+    e) Convey the object code using peer-to-peer transmission, provided
+    you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding
+    Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no
+    charge under subsection 6d.
+
+  A separable portion of the object code, whose source code is excluded
+from the Corresponding Source as a System Library, need not be
+included in conveying the object code work.
+
+  A "User Product" is either (1) a "consumer product", which means any
+tangible personal property which is normally used for personal, family,
+or household purposes, or (2) anything designed or sold for incorporation
+into a dwelling.  In determining whether a product is a consumer product,
+doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage.  For a particular
+product received by a particular user, "normally used" refers to a
+typical or common use of that class of product, regardless of the status
+of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user
+actually uses, or expects or is expected to use, the product.  A product
+is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial
+commercial, industrial or non-consumer uses, unless such uses represent
+the only significant mode of use of the product.
+
+  "Installation Information" for a User Product means any methods,
+procedures, authorization keys, or other information required to install
+and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from
+a modified version of its Corresponding Source.  The information must
+suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object
+code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because
+modification has been made.
+
+  If you convey an object code work under this section in, or with, or
+specifically for use in, a User Product, and the conveying occurs as
+part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the
+User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a
+fixed term (regardless of how the transaction is characterized), the
+Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied
+by the Installation Information.  But this requirement does not apply
+if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install
+modified object code on the User Product (for example, the work has
+been installed in ROM).
+
+  The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a
+requirement to continue to provide support service, warranty, or updates
+for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient, or for
+the User Product in which it has been modified or installed.  Access to a
+network may be denied when the modification itself materially and
+adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and
+protocols for communication across the network.
+
+  Corresponding Source conveyed, and Installation Information provided,
+in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly
+documented (and with an implementation available to the public in
+source code form), and must require no special password or key for
+unpacking, reading or copying.
+
+  7. Additional Terms.
+
+  "Additional permissions" are terms that supplement the terms of this
+License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions.
+Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall
+be treated as though they were included in this License, to the extent
+that they are valid under applicable law.  If additional permissions
+apply only to part of the Program, that part may be used separately
+under those permissions, but the entire Program remains governed by
+this License without regard to the additional permissions.
+
+  When you convey a copy of a covered work, you may at your option
+remove any additional permissions from that copy, or from any part of
+it.  (Additional permissions may be written to require their own
+removal in certain cases when you modify the work.)  You may place
+additional permissions on material, added by you to a covered work,
+for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, for material you
+add to a covered work, you may (if authorized by the copyright holders of
+that material) supplement the terms of this License with terms:
+
+    a) Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the
+    terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License; or
+
+    b) Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or
+    author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal
+    Notices displayed by works containing it; or
+
+    c) Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material, or
+    requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in
+    reasonable ways as different from the original version; or
+
+    d) Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or
+    authors of the material; or
+
+    e) Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some
+    trade names, trademarks, or service marks; or
+
+    f) Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that
+    material by anyone who conveys the material (or modified versions of
+    it) with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient, for
+    any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on
+    those licensors and authors.
+
+  All other non-permissive additional terms are considered "further
+restrictions" within the meaning of section 10.  If the Program as you
+received it, or any part of it, contains a notice stating that it is
+governed by this License along with a term that is a further
+restriction, you may remove that term.  If a license document contains
+a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this
+License, you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms
+of that license document, provided that the further restriction does
+not survive such relicensing or conveying.
+
+  If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section, you
+must place, in the relevant source files, a statement of the
+additional terms that apply to those files, or a notice indicating
+where to find the applicable terms.
+
+  Additional terms, permissive or non-permissive, may be stated in the
+form of a separately written license, or stated as exceptions;
+the above requirements apply either way.
+
+  8. Termination.
+
+  You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly
+provided under this License.  Any attempt otherwise to propagate or
+modify it is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under
+this License (including any patent licenses granted under the third
+paragraph of section 11).
+
+  However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your
+license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a)
+provisionally, unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and
+finally terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright
+holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means
+prior to 60 days after the cessation.
+
+  Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+  Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same
+material under section 10.
+
+  9. Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies.
+
+  You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or
+run a copy of the Program.  Ancillary propagation of a covered work
+occurring solely as a consequence of using peer-to-peer transmission
+to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance.  However,
+nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or
+modify any covered work.  These actions infringe copyright if you do
+not accept this License.  Therefore, by modifying or propagating a
+covered work, you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so.
+
+  10. Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients.
+
+  Each time you convey a covered work, the recipient automatically
+receives a license from the original licensors, to run, modify and
+propagate that work, subject to this License.  You are not responsible
+for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License.
+
+  An "entity transaction" is a transaction transferring control of an
+organization, or substantially all assets of one, or subdividing an
+organization, or merging organizations.  If propagation of a covered
+work results from an entity transaction, each party to that
+transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever
+licenses to the work the party's predecessor in interest had or could
+give under the previous paragraph, plus a right to possession of the
+Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest, if
+the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts.
+
+  You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the
+rights granted or affirmed under this License.  For example, you may
+not impose a license fee, royalty, or other charge for exercise of
+rights granted under this License, and you may not initiate litigation
+(including a cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that
+any patent claim is infringed by making, using, selling, offering for
+sale, or importing the Program or any portion of it.
+
+  11. Patents.
+
+  A "contributor" is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this
+License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based.  The
+work thus licensed is called the contributor's "contributor version".
+
+  A contributor's "essential patent claims" are all patent claims
+owned or controlled by the contributor, whether already acquired or
+hereafter acquired, that would be infringed by some manner, permitted
+by this License, of making, using, or selling its contributor version,
+but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a
+consequence of further modification of the contributor version.  For
+purposes of this definition, "control" includes the right to grant
+patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of
+this License.
+
+  Each contributor grants you a non-exclusive, worldwide, royalty-free
+patent license under the contributor's essential patent claims, to
+make, use, sell, offer for sale, import and otherwise run, modify and
+propagate the contents of its contributor version.
+
+  In the following three paragraphs, a "patent license" is any express
+agreement or commitment, however denominated, not to enforce a patent
+(such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to
+sue for patent infringement).  To "grant" such a patent license to a
+party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a
+patent against the party.
+
+  If you convey a covered work, knowingly relying on a patent license,
+and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone
+to copy, free of charge and under the terms of this License, through a
+publicly available network server or other readily accessible means,
+then you must either (1) cause the Corresponding Source to be so
+available, or (2) arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the
+patent license for this particular work, or (3) arrange, in a manner
+consistent with the requirements of this License, to extend the patent
+license to downstream recipients.  "Knowingly relying" means you have
+actual knowledge that, but for the patent license, your conveying the
+covered work in a country, or your recipient's use of the covered work
+in a country, would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that
+country that you have reason to believe are valid.
+
+  If, pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or
+arrangement, you convey, or propagate by procuring conveyance of, a
+covered work, and grant a patent license to some of the parties
+receiving the covered work authorizing them to use, propagate, modify
+or convey a specific copy of the covered work, then the patent license
+you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered
+work and works based on it.
+
+  A patent license is "discriminatory" if it does not include within
+the scope of its coverage, prohibits the exercise of, or is
+conditioned on the non-exercise of one or more of the rights that are
+specifically granted under this License.  You may not convey a covered
+work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is
+in the business of distributing software, under which you make payment
+to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying
+the work, and under which the third party grants, to any of the
+parties who would receive the covered work from you, a discriminatory
+patent license (a) in connection with copies of the covered work
+conveyed by you (or copies made from those copies), or (b) primarily
+for and in connection with specific products or compilations that
+contain the covered work, unless you entered into that arrangement,
+or that patent license was granted, prior to 28 March 2007.
+
+  Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting
+any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may
+otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law.
+
+  12. No Surrender of Others' Freedom.
+
+  If conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or
+otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not
+excuse you from the conditions of this License.  If you cannot convey a
+covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
+License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may
+not convey it at all.  For example, if you agree to terms that obligate you
+to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey
+the Program, the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this
+License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program.
+
+  13. Use with the GNU Affero General Public License.
+
+  Notwithstanding any other provision of this License, you have
+permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed
+under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single
+combined work, and to convey the resulting work.  The terms of this
+License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work,
+but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License,
+section 13, concerning interaction through a network will apply to the
+combination as such.
+
+  14. Revised Versions of this License.
+
+  The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of
+the GNU General Public License from time to time.  Such new versions will
+be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to
+address new problems or concerns.
+
+  Each version is given a distinguishing version number.  If the
+Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General
+Public License "or any later version" applies to it, you have the
+option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered
+version or of any later version published by the Free Software
+Foundation.  If the Program does not specify a version number of the
+GNU General Public License, you may choose any version ever published
+by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+  If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future
+versions of the GNU General Public License can be used, that proxy's
+public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you
+to choose that version for the Program.
+
+  Later license versions may give you additional or different
+permissions.  However, no additional obligations are imposed on any
+author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a
+later version.
+
+  15. Disclaimer of Warranty.
+
+  THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
+APPLICABLE LAW.  EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT
+HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY
+OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
+THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
+PURPOSE.  THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM
+IS WITH YOU.  SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF
+ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
+
+  16. Limitation of Liability.
+
+  IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING
+WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND/OR CONVEYS
+THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY
+GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE
+USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF
+DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD
+PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS),
+EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+SUCH DAMAGES.
+
+  17. Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16.
+
+  If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided
+above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms,
+reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates
+an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the
+Program, unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a
+copy of the Program in return for a fee.
+
+                     END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
+
+            How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
+
+  If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest
+possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it
+free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms.
+
+  To do so, attach the following notices to the program.  It is safest
+to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively
+state the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least
+the "copyright" line and a pointer to where the full notice is found.
+
+    <one line to give the program's name and a brief idea of what it does.>
+    Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+
+    This program is free software: you can redistribute it and/or modify
+    it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+    the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the License, or
+    (at your option) any later version.
+
+    This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+    but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+    MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+    GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+    You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+    along with this program.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
+
+  If the program does terminal interaction, make it output a short
+notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode:
+
+    <program>  Copyright (C) <year>  <name of author>
+    This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type `show w'.
+    This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it
+    under certain conditions; type `show c' for details.
+
+The hypothetical commands `show w' and `show c' should show the appropriate
+parts of the General Public License.  Of course, your program's commands
+might be different; for a GUI interface, you would use an "about box".
+
+  You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or school,
+if any, to sign a "copyright disclaimer" for the program, if necessary.
+For more information on this, and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL, see
+<http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+  The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program
+into proprietary programs.  If your program is a subroutine library, you
+may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with
+the library.  If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Lesser General
+Public License instead of this License.  But first, please read
+<http://www.gnu.org/philosophy/why-not-lgpl.html>.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..58fac51449
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,181 @@
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    partial class frmDataloggerSettings
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required designer variable.
+        /// </summary>
+        private System.ComponentModel.IContainer components = null;
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Clean up any resources being used.
+        /// </summary>
+        /// <param name="disposing">true if managed resources should be disposed; otherwise, false.</param>
+        protected override void Dispose(bool disposing)
+        {
+            if (disposing && (components != null))
+            {
+                components.Dispose();
+            }
+            base.Dispose(disposing);
+        }
+
+        #region Windows Form Designer generated code
+
+        /// <summary>
+        /// Required method for Designer support - do not modify
+        /// the contents of this method with the code editor.
+        /// </summary>
+        private void InitializeComponent()
+        {
+            this.btnSetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.dtpTime = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
+            this.lblTime = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.lblLoggingInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.nudLogInterval = new System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown();
+            this.lblSeconds = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.btnGetValues = new System.Windows.Forms.Button();
+            this.lblDate = new System.Windows.Forms.Label();
+            this.dtpDate = new System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker();
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).BeginInit();
+            this.SuspendLayout();
+            // 
+            // btnSetValues
+            // 
+            this.btnSetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(168, 136);
+            this.btnSetValues.Name = "btnSetValues";
+            this.btnSetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
+            this.btnSetValues.TabIndex = 0;
+            this.btnSetValues.Text = "Set Values";
+            this.btnSetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnSetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnSetValues_Click);
+            // 
+            // dtpTime
+            // 
+            this.dtpTime.CustomFormat = "";
+            this.dtpTime.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Time;
+            this.dtpTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 61);
+            this.dtpTime.Name = "dtpTime";
+            this.dtpTime.ShowUpDown = true;
+            this.dtpTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
+            this.dtpTime.TabIndex = 1;
+            // 
+            // lblTime
+            // 
+            this.lblTime.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblTime.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblTime.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 67);
+            this.lblTime.Name = "lblTime";
+            this.lblTime.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
+            this.lblTime.TabIndex = 2;
+            this.lblTime.Text = "Device Time:";
+            // 
+            // lblLoggingInterval
+            // 
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 101);
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Name = "lblLoggingInterval";
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(103, 13);
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.TabIndex = 3;
+            this.lblLoggingInterval.Text = "Logging Interval:";
+            // 
+            // nudLogInterval
+            // 
+            this.nudLogInterval.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 94);
+            this.nudLogInterval.Maximum = new decimal(new int[] {
+            60,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            this.nudLogInterval.Minimum = new decimal(new int[] {
+            1,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            this.nudLogInterval.Name = "nudLogInterval";
+            this.nudLogInterval.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(51, 20);
+            this.nudLogInterval.TabIndex = 5;
+            this.nudLogInterval.Value = new decimal(new int[] {
+            5,
+            0,
+            0,
+            0});
+            // 
+            // lblSeconds
+            // 
+            this.lblSeconds.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblSeconds.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(209, 101);
+            this.lblSeconds.Name = "lblSeconds";
+            this.lblSeconds.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(49, 13);
+            this.lblSeconds.TabIndex = 6;
+            this.lblSeconds.Text = "Seconds";
+            // 
+            // btnGetValues
+            // 
+            this.btnGetValues.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(30, 136);
+            this.btnGetValues.Name = "btnGetValues";
+            this.btnGetValues.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(90, 35);
+            this.btnGetValues.TabIndex = 7;
+            this.btnGetValues.Text = "Get Values";
+            this.btnGetValues.UseVisualStyleBackColor = true;
+            this.btnGetValues.Click += new System.EventHandler(this.btnGetValues_Click);
+            // 
+            // lblDate
+            // 
+            this.lblDate.AutoSize = true;
+            this.lblDate.Font = new System.Drawing.Font("Microsoft Sans Serif", 8.25F, System.Drawing.FontStyle.Bold, System.Drawing.GraphicsUnit.Point, ((byte)(0)));
+            this.lblDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(51, 33);
+            this.lblDate.Name = "lblDate";
+            this.lblDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(82, 13);
+            this.lblDate.TabIndex = 8;
+            this.lblDate.Text = "Device Date:";
+            // 
+            // dtpDate
+            // 
+            this.dtpDate.CustomFormat = "dd/MM/yyyy";
+            this.dtpDate.Format = System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePickerFormat.Custom;
+            this.dtpDate.Location = new System.Drawing.Point(148, 27);
+            this.dtpDate.Name = "dtpDate";
+            this.dtpDate.Size = new System.Drawing.Size(110, 20);
+            this.dtpDate.TabIndex = 9;
+            // 
+            // frmDataloggerSettings
+            // 
+            this.AutoScaleDimensions = new System.Drawing.SizeF(6F, 13F);
+            this.AutoScaleMode = System.Windows.Forms.AutoScaleMode.Font;
+            this.ClientSize = new System.Drawing.Size(300, 197);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpDate);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblDate);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnGetValues);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblSeconds);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.nudLogInterval);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblLoggingInterval);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.lblTime);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.dtpTime);
+            this.Controls.Add(this.btnSetValues);
+            this.MaximizeBox = false;
+            this.MinimizeBox = false;
+            this.Name = "frmDataloggerSettings";
+            this.Text = "Datalogger";
+            this.Load += new System.EventHandler(this.frmDataloggerSettings_Load);
+            ((System.ComponentModel.ISupportInitialize)(this.nudLogInterval)).EndInit();
+            this.ResumeLayout(false);
+            this.PerformLayout();
+
+        }
+
+        #endregion
+
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnSetValues;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpTime;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblTime;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblLoggingInterval;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.NumericUpDown nudLogInterval;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblSeconds;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Button btnGetValues;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.Label lblDate;
+        private System.Windows.Forms.DateTimePicker dtpDate;
+    }
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c3d1e15645
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,179 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.ComponentModel;
+using System.Data;
+using System.Drawing;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Text;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+using Hid;
+
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    public partial class frmDataloggerSettings : Form
+    {
+        private const int DEVICE_VID = 0x03EB;
+        private const int DEVICE_PID = 0x2063;
+
+        private struct Device_Report_t
+        {
+            public Byte Day;
+            public Byte Month;
+            public Byte Year;
+
+            public Byte Hour;
+            public Byte Minute;
+            public Byte Second;
+
+            public Byte LogInterval500MS;
+
+            public Byte[] ToReport()
+            {
+                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
+
+                Report[0] = this.Hour;
+                Report[1] = this.Minute;
+                Report[2] = this.Second;
+                Report[3] = this.Day;
+                Report[4] = this.Month;
+                Report[5] = this.Year;
+                Report[6] = this.LogInterval500MS;
+
+                return Report;
+            }
+
+            public void FromReport(Byte[] Report)
+            {
+                this.Hour = Report[0];
+                this.Minute = Report[1];
+                this.Second = Report[2];
+                this.Day = Report[3];
+                this.Month = Report[4];
+                this.Year = Report[5];
+                this.LogInterval500MS = Report[6];
+            }
+        };
+
+        private IDevice GetDeviceConnection()
+        {
+            IDevice[] ConnectedDevices = DeviceFactory.Enumerate(DEVICE_VID, DEVICE_PID);
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = null;
+
+            if (ConnectedDevices.Count() > 0)
+                ConnectionHandle = ConnectedDevices[0];
+            else
+                return null;
+
+            // Fix report handle under Windows
+            if (ConnectionHandle is Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)
+            {
+                ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).AddDevice(0x00,
+                    ((Hid.Win32.Win32DeviceSet)ConnectionHandle).UnallocatedDevices[0]);
+            }
+
+            return ConnectionHandle;
+        }
+
+        public frmDataloggerSettings()
+        {
+            InitializeComponent();
+        }
+
+        private void btnSetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
+
+            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to Datalogger device.");
+                return;
+            }
+
+            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
+            DeviceReport.Day = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Day;
+            DeviceReport.Month = (byte)dtpDate.Value.Month;
+            DeviceReport.Year = (byte)((dtpDate.Value.Year < 2000) ? 0 : (dtpDate.Value.Year - 2000));
+            DeviceReport.Hour = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Hour;
+            DeviceReport.Minute = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Minute;
+            DeviceReport.Second = (byte)dtpTime.Value.Second;
+            DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS = (byte)(nudLogInterval.Value * 2);
+
+            try
+            {
+                ConnectionHandle.Write(0x00, DeviceReport.ToReport());
+                MessageBox.Show("Device parameters updated successfully.");
+            }
+            catch (Exception ex)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void btnGetValues_Click(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+            IDevice ConnectionHandle = GetDeviceConnection();
+
+            if (ConnectionHandle == null)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: Cannot connect to Datalogger device.");
+                return;
+            }
+
+            Device_Report_t DeviceReport = new Device_Report_t();
+
+            try
+            {
+                Byte[] Report = new Byte[7];
+
+                ConnectionHandle.Read(0x00, Report);
+                DeviceReport.FromReport(Report);
+                String msgText = "Device parameters retrieved successfully.";
+
+                try
+                {
+                    dtpDate.Value = new DateTime(
+                        (2000 + DeviceReport.Year),
+                        DeviceReport.Month,
+                        DeviceReport.Day);
+
+                    dtpTime.Value = new DateTime(
+                        DateTime.Now.Year, DateTime.Now.Month, DateTime.Now.Day,
+                        DeviceReport.Hour,
+                        DeviceReport.Minute,
+                        DeviceReport.Second);
+                }
+                catch (Exception ex)
+                {
+                    msgText = "Problem reading device:\n" +
+                        ex.Message +
+                        "\nY:" + DeviceReport.Year.ToString() +
+                        " M:" + DeviceReport.Month.ToString() +
+                        " D:" + DeviceReport.Day.ToString() +
+                        "\n\nUsing current date and time.";
+                    dtpDate.Value = DateTime.Now;
+                    dtpTime.Value = DateTime.Now;
+                }
+
+                try
+                {
+                    nudLogInterval.Value = (DeviceReport.LogInterval500MS / 2);
+                }
+                catch (Exception ex)
+                {
+                    nudLogInterval.Value = nudLogInterval.Minimum;
+                }
+
+                MessageBox.Show(msgText);
+            }
+            catch (Exception ex)
+            {
+                MessageBox.Show("Error: " + ex.Message);
+            }
+        }
+
+        private void frmDataloggerSettings_Load(object sender, EventArgs e)
+        {
+
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..19dc0dd8b3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/DataLoggerSettings.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:import namespace="http://www.w3.org/XML/1998/namespace" />
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" use="required" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+              <xsd:attribute ref="xml:space" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4c19edd212
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Linux.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2a7112fc09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Net.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3693c6ca04
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Hid.Win32.dll
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2588e60c14
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Program.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,21 @@
+using System;
+using System.Collections.Generic;
+using System.Linq;
+using System.Windows.Forms;
+
+namespace Project1HostApp
+{
+    static class Program
+    {
+        /// <summary>
+        /// The main entry point for the application.
+        /// </summary>
+        [STAThread]
+        static void Main()
+        {
+            Application.EnableVisualStyles();
+            Application.SetCompatibleTextRenderingDefault(false);
+            Application.Run(new frmDataloggerSettings());
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a4d0ab1d5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/AssemblyInfo.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+using System.Reflection;
+using System.Runtime.CompilerServices;
+using System.Runtime.InteropServices;
+
+// General Information about an assembly is controlled through the following 
+// set of attributes. Change these attribute values to modify the information
+// associated with an assembly.
+[assembly: AssemblyTitle("TempDataLoggerHostApp")]
+[assembly: AssemblyDescription("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyConfiguration("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCompany("Dean Camera")]
+[assembly: AssemblyProduct("Temp Datalogger HostApp")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCopyright("Copyright © Dean Camera 2011")]
+[assembly: AssemblyTrademark("")]
+[assembly: AssemblyCulture("")]
+
+// Setting ComVisible to false makes the types in this assembly not visible 
+// to COM components.  If you need to access a type in this assembly from 
+// COM, set the ComVisible attribute to true on that type.
+[assembly: ComVisible(false)]
+
+// The following GUID is for the ID of the typelib if this project is exposed to COM
+[assembly: Guid("f41d67c7-13b2-4710-9e0f-f78e7f2bf2e9")]
+
+// Version information for an assembly consists of the following four values:
+//
+//      Major Version
+//      Minor Version 
+//      Build Number
+//      Revision
+//
+// You can specify all the values or you can default the Build and Revision Numbers 
+// by using the '*' as shown below:
+// [assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.*")]
+[assembly: AssemblyVersion("1.0.0.0")]
+[assembly: AssemblyFileVersion("1.0.0.0")]
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..63b1af40d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties {
+    using System;
+    
+    
+    /// <summary>
+    ///   A strongly-typed resource class, for looking up localized strings, etc.
+    /// </summary>
+    // This class was auto-generated by the StronglyTypedResourceBuilder
+    // class via a tool like ResGen or Visual Studio.
+    // To add or remove a member, edit your .ResX file then rerun ResGen
+    // with the /str option, or rebuild your VS project.
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("System.Resources.Tools.StronglyTypedResourceBuilder", "4.0.0.0")]
+    [global::System.Diagnostics.DebuggerNonUserCodeAttribute()]
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    internal class Resources {
+        
+        private static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager resourceMan;
+        
+        private static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo resourceCulture;
+        
+        [global::System.Diagnostics.CodeAnalysis.SuppressMessageAttribute("Microsoft.Performance", "CA1811:AvoidUncalledPrivateCode")]
+        internal Resources() {
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Returns the cached ResourceManager instance used by this class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Resources.ResourceManager ResourceManager {
+            get {
+                if (object.ReferenceEquals(resourceMan, null)) {
+                    global::System.Resources.ResourceManager temp = new global::System.Resources.ResourceManager("TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties.Resources", typeof(Resources).Assembly);
+                    resourceMan = temp;
+                }
+                return resourceMan;
+            }
+        }
+        
+        /// <summary>
+        ///   Overrides the current thread's CurrentUICulture property for all
+        ///   resource lookups using this strongly typed resource class.
+        /// </summary>
+        [global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableAttribute(global::System.ComponentModel.EditorBrowsableState.Advanced)]
+        internal static global::System.Globalization.CultureInfo Culture {
+            get {
+                return resourceCulture;
+            }
+            set {
+                resourceCulture = value;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..af7dbebbac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Resources.resx
@@ -0,0 +1,117 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<root>
+  <!-- 
+    Microsoft ResX Schema 
+    
+    Version 2.0
+    
+    The primary goals of this format is to allow a simple XML format 
+    that is mostly human readable. The generation and parsing of the 
+    various data types are done through the TypeConverter classes 
+    associated with the data types.
+    
+    Example:
+    
+    ... ado.net/XML headers & schema ...
+    <resheader name="resmimetype">text/microsoft-resx</resheader>
+    <resheader name="version">2.0</resheader>
+    <resheader name="reader">System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <resheader name="writer">System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, ...</resheader>
+    <data name="Name1"><value>this is my long string</value><comment>this is a comment</comment></data>
+    <data name="Color1" type="System.Drawing.Color, System.Drawing">Blue</data>
+    <data name="Bitmap1" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded serialized .NET Framework object]</value>
+    </data>
+    <data name="Icon1" type="System.Drawing.Icon, System.Drawing" mimetype="application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64">
+        <value>[base64 mime encoded string representing a byte array form of the .NET Framework object]</value>
+        <comment>This is a comment</comment>
+    </data>
+                
+    There are any number of "resheader" rows that contain simple 
+    name/value pairs.
+    
+    Each data row contains a name, and value. The row also contains a 
+    type or mimetype. Type corresponds to a .NET class that support 
+    text/value conversion through the TypeConverter architecture. 
+    Classes that don't support this are serialized and stored with the 
+    mimetype set.
+    
+    The mimetype is used for serialized objects, and tells the 
+    ResXResourceReader how to depersist the object. This is currently not 
+    extensible. For a given mimetype the value must be set accordingly:
+    
+    Note - application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64 is the format 
+    that the ResXResourceWriter will generate, however the reader can 
+    read any of the formats listed below.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.binary.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Serialization.Formatters.Binary.BinaryFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.soap.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized with 
+            : System.Runtime.Serialization.Formatters.Soap.SoapFormatter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+
+    mimetype: application/x-microsoft.net.object.bytearray.base64
+    value   : The object must be serialized into a byte array 
+            : using a System.ComponentModel.TypeConverter
+            : and then encoded with base64 encoding.
+    -->
+  <xsd:schema id="root" xmlns="" xmlns:xsd="http://www.w3.org/2001/XMLSchema" xmlns:msdata="urn:schemas-microsoft-com:xml-msdata">
+    <xsd:element name="root" msdata:IsDataSet="true">
+      <xsd:complexType>
+        <xsd:choice maxOccurs="unbounded">
+          <xsd:element name="metadata">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="assembly">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:attribute name="alias" type="xsd:string" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="data">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+                <xsd:element name="comment" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="2" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="type" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="3" />
+              <xsd:attribute name="mimetype" type="xsd:string" msdata:Ordinal="4" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+          <xsd:element name="resheader">
+            <xsd:complexType>
+              <xsd:sequence>
+                <xsd:element name="value" type="xsd:string" minOccurs="0" msdata:Ordinal="1" />
+              </xsd:sequence>
+              <xsd:attribute name="name" type="xsd:string" use="required" />
+            </xsd:complexType>
+          </xsd:element>
+        </xsd:choice>
+      </xsd:complexType>
+    </xsd:element>
+  </xsd:schema>
+  <resheader name="resmimetype">
+    <value>text/microsoft-resx</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="version">
+    <value>2.0</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="reader">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceReader, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+  <resheader name="writer">
+    <value>System.Resources.ResXResourceWriter, System.Windows.Forms, Version=2.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, PublicKeyToken=b77a5c561934e089</value>
+  </resheader>
+</root>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..95fc3ad588
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.Designer.cs
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+// <auto-generated>
+//     This code was generated by a tool.
+//     Runtime Version:4.0.30319.239
+//
+//     Changes to this file may cause incorrect behavior and will be lost if
+//     the code is regenerated.
+// </auto-generated>
+//------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+namespace TemperatureLoggerHostApp.Properties {
+    
+    
+    [global::System.Runtime.CompilerServices.CompilerGeneratedAttribute()]
+    [global::System.CodeDom.Compiler.GeneratedCodeAttribute("Microsoft.VisualStudio.Editors.SettingsDesigner.SettingsSingleFileGenerator", "10.0.0.0")]
+    internal sealed partial class Settings : global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase {
+        
+        private static Settings defaultInstance = ((Settings)(global::System.Configuration.ApplicationSettingsBase.Synchronized(new Settings())));
+        
+        public static Settings Default {
+            get {
+                return defaultInstance;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+}
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..39645652af
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/Properties/Settings.settings
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+<?xml version='1.0' encoding='utf-8'?>
+<SettingsFile xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/VisualStudio/2004/01/settings" CurrentProfile="(Default)">
+  <Profiles>
+    <Profile Name="(Default)" />
+  </Profiles>
+  <Settings />
+</SettingsFile>
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ab6b9a83a7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/README.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,24 @@
+http://en.sourceforge.jp/projects/sfnet_libhidnet/
+
+This library has been tested on Windows Vista 32bit, Windows Vista 64bit,
+Windows XP 32bit and Debian (Lenny) AMD64 but should work on any version of
+Windows that can run the .NET framework 2.0 and any other operating system
+that has both hiddev and Mono.
+
+Any additions must be tested and work on Windows and Linux, on both 32 and
+64 bit. Windows 64 bit testing is particularly important as it is often
+neglected.
+
+
+Hid.Linux.dll was compiled under Linux with Mono (mcs) and uses no generics.
+
+Hid.Win32.dll and Hid.Net.dll were compiled under Windows with the .NET
+Framework v2.0.50727 but are also tested to compile with Mono (gmcs).
+
+
+A good starting point when using this library is Hid.DeviceFactory's Enumerate
+methods.
+
+LogitechMX5000.cs is a simple example of how the library can be used. Other
+examples on common devices are welcomed.
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..8517d6f42a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp/TempLoggerHostApp.csproj
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+<?xml version="1.0" encoding="utf-8"?>
+<Project ToolsVersion="4.0" DefaultTargets="Build" xmlns="http://schemas.microsoft.com/developer/msbuild/2003">
+  <PropertyGroup>
+    <Configuration Condition=" '$(Configuration)' == '' ">Debug</Configuration>
+    <Platform Condition=" '$(Platform)' == '' ">AnyCPU</Platform>
+    <ProductVersion>9.0.21022</ProductVersion>
+    <SchemaVersion>2.0</SchemaVersion>
+    <ProjectGuid>{A2D66069-8CF9-4104-828C-49A73D7DB5D1}</ProjectGuid>
+    <OutputType>WinExe</OutputType>
+    <AppDesignerFolder>Properties</AppDesignerFolder>
+    <RootNamespace>TemperatureLoggerHostApp</RootNamespace>
+    <AssemblyName>TemperatureLoggerHostApp</AssemblyName>
+    <TargetFrameworkVersion>v3.5</TargetFrameworkVersion>
+    <FileAlignment>512</FileAlignment>
+    <FileUpgradeFlags>
+    </FileUpgradeFlags>
+    <OldToolsVersion>3.5</OldToolsVersion>
+    <UpgradeBackupLocation />
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Debug|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugSymbols>true</DebugSymbols>
+    <DebugType>full</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>false</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Debug\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>DEBUG;TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <PropertyGroup Condition=" '$(Configuration)|$(Platform)' == 'Release|AnyCPU' ">
+    <DebugType>pdbonly</DebugType>
+    <Optimize>true</Optimize>
+    <OutputPath>bin\Release\</OutputPath>
+    <DefineConstants>TRACE</DefineConstants>
+    <ErrorReport>prompt</ErrorReport>
+    <WarningLevel>4</WarningLevel>
+  </PropertyGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Reference Include="Hid.Net, Version=1.0.0.0, Culture=neutral, processorArchitecture=MSIL">
+      <SpecificVersion>False</SpecificVersion>
+      <HintPath>.\Hid.Net.dll</HintPath>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Core">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml.Linq">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data.DataSetExtensions">
+      <RequiredTargetFramework>3.5</RequiredTargetFramework>
+    </Reference>
+    <Reference Include="System.Data" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Deployment" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Drawing" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Windows.Forms" />
+    <Reference Include="System.Xml" />
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <ItemGroup>
+    <Compile Include="DataLoggerSettings.cs">
+      <SubType>Form</SubType>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="DataLoggerSettings.Designer.cs">
+      <DependentUpon>DataLoggerSettings.cs</DependentUpon>
+    </Compile>
+    <Compile Include="Program.cs" />
+    <Compile Include="Properties\AssemblyInfo.cs" />
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="DataLoggerSettings.resx">
+      <DependentUpon>DataLoggerSettings.cs</DependentUpon>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <EmbeddedResource Include="Properties\Resources.resx">
+      <Generator>ResXFileCodeGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Resources.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+      <SubType>Designer</SubType>
+    </EmbeddedResource>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Resources.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Resources.resx</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTime>True</DesignTime>
+    </Compile>
+    <None Include="Properties\Settings.settings">
+      <Generator>SettingsSingleFileGenerator</Generator>
+      <LastGenOutput>Settings.Designer.cs</LastGenOutput>
+    </None>
+    <Compile Include="Properties\Settings.Designer.cs">
+      <AutoGen>True</AutoGen>
+      <DependentUpon>Settings.settings</DependentUpon>
+      <DesignTimeSharedInput>True</DesignTimeSharedInput>
+    </Compile>
+  </ItemGroup>
+  <Import Project="$(MSBuildToolsPath)\Microsoft.CSharp.targets" />
+  <!-- To modify your build process, add your task inside one of the targets below and uncomment it. 
+       Other similar extension points exist, see Microsoft.Common.targets.
+  <Target Name="BeforeBuild">
+  </Target>
+  <Target Name="AfterBuild">
+  </Target>
+  -->
+</Project>
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5a6bf2da11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TempLogHostApp_Python/temp_log_config.py
@@ -0,0 +1,99 @@
+"""
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+"""
+
+"""
+    Front-end configuration app for the TempDataLogger project. This script
+    configures the logger to the current system time and date, with a user
+    defined logging interval.
+
+    The logging interval should be specified in milliseconds and is rounded to
+    a multiple of 500ms.
+
+    Usage:
+        python temp_log_config.py <Log_Interval>
+
+    Example:
+        python temp_log_config.py 500
+
+    Requires the pywinusb library (https://pypi.python.org/pypi/pywinusb/).
+"""
+
+import sys
+from datetime import datetime
+import pywinusb.hid as hid
+
+# Generic HID device VID, PID and report payload length (length is increased
+# by one to account for the Report ID byte that must be pre-pended)
+device_vid = 0x03EB
+device_pid = 0x2063
+report_length = 1 + 7
+
+
+def get_hid_device_handle():
+    hid_device_filter = hid.HidDeviceFilter(vendor_id=device_vid,
+                                            product_id=device_pid)
+
+    valid_hid_devices = hid_device_filter.get_devices()
+
+    if len(valid_hid_devices) is 0:
+        return None
+    else:
+        return valid_hid_devices[0]
+
+
+def configure_temp_log_device(device, time_date, log_interval_500ms):
+    # Report data for the demo is the report ID (always zero)
+    report_data = [0]
+
+    # Followed by the time/date data
+    report_data.extend([time_date.hour, time_date.minute,
+                        time_date.second, time_date.day,
+                        time_date.month, time_date.year - 2000])
+
+    # Lastly the log interval in 500ms units of time
+    report_data.extend([log_interval_500ms])
+
+    # Zero-extend the array to the length the report should be
+    report_data.extend([0] * (report_length - len(report_data)))
+
+    # Send the generated report to the device
+    device.send_output_report(report_data)
+
+
+def main(time_date, log_interval_500ms):
+    hid_device = get_hid_device_handle()
+
+    if hid_device is None:
+        print("No valid HID device found.")
+        sys.exit(1)
+
+    try:
+        hid_device.open()
+
+        print("Connected to device 0x%04X/0x%04X - %s [%s]" %
+              (hid_device.vendor_id, hid_device.product_id,
+               hid_device.product_name, hid_device.vendor_name))
+
+        configure_temp_log_device(hid_device, time_date, log_interval_500ms)
+
+        print("Time/Date is now set to %s" % time_date)
+        print("Log interval is now set to every %0.1fs" % (log_interval_500ms * (500.0 / 1000.0)))
+
+    finally:
+        hid_device.close()
+
+
+if __name__ == '__main__':
+    time_date = datetime.now()
+    log_interval_500ms = (int(sys.argv[1]) / 500) if len(sys.argv) > 1 else 2
+
+    # Clamp the log interval to the allowable range
+    log_interval_500ms = max(log_interval_500ms, 0x01)
+    log_interval_500ms = min(log_interval_500ms, 0xFF)
+
+    main(time_date, log_interval_500ms)
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4d4e0b5e84
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/TemperatureDataLogger.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage Temperature Datalogger Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Demo Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this demo.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4) - <i>those with >16KB of FLASH memory only</i>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this demo.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Classes:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Mass Storage Device \n
+ *        Human Interface Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclasses:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Bulk-Only Transport \n
+ *        Keyboard Subclass</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification \n
+ *        USBIF HID Specification, USBIF HID Usage Tables</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Temperature Data Logger project. This project is a very basic USB data logger for the current temperature as reported by
+ *  the board's temperature sensor, writing the temperature to a file stored on the board's Dataflash in a FAT filesystem
+ *  each time a specified interval elapses. When inserted into a PC, the datalogger will appear as a standard USB Mass Storage
+ *  device with a single text file, which contains the logged data. Files are named according to the current date when the
+ *  logging commences.
+ *
+ *  A DS1307 or compatible RTC IC is designed to be attached to the AVR's TWI bus, for the management of timestamps on the
+ *  sampled data. This project will not function correctly if the RTC chip is omitted unless the DUMMY_RTC compile time token
+ *  is specified - see \ref Sec_Options.
+ *
+ *  Due to the host's need for exclusive access to the file system, the device will not log samples while connected to a host.
+ *  For the logger to store data, the Dataflash must first be formatted by the host so that it contains a valid FAT file system.
+ *
+ *  This project uses the FatFS library from ELM Chan (http://elm-chan.org/fsw/ff/00index_e.html) and the .NET HID device library
+ *  LibHIDNet (http://sourceforge.net/projects/libhidnet/).
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this demo, which can control the demo behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DUMMY_RTC</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When a DS1307 RTC chip is not fitted, this token can be defined to make the demo use a dummy software RTC using the system
+ *        clock. This is less accurate and does not store the set time and date into non-volatile memory.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bf7ee2c3f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,72 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="Temperature Datalogger" id="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.temp_datalogger" caption="Temperature Datalogger">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Temperature Datalogger project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="HID Class"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="TemperatureDataLogger.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="TempLogHostApp"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="directory" value="TempLogHostApp_Python"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="TempDataLogger.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="TempDataLogger.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/RTC.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/RTC.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/FATFs/"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/integer.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.temperature"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.adc"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.twi"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a9f3353794
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2366 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "Temperature Datalogger Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/ \
+                         TempLogHostApp/ \
+                         TempLogHostApp_Python/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eb662f66bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/TempDataLogger/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = TempDataLogger
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c Lib/DataflashManager.c Lib/RTC.c Lib/SCSI.c Lib/FATFs/diskio.c Lib/FATFs/ff.c \
+               $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS) $(LUFA_SRC_SERIAL) $(LUFA_SRC_TWI) $(LUFA_SRC_TEMPERATURE)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4d5f58a4ac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1000c4a343
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = (USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED | USB_CONFIG_ATTR_SELFPOWERED),
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA USB-RS232 Adapter");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ce014c632a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,110 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b00fab6a44
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/LUFA USBtoSerial.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA USBtoSerial.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB to Serial"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..343b51ba5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.c
@@ -0,0 +1,254 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the USBtoSerial project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "USBtoSerial.h"
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
+static RingBuffer_t USBtoUSART_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USBtoUSART_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+static RingBuffer_t USARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t      USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USBtoUSART_Buffer_Data));
+	RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data));
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		/* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */
+		if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USBtoUSART_Buffer)))
+		{
+			int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+			/* Store received byte into the USART transmit buffer */
+			if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+			  RingBuffer_Insert(&USBtoUSART_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+		}
+
+		uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+		if (BufferCount)
+		{
+			Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface.Config.DataINEndpoint.Address);
+
+			/* Check if a packet is already enqueued to the host - if so, we shouldn't try to send more data
+			 * until it completes as there is a chance nothing is listening and a lengthy timeout could occur */
+			if (Endpoint_IsINReady())
+			{
+				/* Never send more than one bank size less one byte to the host at a time, so that we don't block
+				 * while a Zero Length Packet (ZLP) to terminate the transfer is sent if the host isn't listening */
+				uint8_t BytesToSend = MIN(BufferCount, (CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE - 1));
+
+				/* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
+				while (BytesToSend--)
+				{
+					/* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */
+					if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+											RingBuffer_Peek(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+					{
+						break;
+					}
+
+					/* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */
+					RingBuffer_Remove(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+
+		/* Load the next byte from the USART transmit buffer into the USART if transmit buffer space is available */
+		if (Serial_IsSendReady() && !(RingBuffer_IsEmpty(&USBtoUSART_Buffer)))
+		  Serial_SendByte(RingBuffer_Remove(&USBtoUSART_Buffer));
+
+		CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of data from the serial port, placing received bytes into a circular buffer
+ *  for later transmission to the host.
+ */
+ISR(USART1_RX_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	uint8_t ReceivedByte = UDR1;
+
+	if ((USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured) && !(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer)))
+	  RingBuffer_Insert(&USARTtoUSB_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t ConfigMask = 0;
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.ParityType)
+	{
+		case CDC_PARITY_Odd:
+			ConfigMask = ((1 << UPM11) | (1 << UPM10));
+			break;
+		case CDC_PARITY_Even:
+			ConfigMask = (1 << UPM11);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	if (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.CharFormat == CDC_LINEENCODING_TwoStopBits)
+	  ConfigMask |= (1 << USBS1);
+
+	switch (CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.DataBits)
+	{
+		case 6:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ10);
+			break;
+		case 7:
+			ConfigMask |= (1 << UCSZ11);
+			break;
+		case 8:
+			ConfigMask |= ((1 << UCSZ11) | (1 << UCSZ10));
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Keep the TX line held high (idle) while the USART is reconfigured */
+	PORTD |= (1 << 3);
+
+	/* Must turn off USART before reconfiguring it, otherwise incorrect operation may occur */
+	UCSR1B = 0;
+	UCSR1A = 0;
+	UCSR1C = 0;
+
+	/* Set the new baud rate before configuring the USART */
+	UBRR1  = SERIAL_2X_UBBRVAL(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+
+	/* Reconfigure the USART in double speed mode for a wider baud rate range at the expense of accuracy */
+	UCSR1C = ConfigMask;
+	UCSR1A = (1 << U2X1);
+	UCSR1B = ((1 << RXCIE1) | (1 << TXEN1) | (1 << RXEN1));
+
+	/* Release the TX line after the USART has been reconfigured */
+	PORTD &= ~(1 << 3);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..afa3e43d3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.h
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBtoSerial.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USB_SERIAL_H_
+#define _USB_SERIAL_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/Serial.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY      LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        (LEDS_LED2 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0620f93938
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/USBtoSerial.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,78 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage USB to Serial Converter Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *  \li Series 6 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx6)
+ *  \li Series 4 USB AVRs (ATMEGAxxU4)
+ *  \li Series 2 USB AVRs (AT90USBxx2, ATMEGAxxU2)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  USB to Serial bridge project. This project allows a USB AVR to serve
+ *  as a USB to USART bridge between a USB host and a device lacking a
+ *  USB port. When programmed into a USB AVR, the AVR will enumerate as a
+ *  virtual COM port.
+ *
+ *  The AVR's hardware USART's settings will change to mirror as closely as
+ *  possible the serial settings set on the host. However, due to hardware
+ *  limitations, some options may not be supported (baud rates with unacceptable
+ *  error rates at the AVR's clock speed, data lengths other than 6, 7 or 8 bits,
+ *  1.5 stop bits, parity other than none, even or odd).
+ *
+ *  After running this project for the first time on a new computer,
+ *  you will need to supply the .INF file located in this project
+ *  project's directory as the device's driver when running under
+ *  Windows. This will enable Windows to use its inbuilt CDC drivers,
+ *  negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other
+ *  Operating Systems should automatically use their own inbuilt
+ *  CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>
+ *     None
+ *    </td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5afcafe7c2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="USB to Serial Converter" id="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.usb_to_serial" caption="USB to Serial Converter">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		USB to Serial USART converter project.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="USBtoSerial.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA USBtoSerial.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="USBtoSerial.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USBtoSerial.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.usart"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d5e415aa66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - USB to Serial Device Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..72daabd900
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/USBtoSerial/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = USBtoSerial
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..40ebe7ddc1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,73 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
+	#define ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER
+	#define ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER
+	#define MAX_URI_LENGTH                50
+
+	#define DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS             (uint8_t[]){ 10,   0,   0,   2}
+	#define DEVICE_NETMASK                (uint8_t[]){255, 255, 255,   0}
+	#define DEVICE_GATEWAY                (uint8_t[]){ 10,   0,   0,   1}
+	#define SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS            (uint8_t[]){  1,   0,   1,   0,   1,   0}
+
+	#define UIP_CONF_UDP                  (defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER))
+	#define UIP_CONF_BROADCAST            1
+	#define UIP_CONF_TCP                  1
+	#define UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS            1
+	#define UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS      3
+	#define UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS      5
+	#define UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE          1514
+	#define UIP_CONF_LL_802154            0
+	#define UIP_CONF_LL_80211             0
+	#define UIP_CONF_ROUTER               0
+	#define UIP_CONF_ICMP6                0
+	#define UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH    1
+	#define UIP_URGDATA                   0
+	#define UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM               0
+	#define UIP_ARCH_ADD32                0
+	#define UIP_NEIGHBOR_CONF_ADDRTYPE    0
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fa407999e1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+//		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+//		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      8
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+//		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              0
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7be6e4b217
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,295 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "Descriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceClass,
+	.SubClass               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = USB_CSCP_IADDeviceProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x2069,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 3,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_IAD =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t), .Type = DTYPE_InterfaceAssociation},
+
+			.FirstInterfaceIndex    = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
+
+			.IADStrIndex            = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_VendorSpecificProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x00,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.RNDIS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = MS_CSCP_MassStorageClass,
+			.SubClass               = MS_CSCP_SCSITransparentSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = MS_CSCP_BulkOnlyTransportProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.MS_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA Webserver");
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6b656e4b6e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Descriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Descriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR         (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the Mass Storage host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the Mass Storage data endpoints. */
+		#define MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE         64
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 5)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 1)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 2)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                64
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t  Config;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Command Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_Association_t CDC_IAD;
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t  CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t     CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t   CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// RNDIS CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              RNDIS_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              RNDIS_DataInEndpoint;
+
+			// Mass Storage Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t             MS_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              MS_DataInEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t              MS_DataOutEndpoint;
+		} USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI     = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI     = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage = 2, /**< Mass storage interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c77de8f6bb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,59 @@
+;     Windows LUFA RNDIS Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Net
+ClassGuid={4d36e972-e325-11ce-bfc1-08002be10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[ControlFlags]
+ExcludeFromSelect=*
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Characteristics=0x84 ; NCF_PHYSICAL + NCF_HAS_UI
+BusType=15
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi
+AddReg=Rndis_AddReg_Vista
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+include=netrndis.inf
+needs=Usb_Rndis.ndi.Services
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_2069
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA USB RNDIS Demo"
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..3b1d2d7028
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,208 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  DHCP Client Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will retrieve IP configuration settings from the
+ *  DHCP server on the network.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C
+#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Initialization function for the DHCP client. */
+void DHCPClientApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
+	struct uip_udp_conn* Connection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
+	if (Connection != NULL)
+	{
+		uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState = &Connection->appstate;
+		uip_udp_bind(Connection, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT));
+
+		/* Set the initial client state */
+		AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+
+		/* Set timeout period to half a second for a DHCP server to respond */
+		timer_set(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP client. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack
+ *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_udp_conn->appstate;
+	DHCP_Header_t*      const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
+	uint16_t                  AppDataSize = 0;
+
+	switch (AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState)
+	{
+		case DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover:
+			/* Clear all DHCP settings, reset client IP address */
+			memset(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data, 0x00, sizeof(AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data));
+			uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+
+			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_DISCOVER, AppState);
+
+			/* Add the required DHCP options list to the packet */
+			uint8_t RequiredOptionList[] = {DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER, DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER};
+			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST, sizeof(RequiredOptionList),
+			                                    RequiredOptionList);
+
+			/* Send the DHCP DISCOVER packet */
+			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
+			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer;
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer:
+			if (!(uip_newdata()))
+			{
+				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
+				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
+				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+
+				break;
+			}
+
+			uint8_t OfferResponse_MessageType;
+			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
+			    DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &OfferResponse_MessageType) &&
+			    (OfferResponse_MessageType == DHCP_OFFER))
+			{
+				/* Received a DHCP offer for an IP address, copy over values for later request */
+				memcpy(&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, &AppData->YourIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
+				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,      &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
+				DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID,   &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
+
+				timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendRequest;
+			}
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_SendRequest:
+			/* Fill out the DHCP response header */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_REQUEST, AppState);
+
+			/* Add the DHCP REQUESTED IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
+			                                    &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+
+			/* Add the DHCP SERVER IP ADDRESS option to the packet */
+			AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t),
+			                                    &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP);
+
+			/* Send the DHCP REQUEST packet */
+			uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+			/* Reset the timeout timer, progress to next state */
+			timer_reset(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout);
+			AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK;
+
+			break;
+		case DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK:
+			if (!(uip_newdata()))
+			{
+				/* Check if the DHCP timeout period has expired while waiting for a response */
+				if (timer_expired(&AppState->DHCPClient.Timeout))
+				  AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover;
+
+				break;
+			}
+
+			uint8_t RequestResponse_MessageType;
+			if ((AppData->TransactionID == DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID) &&
+			    DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &RequestResponse_MessageType) &&
+			    (RequestResponse_MessageType == DHCP_ACK))
+			{
+				/* Set the new network parameters from the DHCP server */
+				uip_sethostaddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP);
+				uip_setnetmask((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.Netmask);
+				uip_setdraddr((uip_ipaddr_t*)&AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.GatewayIP);
+
+				AppState->DHCPClient.CurrentState = DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
+ *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP server.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeader       Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
+ *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType  DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
+ *  \param[in]  AppState         Application state of the current UDP connection
+ *
+ *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
+ */
+static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState)
+{
+	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
+ 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	/* Fill out the DHCP packet header */
+	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
+	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID;
+	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = HTONS(BOOTP_BROADCAST);
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientIP,     &uip_hostaddr,        sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP,       &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.AllocatedIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &AppState->DHCPClient.DHCPOffer_Data.ServerIP,    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, &MACAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
+	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
+
+	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
+	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..298ff7354a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPClientApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCPClientApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
+#define _DHCPCLIENT_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+		#include "../Webserver.h"
+		#include "DHCPCommon.h"
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each DHCP connection to a DHCP client. */
+		enum DHCP_Client_States_t
+		{
+			DHCP_STATE_SendDiscover,  /**< Send DISCOVER packet to retrieve DHCP lease offers */
+			DHCP_STATE_WaitForOffer,  /**< Waiting for OFFER packet giving available DHCP leases */
+			DHCP_STATE_SendRequest,   /**< Send REQUEST packet to request a DHCP lease */
+			DHCP_STATE_WaitForACK,    /**< Wait for ACK packet to complete the DHCP lease */
+			DHCP_STATE_AddressLeased, /**< DHCP address has been leased from a DHCP server */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DHCPClientApp_Init(void);
+		void DHCPClientApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPCLIENTAPP_C)
+			static uint16_t DHCPClientApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+			                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+			                                             uip_udp_appstate_t* const AppState);
+		#endif
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7dbcaf0691
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.c
@@ -0,0 +1,103 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Common DHCP routines to manage DHCP packet data.
+ */
+
+#include "DHCPCommon.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT) || defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Sets the given DHCP option in the DHCP packet's option list. This automatically moves the
+ *  end of options terminator past the new option in the options list.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
+ *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to add to the list
+ *  \param[in]     DataLen         Size in bytes of the option data to add
+ *  \param[in]     OptionData      Buffer where the option's data is to be sourced from
+ *
+ *  \return Number of bytes added to the DHCP packet
+ */
+uint8_t DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+                             const uint8_t Option,
+                             const uint8_t DataLen,
+                             void* const OptionData)
+{
+	/* Skip through the DHCP options list until the terminator option is found */
+	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	  DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
+
+	/* Overwrite the existing terminator with the new option, add a new terminator at the end of the list */
+	DHCPOptionList[0] = Option;
+	DHCPOptionList[1] = DataLen;
+	memcpy(&DHCPOptionList[2], OptionData, DataLen);
+	DHCPOptionList[2 + DataLen] = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (2 + DataLen);
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the given option's data (if present) from the DHCP packet's options list.
+ *
+ *  \param[in,out] DHCPOptionList  Pointer to the start of the DHCP packet's options list
+ *  \param[in]     Option          DHCP option to retrieve to the list
+ *  \param[out]    Destination     Buffer where the option's data is to be written to if found
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the option was found in the DHCP packet's options list, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+                          const uint8_t Option,
+                          void* const Destination)
+{
+	/* Look through the incoming DHCP packet's options list for the requested option */
+	while (*DHCPOptionList != DHCP_OPTION_END)
+	{
+		/* Check if the current DHCP option in the packet is the one requested */
+		if (DHCPOptionList[0] == Option)
+		{
+			/* Copy request option's data to the destination buffer */
+			memcpy(Destination, &DHCPOptionList[2], DHCPOptionList[1]);
+
+			/* Indicate that the requested option data was successfully retrieved */
+			return true;
+		}
+
+		/* Skip to next DHCP option in the options list */
+		DHCPOptionList += (DHCPOptionList[1] + 2);
+	}
+
+	/* Requested option not found in the incoming packet's DHCP options list */
+	return false;
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..1ded5420aa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPCommon.h
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for common DHCP defines.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCP_COMMON_H_
+#define _DHCP_COMMON_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdint.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP server. */
+		#define DHCP_SERVER_PORT          67
+
+		/** UDP listen port for a BOOTP client. */
+		#define DHCP_CLIENT_PORT          68
+
+		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REQUEST message. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST       0x01
+
+		/** BOOTP message type for a BOOTP REPLY message. */
+		#define DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY         0x02
+
+		/** BOOTP flag for a BOOTP broadcast message. */
+		#define BOOTP_BROADCAST           0x8000
+
+		/** Magic DHCP cookie for a BOOTP message to identify it as a DHCP message. */
+		#define DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE         0x63538263
+
+		/** Unique transaction ID used to identify DHCP responses to the client. */
+		#define DHCP_TRANSACTION_ID       0x13245466
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a DISCOVER message. */
+		#define DHCP_DISCOVER             1
+
+		/** DHCP message type for an OFFER message. */
+		#define DHCP_OFFER                2
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a REQUEST message. */
+		#define DHCP_REQUEST              3
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a DECLINE message. */
+		#define DHCP_DECLINE              4
+
+		/** DHCP message type for an ACK message. */
+		#define DHCP_ACK                  5
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a NAK message. */
+		#define DHCP_NAK                  6
+
+		/** DHCP message type for a RELEASE message. */
+		#define DHCP_RELEASE              7
+
+		/** DHCP medium type for standard Ethernet. */
+		#define DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET       1
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network subnet mask. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK   1
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network gateway IP. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER        3
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the network DNS server. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_DNS_SERVER    6
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the requested client IP address. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR    50
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the IP address lease time. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_LEASE_TIME    51
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP message type. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE      53
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the DHCP server IP. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_SERVER_ID     54
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the list of required options from the server. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_REQ_LIST      55
+
+		/** DHCP message option for the options list terminator. */
+		#define DHCP_OPTION_END           255
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a DHCP packet inside an Ethernet frame. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			uint8_t      Operation; /**< DHCP operation, either DHCP_OP_BOOTREQUEST or DHCP_OP_BOOTREPLY */
+			uint8_t      HardwareType; /**< Hardware carrier type constant */
+			uint8_t      HardwareAddressLength;  /**< Length in bytes of a hardware (MAC) address on the network */
+			uint8_t      Hops; /**< Number of hops required to reach the server, unused */
+
+			uint32_t     TransactionID; /**< Unique ID of the DHCP packet, for positive matching between sent and received packets */
+
+			uint16_t     ElapsedSeconds; /**< Elapsed seconds since the request was made */
+			uint16_t     Flags; /**< BOOTP packet flags */
+
+			uip_ipaddr_t ClientIP; /**< Client IP address, if already leased an IP */
+			uip_ipaddr_t YourIP; /**< Client IP address */
+			uip_ipaddr_t NextServerIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uip_ipaddr_t RelayAgentIP; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint8_t      ClientHardwareAddress[16]; /**< Hardware (MAC) address of the client making a request to the DHCP server */
+			uint8_t      ServerHostnameString[64]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+			uint8_t      BootFileName[128]; /**< Legacy BOOTP protocol field, unused for DHCP */
+
+			uint32_t     Cookie; /**< Magic BOOTP protocol cookie to indicate a valid packet */
+
+			uint8_t      Options[]; /**< DHCP message options */
+		} DHCP_Header_t;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint8_t  DHCPCommon_SetOption(uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+			                          const uint8_t Option,
+			                          const uint8_t DataLen,
+			                          void* const OptionData);
+		bool     DHCPCommon_GetOption(const uint8_t* DHCPOptionList,
+			                          const uint8_t Option,
+			                          void* const Destination);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9ed521e575
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,265 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  DHCP Server Application. When connected to the uIP stack, this will send IP configuration settings to a
+ *  DHCP client on the network.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C
+#include "DHCPServerApp.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+struct uip_conn* BroadcastConnection;
+
+uint8_t LeasedIPs[255 / 8];
+
+/** Initialization function for the DHCP server. */
+void DHCPServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 67 for DHCP server connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* Create a new UDP connection to the DHCP server port for the DHCP solicitation */
+	struct uip_udp_conn* BroadcastConnection = uip_udp_new(&uip_broadcast_addr, HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT));
+
+	/* If the connection was successfully created, bind it to the local DHCP client port */
+	if (BroadcastConnection != NULL)
+	  uip_udp_bind(BroadcastConnection, HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* Set all IP addresses as unleased */
+	memset(LeasedIPs, 0x00, sizeof(LeasedIPs));
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the DHCP server. This function must be called each time the TCP/IP stack
+ *  needs a UDP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	DHCP_Header_t* const AppData     = (DHCP_Header_t*)uip_appdata;
+	uint16_t             AppDataSize = 0;
+
+	/* Only process when new data arrives - don't retransmit lost packets */
+	if (uip_newdata())
+	{
+		/* Get the DHCP message type (if present), otherwise early-abort */
+		uint8_t DHCPMessageType;
+		if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE, &DHCPMessageType)))
+			return;
+
+		uip_ipaddr_t        Netmask, GatewayIPAddress, PreferredClientIP;
+		struct uip_eth_addr RemoteMACAddress;
+		uint32_t            TransactionID;
+
+		/* Get configured network mask, gateway IP and extract out DHCP transaction ID and remote IP */
+		uip_getnetmask(&Netmask);
+		uip_getdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
+		memcpy(&RemoteMACAddress, &AppData->ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
+		TransactionID = AppData->TransactionID;
+
+		/* Try to extract out the client's preferred IP address if it is indicated in the packet */
+		if (!(DHCPCommon_GetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_REQ_IPADDR, &PreferredClientIP)))
+		  memcpy(&PreferredClientIP, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+
+		switch (DHCPMessageType)
+		{
+			case DHCP_DISCOVER:
+				/* If no preference was made or the preferred IP is already taken, find a new address */
+				if (DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP))
+				  DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(&PreferredClientIP);
+
+				/* Create a new DHCP OFFER packet with the offered IP address */
+				AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_OFFER, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
+
+				/* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP OFFER packet options */
+				AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
+													sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
+				AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
+					                                sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
+
+				/* Send the DHCP OFFER packet */
+				uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
+				memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+				uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+				break;
+			case DHCP_REQUEST:
+				/* Check to see if the requested IP address has already been leased to a client */
+				if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(&PreferredClientIP)))
+				{
+					/* Create a new DHCP ACK packet to accept the IP address lease */
+					AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_ACK, &RemoteMACAddress, &PreferredClientIP, TransactionID);
+
+					/* Add network mask and router information to the list of DHCP ACK packet options */
+					AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_SUBNET_MASK,
+														sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &Netmask);
+					AppDataSize += DHCPCommon_SetOption(AppData->Options, DHCP_OPTION_ROUTER,
+					                                    sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t), &GatewayIPAddress);
+
+					/* Mark the requested IP as leased to a client */
+					DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(&PreferredClientIP);
+				}
+				else
+				{
+					/* Create a new DHCP NAK packet to reject the requested allocation */
+					AppDataSize += DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(AppData, DHCP_NAK, &RemoteMACAddress, &uip_all_zeroes_addr, TransactionID);
+				}
+
+				/* Send the DHCP ACK or NAK packet */
+				uip_poll_conn(BroadcastConnection);
+				memcpy(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+				uip_udp_send(AppDataSize);
+
+				break;
+			case DHCP_RELEASE:
+				/* Mark the IP address as released in the allocation table */
+				DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Fills the DHCP packet response with the appropriate BOOTP header for DHCP. This fills out all the required
+ *  fields, leaving only the additional DHCP options to be added to the packet before it is sent to the DHCP client.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] DHCPHeader             Location in the packet buffer where the BOOTP header should be written to
+ *  \param[in]  DHCPMessageType        DHCP Message type, such as DHCP_DISCOVER
+ *  \param[in]  ClientHardwareAddress  Client MAC address the created transaction should be directed to
+ *  \param[in]  PreferredClientIP      Preferred IP that should be given to the client if it is unallocated
+ *  \param[in]  TransactionID          Transaction ID the created transaction should be associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Size in bytes of the created DHCP packet
+ */
+static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+                                             const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
+											 const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
+                                             const uint32_t TransactionID)
+{
+	/* Erase existing packet data so that we start will all 0x00 DHCP header data */
+ 	memset(DHCPHeader, 0, sizeof(DHCP_Header_t));
+
+	DHCPHeader->Operation             = DHCPMessageType;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareType          = DHCP_HTYPE_ETHERNET;
+	DHCPHeader->HardwareAddressLength = sizeof(MACAddress);
+	DHCPHeader->Hops                  = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->TransactionID         = TransactionID;
+	DHCPHeader->ElapsedSeconds        = 0;
+	DHCPHeader->Flags                 = 0;
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->NextServerIP, &uip_hostaddr, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->YourIP, PreferredClientIP, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+	memcpy(&DHCPHeader->ClientHardwareAddress, ClientHardwareAddress, sizeof(struct uip_eth_addr));
+	DHCPHeader->Cookie                = DHCP_MAGIC_COOKIE;
+
+	/* Add a DHCP message type and terminator options to the start of the DHCP options field */
+	DHCPHeader->Options[0]            = DHCP_OPTION_MSG_TYPE;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[1]            = 1;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[2]            = DHCPMessageType;
+	DHCPHeader->Options[3]            = DHCP_OPTION_END;
+
+	/* Calculate the total number of bytes added to the outgoing packet */
+	return (sizeof(DHCP_Header_t) + 4);
+}
+
+/** Checks to see if the nominated IP address has already been allocated to a client.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address whose lease status should be checked
+ *
+ *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the IP has already been leased to a client, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
+	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
+
+	/* Make sure that the requested IP address isn't already leased to the virtual server or another client */
+	if (IPAddress->u8[3] && !(IPAddress->u8[3] == uip_hostaddr.u8[3]) && !(LeasedIPs[Byte] & Mask))
+	  return false;
+	else
+	  return true;
+}
+
+/** Retrieves the next unleased IP in the IP address pool.
+ *
+ *  \param[out] NewIPAddress  Location where the generated IP Address should be stored
+ */
+static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress)
+{
+	uip_ipaddr_copy(NewIPAddress, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+	/** Look through the current subnet, skipping the broadcast and zero IP addresses */
+	for (uint8_t IP = 1; IP < 254; IP++)
+	{
+		/* Update new IP address to lease with the current IP address to test */
+		NewIPAddress->u8[3] = IP;
+
+		/* If we've found an unleased IP, abort with the updated IP stored for the called */
+		if (!(DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(NewIPAddress)))
+		  return;
+	}
+}
+
+/** Marks the given IP Address as leased in the address pool, so that it will not be
+ *  allocated to another client unless it is first released.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address to mark as leased
+ *
+ *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
+ */
+static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
+	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
+
+	/* Mark the IP address as leased in the allocation table */
+	LeasedIPs[Byte] |= Mask;
+}
+
+/** Marks the given IP Address as not leased in the address pool, so that it can be
+ *  allocated to another client upon request.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] IPAddress  IP Address to mark as not leased
+ *
+ *  \pre The IP address must be within the same /24 subnet as the virtual webserver.
+ */
+static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress)
+{
+	uint8_t Byte = (IPAddress->u8[3] / 8);
+	uint8_t Mask = (1 << (IPAddress->u8[3] % 8));
+
+	/* Mark the IP address as unleased in the allocation table */
+	LeasedIPs[Byte] &= ~Mask;
+}
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c8195a64cb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DHCPServerApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,64 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DHCPServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _DHCPSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+		#include "../Webserver.h"
+		#include "DHCPCommon.h"
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DHCPServerApp_Init(void);
+		void DHCPServerApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_DHCPSERVERAPP_C)
+		static uint16_t DHCPServerApp_FillDHCPHeader(DHCP_Header_t* const DHCPHeader,
+		                                             const uint8_t DHCPMessageType,
+		                                             const struct uip_eth_addr* const ClientHardwareAddress,
+		                                             const uip_ipaddr_t* const PreferredClientIP,
+		                                             const uint32_t TransactionID);
+		static bool DHCPServerApp_CheckIfIPLeased(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
+		static void DHCPServerApp_GetUnleasedIP(uip_ipaddr_t* const NewIPAddress);
+		static void DHCPServerApp_LeaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
+		static void DHCPServerApp_UnleaseIP(const uip_ipaddr_t* const IPAddress);
+		#endif
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..d8dc54dad7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.c
@@ -0,0 +1,534 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Functions to manage the physical Dataflash media, including reading and writing of
+ *  blocks of data. These functions are called by the SCSI layer when data must be stored
+ *  or retrieved to/from the physical storage media. If a different media is used (such
+ *  as a SD card or EEPROM), functions similar to these will need to be generated.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_DATAFLASHMANAGER_C
+#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the pre-selected data OUT endpoint. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the endpoint and writes
+ *  them to the Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently empty */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the current endpoint bank */
+				Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+				/* Wait until the host has sent another packet */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+			Dataflash_SendByte(Endpoint_Read_8());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* If the endpoint is empty, clear it ready for the next packet from the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearOUT();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the pre-selected data IN endpoint. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the endpoint.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to a structure containing a Mass Storage Class configuration and state
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	/* Wait until endpoint is ready before continuing */
+	if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+	  return;
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if the endpoint is currently full */
+			if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+			{
+				/* Clear the endpoint bank to send its contents to the host */
+				Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+				/* Wait until the endpoint is ready for more data */
+				if (Endpoint_WaitUntilReady())
+				  return;
+			}
+
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+			Endpoint_Write_8(Dataflash_ReceiveByte());
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+
+			/* Check if the current command is being aborted by the host */
+			if (MSInterfaceInfo->State.IsMassStoreReset)
+			  return;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* If the endpoint is full, send its contents to the host */
+	if (!(Endpoint_IsReadWriteAllowed()))
+	  Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Writes blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) to the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), from
+ *  the given RAM buffer. This routine reads in OS sized blocks from the buffer and writes them to the
+ *  Dataflash in Dataflash page sized blocks. This can be linked to FAT libraries to write files to the
+ *  Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the write sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to write
+ *  \param[in] BufferPtr     Pointer to the data source RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+	bool     UsingSecondBuffer   = false;
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+	/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+#endif
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, CurrDFPageByte);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+				Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Once all the Dataflash ICs have had their first buffers filled, switch buffers to maintain throughput */
+				if (Dataflash_GetSelectedChip() == DATAFLASH_CHIP_MASK(DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS))
+				  UsingSecondBuffer = !(UsingSecondBuffer);
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE > VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+				/* If less than one Dataflash page remaining, copy over the existing page to preserve trailing data */
+				if ((TotalBlocks * (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4)) < (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+				{
+					/* Copy selected dataflash's current page contents to the Dataflash buffer */
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+					Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF2 : DF_CMD_MAINMEMTOBUFF1);
+					Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+					Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+				}
+#endif
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash buffer write command */
+				Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+				Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2WRITE : DF_CMD_BUFF1WRITE);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(0, 0);
+			}
+
+			/* Write one 16-byte chunk of data to the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  Dataflash_SendByte(*(BufferPtr++));
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Write the Dataflash buffer contents back to the Dataflash page */
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+	Dataflash_SendByte(UsingSecondBuffer ? DF_CMD_BUFF2TOMAINMEMWITHERASE : DF_CMD_BUFF1TOMAINMEMWITHERASE);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0x00);
+	Dataflash_WaitWhileBusy();
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Reads blocks (OS blocks, not Dataflash pages) from the storage medium, the board Dataflash IC(s), into
+ *  the preallocated RAM buffer. This routine reads in Dataflash page sized blocks from the Dataflash
+ *  and writes them in OS sized blocks to the given buffer. This can be linked to FAT libraries to read
+ *  the files stored on the Dataflash.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] BlockAddress  Data block starting address for the read sequence
+ *  \param[in] TotalBlocks   Number of blocks of data to read
+ *  \param[out] BufferPtr    Pointer to the data destination RAM buffer
+ */
+void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr)
+{
+	uint16_t CurrDFPage          = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) / DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint16_t CurrDFPageByte      = ((BlockAddress * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE) % DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE);
+	uint8_t  CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = (CurrDFPageByte >> 4);
+
+	/* Select the correct starting Dataflash IC for the block requested */
+	Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+	/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+	Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, CurrDFPageByte);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+
+	while (TotalBlocks)
+	{
+		uint8_t BytesInBlockDiv16 = 0;
+
+		/* Write an endpoint packet sized data block to the Dataflash */
+		while (BytesInBlockDiv16 < (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE >> 4))
+		{
+			/* Check if end of Dataflash page reached */
+			if (CurrDFPageByteDiv16 == (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE >> 4))
+			{
+				/* Reset the Dataflash buffer counter, increment the page counter */
+				CurrDFPageByteDiv16 = 0;
+				CurrDFPage++;
+
+				/* Select the next Dataflash chip based on the new Dataflash page index */
+				Dataflash_SelectChipFromPage(CurrDFPage);
+
+				/* Send the Dataflash main memory page read command */
+				Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_MAINMEMPAGEREAD);
+				Dataflash_SendAddressBytes(CurrDFPage, 0);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+				Dataflash_SendByte(0x00);
+			}
+
+			/* Read one 16-byte chunk of data from the Dataflash */
+			for (uint8_t ByteNum = 0; ByteNum < 16; ByteNum++)
+			  *(BufferPtr++) = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+
+			/* Increment the Dataflash page 16 byte block counter */
+			CurrDFPageByteDiv16++;
+
+			/* Increment the block 16 byte block counter */
+			BytesInBlockDiv16++;
+		}
+
+		/* Decrement the blocks remaining counter */
+		TotalBlocks--;
+	}
+
+	/* Deselect all Dataflash chips */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Disables the Dataflash memory write protection bits on the board Dataflash ICs, if enabled. */
+void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void)
+{
+	/* Select first Dataflash chip, send the read status register command */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+
+	/* Select second Dataflash chip (if present on selected board), send read status register command */
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_GETSTATUS);
+
+	/* Check if sector protection is enabled */
+	if (Dataflash_ReceiveByte() & DF_STATUS_SECTORPROTECTION_ON)
+	{
+		Dataflash_ToggleSelectedChipCS();
+
+		/* Send the commands to disable sector protection */
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[0]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[1]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[2]);
+		Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_SECTORPROTECTIONOFF[3]);
+	}
+	#endif
+
+	/* Deselect current Dataflash chip */
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+}
+
+/** Performs a simple test on the attached Dataflash IC(s) to ensure that they are working.
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if all media chips are working, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void)
+{
+	uint8_t ReturnByte;
+
+	/* Test first Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP1);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+
+	#if (DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS == 2)
+	/* Test second Dataflash IC is present and responding to commands */
+	Dataflash_SelectChip(DATAFLASH_CHIP2);
+	Dataflash_SendByte(DF_CMD_READMANUFACTURERDEVICEINFO);
+	ReturnByte = Dataflash_ReceiveByte();
+	Dataflash_DeselectChip();
+
+	/* If returned data is invalid, fail the command */
+	if (ReturnByte != DF_MANUFACTURER_ATMEL)
+	  return false;
+	#endif
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..da34b39268
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/DataflashManager.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for DataflashManager.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+#define _DATAFLASH_MANAGER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+
+	/* Preprocessor Checks: */
+		#if (DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE % 16)
+			#error Dataflash page size must be a multiple of 16 bytes.
+		#endif
+
+	/* Defines: */
+		/** Total number of bytes of the storage medium, comprised of one or more Dataflash ICs. */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES                ((uint32_t)DATAFLASH_PAGES * DATAFLASH_PAGE_SIZE * DATAFLASH_TOTALCHIPS)
+
+		/** Block size of the device. This is kept at 512 to remain compatible with the OS despite the underlying
+		 *  storage media (Dataflash) using a different native block size. Do not change this value.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE           512
+
+		/** Total number of blocks of the virtual memory for reporting to the host as the device's total capacity. Do not
+		 *  change this value; change VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES instead to alter the media size.
+		 */
+		#define VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS               (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BYTES / VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE)
+
+		/** Indicates if the disk is write protected or not. */
+		#define DISK_READ_ONLY                      false
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                  const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                  uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+		                                 const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                 uint16_t TotalBlocks);
+		void DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                      uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                      const uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(const uint32_t BlockAddress,
+		                                     uint16_t TotalBlocks,
+		                                     uint8_t* BufferPtr) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3);
+		void DataflashManager_ResetDataflashProtections(void);
+		bool DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..80d8843d13
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/00readme.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,135 @@
+FatFs Module Source Files R0.09a                       (C)ChaN, 2012
+
+
+FILES
+
+  ffconf.h   Configuration file for FatFs module.
+  ff.h       Common include file for FatFs and application module.
+  ff.c       FatFs module.
+  diskio.h   Common include file for FatFs and disk I/O module.
+  diskio.c   An example of glue function to attach existing disk I/O module to FatFs.
+  integer.h  Integer type definitions for FatFs.
+  option     Optional external functions.
+
+  Low level disk I/O module is not included in this archive because the FatFs
+  module is only a generic file system layer and not depend on any specific
+  storage device. You have to provide a low level disk I/O module that written
+  to control your storage device.
+
+
+
+AGREEMENTS
+
+ FatFs module is an open source software to implement FAT file system to
+ small embedded systems. This is a free software and is opened for education,
+ research and commercial developments under license policy of following trems.
+
+  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+
+ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+
+
+
+REVISION HISTORY
+
+  Feb 26, 2006  R0.00  Prototype
+
+  Apr 29, 2006  R0.01  First release.
+
+  Jun 01, 2006  R0.02  Added FAT12.
+                       Removed unbuffered mode.
+                       Fixed a problem on small (<32M) patition.
+
+  Jun 10, 2006  R0.02a Added a configuration option _FS_MINIMUM.
+
+  Sep 22, 2006  R0.03  Added f_rename.
+                       Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+
+  Dec 11, 2006  R0.03a Improved cluster scan algolithm to write files fast.
+                       Fixed f_mkdir creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+
+  Feb 04, 2007  R0.04  Supported multiple drive system. (FatFs)
+                       Changed some APIs for multiple drive system.
+                       Added f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added _USE_FAT32 option. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  Apr 01, 2007  R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a plysical drive. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Added a capability of extending the file size to f_lseek.
+                       Added minimization level 3.
+                       Fixed a problem that can collapse a sector when recreate an
+                       existing file in any sub-directory at non FAT32 cfg. (Tiny-FatFs)
+
+  May 05, 2007  R0.04b Added _USE_NTFLAG option.
+                       Added FSInfo support.
+                       Fixed some problems corresponds to FAT32. (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+                       Fixed short seek (0 < ofs <= csize) collapses the file object.
+
+  Aug 25, 2007  R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read, f_write.
+                       Changed arguments of f_mkfs. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkfs on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo. (FatFs)
+                       Fixed f_mkdir on FAT32 creates incorrect directory. (FatFs)
+
+  Feb 03, 2008  R0.05a Added f_truncate().
+                       Added f_utime().
+                       Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+                       Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+                       Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+
+  Apr 01, 2008  R0.06  Added f_forward(). (Tiny-FatFs)
+                       Added string functions: fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+                       Improved performance of f_lseek() on move to the same or following cluster.
+
+  Apr 01, 2009, R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a buffer configuration option.
+                       Added long file name support.
+                       Added multiple code page support.
+                       Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+                       Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+                       Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+                       Changed result code of critical errors.
+                       Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+
+  Apr 14, 2009, R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+                       Added multiple sector size support.
+
+  Jun 21, 2009, R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() may return FR_OK on error.
+                       Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+                       Added relative path feature.
+                       Added f_chdir().
+                       Added f_chdrive().
+                       Added proper case conversion for extended characters.
+
+  Nov 03, 2009 R0.07e  Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+                       Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+                       Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+                       Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+                       Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+
+  May 15, 2010, R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN)
+                       Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+                       Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+                       Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+                       Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+                       String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+
+  Aug 16,'10 R0.08a    Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+                       Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+                       Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+                       Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+                       Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+
+  Jan 15,'11 R0.08b    Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+                       f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+                       Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+                       Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path names.
+
+  Sep 06,'11 R0.09     f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+                       Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+
+  Aug 27,'12 R0.09a    Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16.
+                       Changed API rejects null object pointer to avoid crash.
+                       Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b119b1a402
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.c
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Low level disk I/O module skeleton for FatFs     (C)ChaN, 2007        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* This is a stub disk I/O module that acts as front end of the existing */
+/* disk I/O modules and attach it to FatFs module with common interface. */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "diskio.h"
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Initialize a Drive                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (
+	BYTE drv				/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Return Disk Status                                                    */
+
+DSTATUS disk_status (
+	BYTE drv		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+)
+{
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Sector(s)                                                        */
+
+DRESULT disk_read (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	BYTE *buff,		/* Data buffer to store read data */
+	DWORD sector,	/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count		/* Number of sectors to read (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_ReadBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write Sector(s)                                                       */
+
+#if _READONLY == 0
+DRESULT disk_write (
+	BYTE drv,			/* Physical drive number (0..) */
+	const BYTE *buff,	/* Data to be written */
+	DWORD sector,		/* Sector address (LBA) */
+	BYTE count			/* Number of sectors to write (1..128) */
+)
+{
+	DataflashManager_WriteBlocks_RAM(sector, count, buff);
+	return RES_OK;
+}
+#endif /* _READONLY */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..65e3048a0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/diskio.h
@@ -0,0 +1,52 @@
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------
+/  Low level disk interface module include file
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _DISKIO_DEFINED
+#define _DISKIO_DEFINED
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"
+#include "ff.h"
+
+#include "../DataflashManager.h"
+
+
+/* Status of Disk Functions */
+typedef BYTE	DSTATUS;
+
+/* Results of Disk Functions */
+typedef enum {
+	RES_OK = 0,		/* 0: Successful */
+	RES_ERROR,		/* 1: R/W Error */
+	RES_WRPRT,		/* 2: Write Protected */
+	RES_NOTRDY,		/* 3: Not Ready */
+	RES_PARERR		/* 4: Invalid Parameter */
+} DRESULT;
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------*/
+/* Prototypes for disk control functions */
+
+DSTATUS disk_initialize (BYTE);
+DSTATUS disk_status (BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_read (BYTE, BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_write (BYTE, const BYTE*, DWORD, BYTE);
+DRESULT disk_ioctl (BYTE, BYTE, void*);
+
+
+/* Disk Status Bits (DSTATUS) */
+
+#define STA_NOINIT		0x01	/* Drive not initialized */
+#define STA_NODISK		0x02	/* No medium in the drive */
+#define STA_PROTECT		0x04	/* Write protected */
+
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2f58adf837
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.c
@@ -0,0 +1,4139 @@
+/*----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module  R0.09a                 (C)ChaN, 2012
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial products UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/-----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Feb 26,'06 R0.00  Prototype.
+/
+/ Apr 29,'06 R0.01  First stable version.
+/
+/ Jun 01,'06 R0.02  Added FAT12 support.
+/                   Removed unbuffered mode.
+/                   Fixed a problem on small (<32M) partition.
+/ Jun 10,'06 R0.02a Added a configuration option (_FS_MINIMUM).
+/
+/ Sep 22,'06 R0.03  Added f_rename().
+/                   Changed option _FS_MINIMUM to _FS_MINIMIZE.
+/ Dec 11,'06 R0.03a Improved cluster scan algorithm to write files fast.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() creates incorrect directory on FAT32.
+/
+/ Feb 04,'07 R0.04  Supported multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed some interfaces for multiple drive system.
+/                   Changed f_mountdrv() to f_mount().
+/                   Added f_mkfs().
+/ Apr 01,'07 R0.04a Supported multiple partitions on a physical drive.
+/                   Added a capability of extending file size to f_lseek().
+/                   Added minimization level 3.
+/                   Fixed an endian sensitive code in f_mkfs().
+/ May 05,'07 R0.04b Added a configuration option _USE_NTFLAG.
+/                   Added FSInfo support.
+/                   Fixed DBCS name can result FR_INVALID_NAME.
+/                   Fixed short seek (<= csize) collapses the file object.
+/
+/ Aug 25,'07 R0.05  Changed arguments of f_read(), f_write() and f_mkfs().
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() on FAT32 creates incorrect FSInfo.
+/                   Fixed f_mkdir() on FAT32 creates incorrect directory.
+/ Feb 03,'08 R0.05a Added f_truncate() and f_utime().
+/                   Fixed off by one error at FAT sub-type determination.
+/                   Fixed btr in f_read() can be mistruncated.
+/                   Fixed cached sector is not flushed when create and close without write.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'08 R0.06  Added fputc(), fputs(), fprintf() and fgets().
+/                   Improved performance of f_lseek() on moving to the same or following cluster.
+/
+/ Apr 01,'09 R0.07  Merged Tiny-FatFs as a configuration option. (_FS_TINY)
+/                   Added long file name feature.
+/                   Added multiple code page feature.
+/                   Added re-entrancy for multitask operation.
+/                   Added auto cluster size selection to f_mkfs().
+/                   Added rewind option to f_readdir().
+/                   Changed result code of critical errors.
+/                   Renamed string functions to avoid name collision.
+/ Apr 14,'09 R0.07a Separated out OS dependent code on reentrant cfg.
+/                   Added multiple sector size feature.
+/ Jun 21,'09 R0.07c Fixed f_unlink() can return FR_OK on error.
+/                   Fixed wrong cache control in f_lseek().
+/                   Added relative path feature.
+/                   Added f_chdir() and f_chdrive().
+/                   Added proper case conversion to extended char.
+/ Nov 03,'09 R0.07e Separated out configuration options from ff.h to ffconf.h.
+/                   Fixed f_unlink() fails to remove a sub-dir on _FS_RPATH.
+/                   Fixed name matching error on the 13 char boundary.
+/                   Added a configuration option, _LFN_UNICODE.
+/                   Changed f_readdir() to return the SFN with always upper case on non-LFN cfg.
+/
+/ May 15,'10 R0.08  Added a memory configuration option. (_USE_LFN = 3)
+/                   Added file lock feature. (_FS_SHARE)
+/                   Added fast seek feature. (_USE_FASTSEEK)
+/                   Changed some types on the API, XCHAR->TCHAR.
+/                   Changed fname member in the FILINFO structure on Unicode cfg.
+/                   String functions support UTF-8 encoding files on Unicode cfg.
+/ Aug 16,'10 R0.08a Added f_getcwd(). (_FS_RPATH = 2)
+/                   Added sector erase feature. (_USE_ERASE)
+/                   Moved file lock semaphore table from fs object to the bss.
+/                   Fixed a wrong directory entry is created on non-LFN cfg when the given name contains ';'.
+/                   Fixed f_mkfs() creates wrong FAT32 volume.
+/ Jan 15,'11 R0.08b Fast seek feature is also applied to f_read() and f_write().
+/                   f_lseek() reports required table size on creating CLMP.
+/                   Extended format syntax of f_printf function.
+/                   Ignores duplicated directory separators in given path name.
+/
+/ Sep 06,'11 R0.09  f_mkfs() supports multiple partition to finish the multiple partition feature.
+/                   Added f_fdisk(). (_MULTI_PARTITION = 2)
+/ Aug 27,'12 R0.09a Fixed assertion failure due to OS/2 EA on FAT12/16 volume.
+/                   Changed f_open() and f_opendir reject null object pointer to avoid crash.
+/                   Changed option name _FS_SHARE to _FS_LOCK.
+/---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include "ff.h"			/* FatFs configurations and declarations */
+#include "diskio.h"		/* Declarations of low level disk I/O functions */
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Definitions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FATFS != 4004	/* Revision ID */
+#error Wrong include file (ff.h).
+#endif
+
+
+/* Definitions on sector size */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512 && _MAX_SS != 1024 && _MAX_SS != 2048 && _MAX_SS != 4096
+#error Wrong sector size.
+#endif
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+#define	SS(fs)	((fs)->ssize)	/* Variable sector size */
+#else
+#define	SS(fs)	512U			/* Fixed sector size */
+#endif
+
+
+/* Reentrancy related */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+#if _USE_LFN == 1
+#error Static LFN work area must not be used in re-entrant configuration.
+#endif
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)		{ if (!lock_fs(fs)) return FR_TIMEOUT; }
+#define	LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	{ unlock_fs(fs, res); return res; }
+#else
+#define	ENTER_FF(fs)
+#define LEAVE_FF(fs, res)	return res
+#endif
+
+#define	ABORT(fs, res)		{ fp->flag |= FA__ERROR; LEAVE_FF(fs, res); }
+
+
+/* File access control feature */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+#if _FS_READONLY
+#error _FS_LOCK must be 0 on read-only cfg.
+#endif
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS *fs;				/* File ID 1, volume (NULL:blank entry) */
+	DWORD clu;				/* File ID 2, directory */
+	WORD idx;				/* File ID 3, directory index */
+	WORD ctr;				/* File open counter, 0:none, 0x01..0xFF:read open count, 0x100:write mode */
+} FILESEM;
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* DBCS code ranges and SBCS extend char conversion table */
+
+#if _CODE_PAGE == 932	/* Japanese Shift-JIS */
+#define _DF1S	0x81	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 start */
+#define _DF1E	0x9F	/* DBC 1st byte range 1 end */
+#define _DF2S	0xE0	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 start */
+#define _DF2E	0xFC	/* DBC 1st byte range 2 end */
+#define _DS1S	0x40	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 start */
+#define _DS1E	0x7E	/* DBC 2nd byte range 1 end */
+#define _DS2S	0x80	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 start */
+#define _DS2E	0xFC	/* DBC 2nd byte range 2 end */
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 936	/* Simplified Chinese GBK */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0x80
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 949	/* Korean */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x41
+#define _DS1E	0x5A
+#define _DS2S	0x61
+#define _DS2E	0x7A
+#define _DS3S	0x81
+#define _DS3E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 950	/* Traditional Chinese Big5 */
+#define _DF1S	0x81
+#define _DF1E	0xFE
+#define _DS1S	0x40
+#define _DS1E	0x7E
+#define _DS2S	0xA1
+#define _DS2E	0xFE
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 437	/* U.S. (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0x41,0x8E,0x41,0x8F,0x80,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x49,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x4F,0x99,0x4F,0x55,0x55,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 720	/* Arabic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x45,0x41,0x84,0x41,0x86,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x49,0x49,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x49,0x49,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 737	/* Greek (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87, \
+				0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0xAA,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x97,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xE4,0xED,0xEE,0xE7,0xE8,0xF1,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 775	/* Baltic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x91,0xA0,0x8E,0x95,0x8F,0x80,0xAD,0xED,0x8A,0x8A,0xA1,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xE0,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xBD,0xBE,0xC6,0xC7,0xA5,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE3,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEE,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 850	/* Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 852	/* Latin 2 (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xDE,0x8F,0x80,0x9D,0xD3,0x8A,0x8A,0xD7,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x91,0xE2,0x99,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA4,0xA4,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA8,0xAA,0x8D,0xAC,0xB8,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBD,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC6,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD2,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xB7,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE3,0xD5,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE9,0xE8,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xDD,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xEB,0xFC,0xFC,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 855	/* Cyrillic (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x81,0x81,0x83,0x83,0x85,0x85,0x87,0x87,0x89,0x89,0x8B,0x8B,0x8D,0x8D,0x8F,0x8F,0x91,0x91,0x93,0x93,0x95,0x95,0x97,0x97,0x99,0x99,0x9B,0x9B,0x9D,0x9D,0x9F,0x9F, \
+				0xA1,0xA1,0xA3,0xA3,0xA5,0xA5,0xA7,0xA7,0xA9,0xA9,0xAB,0xAB,0xAD,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB6,0xB6,0xB8,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBE,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD3,0xD3,0xD5,0xD5,0xD7,0xD7,0xDD,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xE0,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE2,0xE2,0xE4,0xE4,0xE6,0xE6,0xE8,0xE8,0xEA,0xEA,0xEC,0xEC,0xEE,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF8,0xFA,0xFA,0xFC,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 857	/* Turkish (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0x98,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9E, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA6,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xDE,0x59,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 858	/* Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x9A,0x90,0xB6,0x8E,0xB7,0x8F,0x80,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD8,0xD7,0xDE,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x92,0x92,0xE2,0x99,0xE3,0xEA,0xEB,0x59,0x99,0x9A,0x9D,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xB5,0xD6,0xE0,0xE9,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC7,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD1,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE5,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE7,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xED,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 862	/* Hebrew (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x41,0x49,0x4F,0x55,0xA5,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0x21,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 866	/* Russian (OEM) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x9d,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F,0xF0,0xF0,0xF2,0xF2,0xF4,0xF4,0xF6,0xF6,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 874	/* Thai (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1250 /* Central Europe (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xA3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xA5,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBC,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1251 /* Cyrillic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x82,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x80,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F, \
+				0xA0,0xA2,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB2,0xA5,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xA3,0xBD,0xBD,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1252 /* Latin 1 (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0xAd,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0xAE,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1253 /* Greek (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xA2,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA, \
+				0xE0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xFB,0xBC,0xFD,0xBF,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1254 /* Turkish (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x8A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1255 /* Hebrew (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xE0,0xE1,0xE2,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0xE7,0xE8,0xE9,0xEA,0xEB,0xEC,0xED,0xEE,0xEF,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0xF4,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0xF9,0xFA,0xFB,0xFC,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1256 /* Arabic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x8C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0x41,0xE1,0x41,0xE3,0xE4,0xE5,0xE6,0x43,0x45,0x45,0x45,0x45,0xEC,0xED,0x49,0x49,0xF0,0xF1,0xF2,0xF3,0x4F,0xF5,0xF6,0xF7,0xF8,0x55,0xFA,0x55,0x55,0xFD,0xFE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1257 /* Baltic (Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0x9C,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0xA1,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xA8,0xB9,0xAA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xAF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xFF}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1258 /* Vietnam (OEM, Windows) */
+#define _DF1S	0
+#define _EXCVT {0x80,0x81,0x82,0x83,0x84,0x85,0x86,0x87,0x88,0x89,0x8A,0x8B,0x8C,0x8D,0x8E,0x8F,0x90,0x91,0x92,0x93,0x94,0x95,0x96,0x97,0x98,0x99,0x9A,0x9B,0xAC,0x9D,0x9E,0x9F, \
+				0xA0,0x21,0xA2,0xA3,0xA4,0xA5,0xA6,0xA7,0xA8,0xA9,0xAA,0xAB,0xAC,0xAD,0xAE,0xAF,0xB0,0xB1,0xB2,0xB3,0xB4,0xB5,0xB6,0xB7,0xB8,0xB9,0xBA,0xBB,0xBC,0xBD,0xBE,0xBF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xCC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xD2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xD7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xDE,0xDF, \
+				0xC0,0xC1,0xC2,0xC3,0xC4,0xC5,0xC6,0xC7,0xC8,0xC9,0xCA,0xCB,0xEC,0xCD,0xCE,0xCF,0xD0,0xD1,0xF2,0xD3,0xD4,0xD5,0xD6,0xF7,0xD8,0xD9,0xDA,0xDB,0xDC,0xDD,0xFE,0x9F}
+
+#elif _CODE_PAGE == 1	/* ASCII (for only non-LFN cfg) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+#error Cannot use LFN feature without valid code page.
+#endif
+#define _DF1S	0
+
+#else
+#error Unknown code page
+
+#endif
+
+
+/* Character code support macros */
+#define IsUpper(c)	(((c)>='A')&&((c)<='Z'))
+#define IsLower(c)	(((c)>='a')&&((c)<='z'))
+#define IsDigit(c)	(((c)>='0')&&((c)<='9'))
+
+#if _DF1S		/* Code page is DBCS */
+
+#ifdef _DF2S	/* Two 1st byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DF2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF2E))
+#else			/* One 1st byte area */
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	((BYTE)(c) >= _DF1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DF1E)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef _DS3S	/* Three 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS3S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS3E))
+#else			/* Two 2nd byte areas */
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	(((BYTE)(c) >= _DS1S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS1E) || ((BYTE)(c) >= _DS2S && (BYTE)(c) <= _DS2E))
+#endif
+
+#else			/* Code page is SBCS */
+
+#define IsDBCS1(c)	0
+#define IsDBCS2(c)	0
+
+#endif /* _DF1S */
+
+
+/* Name status flags */
+#define NS			11		/* Index of name status byte in fn[] */
+#define NS_LOSS		0x01	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+#define NS_LFN		0x02	/* Force to create LFN entry */
+#define NS_LAST		0x04	/* Last segment */
+#define NS_BODY		0x08	/* Lower case flag (body) */
+#define NS_EXT		0x10	/* Lower case flag (ext) */
+#define NS_DOT		0x20	/* Dot entry */
+
+
+/* FAT sub-type boundaries */
+/* Note that the FAT spec by Microsoft says 4085 but Windows works with 4087! */
+#define MIN_FAT16	4086	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT16 */
+#define	MIN_FAT32	65526	/* Minimum number of clusters for FAT32 */
+
+
+/* FatFs refers the members in the FAT structures as byte array instead of
+/ structure member because the structure is not binary compatible between
+/ different platforms */
+
+#define BS_jmpBoot			0	/* Jump instruction (3) */
+#define BS_OEMName			3	/* OEM name (8) */
+#define BPB_BytsPerSec		11	/* Sector size [byte] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerClus		13	/* Cluster size [sector] (1) */
+#define BPB_RsvdSecCnt		14	/* Size of reserved area [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumFATs			16	/* Number of FAT copies (1) */
+#define BPB_RootEntCnt		17	/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 (2) */
+#define BPB_TotSec16		19	/* Volume size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_Media			21	/* Media descriptor (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz16			22	/* FAT size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_SecPerTrk		24	/* Track size [sector] (2) */
+#define BPB_NumHeads		26	/* Number of heads (2) */
+#define BPB_HiddSec			28	/* Number of special hidden sectors (4) */
+#define BPB_TotSec32		32	/* Volume size [sector] (4) */
+#define BS_DrvNum			36	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig			38	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID			39	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab			43	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType		54	/* File system type (1) */
+#define BPB_FATSz32			36	/* FAT size [sector] (4) */
+#define BPB_ExtFlags		40	/* Extended flags (2) */
+#define BPB_FSVer			42	/* File system version (2) */
+#define BPB_RootClus		44	/* Root dir first cluster (4) */
+#define BPB_FSInfo			48	/* Offset of FSInfo sector (2) */
+#define BPB_BkBootSec		50	/* Offset of backup boot sector (2) */
+#define BS_DrvNum32			64	/* Physical drive number (2) */
+#define BS_BootSig32		66	/* Extended boot signature (1) */
+#define BS_VolID32			67	/* Volume serial number (4) */
+#define BS_VolLab32			71	/* Volume label (8) */
+#define BS_FilSysType32		82	/* File system type (1) */
+#define	FSI_LeadSig			0	/* FSI: Leading signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_StrucSig		484	/* FSI: Structure signature (4) */
+#define	FSI_Free_Count		488	/* FSI: Number of free clusters (4) */
+#define	FSI_Nxt_Free		492	/* FSI: Last allocated cluster (4) */
+#define MBR_Table			446	/* MBR: Partition table offset (2) */
+#define	SZ_PTE				16	/* MBR: Size of a partition table entry */
+#define BS_55AA				510	/* Boot sector signature (2) */
+
+#define	DIR_Name			0	/* Short file name (11) */
+#define	DIR_Attr			11	/* Attribute (1) */
+#define	DIR_NTres			12	/* NT flag (1) */
+#define DIR_CrtTimeTenth	13	/* Created time sub-second (1) */
+#define	DIR_CrtTime			14	/* Created time (2) */
+#define	DIR_CrtDate			16	/* Created date (2) */
+#define DIR_LstAccDate		18	/* Last accessed date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusHI		20	/* Higher 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtTime			22	/* Modified time (2) */
+#define	DIR_WrtDate			24	/* Modified date (2) */
+#define	DIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Lower 16-bit of first cluster (2) */
+#define	DIR_FileSize		28	/* File size (4) */
+#define	LDIR_Ord			0	/* LFN entry order and LLE flag (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Attr			11	/* LFN attribute (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Type			12	/* LFN type (1) */
+#define	LDIR_Chksum			13	/* Sum of corresponding SFN entry */
+#define	LDIR_FstClusLO		26	/* Filled by zero (0) */
+#define	SZ_DIR				32		/* Size of a directory entry */
+#define	LLE					0x40	/* Last long entry flag in LDIR_Ord */
+#define	DDE					0xE5	/* Deleted directory entry mark in DIR_Name[0] */
+#define	NDDE				0x05	/* Replacement of the character collides with DDE */
+
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Module private work area                                   */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Note that uninitialized variables with static duration are
+/  zeroed/nulled at start-up. If not, the compiler or start-up
+/  routine is out of ANSI-C standard.
+*/
+
+#if _VOLUMES
+static
+FATFS *FatFs[_VOLUMES];	/* Pointer to the file system objects (logical drives) */
+#else
+#error Number of volumes must not be 0.
+#endif
+
+static
+WORD Fsid;				/* File system mount ID */
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+static
+BYTE CurrVol;			/* Current drive */
+#endif
+
+#if _FS_LOCK
+static
+FILESEM	Files[_FS_LOCK];	/* File lock semaphores */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN == 0			/* No LFN feature */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		(dobj).fn = sfn
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 1			/* LFN feature with static working buffer */
+static WCHAR LfnBuf[_MAX_LFN+1];
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = LfnBuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 2 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the stack */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR lbuf[_MAX_LFN+1]
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ (dobj).fn = sfn; (dobj).lfn = lbuf; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()
+
+#elif _USE_LFN == 3 		/* LFN feature with dynamic working buffer on the heap */
+#define	DEF_NAMEBUF			BYTE sfn[12]; WCHAR *lfn
+#define INIT_BUF(dobj)		{ lfn = ff_memalloc((_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2); \
+							  if (!lfn) LEAVE_FF((dobj).fs, FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE); \
+							  (dobj).lfn = lfn;	(dobj).fn = sfn; }
+#define	FREE_BUF()			ff_memfree(lfn)
+
+#else
+#error Wrong LFN configuration.
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Module Private Functions
+
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* String functions                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/* Copy memory to memory */
+static
+void mem_cpy (void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+	const BYTE *s = (const BYTE*)src;
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1
+	while (cnt >= sizeof (int)) {
+		*(int*)d = *(int*)s;
+		d += sizeof (int); s += sizeof (int);
+		cnt -= sizeof (int);
+	}
+#endif
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = *s++;
+}
+
+/* Fill memory */
+static
+void mem_set (void* dst, int val, UINT cnt) {
+	BYTE *d = (BYTE*)dst;
+
+	while (cnt--)
+		*d++ = (BYTE)val;
+}
+
+/* Compare memory to memory */
+static
+int mem_cmp (const void* dst, const void* src, UINT cnt) {
+	const BYTE *d = (const BYTE *)dst, *s = (const BYTE *)src;
+	int r = 0;
+
+	while (cnt-- && (r = *d++ - *s++) == 0) ;
+	return r;
+}
+
+/* Check if chr is contained in the string */
+static
+int chk_chr (const char* str, int chr) {
+	while (*str && *str != chr) str++;
+	return *str;
+}
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Request/Release grant to access the volume                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+
+static
+int lock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs		/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	return ff_req_grant(fs->sobj);
+}
+
+
+static
+void unlock_fs (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	FRESULT res		/* Result code to be returned */
+)
+{
+	if (fs &&
+		res != FR_NOT_ENABLED &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_DRIVE &&
+		res != FR_INVALID_OBJECT &&
+		res != FR_TIMEOUT) {
+		ff_rel_grant(fs->sobj);
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* File lock control functions                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_LOCK
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_lock (	/* Check if the file can be accessed */
+	DIR* dj,		/* Directory object pointing the file to be checked */
+	int acc			/* Desired access (0:Read, 1:Write, 2:Delete/Rename) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, be;
+
+	/* Search file semaphore table */
+	for (i = be = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs) {	/* Existing entry */
+			if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&	 	/* Check if the file matched with an open file */
+				Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+				Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+		} else {			/* Blank entry */
+			be++;
+		}
+	}
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK)	/* The file is not opened */
+		return (be || acc == 2) ? FR_OK : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;	/* Is there a blank entry for new file? */
+
+	/* The file has been opened. Reject any open against writing file and all write mode open */
+	return (acc || Files[i].ctr == 0x100) ? FR_LOCKED : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+static
+int enq_lock (void)	/* Check if an entry is available for a new file */
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+	return (i == _FS_LOCK) ? 0 : 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+UINT inc_lock (	/* Increment file open counter and returns its index (0:int error) */
+	DIR* dj,	/* Directory object pointing the file to register or increment */
+	int acc		/* Desired access mode (0:Read, !0:Write) */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {	/* Find the file */
+		if (Files[i].fs == dj->fs &&
+			Files[i].clu == dj->sclust &&
+			Files[i].idx == dj->index) break;
+	}
+
+	if (i == _FS_LOCK) {				/* Not opened. Register it as new. */
+		for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK && Files[i].fs; i++) ;
+		if (i == _FS_LOCK) return 0;	/* No space to register (int err) */
+		Files[i].fs = dj->fs;
+		Files[i].clu = dj->sclust;
+		Files[i].idx = dj->index;
+		Files[i].ctr = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (acc && Files[i].ctr) return 0;	/* Access violation (int err) */
+
+	Files[i].ctr = acc ? 0x100 : Files[i].ctr + 1;	/* Set semaphore value */
+
+	return i + 1;
+}
+
+
+static
+FRESULT dec_lock (	/* Decrement file open counter */
+	UINT i			/* Semaphore index */
+)
+{
+	WORD n;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (--i < _FS_LOCK) {
+		n = Files[i].ctr;
+		if (n == 0x100) n = 0;
+		if (n) n--;
+		Files[i].ctr = n;
+		if (!n) Files[i].fs = 0;
+		res = FR_OK;
+	} else {
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+static
+void clear_lock (	/* Clear lock entries of the volume */
+	FATFS *fs
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+
+	for (i = 0; i < _FS_LOCK; i++) {
+		if (Files[i].fs == fs) Files[i].fs = 0;
+	}
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change window offset                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT move_window (
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD sector	/* Sector number to make appearance in the fs->win[] */
+)					/* Move to zero only writes back dirty window */
+{
+	DWORD wsect;
+
+
+	wsect = fs->winsect;
+	if (wsect != sector) {	/* Changed current window */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fs->wflag) {	/* Write back dirty window if needed */
+			if (disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->wflag = 0;
+			if (wsect < (fs->fatbase + fs->fsize)) {	/* In FAT area */
+				BYTE nf;
+				for (nf = fs->n_fats; nf > 1; nf--) {	/* Reflect the change to all FAT copies */
+					wsect += fs->fsize;
+					disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, wsect, 1);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		if (sector) {
+			if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sector, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			fs->winsect = sector;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Clean-up cached data                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT sync (	/* FR_OK: successful, FR_DISK_ERR: failed */
+	FATFS *fs	/* File system object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = move_window(fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* Update FSInfo sector if needed */
+		if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && fs->fsi_flag) {
+			fs->winsect = 0;
+			/* Create FSInfo structure */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, 512);
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count, fs->free_clust);
+			ST_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free, fs->last_clust);
+			/* Write it into the FSInfo sector */
+			disk_write(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1);
+			fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		}
+		/* Make sure that no pending write process in the physical drive */
+		if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) != RES_OK)
+			res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get sector# from cluster#                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD clust2sect (	/* !=0: Sector number, 0: Failed - invalid cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,		/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst		/* Cluster# to be converted */
+)
+{
+	clst -= 2;
+	if (clst >= (fs->n_fatent - 2)) return 0;		/* Invalid cluster# */
+	return clst * fs->csize + fs->database;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Read value of a FAT entry                                */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+DWORD get_fat (	/* 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, 1:Internal error, Else:Cluster status */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst	/* Cluster# to get the link information */
+)
+{
+	UINT wc, bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent)	/* Check range */
+		return 1;
+
+	switch (fs->fs_type) {
+	case FS_FAT12 :
+		bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc = fs->win[bc % SS(fs)]; bc++;
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)))) break;
+		wc |= fs->win[bc % SS(fs)] << 8;
+		return (clst & 1) ? (wc >> 4) : (wc & 0xFFF);
+
+	case FS_FAT16 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_WORD(p);
+
+	case FS_FAT32 :
+		if (move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)))) break;
+		p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+		return LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF;
+	}
+
+	return 0xFFFFFFFF;	/* An error occurred at the disk I/O layer */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT access - Change value of a FAT entry                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+
+FRESULT put_fat (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst,	/* Cluster# to be changed in range of 2 to fs->n_fatent - 1 */
+	DWORD val	/* New value to mark the cluster */
+)
+{
+	UINT bc;
+	BYTE *p;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		switch (fs->fs_type) {
+		case FS_FAT12 :
+			bc = (UINT)clst; bc += bc / 2;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? ((*p & 0x0F) | ((BYTE)val << 4)) : (BYTE)val;
+			bc++;
+			fs->wflag = 1;
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (bc / SS(fs)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[bc % SS(fs)];
+			*p = (clst & 1) ? (BYTE)(val >> 4) : ((*p & 0xF0) | ((BYTE)(val >> 8) & 0x0F));
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT16 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 2)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 2 % SS(fs)];
+			ST_WORD(p, (WORD)val);
+			break;
+
+		case FS_FAT32 :
+			res = move_window(fs, fs->fatbase + (clst / (SS(fs) / 4)));
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			p = &fs->win[clst * 4 % SS(fs)];
+			val |= LD_DWORD(p) & 0xF0000000;
+			ST_DWORD(p, val);
+			break;
+
+		default :
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		}
+		fs->wflag = 1;
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Remove a cluster chain                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT remove_chain (
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to remove a chain from */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD nxt;
+#if _USE_ERASE
+	DWORD scl = clst, ecl = clst, rt[2];
+#endif
+
+	if (clst < 2 || clst >= fs->n_fatent) {	/* Check range */
+		res = FR_INT_ERR;
+
+	} else {
+		res = FR_OK;
+		while (clst < fs->n_fatent) {			/* Not a last link? */
+			nxt = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Get cluster status */
+			if (nxt == 0) break;				/* Empty cluster? */
+			if (nxt == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }	/* Internal error? */
+			if (nxt == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }	/* Disk error? */
+			res = put_fat(fs, clst, 0);			/* Mark the cluster "empty" */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {	/* Update FSInfo */
+				fs->free_clust++;
+				fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			}
+#if _USE_ERASE
+			if (ecl + 1 == nxt) {	/* Is next cluster contiguous? */
+				ecl = nxt;
+			} else {				/* End of contiguous clusters */ 
+				rt[0] = clust2sect(fs, scl);					/* Start sector */
+				rt[1] = clust2sect(fs, ecl) + fs->csize - 1;	/* End sector */
+				disk_ioctl(fs->drv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, rt);		/* Erase the block */
+				scl = ecl = nxt;
+			}
+#endif
+			clst = nxt;	/* Next cluster */
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Stretch or Create a cluster chain                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+DWORD create_chain (	/* 0:No free cluster, 1:Internal error, 0xFFFFFFFF:Disk error, >=2:New cluster# */
+	FATFS *fs,			/* File system object */
+	DWORD clst			/* Cluster# to stretch. 0 means create a new chain. */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cs, ncl, scl;
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	if (clst == 0) {		/* Create a new chain */
+		scl = fs->last_clust;			/* Get suggested start point */
+		if (!scl || scl >= fs->n_fatent) scl = 1;
+	}
+	else {					/* Stretch the current chain */
+		cs = get_fat(fs, clst);			/* Check the cluster status */
+		if (cs < 2) return 1;			/* It is an invalid cluster */
+		if (cs < fs->n_fatent) return cs;	/* It is already followed by next cluster */
+		scl = clst;
+	}
+
+	ncl = scl;				/* Start cluster */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl++;							/* Next cluster */
+		if (ncl >= fs->n_fatent) {		/* Wrap around */
+			ncl = 2;
+			if (ncl > scl) return 0;	/* No free cluster */
+		}
+		cs = get_fat(fs, ncl);			/* Get the cluster status */
+		if (cs == 0) break;				/* Found a free cluster */
+		if (cs == 0xFFFFFFFF || cs == 1)/* An error occurred */
+			return cs;
+		if (ncl == scl) return 0;		/* No free cluster */
+	}
+
+	res = put_fat(fs, ncl, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Mark the new cluster "last link" */
+	if (res == FR_OK && clst != 0) {
+		res = put_fat(fs, clst, ncl);	/* Link it to the previous one if needed */
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		fs->last_clust = ncl;			/* Update FSINFO */
+		if (fs->free_clust != 0xFFFFFFFF) {
+			fs->free_clust--;
+			fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+		}
+	} else {
+		ncl = (res == FR_DISK_ERR) ? 0xFFFFFFFF : 1;
+	}
+
+	return ncl;		/* Return new cluster number or error code */
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FAT handling - Convert offset into cluster with link map table        */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+static
+DWORD clmt_clust (	/* <2:Error, >=2:Cluster number */
+	FIL* fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File offset to be converted to cluster# */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl, ncl, *tbl;
+
+
+	tbl = fp->cltbl + 1;	/* Top of CLMT */
+	cl = ofs / SS(fp->fs) / fp->fs->csize;	/* Cluster order from top of the file */
+	for (;;) {
+		ncl = *tbl++;			/* Number of cluters in the fragment */
+		if (!ncl) return 0;		/* End of table? (error) */
+		if (cl < ncl) break;	/* In this fragment? */
+		cl -= ncl; tbl++;		/* Next fragment */
+	}
+	return cl + *tbl;	/* Return the cluster number */
+}
+#endif	/* _USE_FASTSEEK */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Set directory index                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_sdi (
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	WORD idx		/* Index of directory table */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD ic;
+
+
+	dj->index = idx;
+	clst = dj->sclust;
+	if (clst == 1 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Check start cluster range */
+		return FR_INT_ERR;
+	if (!clst && dj->fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)	/* Replace cluster# 0 with root cluster# if in FAT32 */
+		clst = dj->fs->dirbase;
+
+	if (clst == 0) {	/* Static table (root-dir in FAT12/16) */
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		if (idx >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)		/* Index is out of range */
+			return FR_INT_ERR;
+		dj->sect = dj->fs->dirbase + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+	else {				/* Dynamic table (sub-dirs or root-dir in FAT32) */
+		ic = SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR * dj->fs->csize;	/* Entries per cluster */
+		while (idx >= ic) {	/* Follow cluster chain */
+			clst = get_fat(dj->fs, clst);				/* Get next cluster */
+			if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Disk error */
+			if (clst < 2 || clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent)	/* Reached to end of table or int error */
+				return FR_INT_ERR;
+			idx -= ic;
+		}
+		dj->clust = clst;
+		dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst) + idx / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* Sector# */
+	}
+
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (idx % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;	/* Ptr to the entry in the sector */
+
+	return FR_OK;	/* Seek succeeded */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Move directory table index next                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_next (	/* FR_OK:Succeeded, FR_NO_FILE:End of table, FR_DENIED:EOT and could not stretch */
+	DIR *dj,		/* Pointer to directory object */
+	int stretch		/* 0: Do not stretch table, 1: Stretch table if needed */
+)
+{
+	DWORD clst;
+	WORD i;
+
+
+	stretch = stretch;		/* To suppress warning on read-only cfg. */
+	i = dj->index + 1;
+	if (!i || !dj->sect)	/* Report EOT when index has reached 65535 */
+		return FR_NO_FILE;
+
+	if (!(i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR))) {	/* Sector changed? */
+		dj->sect++;					/* Next sector */
+
+		if (dj->clust == 0) {	/* Static table */
+			if (i >= dj->fs->n_rootdir)	/* Report EOT when end of table */
+				return FR_NO_FILE;
+		}
+		else {					/* Dynamic table */
+			if (((i / (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) & (dj->fs->csize - 1)) == 0) {	/* Cluster changed? */
+				clst = get_fat(dj->fs, dj->clust);				/* Get next cluster */
+				if (clst <= 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (clst >= dj->fs->n_fatent) {					/* When it reached end of dynamic table */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					BYTE c;
+					if (!stretch) return FR_NO_FILE;			/* When do not stretch, report EOT */
+					clst = create_chain(dj->fs, dj->clust);		/* Stretch cluster chain */
+					if (clst == 0) return FR_DENIED;			/* No free cluster */
+					if (clst == 1) return FR_INT_ERR;
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+					/* Clean-up stretched table */
+					if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;	/* Flush active window */
+					mem_set(dj->fs->win, 0, SS(dj->fs));			/* Clear window buffer */
+					dj->fs->winsect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);	/* Cluster start sector */
+					for (c = 0; c < dj->fs->csize; c++) {		/* Fill the new cluster with 0 */
+						dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (move_window(dj->fs, 0)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+						dj->fs->winsect++;
+					}
+					dj->fs->winsect -= c;						/* Rewind window address */
+#else
+					return FR_NO_FILE;			/* Report EOT */
+#endif
+				}
+				dj->clust = clst;				/* Initialize data for new cluster */
+				dj->sect = clust2sect(dj->fs, clst);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	dj->index = i;
+	dj->dir = dj->fs->win + (i % (SS(dj->fs) / SZ_DIR)) * SZ_DIR;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Load/Store start cluster number                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+DWORD ld_clust (
+	FATFS *fs,	/* Pointer to the fs object */
+	BYTE *dir	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	DWORD cl;
+
+	cl = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO);
+	if (fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32)
+		cl |= (DWORD)LD_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI) << 16;
+
+	return cl;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void st_clust (
+	BYTE *dir,	/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	DWORD cl	/* Value to be set */
+)
+{
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusLO, cl);
+	ST_WORD(dir+DIR_FstClusHI, cl >> 16);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* LFN handling - Test/Pick/Fit an LFN segment from/to directory entry   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+const BYTE LfnOfs[] = {1,3,5,7,9,14,16,18,20,22,24,28,30};	/* Offset of LFN chars in the directory entry */
+
+
+static
+int cmp_lfn (			/* 1:Matched, 0:Not matched */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the LFN to be compared */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry containing a part of LFN */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & ~LLE) - 1) * 13;	/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);	/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			wc = ff_wtoupper(uc);		/* Convert it to upper case */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN || wc != ff_wtoupper(lfnbuf[i++]))	/* Compare it */
+				return 0;				/* Not matched */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;	/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);				/* Repeat until all chars in the entry are checked */
+
+	if ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) && wc && lfnbuf[i])	/* Last segment matched but different length */
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;						/* The part of LFN matched */
+}
+
+
+
+static
+int pick_lfn (			/* 1:Succeeded, 0:Buffer overflow */
+	WCHAR *lfnbuf,		/* Pointer to the Unicode-LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc, uc;
+
+
+	i = ((dir[LDIR_Ord] & 0x3F) - 1) * 13;	/* Offset in the LFN buffer */
+
+	s = 0; wc = 1;
+	do {
+		uc = LD_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s]);		/* Pick an LFN character from the entry */
+		if (wc) {	/* Last char has not been processed */
+			if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;	/* Buffer overflow? */
+			lfnbuf[i++] = wc = uc;			/* Store it */
+		} else {
+			if (uc != 0xFFFF) return 0;		/* Check filler */
+		}
+	} while (++s < 13);						/* Read all character in the entry */
+
+	if (dir[LDIR_Ord] & LLE) {				/* Put terminator if it is the last LFN part */
+		if (i >= _MAX_LFN) return 0;		/* Buffer overflow? */
+		lfnbuf[i] = 0;
+	}
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+void fit_lfn (
+	const WCHAR *lfnbuf,	/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	BYTE *dir,				/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+	BYTE ord,				/* LFN order (1-20) */
+	BYTE sum				/* SFN sum */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, s;
+	WCHAR wc;
+
+
+	dir[LDIR_Chksum] = sum;			/* Set check sum */
+	dir[LDIR_Attr] = AM_LFN;		/* Set attribute. LFN entry */
+	dir[LDIR_Type] = 0;
+	ST_WORD(dir+LDIR_FstClusLO, 0);
+
+	i = (ord - 1) * 13;				/* Get offset in the LFN buffer */
+	s = wc = 0;
+	do {
+		if (wc != 0xFFFF) wc = lfnbuf[i++];	/* Get an effective char */
+		ST_WORD(dir+LfnOfs[s], wc);	/* Put it */
+		if (!wc) wc = 0xFFFF;		/* Padding chars following last char */
+	} while (++s < 13);
+	if (wc == 0xFFFF || !lfnbuf[i]) ord |= LLE;	/* Bottom LFN part is the start of LFN sequence */
+	dir[LDIR_Ord] = ord;			/* Set the LFN order */
+}
+
+#endif
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create numbered name                                                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+void gen_numname (
+	BYTE *dst,			/* Pointer to generated SFN */
+	const BYTE *src,	/* Pointer to source SFN to be modified */
+	const WCHAR *lfn,	/* Pointer to LFN */
+	WORD seq			/* Sequence number */
+)
+{
+	BYTE ns[8], c;
+	UINT i, j;
+
+
+	mem_cpy(dst, src, 11);
+
+	if (seq > 5) {	/* On many collisions, generate a hash number instead of sequential number */
+		do seq = (seq >> 1) + (seq << 15) + (WORD)*lfn++; while (*lfn);
+	}
+
+	/* itoa (hexdecimal) */
+	i = 7;
+	do {
+		c = (seq % 16) + '0';
+		if (c > '9') c += 7;
+		ns[i--] = c;
+		seq /= 16;
+	} while (seq);
+	ns[i] = '~';
+
+	/* Append the number */
+	for (j = 0; j < i && dst[j] != ' '; j++) {
+		if (IsDBCS1(dst[j])) {
+			if (j == i - 1) break;
+			j++;
+		}
+	}
+	do {
+		dst[j++] = (i < 8) ? ns[i++] : ' ';
+	} while (j < 8);
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Calculate sum of an SFN                                               */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_LFN
+static
+BYTE sum_sfn (
+	const BYTE *dir		/* Ptr to directory entry */
+)
+{
+	BYTE sum = 0;
+	UINT n = 11;
+
+	do sum = (sum >> 1) + (sum << 7) + *dir++; while (--n);
+	return sum;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Directory handling - Find an object in the directory                  */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT dir_find (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object linked to the file name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord, sum;
+#endif
+
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind directory object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	ord = sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (dj->lfn) {
+					if (c & LLE) {		/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+						sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+						c &= ~LLE; ord = c;	/* LFN start order */
+						dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+					}
+					/* Check validity of the LFN entry and compare it with given name */
+					ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && cmp_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+				}
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (!ord && sum == sum_sfn(dir)) break;	/* LFN matched? */
+				ord = 0xFF; dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;	/* Reset LFN sequence */
+				if (!(dj->fn[NS] & NS_LOSS) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) break;	/* SFN matched? */
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL) && !mem_cmp(dir, dj->fn, 11)) /* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read an object from the directory                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+FRESULT dir_read (
+	DIR *dj			/* Pointer to the directory object that pointing the entry to be read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN
+	BYTE a, ord = 0xFF, sum = 0xFF;
+#endif
+
+	res = FR_NO_FILE;
+	while (dj->sect) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		dir = dj->dir;					/* Ptr to the directory entry of current index */
+		c = dir[DIR_Name];
+		if (c == 0) { res = FR_NO_FILE; break; }	/* Reached to end of table */
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+		a = dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_MASK;
+		if (c == DDE || (!_FS_RPATH && c == '.') || ((a & AM_VOL) && a != AM_LFN)) {	/* An entry without valid data */
+			ord = 0xFF;
+		} else {
+			if (a == AM_LFN) {			/* An LFN entry is found */
+				if (c & LLE) {			/* Is it start of LFN sequence? */
+					sum = dir[LDIR_Chksum];
+					c &= ~LLE; ord = c;
+					dj->lfn_idx = dj->index;
+				}
+				/* Check LFN validity and capture it */
+				ord = (c == ord && sum == dir[LDIR_Chksum] && pick_lfn(dj->lfn, dir)) ? ord - 1 : 0xFF;
+			} else {					/* An SFN entry is found */
+				if (ord || sum != sum_sfn(dir))	/* Is there a valid LFN? */
+					dj->lfn_idx = 0xFFFF;		/* It has no LFN. */
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+#else		/* Non LFN configuration */
+		if (c != DDE && (_FS_RPATH || c != '.') && !(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_VOL))	/* Is it a valid entry? */
+			break;
+#endif
+		res = dir_next(dj, 0);				/* Next entry */
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+	}
+
+	if (res != FR_OK) dj->sect = 0;
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Register an object to the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+static
+FRESULT dir_register (	/* FR_OK:Successful, FR_DENIED:No free entry or too many SFN collision, FR_DISK_ERR:Disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Target directory with object name to be created */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE c, *dir;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD n, ne, is;
+	BYTE sn[12], *fn, sum;
+	WCHAR *lfn;
+
+
+	fn = dj->fn; lfn = dj->lfn;
+	mem_cpy(sn, fn, 12);
+
+	if (_FS_RPATH && (sn[NS] & NS_DOT))		/* Cannot create dot entry */
+		return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LOSS) {			/* When LFN is out of 8.3 format, generate a numbered name */
+		fn[NS] = 0; dj->lfn = 0;			/* Find only SFN */
+		for (n = 1; n < 100; n++) {
+			gen_numname(fn, sn, lfn, n);	/* Generate a numbered name */
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Check if the name collides with existing SFN */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		}
+		if (n == 100) return FR_DENIED;		/* Abort if too many collisions */
+		if (res != FR_NO_FILE) return res;	/* Abort if the result is other than 'not collided' */
+		fn[NS] = sn[NS]; dj->lfn = lfn;
+	}
+
+	if (sn[NS] & NS_LFN) {			/* When LFN is to be created, reserve an SFN + LFN entries. */
+		for (ne = 0; lfn[ne]; ne++) ;
+		ne = (ne + 25) / 13;
+	} else {						/* Otherwise reserve only an SFN entry. */
+		ne = 1;
+	}
+
+	/* Reserve contiguous entries */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res != FR_OK) return res;
+	n = is = 0;
+	do {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res != FR_OK) break;
+		c = *dj->dir;				/* Check the entry status */
+		if (c == DDE || c == 0) {	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			if (n == 0) is = dj->index;	/* First index of the contiguous entry */
+			if (++n == ne) break;	/* A contiguous entry that required count is found */
+		} else {
+			n = 0;					/* Not a blank entry. Restart to search */
+		}
+		res = dir_next(dj, 1);		/* Next entry with table stretch */
+	} while (res == FR_OK);
+
+	if (res == FR_OK && ne > 1) {	/* Initialize LFN entry if needed */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, is);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			sum = sum_sfn(dj->fn);	/* Sum of the SFN tied to the LFN */
+			ne--;
+			do {					/* Store LFN entries in bottom first */
+				res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				fit_lfn(dj->lfn, dj->dir, (BYTE)ne, sum);
+				dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);	/* Next entry */
+			} while (res == FR_OK && --ne);
+		}
+	}
+
+#else	/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {	/* Find a blank entry for the SFN */
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			c = *dj->dir;
+			if (c == DDE || c == 0) break;	/* Is it a blank entry? */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 1);			/* Next entry with table stretch */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Initialize the SFN entry */
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj->dir;
+			mem_set(dir, 0, SZ_DIR);	/* Clean the entry */
+			mem_cpy(dir, dj->fn, 11);	/* Put SFN */
+#if _USE_LFN
+			dir[DIR_NTres] = *(dj->fn+NS) & (NS_BODY | NS_EXT);	/* Put NT flag */
+#endif
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Remove an object from the directory                                   */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if !_FS_READONLY && !_FS_MINIMIZE
+static
+FRESULT dir_remove (	/* FR_OK: Successful, FR_DISK_ERR: A disk error */
+	DIR *dj				/* Directory object pointing the entry to be removed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	WORD i;
+
+	i = dj->index;	/* SFN index */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, (WORD)((dj->lfn_idx == 0xFFFF) ? i : dj->lfn_idx));	/* Goto the SFN or top of the LFN entries */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		do {
+			res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+			if (dj->index >= i) break;	/* When reached SFN, all entries of the object has been deleted. */
+			res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Next entry */
+		} while (res == FR_OK);
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+	}
+
+#else			/* Non LFN configuration */
+	res = dir_sdi(dj, dj->index);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		res = move_window(dj->fs, dj->sect);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*dj->dir = DDE;			/* Mark the entry "deleted" */
+			dj->fs->wflag = 1;
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+
+	return res;
+}
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Pick a segment and create the object name in directory form           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT create_name (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	const TCHAR **path	/* Pointer to pointer to the segment in the path string */
+)
+{
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+	static const BYTE excvt[] = _EXCVT;	/* Upper conversion table for extended chars */
+#endif
+
+#if _USE_LFN	/* LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, cf;
+	WCHAR w, *lfn;
+	UINT i, ni, si, di;
+	const TCHAR *p;
+
+	/* Create LFN in Unicode */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	lfn = dj->lfn;
+	si = di = 0;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = p[si++];					/* Get a character */
+		if (w < ' ' || w == '/' || w == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (di >= _MAX_LFN)				/* Reject too long name */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+		w &= 0xFF;
+		if (IsDBCS1(w)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			b = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(b))
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid sequence */
+			w = (w << 8) + b;			/* Create a DBC */
+		}
+		w = ff_convert(w, 1);			/* Convert ANSI/OEM to Unicode */
+		if (!w) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject invalid code */
+#endif
+		if (w < 0x80 && chk_chr("\"*:<>\?|\x7F", w)) /* Reject illegal chars for LFN */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		lfn[di++] = w;					/* Store the Unicode char */
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	cf = (w < ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if ((di == 1 && lfn[di-1] == '.') || /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		(di == 2 && lfn[di-1] == '.' && lfn[di-2] == '.')) {
+		lfn[di] = 0;
+		for (i = 0; i < 11; i++)
+			dj->fn[i] = (i < di) ? '.' : ' ';
+		dj->fn[i] = cf | NS_DOT;		/* This is a dot entry */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	while (di) {						/* Strip trailing spaces and dots */
+		w = lfn[di-1];
+		if (w != ' ' && w != '.') break;
+		di--;
+	}
+	if (!di) return FR_INVALID_NAME;	/* Reject nul string */
+
+	lfn[di] = 0;						/* LFN is created */
+
+	/* Create SFN in directory form */
+	mem_set(dj->fn, ' ', 11);
+	for (si = 0; lfn[si] == ' ' || lfn[si] == '.'; si++) ;	/* Strip leading spaces and dots */
+	if (si) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;
+	while (di && lfn[di - 1] != '.') di--;	/* Find extension (di<=si: no extension) */
+
+	b = i = 0; ni = 8;
+	for (;;) {
+		w = lfn[si++];					/* Get an LFN char */
+		if (!w) break;					/* Break on end of the LFN */
+		if (w == ' ' || (w == '.' && si != di)) {	/* Remove spaces and dots */
+			cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (i >= ni || si == di) {		/* Extension or end of SFN */
+			if (ni == 11) {				/* Long extension */
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; break;
+			}
+			if (si != di) cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;	/* Out of 8.3 format */
+			if (si > di) break;			/* No extension */
+			si = di; i = 8; ni = 11;	/* Enter extension section */
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+
+		if (w >= 0x80) {				/* Non ASCII char */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			w = ff_convert(w, 0);		/* Unicode -> OEM code */
+			if (w) w = excvt[w - 0x80];	/* Convert extended char to upper (SBCS) */
+#else
+			w = ff_convert(ff_wtoupper(w), 0);	/* Upper converted Unicode -> OEM code */
+#endif
+			cf |= NS_LFN;				/* Force create LFN entry */
+		}
+
+		if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100) {		/* Double byte char (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			if (i >= ni - 1) {
+				cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN; i = ni; continue;
+			}
+			dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)(w >> 8);
+		} else {						/* Single byte char */
+			if (!w || chk_chr("+,;=[]", w)) {	/* Replace illegal chars for SFN */
+				w = '_'; cf |= NS_LOSS | NS_LFN;/* Lossy conversion */
+			} else {
+				if (IsUpper(w)) {		/* ASCII large capital */
+					b |= 2;
+				} else {
+					if (IsLower(w)) {	/* ASCII small capital */
+						b |= 1; w -= 0x20;
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		dj->fn[i++] = (BYTE)w;
+	}
+
+	if (dj->fn[0] == DDE) dj->fn[0] = NDDE;	/* If the first char collides with deleted mark, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x0C || (b & 0x03) == 0x03)	/* Create LFN entry when there are composite capitals */
+		cf |= NS_LFN;
+	if (!(cf & NS_LFN)) {						/* When LFN is in 8.3 format without extended char, NT flags are created */
+		if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) cf |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Extension has only small capital) */
+		if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) cf |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Filename has only small capital) */
+	}
+
+	dj->fn[NS] = cf;	/* SFN is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+
+
+#else	/* Non-LFN configuration */
+	BYTE b, c, d, *sfn;
+	UINT ni, si, i;
+	const char *p;
+
+	/* Create file name in directory form */
+	for (p = *path; *p == '/' || *p == '\\'; p++) ;	/* Strip duplicated separator */
+	sfn = dj->fn;
+	mem_set(sfn, ' ', 11);
+	si = i = b = 0; ni = 8;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (p[si] == '.') { /* Is this a dot entry? */
+		for (;;) {
+			c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+			if (c != '.' || si >= 3) break;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+		if (c != '/' && c != '\\' && c > ' ') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		*path = &p[si];									/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+		sfn[NS] = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST | NS_DOT : NS_DOT;	/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+		return FR_OK;
+	}
+#endif
+	for (;;) {
+		c = (BYTE)p[si++];
+		if (c <= ' ' || c == '/' || c == '\\') break;	/* Break on end of segment */
+		if (c == '.' || i >= ni) {
+			if (ni != 8 || c != '.') return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			i = 8; ni = 11;
+			b <<= 2; continue;
+		}
+		if (c >= 0x80) {				/* Extended char? */
+			b |= 3;						/* Eliminate NT flag */
+#ifdef _EXCVT
+			c = excvt[c - 0x80];		/* Upper conversion (SBCS) */
+#else
+#if !_DF1S	/* ASCII only cfg */
+			return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#endif
+#endif
+		}
+		if (IsDBCS1(c)) {				/* Check if it is a DBC 1st byte (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+			d = (BYTE)p[si++];			/* Get 2nd byte */
+			if (!IsDBCS2(d) || i >= ni - 1)	/* Reject invalid DBC */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+			sfn[i++] = d;
+		} else {						/* Single byte code */
+			if (chk_chr("\"*+,:;<=>\?[]|\x7F", c))	/* Reject illegal chrs for SFN */
+				return FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			if (IsUpper(c)) {			/* ASCII large capital? */
+				b |= 2;
+			} else {
+				if (IsLower(c)) {		/* ASCII small capital? */
+					b |= 1; c -= 0x20;
+				}
+			}
+			sfn[i++] = c;
+		}
+	}
+	*path = &p[si];						/* Return pointer to the next segment */
+	c = (c <= ' ') ? NS_LAST : 0;		/* Set last segment flag if end of path */
+
+	if (!i) return FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Reject nul string */
+	if (sfn[0] == DDE) sfn[0] = NDDE;	/* When first char collides with DDE, replace it with 0x05 */
+
+	if (ni == 8) b <<= 2;
+	if ((b & 0x03) == 0x01) c |= NS_EXT;	/* NT flag (Name extension has only small capital) */
+	if ((b & 0x0C) == 0x04) c |= NS_BODY;	/* NT flag (Name body has only small capital) */
+
+	sfn[NS] = c;		/* Store NT flag, File name is created */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get file information from directory entry                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+static
+void get_fileinfo (		/* No return code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno	 	/* Pointer to the file information to be filled */
+)
+{
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE nt, *dir;
+	TCHAR *p, c;
+
+
+	p = fno->fname;
+	if (dj->sect) {
+		dir = dj->dir;
+		nt = dir[DIR_NTres];		/* NT flag */
+		for (i = 0; i < 8; i++) {	/* Copy name body */
+			c = dir[i];
+			if (c == ' ') break;
+			if (c == NDDE) c = (TCHAR)DDE;
+			if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_BODY) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+			if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 7 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+				c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+			c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+			if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+			*p++ = c;
+		}
+		if (dir[8] != ' ') {		/* Copy name extension */
+			*p++ = '.';
+			for (i = 8; i < 11; i++) {
+				c = dir[i];
+				if (c == ' ') break;
+				if (_USE_LFN && (nt & NS_EXT) && IsUpper(c)) c += 0x20;
+#if _LFN_UNICODE
+				if (IsDBCS1(c) && i < 10 && IsDBCS2(dir[i+1]))
+					c = (c << 8) | dir[++i];
+				c = ff_convert(c, 1);
+				if (!c) c = '?';
+#endif
+				*p++ = c;
+			}
+		}
+		fno->fattrib = dir[DIR_Attr];				/* Attribute */
+		fno->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* Size */
+		fno->fdate = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate);		/* Date */
+		fno->ftime = LD_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime);		/* Time */
+	}
+	*p = 0;		/* Terminate SFN str by a \0 */
+
+#if _USE_LFN
+	if (fno->lfname && fno->lfsize) {
+		TCHAR *tp = fno->lfname;
+		WCHAR w, *lfn;
+
+		i = 0;
+		if (dj->sect && dj->lfn_idx != 0xFFFF) {/* Get LFN if available */
+			lfn = dj->lfn;
+			while ((w = *lfn++) != 0) {			/* Get an LFN char */
+#if !_LFN_UNICODE
+				w = ff_convert(w, 0);			/* Unicode -> OEM conversion */
+				if (!w) { i = 0; break; }		/* Could not convert, no LFN */
+				if (_DF1S && w >= 0x100)		/* Put 1st byte if it is a DBC (always false on SBCS cfg) */
+					tp[i++] = (TCHAR)(w >> 8);
+#endif
+				if (i >= fno->lfsize - 1) { i = 0; break; }	/* Buffer overflow, no LFN */
+				tp[i++] = (TCHAR)w;
+			}
+		}
+		tp[i] = 0;	/* Terminate the LFN str by a \0 */
+	}
+#endif
+}
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Follow a file path                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT follow_path (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: error code */
+	DIR *dj,			/* Directory object to return last directory and found object */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Full-path string to find a file or directory */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	BYTE *dir, ns;
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\') { /* There is a heading separator */
+		path++;	dj->sclust = 0;		/* Strip it and start from the root dir */
+	} else {							/* No heading separator */
+		dj->sclust = dj->fs->cdir;	/* Start from the current dir */
+	}
+#else
+	if (*path == '/' || *path == '\\')	/* Strip heading separator if exist */
+		path++;
+	dj->sclust = 0;						/* Start from the root dir */
+#endif
+
+	if ((UINT)*path < ' ') {			/* Nul path means the start directory itself */
+		res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);
+		dj->dir = 0;
+	} else {							/* Follow path */
+		for (;;) {
+			res = create_name(dj, &path);	/* Get a segment */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_find(dj);				/* Find it */
+			ns = *(dj->fn+NS);
+			if (res != FR_OK) {				/* Failed to find the object */
+				if (res != FR_NO_FILE) break;	/* Abort if any hard error occurred */
+				/* Object not found */
+				if (_FS_RPATH && (ns & NS_DOT)) {	/* If dot entry is not exit */
+					dj->sclust = 0; dj->dir = 0;	/* It is the root dir */
+					res = FR_OK;
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) continue;
+				} else {							/* Could not find the object */
+					if (!(ns & NS_LAST)) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+				break;
+			}
+			if (ns & NS_LAST) break;			/* Last segment match. Function completed. */
+			dir = dj->dir;						/* There is next segment. Follow the sub directory */
+			if (!(dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot follow because it is a file */
+				res = FR_NO_PATH; break;
+			}
+			dj->sclust = ld_clust(dj->fs, dir);
+		}
+	}
+
+	return res;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Load a sector and check if it is an FAT Volume Boot Record            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+BYTE check_fs (	/* 0:FAT-VBR, 1:Any BR but not FAT, 2:Not a BR, 3:Disk error */
+	FATFS *fs,	/* File system object */
+	DWORD sect	/* Sector# (lba) to check if it is an FAT boot record or not */
+)
+{
+	if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load boot record */
+		return 3;
+	if (LD_WORD(&fs->win[BS_55AA]) != 0xAA55)		/* Check record signature (always placed at offset 510 even if the sector size is >512) */
+		return 2;
+
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)	/* Check "FAT" string */
+		return 0;
+	if ((LD_DWORD(&fs->win[BS_FilSysType32]) & 0xFFFFFF) == 0x544146)
+		return 0;
+
+	return 1;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file system object is valid or not                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT chk_mounted (	/* FR_OK(0): successful, !=0: any error occurred */
+	const TCHAR **path,	/* Pointer to pointer to the path name (drive number) */
+	FATFS **rfs,		/* Pointer to pointer to the found file system object */
+	BYTE wmode			/* !=0: Check write protection for write access */
+)
+{
+	BYTE fmt, b, pi, *tbl;
+	UINT vol;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD bsect, fasize, tsect, sysect, nclst, szbfat;
+	WORD nrsv;
+	const TCHAR *p = *path;
+	FATFS *fs;
+
+
+	/* Get logical drive number from the path name */
+	vol = p[0] - '0';					/* Is there a drive number? */
+	if (vol <= 9 && p[1] == ':') {		/* Found a drive number, get and strip it */
+		p += 2; *path = p;				/* Return pointer to the path name */
+	} else {							/* No drive number is given */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+		vol = CurrVol;					/* Use current drive */
+#else
+		vol = 0;						/* Use drive 0 */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the file system object is valid or not */
+	*rfs = 0;
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES) 				/* Is the drive number valid? */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	fs = FatFs[vol];					/* Get corresponding file system object */
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;		/* Is the file system object available? */
+
+	ENTER_FF(fs);						/* Lock file system */
+
+	*rfs = fs;							/* Return pointer to the corresponding file system object */
+	if (fs->fs_type) {					/* If the volume has been mounted */
+		stat = disk_status(fs->drv);
+		if (!(stat & STA_NOINIT)) {		/* and the physical drive is kept initialized (has not been changed), */
+			if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check write protection if needed */
+				return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+			return FR_OK;				/* The file system object is valid */
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* The file system object is not valid. */
+	/* Following code attempts to mount the volume. (analyze BPB and initialize the fs object) */
+
+	fs->fs_type = 0;					/* Clear the file system object */
+	fs->drv = LD2PD(vol);				/* Bind the logical drive and a physical drive */
+	stat = disk_initialize(fs->drv);	/* Initialize the physical drive */
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT)				/* Check if the initialization succeeded */
+		return FR_NOT_READY;			/* Failed to initialize due to no medium or hard error */
+	if (!_FS_READONLY && wmode && (stat & STA_PROTECT))	/* Check disk write protection if needed */
+		return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512						/* Get disk sector size (variable sector size cfg only) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(fs->drv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &fs->ssize) != RES_OK)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	/* Search FAT partition on the drive. Supports only generic partitions, FDISK and SFD. */
+	fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect = 0);		/* Load sector 0 and check if it is an FAT-VBR (in SFD) */
+	if (LD2PT(vol) && !fmt) fmt = 1;	/* Force non-SFD if the volume is forced partition */
+	if (fmt == 1) {						/* Not an FAT-VBR, the physical drive can be partitioned */
+		/* Check the partition listed in the partition table */
+		pi = LD2PT(vol);
+		if (pi) pi--;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + pi * SZ_PTE];/* Partition table */
+		if (tbl[4]) {						/* Is the partition existing? */
+			bsect = LD_DWORD(&tbl[8]);		/* Partition offset in LBA */
+			fmt = check_fs(fs, bsect);		/* Check the partition */
+		}
+	}
+	if (fmt == 3) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* No FAT volume is found */
+
+	/* An FAT volume is found. Following code initializes the file system object */
+
+	if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_BytsPerSec) != SS(fs))		/* (BPB_BytsPerSec must be equal to the physical sector size) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+	fasize = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz16);				/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+	if (!fasize) fasize = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_FATSz32);
+	fs->fsize = fasize;
+
+	fs->n_fats = b = fs->win[BPB_NumFATs];				/* Number of FAT copies */
+	if (b != 1 && b != 2) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Must be 1 or 2) */
+	fasize *= b;										/* Number of sectors for FAT area */
+
+	fs->csize = b = fs->win[BPB_SecPerClus];			/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (!b || (b & (b - 1))) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (Must be power of 2) */
+
+	fs->n_rootdir = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RootEntCnt);	/* Number of root directory entries */
+	if (fs->n_rootdir % (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR)) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be sector aligned) */
+
+	tsect = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec16);				/* Number of sectors on the volume */
+	if (!tsect) tsect = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_TotSec32);
+
+	nrsv = LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_RsvdSecCnt);				/* Number of reserved sectors */
+	if (!nrsv) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;					/* (BPB_RsvdSecCnt must not be 0) */
+
+	/* Determine the FAT sub type */
+	sysect = nrsv + fasize + fs->n_rootdir / (SS(fs) / SZ_DIR);	/* RSV+FAT+DIR */
+	if (tsect < sysect) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	nclst = (tsect - sysect) / fs->csize;				/* Number of clusters */
+	if (!nclst) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;				/* (Invalid volume size) */
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (nclst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Boundaries and Limits */
+	fs->n_fatent = nclst + 2;							/* Number of FAT entries */
+	fs->database = bsect + sysect;						/* Data start sector */
+	fs->fatbase = bsect + nrsv; 						/* FAT start sector */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		if (fs->n_rootdir) return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;		/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = LD_DWORD(fs->win+BPB_RootClus);	/* Root directory start cluster */
+		szbfat = fs->n_fatent * 4;						/* (Required FAT size) */
+	} else {
+		if (!fs->n_rootdir)	return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;	/* (BPB_RootEntCnt must not be 0) */
+		fs->dirbase = fs->fatbase + fasize;				/* Root directory start sector */
+		szbfat = (fmt == FS_FAT16) ?					/* (Required FAT size) */
+			fs->n_fatent * 2 : fs->n_fatent * 3 / 2 + (fs->n_fatent & 1);
+	}
+	if (fs->fsize < (szbfat + (SS(fs) - 1)) / SS(fs))	/* (BPB_FATSz must not be less than required) */
+		return FR_NO_FILESYSTEM;
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	/* Initialize cluster allocation information */
+	fs->free_clust = 0xFFFFFFFF;
+	fs->last_clust = 0;
+
+	/* Get fsinfo if available */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+	 	fs->fsi_flag = 0;
+		fs->fsi_sector = bsect + LD_WORD(fs->win+BPB_FSInfo);
+		if (disk_read(fs->drv, fs->win, fs->fsi_sector, 1) == RES_OK &&
+			LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) == 0xAA55 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_LeadSig) == 0x41615252 &&
+			LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_StrucSig) == 0x61417272) {
+				fs->last_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Nxt_Free);
+				fs->free_clust = LD_DWORD(fs->win+FSI_Free_Count);
+		}
+	}
+#endif
+	fs->fs_type = fmt;		/* FAT sub-type */
+	fs->id = ++Fsid;		/* File system mount ID */
+	fs->winsect = 0;		/* Invalidate sector cache */
+	fs->wflag = 0;
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	fs->cdir = 0;			/* Current directory (root dir) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK				/* Clear file lock semaphores */
+	clear_lock(fs);
+#endif
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Check if the file/dir object is valid or not                          */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+static
+FRESULT validate (	/* FR_OK(0): The object is valid, !=0: Invalid */
+	void* obj		/* Pointer to the object FIL/DIR to check validity */
+)
+{
+	FIL *fil;
+
+
+	fil = (FIL*)obj;	/* Assuming offset of fs and id in the FIL/DIR is identical */
+	if (!fil->fs || !fil->fs->fs_type || fil->fs->id != fil->id)
+		return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	ENTER_FF(fil->fs);		/* Lock file system */
+
+	if (disk_status(fil->fs->drv) & STA_NOINIT)
+		return FR_NOT_READY;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+   Public Functions
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Mount/Unmount a Logical Drive                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mount (
+	BYTE vol,		/* Logical drive number to be mounted/unmounted */
+	FATFS *fs		/* Pointer to new file system object (NULL for unmount)*/
+)
+{
+	FATFS *rfs;
+
+
+	if (vol >= _VOLUMES)		/* Check if the drive number is valid */
+		return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	rfs = FatFs[vol];			/* Get current fs object */
+
+	if (rfs) {
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		clear_lock(rfs);
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Discard sync object of the current volume */
+		if (!ff_del_syncobj(rfs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		rfs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear old fs object */
+	}
+
+	if (fs) {
+		fs->fs_type = 0;		/* Clear new fs object */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT				/* Create sync object for the new volume */
+		if (!ff_cre_syncobj(vol, &fs->sobj)) return FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+	}
+	FatFs[vol] = fs;			/* Register new fs object */
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Open or Create a File                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_open (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the blank file object */
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file name */
+	BYTE mode			/* Access mode and file open mode flags */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+	fp->fs = 0;			/* Clear file object */
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	mode &= FA_READ | FA_WRITE | FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, (BYTE)(mode & ~FA_READ));
+#else
+	mode &= FA_READ;
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		dir = dj.dir;
+#if !_FS_READONLY	/* R/W configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (!dir)	/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			else
+				res = chk_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+#endif
+		}
+		/* Create or Open a file */
+		if (mode & (FA_CREATE_ALWAYS | FA_OPEN_ALWAYS | FA_CREATE_NEW)) {
+			DWORD dw, cl;
+
+			if (res != FR_OK) {					/* No file, create new */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE)			/* There is no file to open, create a new entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+					res = enq_lock() ? dir_register(&dj) : FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES;
+#else
+					res = dir_register(&dj);
+#endif
+				mode |= FA_CREATE_ALWAYS;		/* File is created */
+				dir = dj.dir;					/* New entry */
+			}
+			else {								/* Any object is already existing */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & (AM_RDO | AM_DIR)) {	/* Cannot overwrite it (R/O or DIR) */
+					res = FR_DENIED;
+				} else {
+					if (mode & FA_CREATE_NEW)	/* Cannot create as new file */
+						res = FR_EXIST;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK && (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)) {	/* Truncate it if overwrite mode */
+				dw = get_fattime();					/* Created time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_CrtTime, dw);
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = 0;					/* Reset attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, 0);		/* size = 0 */
+				cl = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);			/* Get start cluster */
+				st_clust(dir, 0);					/* cluster = 0 */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				if (cl) {							/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+					dw = dj.fs->winsect;
+					res = remove_chain(dj.fs, cl);
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dj.fs->last_clust = cl - 1;	/* Reuse the cluster hole */
+						res = move_window(dj.fs, dw);
+					}
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		else {	/* Open an existing file */
+			if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow succeeded */
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {		/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+				} else {
+					if ((mode & FA_WRITE) && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)) /* R/O violation */
+						res = FR_DENIED;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			if (mode & FA_CREATE_ALWAYS)			/* Set file change flag if created or overwritten */
+				mode |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			fp->dir_sect = dj.fs->winsect;			/* Pointer to the directory entry */
+			fp->dir_ptr = dir;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+			fp->lockid = inc_lock(&dj, (mode & ~FA_READ) ? 1 : 0);
+			if (!fp->lockid) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+#endif
+		}
+
+#else				/* R/O configuration */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow succeeded */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Current dir itself */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* It is a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+		FREE_BUF();
+
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			fp->flag = mode;					/* File access mode */
+			fp->sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);	/* File start cluster */
+			fp->fsize = LD_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize);	/* File size */
+			fp->fptr = 0;						/* File pointer */
+			fp->dsect = 0;
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+			fp->cltbl = 0;						/* Normal seek mode */
+#endif
+			fp->fs = dj.fs; fp->id = dj.fs->id;	/* Validate file object */
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read File                                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_read (
+	FIL *fp, 		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	void *buff,		/* Pointer to data buffer */
+	UINT btr,		/* Number of bytes to read */
+	UINT *br		/* Pointer to number of bytes read */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect, remain;
+	UINT rcnt, cc;
+	BYTE csect, *rbuff = buff;
+
+
+	*br = 0;	/* Clear read byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);							/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)					/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ)) 					/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;		/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr;								/* Repeat until all data read */
+		rbuff += rcnt, fp->fptr += rcnt, *br += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {		/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {						/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {			/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;			/* Follow from the origin */
+				} else {						/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst < 2) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;				/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btr / SS(fp->fs);				/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {							/* Read maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, rbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if !_FS_READONLY && _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2			/* Replace one of the read sectors with cached data if it contains a dirty sector */
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->wflag && fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->fs->win, SS(fp->fs));
+#else
+				if ((fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) && fp->dsect - sect < cc)
+					mem_cpy(rbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), fp->buf, SS(fp->fs));
+#endif
+#endif
+				rcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;			/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if !_FS_TINY
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {			/* Load data sector if not in cache */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+					if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Get partial sector data from sector buffer */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))		/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#else
+		mem_cpy(rbuff, &fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);	/* Pick partial sector */
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Write File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_write (
+	FIL *fp,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const void *buff,	/* Pointer to the data to be written */
+	UINT btw,			/* Number of bytes to write */
+	UINT *bw			/* Pointer to number of bytes written */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD clst, sect;
+	UINT wcnt, cc;
+	const BYTE *wbuff = buff;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bw = 0;	/* Clear write byte counter */
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)				/* Aborted file? */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))				/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+	if ((DWORD)(fp->fsize + btw) < fp->fsize) btw = 0;	/* File size cannot reach 4GB */
+
+	for ( ;  btw;							/* Repeat until all data written */
+		wbuff += wcnt, fp->fptr += wcnt, *bw += wcnt, btw -= wcnt) {
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {	/* On the sector boundary? */
+			csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+			if (!csect) {					/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				if (fp->fptr == 0) {		/* On the top of the file? */
+					clst = fp->sclust;		/* Follow from the origin */
+					if (clst == 0)			/* When no cluster is allocated, */
+						fp->sclust = clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);	/* Create a new cluster chain */
+				} else {					/* Middle or end of the file */
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+					if (fp->cltbl)
+						clst = clmt_clust(fp, fp->fptr);	/* Get cluster# from the CLMT */
+					else
+#endif
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Follow or stretch cluster chain on the FAT */
+				}
+				if (clst == 0) break;		/* Could not allocate a new cluster (disk full) */
+				if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;			/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fs->winsect == fp->dsect && move_window(fp->fs, 0))	/* Write-back sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#else
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);	/* Get current sector */
+			if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+			sect += csect;
+			cc = btw / SS(fp->fs);			/* When remaining bytes >= sector size, */
+			if (cc) {						/* Write maximum contiguous sectors directly */
+				if (csect + cc > fp->fs->csize)	/* Clip at cluster boundary */
+					cc = fp->fs->csize - csect;
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, wbuff, sect, (BYTE)cc) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#if _FS_TINY
+				if (fp->fs->winsect - sect < cc) {	/* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->fs->win, wbuff + ((fp->fs->winsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->fs->wflag = 0;
+				}
+#else
+				if (fp->dsect - sect < cc) { /* Refill sector cache if it gets invalidated by the direct write */
+					mem_cpy(fp->buf, wbuff + ((fp->dsect - sect) * SS(fp->fs)), SS(fp->fs));
+					fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+				}
+#endif
+				wcnt = SS(fp->fs) * cc;		/* Number of bytes transferred */
+				continue;
+			}
+#if _FS_TINY
+			if (fp->fptr >= fp->fsize) {	/* Avoid silly cache filling at growing edge */
+				if (move_window(fp->fs, 0)) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->fs->winsect = sect;
+			}
+#else
+			if (fp->dsect != sect) {		/* Fill sector cache with file data */
+				if (fp->fptr < fp->fsize &&
+					disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, sect, 1) != RES_OK)
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+			}
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = sect;
+		}
+		wcnt = SS(fp->fs) - ((UINT)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));/* Put partial sector into file I/O buffer */
+		if (wcnt > btw) wcnt = btw;
+#if _FS_TINY
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, fp->dsect))	/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		mem_cpy(&fp->fs->win[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+#else
+		mem_cpy(&fp->buf[fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], wbuff, wcnt);	/* Fit partial sector */
+		fp->flag |= FA__DIRTY;
+#endif
+	}
+
+	if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Update file size if needed */
+	fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;						/* Set file change flag */
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Synchronize the File Object                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_sync (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD tim;
+	BYTE *dir;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__WRITTEN) {	/* Has the file been written? */
+#if !_FS_TINY	/* Write-back dirty buffer */
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			/* Update the directory entry */
+			res = move_window(fp->fs, fp->dir_sect);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dir = fp->dir_ptr;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] |= AM_ARC;					/* Set archive bit */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_FileSize, fp->fsize);		/* Update file size */
+				st_clust(dir, fp->sclust);					/* Update start cluster */
+				tim = get_fattime();						/* Update updated time */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_LstAccDate, 0);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__WRITTEN;
+				fp->fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(fp->fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Close File                                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_close (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object to be closed */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+#if _FS_READONLY
+	res = validate(fp);
+	{
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+		LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+	}
+#else
+	res = f_sync(fp);		/* Flush cached data */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	if (res == FR_OK) {		/* Decrement open counter */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+		FATFS *fs = fp->fs;;
+		res = validate(fp);
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);	
+			unlock_fs(fs, FR_OK);
+		}
+#else
+		res = dec_lock(fp->lockid);
+#endif
+	}
+#endif
+	if (res == FR_OK) fp->fs = 0;	/* Discard file object */
+	return res;
+#endif
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Current Drive/Directory Handlings                                     */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 1
+
+FRESULT f_chdrive (
+	BYTE drv		/* Drive number */
+)
+{
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+
+	CurrVol = drv;
+
+	return FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+
+FRESULT f_chdir (
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Follow completed */
+			if (!dj.dir) {
+				dj.fs->cdir = dj.sclust;	/* Start directory itself */
+			} else {
+				if (dj.dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)	/* Reached to the directory */
+					dj.fs->cdir = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);
+				else
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;		/* Reached but a file */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+#if _FS_RPATH >= 2
+FRESULT f_getcwd (
+	TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+	UINT sz_path	/* Size of path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	UINT i, n;
+	DWORD ccl;
+	TCHAR *tp;
+	FILINFO fno;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	*path = 0;
+	res = chk_mounted((const TCHAR**)&path, &dj.fs, 0);	/* Get current volume */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		i = sz_path;		/* Bottom of buffer (dir stack base) */
+		dj.sclust = dj.fs->cdir;			/* Start to follow upper dir from current dir */
+		while ((ccl = dj.sclust) != 0) {	/* Repeat while current dir is a sub-dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 1);			/* Get parent dir */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			res = dir_read(&dj);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			dj.sclust = ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir);	/* Goto parent dir */
+			res = dir_sdi(&dj, 0);
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+			do {							/* Find the entry links to the child dir */
+				res = dir_read(&dj);
+				if (res != FR_OK) break;
+				if (ccl == ld_clust(dj.fs, dj.dir)) break;	/* Found the entry */
+				res = dir_next(&dj, 0);	
+			} while (res == FR_OK);
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_INT_ERR;/* It cannot be 'not found'. */
+			if (res != FR_OK) break;
+#if _USE_LFN
+			fno.lfname = path;
+			fno.lfsize = i;
+#endif
+			get_fileinfo(&dj, &fno);		/* Get the dir name and push it to the buffer */
+			tp = fno.fname;
+			if (_USE_LFN && *path) tp = path;
+			for (n = 0; tp[n]; n++) ;
+			if (i < n + 3) {
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE; break;
+			}
+			while (n) path[--i] = tp[--n];
+			path[--i] = '/';
+		}
+		tp = path;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			*tp++ = '0' + CurrVol;			/* Put drive number */
+			*tp++ = ':';
+			if (i == sz_path) {				/* Root-dir */
+				*tp++ = '/';
+			} else {						/* Sub-dir */
+				do		/* Add stacked path str */
+					*tp++ = path[i++];
+				while (i < sz_path);
+			}
+		}
+		*tp = 0;
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 2 */
+#endif /* _FS_RPATH >= 1 */
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Seek File R/W Pointer                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_lseek (
+	FIL *fp,		/* Pointer to the file object */
+	DWORD ofs		/* File pointer from top of file */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+
+
+	res = validate(fp);					/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)			/* Check abort flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	if (fp->cltbl) {	/* Fast seek */
+		DWORD cl, pcl, ncl, tcl, dsc, tlen, ulen, *tbl;
+
+		if (ofs == CREATE_LINKMAP) {	/* Create CLMT */
+			tbl = fp->cltbl;
+			tlen = *tbl++; ulen = 2;	/* Given table size and required table size */
+			cl = fp->sclust;			/* Top of the chain */
+			if (cl) {
+				do {
+					/* Get a fragment */
+					tcl = cl; ncl = 0; ulen += 2;	/* Top, length and used items */
+					do {
+						pcl = cl; ncl++;
+						cl = get_fat(fp->fs, cl);
+						if (cl <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+						if (cl == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					} while (cl == pcl + 1);
+					if (ulen <= tlen) {		/* Store the length and top of the fragment */
+						*tbl++ = ncl; *tbl++ = tcl;
+					}
+				} while (cl < fp->fs->n_fatent);	/* Repeat until end of chain */
+			}
+			*fp->cltbl = ulen;	/* Number of items used */
+			if (ulen <= tlen)
+				*tbl = 0;		/* Terminate table */
+			else
+				res = FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE;	/* Given table size is smaller than required */
+
+		} else {						/* Fast seek */
+			if (ofs > fp->fsize)		/* Clip offset at the file size */
+				ofs = fp->fsize;
+			fp->fptr = ofs;				/* Set file pointer */
+			if (ofs) {
+				fp->clust = clmt_clust(fp, ofs - 1);
+				dsc = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (!dsc) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				dsc += (ofs - 1) / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1);
+				if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && dsc != fp->dsect) {	/* Refill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {		/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+						if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+							ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+						fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+					}
+#endif
+					if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, dsc, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Load current sector */
+						ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+					fp->dsect = dsc;
+				}
+			}
+		}
+	} else
+#endif
+
+	/* Normal Seek */
+	{
+		DWORD clst, bcs, nsect, ifptr;
+
+		if (ofs > fp->fsize					/* In read-only mode, clip offset with the file size */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			 && !(fp->flag & FA_WRITE)
+#endif
+			) ofs = fp->fsize;
+
+		ifptr = fp->fptr;
+		fp->fptr = nsect = 0;
+		if (ofs) {
+			bcs = (DWORD)fp->fs->csize * SS(fp->fs);	/* Cluster size (byte) */
+			if (ifptr > 0 &&
+				(ofs - 1) / bcs >= (ifptr - 1) / bcs) {	/* When seek to same or following cluster, */
+				fp->fptr = (ifptr - 1) & ~(bcs - 1);	/* start from the current cluster */
+				ofs -= fp->fptr;
+				clst = fp->clust;
+			} else {									/* When seek to back cluster, */
+				clst = fp->sclust;						/* start from the first cluster */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+				if (clst == 0) {						/* If no cluster chain, create a new chain */
+					clst = create_chain(fp->fs, 0);
+					if (clst == 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					fp->sclust = clst;
+				}
+#endif
+				fp->clust = clst;
+			}
+			if (clst != 0) {
+				while (ofs > bcs) {						/* Cluster following loop */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+					if (fp->flag & FA_WRITE) {			/* Check if in write mode or not */
+						clst = create_chain(fp->fs, clst);	/* Force stretch if in write mode */
+						if (clst == 0) {				/* When disk gets full, clip file size */
+							ofs = bcs; break;
+						}
+					} else
+#endif
+						clst = get_fat(fp->fs, clst);	/* Follow cluster chain if not in write mode */
+					if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+					if (clst <= 1 || clst >= fp->fs->n_fatent) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					fp->clust = clst;
+					fp->fptr += bcs;
+					ofs -= bcs;
+				}
+				fp->fptr += ofs;
+				if (ofs % SS(fp->fs)) {
+					nsect = clust2sect(fp->fs, clst);	/* Current sector */
+					if (!nsect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+					nsect += ofs / SS(fp->fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs) && nsect != fp->dsect) {	/* Fill sector cache if needed */
+#if !_FS_TINY
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+			if (fp->flag & FA__DIRTY) {			/* Write-back dirty sector cache */
+				if (disk_write(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, fp->dsect, 1) != RES_OK)
+					ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->flag &= ~FA__DIRTY;
+			}
+#endif
+			if (disk_read(fp->fs->drv, fp->buf, nsect, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Fill sector cache */
+				ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+#endif
+			fp->dsect = nsect;
+		}
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+		if (fp->fptr > fp->fsize) {			/* Set file change flag if the file size is extended */
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+		}
+#endif
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory Object                                             */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_opendir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to directory object to create */
+	const TCHAR *path	/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	if (!dj) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj->fs, 0);
+	fs = dj->fs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(*dj);
+		res = follow_path(dj, path);			/* Follow the path to the directory */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj->dir) {						/* It is not the root dir */
+				if (dj->dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR) {	/* The object is a directory */
+					dj->sclust = ld_clust(fs, dj->dir);
+				} else {						/* The object is not a directory */
+					res = FR_NO_PATH;
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				dj->id = fs->id;
+				res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind dir */
+			}
+		}
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_NO_PATH;
+		if (res != FR_OK) dj->fs = 0;			/* Invalidate the dir object if function failed */
+	} else {
+		dj->fs = 0;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Read Directory Entry in Sequence                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_readdir (
+	DIR *dj,			/* Pointer to the open directory object */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = validate(dj);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (!fno) {
+			res = dir_sdi(dj, 0);			/* Rewind the directory object */
+		} else {
+			INIT_BUF(*dj);
+			res = dir_read(dj);				/* Read an directory item */
+			if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {		/* Reached end of dir */
+				dj->sect = 0;
+				res = FR_OK;
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {				/* A valid entry is found */
+				get_fileinfo(dj, fno);		/* Get the object information */
+				res = dir_next(dj, 0);		/* Increment index for next */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {
+					dj->sect = 0;
+					res = FR_OK;
+				}
+			}
+			FREE_BUF();
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if _FS_MINIMIZE == 0
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get File Status                                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_stat (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	FILINFO *fno		/* Pointer to file information to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 0);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) {				/* Follow completed */
+			if (dj.dir)		/* Found an object */
+				get_fileinfo(&dj, fno);
+			else			/* It is root dir */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get Number of Free Clusters                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_getfree (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the logical drive number (root dir) */
+	DWORD *nclst,		/* Pointer to the variable to return number of free clusters */
+	FATFS **fatfs		/* Pointer to pointer to corresponding file system object to return */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DWORD n, clst, sect, stat;
+	UINT i;
+	BYTE fat, *p;
+
+
+	/* Get drive number */
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, fatfs, 0);
+	fs = *fatfs;
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		/* If free_clust is valid, return it without full cluster scan */
+		if (fs->free_clust <= fs->n_fatent - 2) {
+			*nclst = fs->free_clust;
+		} else {
+			/* Get number of free clusters */
+			fat = fs->fs_type;
+			n = 0;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT12) {
+				clst = 2;
+				do {
+					stat = get_fat(fs, clst);
+					if (stat == 0xFFFFFFFF) { res = FR_DISK_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 1) { res = FR_INT_ERR; break; }
+					if (stat == 0) n++;
+				} while (++clst < fs->n_fatent);
+			} else {
+				clst = fs->n_fatent;
+				sect = fs->fatbase;
+				i = 0; p = 0;
+				do {
+					if (!i) {
+						res = move_window(fs, sect++);
+						if (res != FR_OK) break;
+						p = fs->win;
+						i = SS(fs);
+					}
+					if (fat == FS_FAT16) {
+						if (LD_WORD(p) == 0) n++;
+						p += 2; i -= 2;
+					} else {
+						if ((LD_DWORD(p) & 0x0FFFFFFF) == 0) n++;
+						p += 4; i -= 4;
+					}
+				} while (--clst);
+			}
+			fs->free_clust = n;
+			if (fat == FS_FAT32) fs->fsi_flag = 1;
+			*nclst = n;
+		}
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Truncate File                                                         */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_truncate (
+	FIL *fp		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD ncl;
+
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);						/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR) {			/* Check abort flag */
+			res = FR_INT_ERR;
+		} else {
+			if (!(fp->flag & FA_WRITE))		/* Check access mode */
+				res = FR_DENIED;
+		}
+	}
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		if (fp->fsize > fp->fptr) {
+			fp->fsize = fp->fptr;	/* Set file size to current R/W point */
+			fp->flag |= FA__WRITTEN;
+			if (fp->fptr == 0) {	/* When set file size to zero, remove entire cluster chain */
+				res = remove_chain(fp->fs, fp->sclust);
+				fp->sclust = 0;
+			} else {				/* When truncate a part of the file, remove remaining clusters */
+				ncl = get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				res = FR_OK;
+				if (ncl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+				if (ncl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				if (res == FR_OK && ncl < fp->fs->n_fatent) {
+					res = put_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust, 0x0FFFFFFF);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = remove_chain(fp->fs, ncl);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		if (res != FR_OK) fp->flag |= FA__ERROR;
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Delete a File or Directory                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_unlink (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the file or directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj, sdj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DWORD dclst;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;			/* Cannot remove dot entry */
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&dj, 2);	/* Cannot remove open file */
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {					/* The object is accessible */
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;		/* Cannot remove the start directory */
+			} else {
+				if (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_RDO)
+					res = FR_DENIED;		/* Cannot remove R/O object */
+			}
+			dclst = ld_clust(dj.fs, dir);
+			if (res == FR_OK && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {	/* Is it a sub-dir? */
+				if (dclst < 2) {
+					res = FR_INT_ERR;
+				} else {
+					mem_cpy(&sdj, &dj, sizeof (DIR));	/* Check if the sub-dir is empty or not */
+					sdj.sclust = dclst;
+					res = dir_sdi(&sdj, 2);		/* Exclude dot entries */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						res = dir_read(&sdj);
+						if (res == FR_OK		/* Not empty dir */
+#if _FS_RPATH
+						|| dclst == dj.fs->cdir	/* Current dir */
+#endif
+						) res = FR_DENIED;
+						if (res == FR_NO_FILE) res = FR_OK;	/* Empty */
+					}
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) {
+				res = dir_remove(&dj);		/* Remove the directory entry */
+				if (res == FR_OK) {
+					if (dclst)				/* Remove the cluster chain if exist */
+						res = remove_chain(dj.fs, dclst);
+					if (res == FR_OK) res = sync(dj.fs);
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create a Directory                                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_mkdir (
+	const TCHAR *path		/* Pointer to the directory path */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir, n;
+	DWORD dsc, dcl, pcl, tim = get_fattime();
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);			/* Follow the file path */
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* Any object with same name is already existing */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_NO_FILE && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_NO_FILE) {				/* Can create a new directory */
+			dcl = create_chain(dj.fs, 0);		/* Allocate a cluster for the new directory table */
+			res = FR_OK;
+			if (dcl == 0) res = FR_DENIED;		/* No space to allocate a new cluster */
+			if (dcl == 1) res = FR_INT_ERR;
+			if (dcl == 0xFFFFFFFF) res = FR_DISK_ERR;
+			if (res == FR_OK)					/* Flush FAT */
+				res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+			if (res == FR_OK) {					/* Initialize the new directory table */
+				dsc = clust2sect(dj.fs, dcl);
+				dir = dj.fs->win;
+				mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				mem_set(dir+DIR_Name, ' ', 8+3);	/* Create "." entry */
+				dir[DIR_Name] = '.';
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);
+				mem_cpy(dir+SZ_DIR, dir, SZ_DIR); 	/* Create ".." entry */
+				dir[33] = '.'; pcl = dj.sclust;
+				if (dj.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && pcl == dj.fs->dirbase)
+					pcl = 0;
+				st_clust(dir+SZ_DIR, pcl);
+				for (n = dj.fs->csize; n; n--) {	/* Write dot entries and clear following sectors */
+					dj.fs->winsect = dsc++;
+					dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+					res = move_window(dj.fs, 0);
+					if (res != FR_OK) break;
+					mem_set(dir, 0, SS(dj.fs));
+				}
+			}
+			if (res == FR_OK) res = dir_register(&dj);	/* Register the object to the directory */
+			if (res != FR_OK) {
+				remove_chain(dj.fs, dcl);			/* Could not register, remove cluster chain */
+			} else {
+				dir = dj.dir;
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = AM_DIR;				/* Attribute */
+				ST_DWORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, tim);		/* Created time */
+				st_clust(dir, dcl);					/* Table start cluster */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Attribute                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_chmod (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file path */
+	BYTE value,			/* Attribute bits */
+	BYTE mask			/* Attribute mask to change */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);		/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {						/* Is it a root directory? */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {						/* File or sub directory */
+				mask &= AM_RDO|AM_HID|AM_SYS|AM_ARC;	/* Valid attribute mask */
+				dir[DIR_Attr] = (value & mask) | (dir[DIR_Attr] & (BYTE)~mask);	/* Apply attribute change */
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Change Timestamp                                                      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_utime (
+	const TCHAR *path,	/* Pointer to the file/directory name */
+	const FILINFO *fno	/* Pointer to the time stamp to be set */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR dj;
+	BYTE *dir;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path, &dj.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		INIT_BUF(dj);
+		res = follow_path(&dj, path);	/* Follow the file path */
+		FREE_BUF();
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (dj.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+		if (res == FR_OK) {
+			dir = dj.dir;
+			if (!dir) {					/* Root directory */
+				res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+			} else {					/* File or sub-directory */
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtTime, fno->ftime);
+				ST_WORD(dir+DIR_WrtDate, fno->fdate);
+				dj.fs->wflag = 1;
+				res = sync(dj.fs);
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(dj.fs, res);
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Rename File/Directory                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_rename (
+	const TCHAR *path_old,	/* Pointer to the old name */
+	const TCHAR *path_new	/* Pointer to the new name */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DIR djo, djn;
+	BYTE buf[21], *dir;
+	DWORD dw;
+	DEF_NAMEBUF;
+
+
+	res = chk_mounted(&path_old, &djo.fs, 1);
+	if (res == FR_OK) {
+		djn.fs = djo.fs;
+		INIT_BUF(djo);
+		res = follow_path(&djo, path_old);		/* Check old object */
+		if (_FS_RPATH && res == FR_OK && (djo.fn[NS] & NS_DOT))
+			res = FR_INVALID_NAME;
+#if _FS_LOCK
+		if (res == FR_OK) res = chk_lock(&djo, 2);
+#endif
+		if (res == FR_OK) {						/* Old object is found */
+			if (!djo.dir) {						/* Is root dir? */
+				res = FR_NO_FILE;
+			} else {
+				mem_cpy(buf, djo.dir+DIR_Attr, 21);		/* Save the object information except for name */
+				mem_cpy(&djn, &djo, sizeof (DIR));		/* Check new object */
+				res = follow_path(&djn, path_new);
+				if (res == FR_OK) res = FR_EXIST;		/* The new object name is already existing */
+				if (res == FR_NO_FILE) { 				/* Is it a valid path and no name collision? */
+/* Start critical section that an interruption or error can cause cross-link */
+					res = dir_register(&djn);			/* Register the new entry */
+					if (res == FR_OK) {
+						dir = djn.dir;					/* Copy object information except for name */
+						mem_cpy(dir+13, buf+2, 19);
+						dir[DIR_Attr] = buf[0] | AM_ARC;
+						djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+						if (djo.sclust != djn.sclust && (dir[DIR_Attr] & AM_DIR)) {		/* Update .. entry in the directory if needed */
+							dw = clust2sect(djo.fs, ld_clust(djo.fs, dir));
+							if (!dw) {
+								res = FR_INT_ERR;
+							} else {
+								res = move_window(djo.fs, dw);
+								dir = djo.fs->win+SZ_DIR;	/* .. entry */
+								if (res == FR_OK && dir[1] == '.') {
+									dw = (djo.fs->fs_type == FS_FAT32 && djn.sclust == djo.fs->dirbase) ? 0 : djn.sclust;
+									st_clust(dir, dw);
+									djo.fs->wflag = 1;
+								}
+							}
+						}
+						if (res == FR_OK) {
+							res = dir_remove(&djo);		/* Remove old entry */
+							if (res == FR_OK)
+								res = sync(djo.fs);
+						}
+					}
+/* End critical section */
+				}
+			}
+		}
+		FREE_BUF();
+	}
+	LEAVE_FF(djo.fs, res);
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE == 0 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 1 */
+#endif /* _FS_MINIMIZE <= 2 */
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Forward data to the stream directly (available on only tiny cfg)      */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if _USE_FORWARD && _FS_TINY
+
+FRESULT f_forward (
+	FIL *fp, 						/* Pointer to the file object */
+	UINT (*func)(const BYTE*,UINT),	/* Pointer to the streaming function */
+	UINT btr,						/* Number of bytes to forward */
+	UINT *bf						/* Pointer to number of bytes forwarded */
+)
+{
+	FRESULT res;
+	DWORD remain, clst, sect;
+	UINT rcnt;
+	BYTE csect;
+
+
+	*bf = 0;	/* Clear transfer byte counter */
+
+	if (!fp) return FR_INVALID_OBJECT;
+
+	res = validate(fp);								/* Check validity of the object */
+	if (res != FR_OK) LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, res);
+	if (fp->flag & FA__ERROR)						/* Check error flag */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	if (!(fp->flag & FA_READ))						/* Check access mode */
+		LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_DENIED);
+
+	remain = fp->fsize - fp->fptr;
+	if (btr > remain) btr = (UINT)remain;			/* Truncate btr by remaining bytes */
+
+	for ( ;  btr && (*func)(0, 0);					/* Repeat until all data transferred or stream becomes busy */
+		fp->fptr += rcnt, *bf += rcnt, btr -= rcnt) {
+		csect = (BYTE)(fp->fptr / SS(fp->fs) & (fp->fs->csize - 1));	/* Sector offset in the cluster */
+		if ((fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)) == 0) {			/* On the sector boundary? */
+			if (!csect) {							/* On the cluster boundary? */
+				clst = (fp->fptr == 0) ?			/* On the top of the file? */
+					fp->sclust : get_fat(fp->fs, fp->clust);
+				if (clst <= 1) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+				if (clst == 0xFFFFFFFF) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+				fp->clust = clst;					/* Update current cluster */
+			}
+		}
+		sect = clust2sect(fp->fs, fp->clust);		/* Get current data sector */
+		if (!sect) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+		sect += csect;
+		if (move_window(fp->fs, sect))				/* Move sector window */
+			ABORT(fp->fs, FR_DISK_ERR);
+		fp->dsect = sect;
+		rcnt = SS(fp->fs) - (WORD)(fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs));	/* Forward data from sector window */
+		if (rcnt > btr) rcnt = btr;
+		rcnt = (*func)(&fp->fs->win[(WORD)fp->fptr % SS(fp->fs)], rcnt);
+		if (!rcnt) ABORT(fp->fs, FR_INT_ERR);
+	}
+
+	LEAVE_FF(fp->fs, FR_OK);
+}
+#endif /* _USE_FORWARD */
+
+
+
+#if _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Create File System on the Drive                                       */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#define N_ROOTDIR	512		/* Number of root dir entries for FAT12/16 */
+#define N_FATS		1		/* Number of FAT copies (1 or 2) */
+
+
+FRESULT f_mkfs (
+	BYTE drv,		/* Logical drive number */
+	BYTE sfd,		/* Partitioning rule 0:FDISK, 1:SFD */
+	UINT au			/* Allocation unit size [bytes] */
+)
+{
+	static const WORD vst[] = { 1024,   512,  256,  128,   64,    32,   16,    8,    4,    2,   0};
+	static const WORD cst[] = {32768, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 16384, 8192, 4096, 2048, 1024, 512};
+	BYTE fmt, md, sys, *tbl, pdrv, part;
+	DWORD n_clst, vs, n, wsect;
+	UINT i;
+	DWORD b_vol, b_fat, b_dir, b_data;	/* LBA */
+	DWORD n_vol, n_rsv, n_fat, n_dir;	/* Size */
+	FATFS *fs;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+
+
+	/* Check mounted drive and clear work area */
+	if (drv >= _VOLUMES) return FR_INVALID_DRIVE;
+	if (sfd > 1) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	if (au & (au - 1)) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+	fs = FatFs[drv];
+	if (!fs) return FR_NOT_ENABLED;
+	fs->fs_type = 0;
+	pdrv = LD2PD(drv);	/* Physical drive */
+	part = LD2PT(drv);	/* Partition (0:auto detect, 1-4:get from partition table)*/
+
+	/* Get disk statics */
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+#if _MAX_SS != 512					/* Get disk sector size */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_SIZE, &SS(fs)) != RES_OK || SS(fs) > _MAX_SS)
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+#endif
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Get partition information from partition table in the MBR */
+		if (disk_read(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		if (LD_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA) != 0xAA55) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		if (!tbl[4]) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* No partition? */
+		b_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+8);	/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol = LD_DWORD(tbl+12);	/* Volume size */
+	} else {
+		/* Create a partition in this function */
+		if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &n_vol) != RES_OK || n_vol < 128)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		b_vol = (sfd) ? 0 : 63;		/* Volume start sector */
+		n_vol -= b_vol;				/* Volume size */
+	}
+
+	if (!au) {				/* AU auto selection */
+		vs = n_vol / (2000 / (SS(fs) / 512));
+		for (i = 0; vs < vst[i]; i++) ;
+		au = cst[i];
+	}
+	au /= SS(fs);		/* Number of sectors per cluster */
+	if (au == 0) au = 1;
+	if (au > 128) au = 128;
+
+	/* Pre-compute number of clusters and FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = n_vol / au;
+	fmt = FS_FAT12;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT16) fmt = FS_FAT16;
+	if (n_clst >= MIN_FAT32) fmt = FS_FAT32;
+
+	/* Determine offset and size of FAT structure */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		n_fat = ((n_clst * 4) + 8 + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 32;
+		n_dir = 0;
+	} else {
+		n_fat = (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? (n_clst * 3 + 1) / 2 + 3 : (n_clst * 2) + 4;
+		n_fat = (n_fat + SS(fs) - 1) / SS(fs);
+		n_rsv = 1;
+		n_dir = (DWORD)N_ROOTDIR * SZ_DIR / SS(fs);
+	}
+	b_fat = b_vol + n_rsv;				/* FAT area start sector */
+	b_dir = b_fat + n_fat * N_FATS;		/* Directory area start sector */
+	b_data = b_dir + n_dir;				/* Data area start sector */
+	if (n_vol < b_data + au - b_vol) return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;	/* Too small volume */
+
+	/* Align data start sector to erase block boundary (for flash memory media) */
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_BLOCK_SIZE, &n) != RES_OK || !n || n > 32768) n = 1;
+	n = (b_data + n - 1) & ~(n - 1);	/* Next nearest erase block from current data start */
+	n = (n - b_data) / N_FATS;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {		/* FAT32: Move FAT offset */
+		n_rsv += n;
+		b_fat += n;
+	} else {					/* FAT12/16: Expand FAT size */
+		n_fat += n;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine number of clusters and final check of validity of the FAT sub-type */
+	n_clst = (n_vol - n_rsv - n_fat * N_FATS - n_dir) / au;
+	if (   (fmt == FS_FAT16 && n_clst < MIN_FAT16)
+		|| (fmt == FS_FAT32 && n_clst < MIN_FAT32))
+		return FR_MKFS_ABORTED;
+
+	switch (fmt) {	/* Determine system ID for partition table */
+	case FS_FAT12:	sys = 0x01; break;
+	case FS_FAT16:	sys = (n_vol < 0x10000) ? 0x04 : 0x06; break;
+	default: 		sys = 0x0C;
+	}
+
+	if (_MULTI_PARTITION && part) {
+		/* Update system ID in the partition table */
+		tbl = &fs->win[MBR_Table + (part - 1) * SZ_PTE];
+		tbl[4] = sys;
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		md = 0xF8;
+	} else {
+		if (sfd) {	/* No partition table (SFD) */
+			md = 0xF0;
+		} else {	/* Create partition table (FDISK) */
+			mem_set(fs->win, 0, SS(fs));
+			tbl = fs->win+MBR_Table;	/* Create partition table for single partition in the drive */
+			tbl[1] = 1;						/* Partition start head */
+			tbl[2] = 1;						/* Partition start sector */
+			tbl[3] = 0;						/* Partition start cylinder */
+			tbl[4] = sys;					/* System type */
+			tbl[5] = 254;					/* Partition end head */
+			n = (b_vol + n_vol) / 63 / 255;
+			tbl[6] = (BYTE)((n >> 2) | 63);	/* Partition end sector */
+			tbl[7] = (BYTE)n;				/* End cylinder */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 63);			/* Partition start in LBA */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+12, n_vol);		/* Partition size in LBA */
+			ST_WORD(fs->win+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);	/* MBR signature */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, fs->win, 0, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the MBR sector */
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+			md = 0xF8;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Create BPB in the VBR */
+	tbl = fs->win;							/* Clear sector */
+	mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));
+	mem_cpy(tbl, "\xEB\xFE\x90" "MSDOS5.0", 11);/* Boot jump code, OEM name */
+	i = SS(fs);								/* Sector size */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BytsPerSec, i);
+	tbl[BPB_SecPerClus] = (BYTE)au;			/* Sectors per cluster */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RsvdSecCnt, n_rsv);		/* Reserved sectors */
+	tbl[BPB_NumFATs] = N_FATS;				/* Number of FATs */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 0 : N_ROOTDIR;	/* Number of rootdir entries */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_RootEntCnt, i);
+	if (n_vol < 0x10000) {					/* Number of total sectors */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec16, n_vol);
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_TotSec32, n_vol);
+	}
+	tbl[BPB_Media] = md;					/* Media descriptor */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_SecPerTrk, 63);			/* Number of sectors per track */
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_NumHeads, 255);			/* Number of heads */
+	ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_HiddSec, b_vol);		/* Hidden sectors */
+	n = get_fattime();						/* Use current time as VSN */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID32, n);		/* VSN */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz32, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BPB_RootClus, 2);		/* Root directory start cluster (2) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FSInfo, 1);			/* FSInfo record offset (VBR+1) */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_BkBootSec, 6);		/* Backup boot record offset (VBR+6) */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum32] = 0x80;			/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig32] = 0x29;			/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab32, "NO NAME    " "FAT32   ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	} else {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+BS_VolID, n);			/* VSN */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BPB_FATSz16, n_fat);	/* Number of sectors per FAT */
+		tbl[BS_DrvNum] = 0x80;				/* Drive number */
+		tbl[BS_BootSig] = 0x29;				/* Extended boot signature */
+		mem_cpy(tbl+BS_VolLab, "NO NAME    " "FAT     ", 19);	/* Volume label, FAT signature */
+	}
+	ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);			/* Signature (Offset is fixed here regardless of sector size) */
+	if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol, 1) != RES_OK)	/* Write it to the VBR sector */
+		return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32)							/* Write backup VBR if needed (VBR+6) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 6, 1);
+
+	/* Initialize FAT area */
+	wsect = b_fat;
+	for (i = 0; i < N_FATS; i++) {		/* Initialize each FAT copy */
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* 1st sector of the FAT  */
+		n = md;								/* Media descriptor byte */
+		if (fmt != FS_FAT32) {
+			n |= (fmt == FS_FAT12) ? 0x00FFFF00 : 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT12/16) */
+		} else {
+			n |= 0xFFFFFF00;
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+0, n);				/* Reserve cluster #0-1 (FAT32) */
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+4, 0xFFFFFFFF);
+			ST_DWORD(tbl+8, 0x0FFFFFFF);	/* Reserve cluster #2 for root dir */
+		}
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		mem_set(tbl, 0, SS(fs));			/* Fill following FAT entries with zero */
+		for (n = 1; n < n_fat; n++) {		/* This loop may take a time on FAT32 volume due to many single sector writes */
+			if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+				return FR_DISK_ERR;
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize root directory */
+	i = (fmt == FS_FAT32) ? au : n_dir;
+	do {
+		if (disk_write(pdrv, tbl, wsect++, 1) != RES_OK)
+			return FR_DISK_ERR;
+	} while (--i);
+
+#if _USE_ERASE	/* Erase data area if needed */
+	{
+		DWORD eb[2];
+
+		eb[0] = wsect; eb[1] = wsect + (n_clst - ((fmt == FS_FAT32) ? 1 : 0)) * au - 1;
+		disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR, eb);
+	}
+#endif
+
+	/* Create FSInfo if needed */
+	if (fmt == FS_FAT32) {
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_LeadSig, 0x41615252);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_StrucSig, 0x61417272);
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Free_Count, n_clst - 1);	/* Number of free clusters */
+		ST_DWORD(tbl+FSI_Nxt_Free, 2);				/* Last allocated cluster# */
+		ST_WORD(tbl+BS_55AA, 0xAA55);
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 1, 1);	/* Write original (VBR+1) */
+		disk_write(pdrv, tbl, b_vol + 7, 1);	/* Write backup (VBR+7) */
+	}
+
+	return (disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0) == RES_OK) ? FR_OK : FR_DISK_ERR;
+}
+
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION == 2
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Divide Physical Drive                                                 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+FRESULT f_fdisk (
+	BYTE pdrv,			/* Physical drive number */
+	const DWORD szt[],	/* Pointer to the size table for each partitions */
+	void* work			/* Pointer to the working buffer */
+)
+{
+	UINT i, n, sz_cyl, tot_cyl, b_cyl, e_cyl, p_cyl;
+	BYTE s_hd, e_hd, *p, *buf = (BYTE*)work;
+	DSTATUS stat;
+	DWORD sz_disk, sz_part, s_part;
+
+
+	stat = disk_initialize(pdrv);
+	if (stat & STA_NOINIT) return FR_NOT_READY;
+	if (stat & STA_PROTECT) return FR_WRITE_PROTECTED;
+	if (disk_ioctl(pdrv, GET_SECTOR_COUNT, &sz_disk)) return FR_DISK_ERR;
+
+	/* Determine CHS in the table regardless of the drive geometry */
+	for (n = 16; n < 256 && sz_disk / n / 63 > 1024; n *= 2) ;
+	if (n == 256) n--;
+	e_hd = n - 1;
+	sz_cyl = 63 * n;
+	tot_cyl = sz_disk / sz_cyl;
+
+	/* Create partition table */
+	mem_set(buf, 0, _MAX_SS);
+	p = buf + MBR_Table; b_cyl = 0;
+	for (i = 0; i < 4; i++, p += SZ_PTE) {
+		p_cyl = (szt[i] <= 100) ? (DWORD)tot_cyl * szt[i] / 100 : szt[i] / sz_cyl;
+		if (!p_cyl) continue;
+		s_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * b_cyl;
+		sz_part = (DWORD)sz_cyl * p_cyl;
+		if (i == 0) {	/* Exclude first track of cylinder 0 */
+			s_hd = 1;
+			s_part += 63; sz_part -= 63;
+		} else {
+			s_hd = 0;
+		}
+		e_cyl = b_cyl + p_cyl - 1;
+		if (e_cyl >= tot_cyl) return FR_INVALID_PARAMETER;
+
+		/* Set partition table */
+		p[1] = s_hd;						/* Start head */
+		p[2] = (BYTE)((b_cyl >> 2) + 1);	/* Start sector */
+		p[3] = (BYTE)b_cyl;					/* Start cylinder */
+		p[4] = 0x06;						/* System type (temporary setting) */
+		p[5] = e_hd;						/* End head */
+		p[6] = (BYTE)((e_cyl >> 2) + 63);	/* End sector */
+		p[7] = (BYTE)e_cyl;					/* End cylinder */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 8, s_part);			/* Start sector in LBA */
+		ST_DWORD(p + 12, sz_part);			/* Partition size */
+
+		/* Next partition */
+		b_cyl += p_cyl;
+	}
+	ST_WORD(p, 0xAA55);
+
+	/* Write it to the MBR */
+	return (disk_write(pdrv, buf, 0, 1) || disk_ioctl(pdrv, CTRL_SYNC, 0)) ? FR_DISK_ERR : FR_OK;
+}
+
+
+#endif /* _MULTI_PARTITION == 2 */
+#endif /* _USE_MKFS && !_FS_READONLY */
+
+
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Get a string from the file                                            */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+TCHAR* f_gets (
+	TCHAR* buff,	/* Pointer to the string buffer to read */
+	int len,		/* Size of string buffer (characters) */
+	FIL* fil		/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n = 0;
+	TCHAR c, *p = buff;
+	BYTE s[2];
+	UINT rc;
+
+
+	while (n < len - 1) {			/* Read bytes until buffer gets filled */
+		f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+		if (rc != 1) break;			/* Break on EOF or error */
+		c = s[0];
+#if _LFN_UNICODE					/* Read a character in UTF-8 encoding */
+		if (c >= 0x80) {
+			if (c < 0xC0) continue;	/* Skip stray trailer */
+			if (c < 0xE0) {			/* Two-byte sequence */
+				f_read(fil, s, 1, &rc);
+				if (rc != 1) break;
+				c = ((c & 0x1F) << 6) | (s[0] & 0x3F);
+				if (c < 0x80) c = '?';
+			} else {
+				if (c < 0xF0) {		/* Three-byte sequence */
+					f_read(fil, s, 2, &rc);
+					if (rc != 2) break;
+					c = (c << 12) | ((s[0] & 0x3F) << 6) | (s[1] & 0x3F);
+					if (c < 0x800) c = '?';
+				} else {			/* Reject four-byte sequence */
+					c = '?';
+				}
+			}
+		}
+#endif
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+		if (c == '\r') continue;	/* Strip '\r' */
+#endif
+		*p++ = c;
+		n++;
+		if (c == '\n') break;		/* Break on EOL */
+	}
+	*p = 0;
+	return n ? buff : 0;			/* When no data read (eof or error), return with error. */
+}
+
+
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#include <stdarg.h>
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a character to the file                                           */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_putc (
+	TCHAR c,	/* A character to be output */
+	FIL* fil	/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	UINT bw, btw;
+	BYTE s[3];
+
+
+#if _USE_STRFUNC >= 2
+	if (c == '\n') f_putc ('\r', fil);	/* LF -> CRLF conversion */
+#endif
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE	/* Write the character in UTF-8 encoding */
+	if (c < 0x80) {			/* 7-bit */
+		s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+		btw = 1;
+	} else {
+		if (c < 0x800) {	/* 11-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xC0 | (c >> 6));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 2;
+		} else {			/* 16-bit */
+			s[0] = (BYTE)(0xE0 | (c >> 12));
+			s[1] = (BYTE)(0x80 | ((c >> 6) & 0x3F));
+			s[2] = (BYTE)(0x80 | (c & 0x3F));
+			btw = 3;
+		}
+	}
+#else				/* Write the character without conversion */
+	s[0] = (BYTE)c;
+	btw = 1;
+#endif
+	f_write(fil, s, btw, &bw);		/* Write the char to the file */
+	return (bw == btw) ? 1 : EOF;	/* Return the result */
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a string to the file                                              */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_puts (
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the string to be output */
+	FIL* fil			/* Pointer to the file object */
+)
+{
+	int n;
+
+
+	for (n = 0; *str; str++, n++) {
+		if (f_putc(*str, fil) == EOF) return EOF;
+	}
+	return n;
+}
+
+
+
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Put a formatted string to the file                                    */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+int f_printf (
+	FIL* fil,			/* Pointer to the file object */
+	const TCHAR* str,	/* Pointer to the format string */
+	...					/* Optional arguments... */
+)
+{
+	va_list arp;
+	BYTE f, r;
+	UINT i, j, w;
+	ULONG v;
+	TCHAR c, d, s[16], *p;
+	int res, chc, cc;
+
+
+	va_start(arp, str);
+
+	for (cc = res = 0; cc != EOF; res += cc) {
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == 0) break;			/* End of string */
+		if (c != '%') {				/* Non escape character */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil);
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = 1;
+			continue;
+		}
+		w = f = 0;
+		c = *str++;
+		if (c == '0') {				/* Flag: '0' padding */
+			f = 1; c = *str++;
+		} else {
+			if (c == '-') {			/* Flag: left justified */
+				f = 2; c = *str++;
+			}
+		}
+		while (IsDigit(c)) {		/* Precision */
+			w = w * 10 + c - '0';
+			c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (c == 'l' || c == 'L') {	/* Prefix: Size is long int */
+			f |= 4; c = *str++;
+		}
+		if (!c) break;
+		d = c;
+		if (IsLower(d)) d -= 0x20;
+		switch (d) {				/* Type is... */
+		case 'S' :					/* String */
+			p = va_arg(arp, TCHAR*);
+			for (j = 0; p[j]; j++) ;
+			chc = 0;
+			if (!(f & 2)) {
+				while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			}
+			chc += (cc = f_puts(p, fil));
+			while (j++ < w) chc += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+			if (cc != EOF) cc = chc;
+			continue;
+		case 'C' :					/* Character */
+			cc = f_putc((TCHAR)va_arg(arp, int), fil); continue;
+		case 'B' :					/* Binary */
+			r = 2; break;
+		case 'O' :					/* Octal */
+			r = 8; break;
+		case 'D' :					/* Signed decimal */
+		case 'U' :					/* Unsigned decimal */
+			r = 10; break;
+		case 'X' :					/* Hexdecimal */
+			r = 16; break;
+		default:					/* Unknown type (pass-through) */
+			cc = f_putc(c, fil); continue;
+		}
+
+		/* Get an argument and put it in numeral */
+		v = (f & 4) ? (ULONG)va_arg(arp, long) : ((d == 'D') ? (ULONG)(long)va_arg(arp, int) : (ULONG)va_arg(arp, unsigned int));
+		if (d == 'D' && (v & 0x80000000)) {
+			v = 0 - v;
+			f |= 8;
+		}
+		i = 0;
+		do {
+			d = (TCHAR)(v % r); v /= r;
+			if (d > 9) d += (c == 'x') ? 0x27 : 0x07;
+			s[i++] = d + '0';
+		} while (v && i < sizeof s / sizeof s[0]);
+		if (f & 8) s[i++] = '-';
+		j = i; d = (f & 1) ? '0' : ' ';
+		res = 0;
+		while (!(f & 2) && j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(d, fil));
+		do res += (cc = f_putc(s[--i], fil)); while(i);
+		while (j++ < w) res += (cc = f_putc(' ', fil));
+		if (cc != EOF) cc = res;
+	}
+
+	va_end(arp);
+	return (cc == EOF) ? cc : res;
+}
+
+#endif /* !_FS_READONLY */
+#endif /* _USE_STRFUNC */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..627cbaabe6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ff.h
@@ -0,0 +1,337 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module include file  R0.09a    (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ FatFs module is a generic FAT file system module for small embedded systems.
+/ This is a free software that opened for education, research and commercial
+/ developments under license policy of following terms.
+/
+/  Copyright (C) 2012, ChaN, all right reserved.
+/
+/ * The FatFs module is a free software and there is NO WARRANTY.
+/ * No restriction on use. You can use, modify and redistribute it for
+/   personal, non-profit or commercial product UNDER YOUR RESPONSIBILITY.
+/ * Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _FATFS
+#define _FATFS	4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+extern "C" {
+#endif
+
+#include "integer.h"	/* Basic integer types */
+#include "ffconf.h"		/* FatFs configuration options */
+
+#if _FATFS != _FFCONF
+#error Wrong configuration file (ffconf.h).
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Definitions of volume management */
+
+#if _MULTI_PARTITION		/* Multiple partition configuration */
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE pd;	/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE pt;	/* Partition: 0:Auto detect, 1-4:Forced partition) */
+} PARTITION;
+extern PARTITION VolToPart[];	/* Volume - Partition resolution table */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pd)	/* Get physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) (VolToPart[vol].pt)	/* Get partition index */
+
+#else							/* Single partition configuration */
+#define LD2PD(vol) (BYTE)(vol)	/* Each logical drive is bound to the same physical drive number */
+#define LD2PT(vol) 0			/* Always mounts the 1st partition or in SFD */
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* Type of path name strings on FatFs API */
+
+#if _LFN_UNICODE			/* Unicode string */
+#if !_USE_LFN
+#error _LFN_UNICODE must be 0 in non-LFN cfg.
+#endif
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef WCHAR TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) L ## x
+#define _TEXT(x) L ## x
+#endif
+
+#else						/* ANSI/OEM string */
+#ifndef _INC_TCHAR
+typedef char TCHAR;
+#define _T(x) x
+#define _TEXT(x) x
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
+
+
+/* File system object structure (FATFS) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	BYTE	fs_type;		/* FAT sub-type (0:Not mounted) */
+	BYTE	drv;			/* Physical drive number */
+	BYTE	csize;			/* Sectors per cluster (1,2,4...128) */
+	BYTE	n_fats;			/* Number of FAT copies (1,2) */
+	BYTE	wflag;			/* win[] dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	BYTE	fsi_flag;		/* fsinfo dirty flag (1:must be written back) */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID */
+	WORD	n_rootdir;		/* Number of root directory entries (FAT12/16) */
+#if _MAX_SS != 512
+	WORD	ssize;			/* Bytes per sector (512, 1024, 2048 or 4096) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+	_SYNC_t	sobj;			/* Identifier of sync object */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	last_clust;		/* Last allocated cluster */
+	DWORD	free_clust;		/* Number of free clusters */
+	DWORD	fsi_sector;		/* fsinfo sector (FAT32) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_RPATH
+	DWORD	cdir;			/* Current directory start cluster (0:root) */
+#endif
+	DWORD	n_fatent;		/* Number of FAT entries (= number of clusters + 2) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* Sectors per FAT */
+	DWORD	fatbase;		/* FAT start sector */
+	DWORD	dirbase;		/* Root directory start sector (FAT32:Cluster#) */
+	DWORD	database;		/* Data start sector */
+	DWORD	winsect;		/* Current sector appearing in the win[] */
+	BYTE	win[_MAX_SS];	/* Disk access window for Directory, FAT (and Data on tiny cfg) */
+} FATFS;
+
+
+
+/* File object structure (FIL) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the related file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* File system mount ID of the related file system object */
+	BYTE	flag;			/* File status flags */
+	BYTE	pad1;
+	DWORD	fptr;			/* File read/write pointer (0ed on file open) */
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* File data start cluster (0:no data cluster, always 0 when fsize is 0) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster of fpter */
+	DWORD	dsect;			/* Current data sector of fpter */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+	DWORD	dir_sect;		/* Sector containing the directory entry */
+	BYTE*	dir_ptr;		/* Pointer to the directory entry in the window */
+#endif
+#if _USE_FASTSEEK
+	DWORD*	cltbl;			/* Pointer to the cluster link map table (null on file open) */
+#endif
+#if _FS_LOCK
+	UINT	lockid;			/* File lock ID (index of file semaphore table Files[]) */
+#endif
+#if !_FS_TINY
+	BYTE	buf[_MAX_SS];	/* File data read/write buffer */
+#endif
+} FIL;
+
+
+
+/* Directory object structure (DIR) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	FATFS*	fs;				/* Pointer to the owner file system object */
+	WORD	id;				/* Owner file system mount ID */
+	WORD	index;			/* Current read/write index number */
+	DWORD	sclust;			/* Table start cluster (0:Root dir) */
+	DWORD	clust;			/* Current cluster */
+	DWORD	sect;			/* Current sector */
+	BYTE*	dir;			/* Pointer to the current SFN entry in the win[] */
+	BYTE*	fn;				/* Pointer to the SFN (in/out) {file[8],ext[3],status[1]} */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	WCHAR*	lfn;			/* Pointer to the LFN working buffer */
+	WORD	lfn_idx;		/* Last matched LFN index number (0xFFFF:No LFN) */
+#endif
+} DIR;
+
+
+
+/* File status structure (FILINFO) */
+
+typedef struct {
+	DWORD	fsize;			/* File size */
+	WORD	fdate;			/* Last modified date */
+	WORD	ftime;			/* Last modified time */
+	BYTE	fattrib;		/* Attribute */
+	TCHAR	fname[13];		/* Short file name (8.3 format) */
+#if _USE_LFN
+	TCHAR*	lfname;			/* Pointer to the LFN buffer */
+	UINT 	lfsize;			/* Size of LFN buffer in TCHAR */
+#endif
+} FILINFO;
+
+
+
+/* File function return code (FRESULT) */
+
+typedef enum {
+	FR_OK = 0,				/* (0) Succeeded */
+	FR_DISK_ERR,			/* (1) A hard error occurred in the low level disk I/O layer */
+	FR_INT_ERR,				/* (2) Assertion failed */
+	FR_NOT_READY,			/* (3) The physical drive cannot work */
+	FR_NO_FILE,				/* (4) Could not find the file */
+	FR_NO_PATH,				/* (5) Could not find the path */
+	FR_INVALID_NAME,		/* (6) The path name format is invalid */
+	FR_DENIED,				/* (7) Access denied due to prohibited access or directory full */
+	FR_EXIST,				/* (8) Access denied due to prohibited access */
+	FR_INVALID_OBJECT,		/* (9) The file/directory object is invalid */
+	FR_WRITE_PROTECTED,		/* (10) The physical drive is write protected */
+	FR_INVALID_DRIVE,		/* (11) The logical drive number is invalid */
+	FR_NOT_ENABLED,			/* (12) The volume has no work area */
+	FR_NO_FILESYSTEM,		/* (13) There is no valid FAT volume */
+	FR_MKFS_ABORTED,		/* (14) The f_mkfs() aborted due to any parameter error */
+	FR_TIMEOUT,				/* (15) Could not get a grant to access the volume within defined period */
+	FR_LOCKED,				/* (16) The operation is rejected according to the file sharing policy */
+	FR_NOT_ENOUGH_CORE,		/* (17) LFN working buffer could not be allocated */
+	FR_TOO_MANY_OPEN_FILES,	/* (18) Number of open files > _FS_SHARE */
+	FR_INVALID_PARAMETER	/* (19) Given parameter is invalid */
+} FRESULT;
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* FatFs module application interface                           */
+
+FRESULT f_mount (BYTE, FATFS*);						/* Mount/Unmount a logical drive */
+FRESULT f_open (FIL*, const TCHAR*, BYTE);			/* Open or create a file */
+FRESULT f_read (FIL*, void*, UINT, UINT*);			/* Read data from a file */
+FRESULT f_lseek (FIL*, DWORD);						/* Move file pointer of a file object */
+FRESULT f_close (FIL*);								/* Close an open file object */
+FRESULT f_opendir (DIR*, const TCHAR*);				/* Open an existing directory */
+FRESULT f_readdir (DIR*, FILINFO*);					/* Read a directory item */
+FRESULT f_stat (const TCHAR*, FILINFO*);			/* Get file status */
+FRESULT f_write (FIL*, const void*, UINT, UINT*);	/* Write data to a file */
+FRESULT f_getfree (const TCHAR*, DWORD*, FATFS**);	/* Get number of free clusters on the drive */
+FRESULT f_truncate (FIL*);							/* Truncate file */
+FRESULT f_sync (FIL*);								/* Flush cached data of a writing file */
+FRESULT f_unlink (const TCHAR*);					/* Delete an existing file or directory */
+FRESULT	f_mkdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Create a new directory */
+FRESULT f_chmod (const TCHAR*, BYTE, BYTE);			/* Change attribute of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_utime (const TCHAR*, const FILINFO*);		/* Change times-tamp of the file/dir */
+FRESULT f_rename (const TCHAR*, const TCHAR*);		/* Rename/Move a file or directory */
+FRESULT f_chdrive (BYTE);							/* Change current drive */
+FRESULT f_chdir (const TCHAR*);						/* Change current directory */
+FRESULT f_getcwd (TCHAR*, UINT);					/* Get current directory */
+FRESULT f_forward (FIL*, UINT(*)(const BYTE*,UINT), UINT, UINT*);	/* Forward data to the stream */
+FRESULT f_mkfs (BYTE, BYTE, UINT);					/* Create a file system on the drive */
+FRESULT	f_fdisk (BYTE, const DWORD[], void*);		/* Divide a physical drive into some partitions */
+int f_putc (TCHAR, FIL*);							/* Put a character to the file */
+int f_puts (const TCHAR*, FIL*);					/* Put a string to the file */
+int f_printf (FIL*, const TCHAR*, ...);				/* Put a formatted string to the file */
+TCHAR* f_gets (TCHAR*, int, FIL*);					/* Get a string from the file */
+
+#define f_eof(fp) (((fp)->fptr == (fp)->fsize) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_error(fp) (((fp)->flag & FA__ERROR) ? 1 : 0)
+#define f_tell(fp) ((fp)->fptr)
+#define f_size(fp) ((fp)->fsize)
+
+#ifndef EOF
+#define EOF (-1)
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Additional user defined functions                            */
+
+/* RTC function */
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+DWORD get_fattime (void);
+#endif
+
+/* Unicode support functions */
+#if _USE_LFN						/* Unicode - OEM code conversion */
+WCHAR ff_convert (WCHAR, UINT);		/* OEM-Unicode bidirectional conversion */
+WCHAR ff_wtoupper (WCHAR);			/* Unicode upper-case conversion */
+#if _USE_LFN == 3					/* Memory functions */
+void* ff_memalloc (UINT);			/* Allocate memory block */
+void ff_memfree (void*);			/* Free memory block */
+#endif
+#endif
+
+/* Sync functions */
+#if _FS_REENTRANT
+int ff_cre_syncobj (BYTE, _SYNC_t*);/* Create a sync object */
+int ff_req_grant (_SYNC_t);			/* Lock sync object */
+void ff_rel_grant (_SYNC_t);		/* Unlock sync object */
+int ff_del_syncobj (_SYNC_t);		/* Delete a sync object */
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Flags and offset address                                     */
+
+
+/* File access control and file status flags (FIL.flag) */
+
+#define	FA_READ				0x01
+#define	FA_OPEN_EXISTING	0x00
+#define FA__ERROR			0x80
+
+#if !_FS_READONLY
+#define	FA_WRITE			0x02
+#define	FA_CREATE_NEW		0x04
+#define	FA_CREATE_ALWAYS	0x08
+#define	FA_OPEN_ALWAYS		0x10
+#define FA__WRITTEN			0x20
+#define FA__DIRTY			0x40
+#endif
+
+
+/* FAT sub type (FATFS.fs_type) */
+
+#define FS_FAT12	1
+#define FS_FAT16	2
+#define FS_FAT32	3
+
+
+/* File attribute bits for directory entry */
+
+#define	AM_RDO	0x01	/* Read only */
+#define	AM_HID	0x02	/* Hidden */
+#define	AM_SYS	0x04	/* System */
+#define	AM_VOL	0x08	/* Volume label */
+#define AM_LFN	0x0F	/* LFN entry */
+#define AM_DIR	0x10	/* Directory */
+#define AM_ARC	0x20	/* Archive */
+#define AM_MASK	0x3F	/* Mask of defined bits */
+
+
+/* Fast seek feature */
+#define CREATE_LINKMAP	0xFFFFFFFF
+
+
+
+/*--------------------------------*/
+/* Multi-byte word access macros  */
+
+#if _WORD_ACCESS == 1	/* Enable word access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(WORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(WORD)(val)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(DWORD*)(BYTE*)(ptr)=(DWORD)(val)
+#else					/* Use byte-by-byte access to the FAT structure */
+#define	LD_WORD(ptr)		(WORD)(((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|(WORD)*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	LD_DWORD(ptr)		(DWORD)(((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)<<24)|((DWORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)<<16)|((WORD)*((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)<<8)|*(BYTE*)(ptr))
+#define	ST_WORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8)
+#define	ST_DWORD(ptr,val)	*(BYTE*)(ptr)=(BYTE)(val); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+1)=(BYTE)((WORD)(val)>>8); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+2)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>16); *((BYTE*)(ptr)+3)=(BYTE)((DWORD)(val)>>24)
+#endif
+
+#ifdef __cplusplus
+}
+#endif
+
+#endif /* _FATFS */
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..243a20fa22
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h
@@ -0,0 +1,190 @@
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/  FatFs - FAT file system module configuration file  R0.09a (C)ChaN, 2012
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/
+/ CAUTION! Do not forget to make clean the project after any changes to
+/ the configuration options.
+/
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef _FFCONF
+#define _FFCONF 4004	/* Revision ID */
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Function and Buffer Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define	_FS_TINY	1		/* 0:Normal or 1:Tiny */
+/* When _FS_TINY is set to 1, FatFs uses the sector buffer in the file system
+/  object instead of the sector buffer in the individual file object for file
+/  data transfer. This reduces memory consumption 512 bytes each file object. */
+
+
+#define _FS_READONLY	1	/* 0:Read/Write or 1:Read only */
+/* Setting _FS_READONLY to 1 defines read only configuration. This removes
+/  writing functions, f_write, f_sync, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_rename,
+/  f_truncate and useless f_getfree. */
+
+
+#define _FS_MINIMIZE	2	/* 0 to 3 */
+/* The _FS_MINIMIZE option defines minimization level to remove some functions.
+/
+/   0: Full function.
+/   1: f_stat, f_getfree, f_unlink, f_mkdir, f_chmod, f_truncate and f_rename
+/      are removed.
+/   2: f_opendir and f_readdir are removed in addition to 1.
+/   3: f_lseek is removed in addition to 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_STRFUNC	0	/* 0:Disable or 1-2:Enable */
+/* To enable string functions, set _USE_STRFUNC to 1 or 2. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_MKFS	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_mkfs function, set _USE_MKFS to 1 and set _FS_READONLY to 0 */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FORWARD	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable f_forward function, set _USE_FORWARD to 1 and set _FS_TINY to 1. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_FASTSEEK	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable fast seek feature, set _USE_FASTSEEK to 1. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Locale and Namespace Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _CODE_PAGE	932
+/* The _CODE_PAGE specifies the OEM code page to be used on the target system.
+/  Incorrect setting of the code page can cause a file open failure.
+/
+/   932  - Japanese Shift-JIS (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   936  - Simplified Chinese GBK (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   949  - Korean (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   950  - Traditional Chinese Big5 (DBCS, OEM, Windows)
+/   1250 - Central Europe (Windows)
+/   1251 - Cyrillic (Windows)
+/   1252 - Latin 1 (Windows)
+/   1253 - Greek (Windows)
+/   1254 - Turkish (Windows)
+/   1255 - Hebrew (Windows)
+/   1256 - Arabic (Windows)
+/   1257 - Baltic (Windows)
+/   1258 - Vietnam (OEM, Windows)
+/   437  - U.S. (OEM)
+/   720  - Arabic (OEM)
+/   737  - Greek (OEM)
+/   775  - Baltic (OEM)
+/   850  - Multilingual Latin 1 (OEM)
+/   858  - Multilingual Latin 1 + Euro (OEM)
+/   852  - Latin 2 (OEM)
+/   855  - Cyrillic (OEM)
+/   866  - Russian (OEM)
+/   857  - Turkish (OEM)
+/   862  - Hebrew (OEM)
+/   874  - Thai (OEM, Windows)
+/	1    - ASCII only (Valid for non LFN cfg.)
+*/
+
+
+#define	_USE_LFN	0		/* 0 to 3 */
+#define	_MAX_LFN	255		/* Maximum LFN length to handle (12 to 255) */
+/* The _USE_LFN option switches the LFN support.
+/
+/   0: Disable LFN feature. _MAX_LFN and _LFN_UNICODE have no effect.
+/   1: Enable LFN with static working buffer on the BSS. Always NOT reentrant.
+/   2: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the STACK.
+/   3: Enable LFN with dynamic working buffer on the HEAP.
+/
+/  The LFN working buffer occupies (_MAX_LFN + 1) * 2 bytes. To enable LFN,
+/  Unicode handling functions ff_convert() and ff_wtoupper() must be added
+/  to the project. When enable to use heap, memory control functions
+/  ff_memalloc() and ff_memfree() must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_LFN_UNICODE	0	/* 0:ANSI/OEM or 1:Unicode */
+/* To switch the character code set on FatFs API to Unicode,
+/  enable LFN feature and set _LFN_UNICODE to 1. */
+
+
+#define _FS_RPATH		0	/* 0 to 2 */
+/* The _FS_RPATH option configures relative path feature.
+/
+/   0: Disable relative path feature and remove related functions.
+/   1: Enable relative path. f_chdrive() and f_chdir() are available.
+/   2: f_getcwd() is available in addition to 1.
+/
+/  Note that output of the f_readdir function is affected by this option. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ Physical Drive Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _VOLUMES	1
+/* Number of volumes (logical drives) to be used. */
+
+
+#define	_MAX_SS		512		/* 512, 1024, 2048 or 4096 */
+/* Maximum sector size to be handled.
+/  Always set 512 for memory card and hard disk but a larger value may be
+/  required for on-board flash memory, floppy disk and optical disk.
+/  When _MAX_SS is larger than 512, it configures FatFs to variable sector size
+/  and GET_SECTOR_SIZE command must be implemented to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+#define	_MULTI_PARTITION	0	/* 0:Single partition, 1/2:Enable multiple partition */
+/* When set to 0, each volume is bound to the same physical drive number and
+/ it can mount only first primary partition. When it is set to 1, each volume
+/ is tied to the partitions listed in VolToPart[]. */
+
+
+#define	_USE_ERASE	0	/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+/* To enable sector erase feature, set _USE_ERASE to 1. CTRL_ERASE_SECTOR command
+/  should be added to the disk_ioctl function. */
+
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------/
+/ System Configurations
+/----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#define _WORD_ACCESS	1	/* 0 or 1 */
+/* Set 0 first and it is always compatible with all platforms. The _WORD_ACCESS
+/  option defines which access method is used to the word data on the FAT volume.
+/
+/   0: Byte-by-byte access.
+/   1: Word access. Do not choose this unless following condition is met.
+/
+/  When the byte order on the memory is big-endian or address miss-aligned word
+/  access results incorrect behavior, the _WORD_ACCESS must be set to 0.
+/  If it is not the case, the value can also be set to 1 to improve the
+/  performance and code size. */
+
+
+/* A header file that defines sync object types on the O/S, such as
+/  windows.h, ucos_ii.h and semphr.h, must be included prior to ff.h. */
+
+#define _FS_REENTRANT	0		/* 0:Disable or 1:Enable */
+#define _FS_TIMEOUT		1000	/* Timeout period in unit of time ticks */
+#define	_SYNC_t			HANDLE	/* O/S dependent type of sync object. e.g. HANDLE, OS_EVENT*, ID and etc.. */
+
+/* The _FS_REENTRANT option switches the reentrancy (thread safe) of the FatFs module.
+/
+/   0: Disable reentrancy. _SYNC_t and _FS_TIMEOUT have no effect.
+/   1: Enable reentrancy. Also user provided synchronization handlers,
+/      ff_req_grant, ff_rel_grant, ff_del_syncobj and ff_cre_syncobj
+/      function must be added to the project. */
+
+
+#define	_FS_LOCK	0	/* 0:Disable or >=1:Enable */
+/* To enable file lock control feature, set _FS_LOCK to 1 or greater.
+   The value defines how many files can be opened simultaneously. */
+
+
+#endif /* _FFCONFIG */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5408fe6b3e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/FATFs/integer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,38 @@
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+/* Integer type definitions for FatFs module */
+/*-------------------------------------------*/
+
+#ifndef _INTEGER
+#define _INTEGER
+
+#ifdef _WIN32	/* FatFs development platform */
+
+#include <windows.h>
+#include <tchar.h>
+
+#else			/* Embedded platform */
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit, 32-bit or larger integer */
+typedef int				INT;
+typedef unsigned int	UINT;
+
+/* These types must be 8-bit integer */
+typedef char			CHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	UCHAR;
+typedef unsigned char	BYTE;
+
+/* These types must be 16-bit integer */
+typedef short			SHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	USHORT;
+typedef unsigned short	WORD;
+typedef unsigned short	WCHAR;
+
+/* These types must be 32-bit integer */
+typedef long			LONG;
+typedef unsigned long	ULONG;
+typedef unsigned long	DWORD;
+
+#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b9cb3efa6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,284 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Simple HTTP Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
+ *  this will serve out files to HTTP clients on port 80.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C
+#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before the page contents. This indicates to the host that a page exists at the
+ *  given location, and gives extra connection information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP200Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 200 OK\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
+                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
+                                     "Content-Type: ";
+
+/** HTTP server response header, for transmission before a resource not found error. This indicates to the host that the given
+ *  URL is invalid, and gives extra error information.
+ */
+const char PROGMEM HTTP404Header[] = "HTTP/1.1 404 Not Found\r\n"
+                                     "Server: LUFA " LUFA_VERSION_STRING "\r\n"
+                                     "Connection: close\r\n"
+                                     "MIME-version: 1.0\r\n"
+                                     "Content-Type: text/plain\r\n\r\n"
+                                     "Error 404: File Not Found: /";
+
+/** Default filename to fetch when a directory is requested */
+const char PROGMEM DefaultDirFileName[] = "index.htm";
+
+/** Default MIME type sent if no other MIME type can be determined. */
+const char PROGMEM DefaultMIMEType[] = "text/plain";
+
+/** List of MIME types for each supported file extension. */
+const MIME_Type_t MIMETypes[] =
+	{
+		{.Extension = "htm", .MIMEType = "text/html"},
+		{.Extension = "jpg", .MIMEType = "image/jpeg"},
+		{.Extension = "gif", .MIMEType = "image/gif"},
+		{.Extension = "bmp", .MIMEType = "image/bmp"},
+		{.Extension = "png", .MIMEType = "image/png"},
+		{.Extension = "ico", .MIMEType = "image/x-icon"},
+		{.Extension = "exe", .MIMEType = "application/octet-stream"},
+		{.Extension = "gz",  .MIMEType = "application/x-gzip"},
+		{.Extension = "zip", .MIMEType = "application/zip"},
+		{.Extension = "pdf", .MIMEType = "application/pdf"},
+	};
+
+/** FATFs structure to hold the internal state of the FAT driver for the Dataflash contents. */
+FATFS DiskFATState;
+
+
+/** Initialization function for the simple HTTP webserver. */
+void HTTPServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 80 for HTTP connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT));
+
+	/* Mount the Dataflash disk via FatFS */
+	f_mount(0, &DiskFATState);
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the simple HTTP webserver. This function must be called each time the
+ *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState = &uip_conn->appstate;
+
+	if (uip_aborted() || uip_timedout() || uip_closed())
+	{
+		/* Lock to the closed state so that no further processing will occur on the connection */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_connected())
+	{
+		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState  = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState     = WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen      = false;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos  = 0;
+		AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize = 0;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_acked())
+	{
+		/* Add the amount of ACKed file data to the total sent file bytes counter */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos += AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize;
+
+		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
+		AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = AppState->HTTPServer.NextState;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit())
+	{
+		/* Return file pointer to the last ACKed position */
+		f_lseek(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.ACKedFilePos);
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
+	{
+		switch (AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState)
+		{
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile:
+				HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader:
+				HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData:
+				HTTPServerApp_SendData();
+				break;
+			case WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing:
+				/* Connection is being terminated for some reason - close file handle */
+				f_close(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle);
+				AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen = false;
+
+				/* If connection is not already closed, close it */
+				uip_close();
+
+				AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
+				AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed;
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the Request Process state. This state manages the processing of incoming HTTP
+ *  GET requests to the server from the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	/* No HTTP header received from the client, abort processing */
+	if (!(uip_newdata()))
+	  return;
+
+	char* RequestToken      = strtok(AppData, " ");
+	char* RequestedFileName = strtok(NULL, " ");
+
+	/* Must be a GET request, abort otherwise */
+	if (strcmp_P(RequestToken, PSTR("GET")) != 0)
+	{
+		uip_abort();
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Copy over the requested filename */
+	strlcpy(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, &RequestedFileName[1], sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName));
+
+	/* Determine the length of the URI so that it can be checked to see if it is a directory */
+	uint8_t FileNameLen = strlen(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
+
+	/* If the URI is a directory, append the default filename */
+	if ((AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen - 1] == '/') || !(FileNameLen))
+	{
+		strlcpy_P(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileName[FileNameLen], DefaultDirFileName,
+		          (sizeof(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName) - FileNameLen));
+	}
+
+	/* Try to open the file from the Dataflash disk */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen     = (f_open(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName,
+	                                            (FA_OPEN_EXISTING | FA_READ)) == FR_OK);
+
+	/* Lock to the SendResponseHeader state until connection terminated */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.CurrentState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
+	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState    = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader;
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the HTTP Response Header Send state. This state manages the transmission of
+ *  the HTTP response header to the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	char* Extension     = strpbrk(AppState->HTTPServer.FileName, ".");
+	bool  FoundMIMEType = false;
+
+	/* If the file isn't already open, it wasn't found - send back a 404 error response and abort */
+	if (!(AppState->HTTPServer.FileOpen))
+	{
+		/* Copy over the HTTP 404 response header and send it to the receiving client */
+		strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP404Header);
+		strcat(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.FileName);
+		uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+		AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Copy over the HTTP 200 response header and send it to the receiving client */
+	strcpy_P(AppData, HTTP200Header);
+
+	/* Check to see if a MIME type for the requested file's extension was found */
+	if (Extension != NULL)
+	{
+		/* Look through the MIME type list, copy over the required MIME type if found */
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < (sizeof(MIMETypes) / sizeof(MIMETypes[0])); i++)
+		{
+			if (strcmp(&Extension[1], MIMETypes[i].Extension) == 0)
+			{
+				strcat(AppData, MIMETypes[i].MIMEType);
+				FoundMIMEType = true;
+				break;
+			}
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Check if a MIME type was found and copied to the output buffer */
+	if (!(FoundMIMEType))
+	{
+		/* MIME type not found - copy over the default MIME type */
+		strcat_P(AppData, DefaultMIMEType);
+	}
+
+	/* Add the end-of-line terminator and end-of-headers terminator after the MIME type */
+	strcat_P(AppData, PSTR("\r\n\r\n"));
+
+	/* Send the MIME header to the receiving client */
+	uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+	/* When the MIME header is ACKed, progress to the data send stage */
+	AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData;
+}
+
+/** HTTP Server State handler for the Data Send state. This state manages the transmission of file chunks
+ *  to the receiving HTTP client.
+ */
+static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState    = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData     = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	/* Get the maximum segment size for the current packet */
+	uint16_t MaxChunkSize = uip_mss();
+
+	/* Read the next chunk of data from the open file */
+	f_read(&AppState->HTTPServer.FileHandle, AppData, MaxChunkSize, &AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
+
+	/* Send the next file chunk to the receiving client */
+	uip_send(AppData, AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize);
+
+	/* Check if we are at the last chunk of the file, if so next ACK should close the connection */
+	if (MaxChunkSize != AppState->HTTPServer.SentChunkSize)
+	  AppState->HTTPServer.NextState = WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6e9ada00cd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/HTTPServerApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,84 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for HTTPServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _HTTPSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Version.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+		#include <ff.h>
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each HTTP connection to the webserver. */
+		enum Webserver_States_t
+		{
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_OpenRequestedFile, /**< Currently opening requested file */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendResponseHeader, /**< Currently sending HTTP response headers to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_SendData, /**< Currently sending HTTP page data to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closing, /**< Ready to close the connection to the client */
+			WEBSERVER_STATE_Closed, /**< Connection closed after all data sent */
+		};
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for a MIME type handler. */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			char* Extension; /**< File extension (no leading '.' character) */
+			char* MIMEType;  /**< Appropriate MIME type to send when the extension is encountered */
+		} MIME_Type_t;
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TCP listen port for incoming HTTP traffic. */
+		#define HTTP_SERVER_PORT  80
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void HTTPServerApp_Init(void);
+		void HTTPServerApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_HTTPSERVERAPP_C)
+			static void HTTPServerApp_OpenRequestedFile(void);
+			static void HTTPServerApp_SendResponseHeader(void);
+			static void HTTPServerApp_SendData(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..315f2e3a3d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.c
@@ -0,0 +1,344 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  SCSI command processing routines, for SCSI commands issued by the host. Mass Storage
+ *  devices use a thin "Bulk-Only Transport" protocol for issuing commands and status information,
+ *  which wrap around standard SCSI device commands for controlling the actual storage medium.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C
+#include "SCSI.h"
+
+/** Structure to hold the SCSI response data to a SCSI INQUIRY command. This gives information about the device's
+ *  features and capabilities.
+ */
+static const SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t InquiryData =
+	{
+		.DeviceType          = DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK,
+		.PeripheralQualifier = 0,
+
+		.Removable           = true,
+
+		.Version             = 0,
+
+		.ResponseDataFormat  = 2,
+		.NormACA             = false,
+		.TrmTsk              = false,
+		.AERC                = false,
+
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x1F,
+
+		.SoftReset           = false,
+		.CmdQue              = false,
+		.Linked              = false,
+		.Sync                = false,
+		.WideBus16Bit        = false,
+		.WideBus32Bit        = false,
+		.RelAddr             = false,
+
+		.VendorID            = "LUFA",
+		.ProductID           = "Dataflash Disk",
+		.RevisionID          = {'0','.','0','0'},
+	};
+
+/** Structure to hold the sense data for the last issued SCSI command, which is returned to the host after a SCSI REQUEST SENSE
+ *  command is issued. This gives information on exactly why the last command failed to complete.
+ */
+static SCSI_Request_Sense_Response_t SenseData =
+	{
+		.ResponseCode        = 0x70,
+		.AdditionalLength    = 0x0A,
+	};
+
+
+/** Main routine to process the SCSI command located in the Command Block Wrapper read from the host. This dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate SCSI command handling routine if the issued command is supported by the device, else it returns
+ *  a command failure due to a ILLEGAL REQUEST.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise
+ */
+bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess = false;
+
+	/* Run the appropriate SCSI command hander function based on the passed command */
+	switch (MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[0])
+	{
+		case SCSI_CMD_INQUIRY:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Inquiry(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_REQUEST_SENSE:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_CAPACITY_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_SEND_DIAGNOSTIC:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_WRITE_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_WRITE);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_READ_10:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(MSInterfaceInfo, DATA_READ);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_MODE_SENSE_6:
+			CommandSuccess = SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(MSInterfaceInfo);
+			break;
+		case SCSI_CMD_START_STOP_UNIT:
+		case SCSI_CMD_TEST_UNIT_READY:
+		case SCSI_CMD_PREVENT_ALLOW_MEDIUM_REMOVAL:
+		case SCSI_CMD_VERIFY_10:
+			/* These commands should just succeed, no handling required */
+			CommandSuccess = true;
+			MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+			break;
+		default:
+			/* Update the SENSE key to reflect the invalid command */
+			SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_COMMAND,
+		                   SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+			break;
+	}
+
+	/* Check if command was successfully processed */
+	if (CommandSuccess)
+	{
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_GOOD,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return true;
+	}
+
+	return false;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI INQUIRY command. This command returns information about the device's features
+ *  and capabilities to the host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint16_t AllocationLength  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[3]);
+	uint16_t BytesTransferred  = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(InquiryData));
+
+	/* Only the standard INQUIRY data is supported, check if any optional INQUIRY bits set */
+	if ((MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & ((1 << 0) | (1 << 1))) ||
+	     MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2])
+	{
+		/* Optional but unsupported bits set - update the SENSE key and fail the request */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&InquiryData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+
+	/* Pad out remaining bytes with 0x00 */
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+
+	/* Finalize the stream transfer to send the last packet */
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI REQUEST SENSE command. This command returns information about the last issued command,
+ *  including the error code and additional error information so that the host can determine why a command failed to complete.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint8_t  AllocationLength = MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[4];
+	uint8_t  BytesTransferred = MIN(AllocationLength, sizeof(SenseData));
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_LE(&SenseData, BytesTransferred, NULL);
+	Endpoint_Null_Stream((AllocationLength - BytesTransferred), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= BytesTransferred;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ CAPACITY (10) command. This command returns information about the device's capacity
+ *  on the selected Logical Unit (drive), as a number of OS-sized blocks.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	uint32_t LastBlockAddressInLUN = (VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS - 1);
+	uint32_t MediaBlockSize        = VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE;
+
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&LastBlockAddressInLUN, sizeof(LastBlockAddressInLUN), NULL);
+	Endpoint_Write_Stream_BE(&MediaBlockSize, sizeof(MediaBlockSize), NULL);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 8;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI SEND DIAGNOSTIC command. This command performs a quick check of the Dataflash ICs on the
+ *  board, and indicates if they are present and functioning correctly. Only the Self-Test portion of the diagnostic command is
+ *  supported.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Check to see if the SELF TEST bit is not set */
+	if (!(MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[1] & (1 << 2)))
+	{
+		/* Only self-test supported - update SENSE key and fail the command */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_INVALID_FIELD_IN_CDB,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Check to see if all attached Dataflash ICs are functional */
+	if (!(DataflashManager_CheckDataflashOperation()))
+	{
+		/* Update SENSE key with a hardware error condition and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_HARDWARE_ERROR,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_NO_ADDITIONAL_INFORMATION,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Succeed the command and update the bytes transferred counter */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength = 0;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI READ (10) or WRITE (10) command. This command reads in the block start address
+ *  and total number of blocks to process, then calls the appropriate low-level Dataflash routine to handle the actual
+ *  reading and writing of the data.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *  \param[in] IsDataRead  Indicates if the command is a READ (10) command or WRITE (10) command (DATA_READ or DATA_WRITE)
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+                                      const bool IsDataRead)
+{
+	uint32_t BlockAddress;
+	uint16_t TotalBlocks;
+
+	/* Check if the disk is write protected or not */
+	if ((IsDataRead == DATA_WRITE) && DISK_READ_ONLY)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_DATA_PROTECT,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_WRITE_PROTECTED,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Load in the 32-bit block address (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	BlockAddress = SwapEndian_32(*(uint32_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[2]);
+
+	/* Load in the 16-bit total blocks (SCSI uses big-endian, so have to reverse the byte order) */
+	TotalBlocks  = SwapEndian_16(*(uint16_t*)&MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.SCSICommandData[7]);
+
+	/* Check if the block address is outside the maximum allowable value for the LUN */
+	if (BlockAddress >= VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCKS)
+	{
+		/* Block address is invalid, update SENSE key and return command fail */
+		SCSI_SET_SENSE(SCSI_SENSE_KEY_ILLEGAL_REQUEST,
+		               SCSI_ASENSE_LOGICAL_BLOCK_ADDRESS_OUT_OF_RANGE,
+		               SCSI_ASENSEQ_NO_QUALIFIER);
+
+		return false;
+	}
+
+	/* Determine if the packet is a READ (10) or WRITE (10) command, call appropriate function */
+	if (IsDataRead == DATA_READ)
+	  DataflashManager_ReadBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+	else
+	  DataflashManager_WriteBlocks(MSInterfaceInfo, BlockAddress, TotalBlocks);
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= ((uint32_t)TotalBlocks * VIRTUAL_MEMORY_BLOCK_SIZE);
+
+	return true;
+}
+
+/** Command processing for an issued SCSI MODE SENSE (6) command. This command returns various informational pages about
+ *  the SCSI device, as well as the device's Write Protect status.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface structure that the command is associated with
+ *
+ *  \return Boolean \c true if the command completed successfully, \c false otherwise.
+ */
+static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Send an empty header response with the Write Protect flag status */
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(DISK_READ_ONLY ? 0x80 : 0x00);
+	Endpoint_Write_8(0x00);
+	Endpoint_ClearIN();
+
+	/* Update the bytes transferred counter and succeed the command */
+	MSInterfaceInfo->State.CommandBlock.DataTransferLength -= 4;
+
+	return true;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..53274dd892
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/SCSI.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SCSI.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SCSI_H_
+#define _SCSI_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "../Descriptors.h"
+		#include "DataflashManager.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Macro to set the current SCSI sense data to the given key, additional sense code and additional sense qualifier. This
+		 *  is for convenience, as it allows for all three sense values (returned upon request to the host to give information about
+		 *  the last command failure) in a quick and easy manner.
+		 *
+		 *  \param[in] Key    New SCSI sense key to set the sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Acode  New SCSI additional sense key to set the additional sense code to
+		 *  \param[in] Aqual  New SCSI additional sense key qualifier to set the additional sense qualifier code to
+		 */
+		#define SCSI_SET_SENSE(Key, Acode, Aqual)  do { SenseData.SenseKey                 = (Key);   \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseCode      = (Acode); \
+		                                                SenseData.AdditionalSenseQualifier = (Aqual); } while (0)
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be read from the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_READ           true
+
+		/** Macro for the \ref SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10() function, to indicate that data is to be written to the storage medium. */
+		#define DATA_WRITE          false
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a Block Media device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_BLOCK   0x00
+
+		/** Value for the DeviceType entry in the SCSI_Inquiry_Response_t enum, indicating a CD-ROM device. */
+		#define DEVICE_TYPE_CDROM   0x05
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		bool SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_SCSI_C)
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Inquiry(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Request_Sense(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Read_Capacity_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_Send_Diagnostic(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ReadWrite_10(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo,
+			                                      const bool IsDataRead);
+			static bool SCSI_Command_ModeSense_6(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..a05cd286f8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,163 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  TELNET Webserver Application. When connected to the uIP stack,
+ *  this will serve out raw TELNET to the client on port 23.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C
+#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
+
+#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER) || defined(__DOXYGEN__)
+
+/** Welcome message to send to a TELNET client when a connection is first made. */
+const char PROGMEM WelcomeHeader[] = "********************************************\r\n"
+                                     "*       LUFA uIP Webserver (TELNET)        *\r\n"
+                                     "********************************************\r\n";
+
+/** Main TELNET menu, giving the user the list of available commands they may issue */
+const char PROGMEM TELNETMenu[] = "\r\n"
+                                  "  == Available Commands: ==\r\n"
+                                  "     c) List Active TCP Connections\r\n"
+                                  "  =========================\r\n"
+                                  "\r\n>";
+
+/** Header to print before the current connections are printed to the client */
+const char PROGMEM CurrentConnectionsHeader[] = "\r\n* Current TCP Connections: *\r\n";
+
+/** Initialization function for the simple TELNET webserver. */
+void TELNETServerApp_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Listen on port 23 for TELNET connections from hosts */
+	uip_listen(HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT));
+}
+
+/** uIP stack application callback for the TELNET server. This function must be called each time the
+ *  TCP/IP stack needs a TCP packet to be processed.
+ */
+void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void)
+{
+	uip_tcp_appstate_t* const AppState   = &uip_conn->appstate;
+	char*               const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	if (uip_connected())
+	{
+		/* New connection - initialize connection state values */
+		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = TELNET_STATE_SendHeader;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_acked())
+	{
+		/* Progress to the next state once the current state's data has been ACKed */
+		AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState = AppState->TELNETServer.NextState;
+	}
+
+	if (uip_rexmit() || uip_acked() || uip_newdata() || uip_connected() || uip_poll())
+	{
+		switch (AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState)
+		{
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendHeader:
+				/* Copy over and send the TELNET welcome message upon first connection */
+				strcpy_P(AppData, WelcomeHeader);
+				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendMenu:
+				/* Copy over and send the TELNET menu to the client */
+				strcpy_P(AppData, TELNETMenu);
+				uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_GetCommand;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_GetCommand:
+				if (!(uip_datalen()))
+				  break;
+
+				/* Save the issued command for later processing */
+				AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand = AppData[0];
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.CurrentState  = TELNET_STATE_SendResponse;
+				break;
+			case TELNET_STATE_SendResponse:
+				/* Determine which command was issued, perform command processing */
+				switch (AppState->TELNETServer.IssuedCommand)
+				{
+					case 'c':
+						TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections();
+						break;
+					default:
+						strcpy_P(AppData, PSTR("Invalid Command.\r\n"));
+						uip_send(AppData, strlen(AppData));
+						break;
+				}
+
+				AppState->TELNETServer.NextState = TELNET_STATE_SendMenu;
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+}
+
+/** Sends a list of active TCP connections to the TELNET client. */
+static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void)
+{
+	char* const AppData    = (char*)uip_appdata;
+
+	strcpy_P(AppData, CurrentConnectionsHeader);
+
+	uint16_t ResponseLen     = strlen(AppData);
+	uint8_t  ActiveConnCount = 0;
+
+	/* Loop through the complete uIP TCP connections list, looking for active connections */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+	{
+		struct uip_conn* CurrConnection = &uip_conns[i];
+
+		/* If the connection is not closed, it is active and must be added to the out buffer */
+		if (CurrConnection->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
+		{
+			/* Add the current connection's details to the out buffer */
+			ResponseLen += sprintf_P(&AppData[ResponseLen], PSTR("%u) %d.%d.%d.%d (Local Port %u <=> Remote Port %u)\r\n"),
+			                         ++ActiveConnCount,
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[0],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[1],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[2],
+			                         CurrConnection->ripaddr.u8[3],
+			                         HTONS(CurrConnection->lport), HTONS(CurrConnection->rport));
+		}
+	}
+
+	uip_send(AppData, ResponseLen);
+}
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ac2a836543
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/TELNETServerApp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for TELNETServerApp.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
+#define _TELNETSERVER_APP_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <string.h>
+		#include <stdio.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** TCP listen port for incoming TELNET traffic. */
+		#define TELNET_SERVER_PORT  23
+
+	/* Enums: */
+		/** States for each TELNET connection to the server. */
+		enum TELNET_States_t
+		{
+			TELNET_STATE_SendHeader, /**< Currently sending welcome header to the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_SendMenu, /**< Currently sending the command list menu to the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_GetCommand, /**< Currently waiting for a command from the client */
+			TELNET_STATE_SendResponse, /**< Processing the issued command and sending a response */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void TELNETServerApp_Init(void);
+		void TELNETServerApp_Callback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_TELNETSERVERAPP_C)
+			static void TELNETServerApp_DisplayTCPConnections(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c9cbba7c51
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.c
@@ -0,0 +1,298 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  uIP Management functions. This file contains the functions and globals needed to maintain the uIP
+ *  stack once an RNDIS device has been attached to the system.
+ */
+
+#define  INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C
+#include "uIPManagement.h"
+
+/** Connection timer, to retain the time elapsed since the last time the uIP connections were managed. */
+static struct timer ConnectionTimer;
+
+/** ARP timer, to retain the time elapsed since the ARP cache was last updated. */
+static struct timer ARPTimer;
+
+/** MAC address of the RNDIS device, when enumerated. */
+struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
+
+
+/** Configures the uIP stack ready for network traffic processing. */
+void uIPManagement_Init(void)
+{
+	/* uIP Timing Initialization */
+	clock_init();
+	timer_set(&ConnectionTimer, CLOCK_SECOND / 2);
+	timer_set(&ARPTimer, CLOCK_SECOND * 10);
+
+	/* uIP Stack Initialization */
+	uip_init();
+	uip_arp_init();
+
+	/* DHCP/Server IP Settings Initialization */
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	{
+		MACAddress.addr[0] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[0];
+		MACAddress.addr[1] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[1];
+		MACAddress.addr[2] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[2];
+		MACAddress.addr[3] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[3];
+		MACAddress.addr[4] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[4];
+		MACAddress.addr[5] = SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS[5];
+
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER)
+		DHCPServerApp_Init();
+		#endif
+
+		uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
+		uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
+		uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
+		uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
+		uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+		DHCPClientApp_Init();
+		#else
+		uip_ipaddr_t IPAddress, Netmask, GatewayIPAddress;
+		uip_ipaddr(&IPAddress,        DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[0], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[1], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[2], DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&Netmask,          DEVICE_NETMASK[0],    DEVICE_NETMASK[1],    DEVICE_NETMASK[2],    DEVICE_NETMASK[3]);
+		uip_ipaddr(&GatewayIPAddress, DEVICE_GATEWAY[0],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[1],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[2],    DEVICE_GATEWAY[3]);
+		uip_sethostaddr(&IPAddress);
+		uip_setnetmask(&Netmask);
+		uip_setdraddr(&GatewayIPAddress);
+		#endif
+	}
+
+	/* Virtual Webserver Ethernet Address Configuration */
+	uip_setethaddr(MACAddress);
+
+	/* HTTP Webserver Initialization */
+	HTTPServerApp_Init();
+
+	/* TELNET Server Initialization */
+	#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
+	TELNETServerApp_Init();
+	#endif
+}
+
+/** uIP Management function. This function manages the uIP stack when called while an RNDIS device has been
+ *  attached to the system.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void)
+{
+	if (((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)   && (USB_HostState   == HOST_STATE_Configured)) ||
+	    ((USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device) && (USB_DeviceState == DEVICE_STATE_Configured)))
+	{
+		uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket();
+		uIPManagement_ManageConnections();
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given TCP connection. This routine dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate TCP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void)
+{
+	/* Call the correct TCP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
+	switch (uip_conn->lport)
+	{
+		case HTONS(HTTP_SERVER_PORT):
+			HTTPServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#if defined(ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER)
+		case HTONS(TELNET_SERVER_PORT):
+			TELNETServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#endif
+	}
+}
+
+/** uIP TCP/IP network stack callback function for the processing of a given UDP connection. This routine dispatches
+ *  to the appropriate UDP protocol application based on the connection's listen port number.
+ */
+void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void)
+{
+	/* Call the correct UDP application based on the port number the connection is listening on */
+	switch (uip_udp_conn->lport)
+	{
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+		case HTONS(DHCP_CLIENT_PORT):
+			DHCPClientApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#endif
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER)
+		case HTONS(DHCP_SERVER_PORT):
+			DHCPServerApp_Callback();
+			break;
+		#endif
+	}
+}
+
+/** Processes Incoming packets to the server from the connected RNDIS device, creating responses as needed. */
+static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void)
+{
+	/* Determine which USB mode the system is currently initialized in */
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	{
+		/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
+		if (!(RNDIS_Device_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device)))
+		  return;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
+		RNDIS_Device_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, &uip_len);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* If no packet received, exit processing routine */
+		if (!(RNDIS_Host_IsPacketReceived(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host)))
+		  return;
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		/* Read the Incoming packet straight into the UIP packet buffer */
+		RNDIS_Host_ReadPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, &uip_len);
+	}
+
+	/* If the packet contains an Ethernet frame, process it */
+	if (uip_len > 0)
+	{
+		switch (((struct uip_eth_hdr*)uip_buf)->type)
+		{
+			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP):
+				/* Filter packet by MAC destination */
+				uip_arp_ipin();
+
+				/* Process Incoming packet */
+				uip_input();
+
+				/* If a response was generated, send it */
+				if (uip_len > 0)
+				{
+					/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+					uip_arp_out();
+
+					uip_split_output();
+				}
+
+				break;
+			case HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP):
+				/* Process ARP packet */
+				uip_arp_arpin();
+
+				/* If a response was generated, send it */
+				if (uip_len > 0)
+				  uip_split_output();
+
+				break;
+		}
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Manages the currently open network connections, including TCP and (if enabled) UDP. */
+static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void)
+{
+	/* Poll TCP connections for more data to send back to the host */
+	for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+	{
+		uip_poll_conn(&uip_conns[i]);
+
+		/* If a response was generated, send it */
+		if (uip_len > 0)
+		{
+			/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+			uip_arp_out();
+
+			/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+			uip_split_output();
+		}
+	}
+
+	/* Manage open connections for timeouts */
+	if (timer_expired(&ConnectionTimer))
+	{
+		timer_reset(&ConnectionTimer);
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; i++)
+		{
+			/* Run periodic connection management for each TCP connection */
+			uip_periodic(i);
+
+			/* If a response was generated, send it */
+			if (uip_len > 0)
+			{
+				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+				uip_arp_out();
+
+				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+				uip_split_output();
+			}
+		}
+
+		#if defined(ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT)
+		for (uint8_t i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++)
+		{
+			/* Run periodic connection management for each UDP connection */
+			uip_udp_periodic(i);
+
+			/* If a response was generated, send it */
+			if (uip_len > 0)
+			{
+				/* Add destination MAC to outgoing packet */
+				uip_arp_out();
+
+				/* Split and send the outgoing packet */
+				uip_split_output();
+			}
+		}
+		#endif
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+
+	/* Manage ARP cache refreshing */
+	if (timer_expired(&ARPTimer))
+	{
+		timer_reset(&ARPTimer);
+		uip_arp_timer();
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..9a6fa17599
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uIPManagement.h
@@ -0,0 +1,69 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for uIPManagement.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
+#define _UIP_MANAGEMENT_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include <uip.h>
+		#include <uip_arp.h>
+		#include <uip-split.h>
+		#include <timer.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include "DHCPClientApp.h"
+		#include "DHCPServerApp.h"
+		#include "HTTPServerApp.h"
+		#include "TELNETServerApp.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern struct uip_eth_addr MACAddress;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void uIPManagement_Init(void);
+		void uIPManagement_ManageNetwork(void);
+		void uIPManagement_TCPCallback(void);
+		void uIPManagement_UDPCallback(void);
+
+		#if defined(INCLUDE_FROM_UIPMANAGEMENT_C)
+			static void uIPManagement_ProcessIncomingPacket(void);
+			static void uIPManagement_ManageConnections(void);
+		#endif
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..e71f7209d2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.c
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <stdlib.h>
+#include <stdio.h>
+
+#include <LUFA/Common/Common.h>
+
+#include "clock.h"
+
+//Counted time
+volatile clock_time_t clock_datetime = 0;
+
+//Overflow interrupt
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	clock_datetime += 1;
+}
+
+//Initialise the clock
+void clock_init()
+{
+	OCR1A  = (((F_CPU / 1024) / 100) - 1);
+	TCCR1B = ((1 << WGM12) | (1 << CS12) | (1 << CS10));
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
+}
+
+//Return time
+clock_time_t clock_time()
+{
+	clock_time_t time;
+
+	GlobalInterruptDisable();
+	time = clock_datetime;
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	return time;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..bbfa4ac0e3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/clock.h
@@ -0,0 +1,13 @@
+#ifndef __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
+#define __CLOCK_ARCH_H__
+
+#include <stdint.h>
+#include <util/atomic.h>
+
+typedef uint16_t clock_time_t;
+#define CLOCK_SECOND 100
+void clock_init(void);
+clock_time_t clock_time(void);
+
+#endif /* __CLOCK_ARCH_H__ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..eae06f43bd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.c
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup timer
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Timer library implementation.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: timer.c,v 1.2 2006/06/12 08:00:30 adam Exp $
+ */
+
+#include "clock.h"
+#include "timer.h"
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Set a timer.
+ *
+ * This function is used to set a timer for a time sometime in the
+ * future. The function timer_expired() will evaluate to true after
+ * the timer has expired.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer
+ * \param interval The interval before the timer expires.
+ *
+ */
+void
+timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval)
+{
+  t->interval = interval;
+  t->start = clock_time();
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Reset the timer with the same interval.
+ *
+ * This function resets the timer with the same interval that was
+ * given to the timer_set() function. The start point of the interval
+ * is the exact time that the timer last expired. Therefore, this
+ * function will cause the timer to be stable over time, unlike the
+ * timer_restart() function.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer.
+ *
+ * \sa timer_restart()
+ */
+void
+timer_reset(struct timer *t)
+{
+  t->start += t->interval;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Restart the timer from the current point in time
+ *
+ * This function restarts a timer with the same interval that was
+ * given to the timer_set() function. The timer will start at the
+ * current time.
+ *
+ * \note A periodic timer will drift if this function is used to reset
+ * it. For periodic timers, use the timer_reset() function instead.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer.
+ *
+ * \sa timer_reset()
+ */
+void
+timer_restart(struct timer *t)
+{
+  t->start = clock_time();
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Check if a timer has expired.
+ *
+ * This function tests if a timer has expired and returns true or
+ * false depending on its status.
+ *
+ * \param t A pointer to the timer
+ *
+ * \return Non-zero if the timer has expired, zero otherwise.
+ *
+ */
+int
+timer_expired(struct timer *t)
+{
+  return (clock_time_t)(clock_time() - t->start) >= (clock_time_t)t->interval;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..04917e4c52
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/timer.h
@@ -0,0 +1,87 @@
+/**
+ * \defgroup timer Timer library
+ *
+ * The timer library provides functions for setting, resetting and
+ * restarting timers, and for checking if a timer has expired. An
+ * application must "manually" check if its timers have expired; this
+ * is not done automatically.
+ *
+ * A timer is declared as a \c struct \c timer and all access to the
+ * timer is made by a pointer to the declared timer.
+ *
+ * \note The timer library uses the \ref clock "Clock library" to
+ * measure time. Intervals should be specified in the format used by
+ * the clock library.
+ *
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Timer library header file.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: timer.h,v 1.3 2006/06/11 21:46:39 adam Exp $
+ */
+#ifndef __TIMER_H__
+#define __TIMER_H__
+
+#include "clock.h"
+
+/**
+ * A timer.
+ *
+ * This structure is used for declaring a timer. The timer must be set
+ * with timer_set() before it can be used.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+struct timer {
+  clock_time_t start;
+  clock_time_t interval;
+};
+
+void timer_set(struct timer *t, clock_time_t interval);
+void timer_reset(struct timer *t);
+void timer_restart(struct timer *t);
+int timer_expired(struct timer *t);
+
+#endif /* __TIMER_H__ */
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5222a05b63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.c
@@ -0,0 +1,151 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: uip-split.c,v 1.2 2008/10/14 13:39:12 julienabeille Exp $
+ */
+
+#include "uip-split.h"
+
+
+#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_split_output(void)
+{
+#if UIP_TCP
+  u16_t tcplen, len1, len2;
+
+  /* We only try to split maximum sized TCP segments. */
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP  && uip_len == UIP_BUFSIZE) {
+
+    tcplen = uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN;
+    /* Split the segment in two. If the original packet length was
+       odd, we make the second packet one byte larger. */
+    len1 = len2 = tcplen / 2;
+    if(len1 + len2 < tcplen) {
+      ++len2;
+    }
+
+    /* Create the first packet. This is done by altering the length
+       field of the IP header and updating the checksums. */
+    uip_len = len1 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+       length. */
+    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
+    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
+    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
+    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Transmit the first packet. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
+	else
+	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Now, create the second packet. To do this, it is not enough to
+       just alter the length field, but we must also update the TCP
+       sequence number and point the uip_appdata to a new place in
+       memory. This place is determined by the length of the first
+       packet (len1). */
+    uip_len = len2 + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+       length. */
+    BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+    BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    BUF->len[0] = (uip_len  - UIP_LLH_LEN) >> 8;
+    BUF->len[1] = (uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN) & 0xff;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    memcpy(uip_appdata, (u8_t *)uip_appdata + len1, len2);
+
+    uip_add32(BUF->seqno, len1);
+    BUF->seqno[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+    BUF->seqno[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+    BUF->seqno[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+    BUF->seqno[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+
+    /* Recalculate the TCP checksum. */
+    BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+    BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    /* Recalculate the IP checksum. */
+    BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+    BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+    /* Transmit the second packet. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
+	else
+	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    return;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_TCP */
+
+  /*    uip_fw_output();*/
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+	tcpip_ipv6_output();
+#else
+	if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Device)
+	  RNDIS_Device_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device, uip_buf, uip_len);
+	else
+	  RNDIS_Host_SendPacket(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, uip_buf, uip_len);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+}
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0c768ce40a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip-split.h
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2004, Swedish Institute of Computer Science.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. Neither the name of the Institute nor the names of its contributors
+ *    may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software
+ *    without specific prior written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE INSTITUTE AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND
+ * ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
+ * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE INSTITUTE OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
+ * FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS
+ * OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)
+ * HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT
+ * LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY
+ * OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
+ * SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the Contiki operating system.
+ *
+ * Author: Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ * $Id: uip-split.h,v 1.1 2006/06/17 22:41:19 adamdunkels Exp $
+ */
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipsplit uIP TCP throughput booster hack
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The basic uIP TCP implementation only allows each TCP connection to
+ * have a single TCP segment in flight at any given time. Because of
+ * the delayed ACK algorithm employed by most TCP receivers, uIP's
+ * limit on the amount of in-flight TCP segments seriously reduces the
+ * maximum achievable throughput for sending data from uIP.
+ *
+ * The uip-split module is a hack which tries to remedy this
+ * situation. By splitting maximum sized outgoing TCP segments into
+ * two, the delayed ACK algorithm is not invoked at TCP
+ * receivers. This improves the throughput when sending data from uIP
+ * by orders of magnitude.
+ *
+ * The uip-split module uses the uip-fw module (uIP IP packet
+ * forwarding) for sending packets. Therefore, the uip-fw module must
+ * be set up with the appropriate network interfaces for this module
+ * to work.
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Module for splitting outbound TCP segments in two to avoid the
+ * delayed ACK throughput degradation.
+ * \author
+ * Adam Dunkels <adam@sics.se>
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_SPLIT_H__
+#define __UIP_SPLIT_H__
+
+#include <string.h>
+#include <uip.h>
+
+#include "../../USBHostMode.h"
+
+#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+/**
+ * Handle outgoing packets.
+ *
+ * This function inspects an outgoing packet in the uip_buf buffer and
+ * sends it out using the uip_fw_output() function. If the packet is a
+ * full-sized TCP segment it will be split into two segments and
+ * transmitted separately. This function should be called instead of
+ * the actual device driver output function, or the uip_fw_output()
+ * function.
+ *
+ * The headers of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the uip_buf
+ * buffer and the payload is assumed to be wherever uip_appdata
+ * points. The length of the outgoing packet is assumed to be in the
+ * uip_len variable.
+ *
+ */
+void uip_split_output(void);
+void uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16);
+#endif /* __UIP_SPLIT_H__ */
+
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fead75775c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1941 @@
+#define DEBUG_PRINTF(...) /*printf(__VA_ARGS__)*/
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * The uIP TCP/IP stack code.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip.c,v 1.15 2008/10/15 08:08:32 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * uIP is a small implementation of the IP, UDP and TCP protocols (as
+ * well as some basic ICMP stuff). The implementation couples the IP,
+ * UDP, TCP and the application layers very tightly. To keep the size
+ * of the compiled code down, this code frequently uses the goto
+ * statement. While it would be possible to break the uip_process()
+ * function into many smaller functions, this would increase the code
+ * size because of the overhead of parameter passing and the fact that
+ * the optimizer would not be as efficient.
+ *
+ * The principle is that we have a small buffer, called the uip_buf,
+ * in which the device driver puts an incoming packet. The TCP/IP
+ * stack parses the headers in the packet, and calls the
+ * application. If the remote host has sent data to the application,
+ * this data is present in the uip_buf and the application read the
+ * data from there. It is up to the application to put this data into
+ * a byte stream if needed. The application will not be fed with data
+ * that is out of sequence.
+ *
+ * If the application whishes to send data to the peer, it should put
+ * its data into the uip_buf. The uip_appdata pointer points to the
+ * first available byte. The TCP/IP stack will calculate the
+ * checksums, and fill in the necessary header fields and finally send
+ * the packet back to the peer.
+*/
+
+#include "uip.h"
+#include "uipopt.h"
+#include "uip_arp.h"
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6 /* If UIP_CONF_IPV6 is defined, we compile the
+		      uip6.c file instead of this one. Therefore
+		      this #ifndef removes the entire compilation
+		      output of the uip.c file */
+
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#include "net/uip-neighbor.h"
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Variable definitions. */
+
+
+/* The IP address of this host. If it is defined to be fixed (by
+   setting UIP_FIXEDADDR to 1 in uipopt.h), the address is set
+   here. Otherwise, the address */
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR > 0
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr =
+  { UIP_IPADDR0, UIP_IPADDR1, UIP_IPADDR2, UIP_IPADDR3 };
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_draddr =
+  { UIP_DRIPADDR0, UIP_DRIPADDR1, UIP_DRIPADDR2, UIP_DRIPADDR3 };
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_netmask =
+  { UIP_NETMASK0, UIP_NETMASK1, UIP_NETMASK2, UIP_NETMASK3 };
+#else
+uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_draddr, uip_netmask;
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr =
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff,
+      0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  { { 0xff, 0xff, 0xff, 0xff } };
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr = { { 0x0, /* rest is 0 */ } };
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
+const struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{UIP_ETHADDR0,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR1,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR2,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR3,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR4,
+					  UIP_ETHADDR5}};
+#else
+struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr = {{0,0,0,0,0,0}};
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER
+u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE + 2];   /* The packet buffer that contains
+				    incoming packets. */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_EXTERNAL_BUFFER */
+
+void *uip_appdata;               /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
+				    application data. */
+void *uip_sappdata;              /* The uip_appdata pointer points to
+				    the application data which is to
+				    be sent. */
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+void *uip_urgdata;               /* The uip_urgdata pointer points to
+   				    urgent data (out-of-band data), if
+   				    present. */
+u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+u16_t uip_len, uip_slen;
+                             /* The uip_len is either 8 or 16 bits,
+				depending on the maximum packet
+				size. */
+
+u8_t uip_flags;     /* The uip_flags variable is used for
+				communication between the TCP/IP stack
+				and the application program. */
+struct uip_conn *uip_conn;   /* uip_conn always points to the current
+				connection. */
+
+struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
+                             /* The uip_conns array holds all TCP
+				connections. */
+u16_t uip_listenports[UIP_LISTENPORTS];
+                             /* The uip_listenports list all currently
+				listening ports. */
+#if UIP_UDP
+struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
+struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+static u16_t ipid;           /* Ths ipid variable is an increasing
+				number that is used for the IP ID
+				field. */
+
+void uip_setipid(u16_t id) { ipid = id; }
+
+static u8_t iss[4];          /* The iss variable is used for the TCP
+				initial sequence number. */
+
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+static u16_t lastport;       /* Keeps track of the last port used for
+				a new connection. */
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+/* Temporary variables. */
+u8_t uip_acc32[4];
+static u8_t c, opt;
+static u16_t tmp16;
+
+/* Structures and definitions. */
+#define TCP_FIN 0x01
+#define TCP_SYN 0x02
+#define TCP_RST 0x04
+#define TCP_PSH 0x08
+#define TCP_ACK 0x10
+#define TCP_URG 0x20
+#define TCP_CTL 0x3f
+
+#define TCP_OPT_END     0   /* End of TCP options list */
+#define TCP_OPT_NOOP    1   /* "No-operation" TCP option */
+#define TCP_OPT_MSS     2   /* Maximum segment size TCP option */
+
+#define TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN 4   /* Length of TCP MSS option. */
+
+#define ICMP_ECHO_REPLY 0
+#define ICMP_ECHO       8
+
+#define ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE        3
+#define ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE        3
+
+#define ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY             129
+#define ICMP6_ECHO                   128
+#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION  135
+#define ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT 136
+
+#define ICMP6_FLAG_S (1 << 6)
+
+#define ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS 1
+#define ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS 2
+
+
+/* Macros. */
+#define BUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+#define FBUF ((struct uip_tcpip_hdr *)&uip_reassbuf[0])
+#define ICMPBUF ((struct uip_icmpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+#define UDPBUF ((struct uip_udpip_hdr *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN])
+
+
+#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
+struct uip_stats uip_stat;
+#define UIP_STAT(s) s
+#else
+#define UIP_STAT(s)
+#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
+
+#if UIP_LOGGING == 1
+#include <stdio.h>
+void uip_log(char *msg);
+#define UIP_LOG(m) uip_log(m)
+#else
+#define UIP_LOG(m)
+#endif /* UIP_LOGGING == 1 */
+
+#if ! UIP_ARCH_ADD32
+void
+uip_add32(u8_t *op32, u16_t op16)
+{
+  uip_acc32[3] = op32[3] + (op16 & 0xff);
+  uip_acc32[2] = op32[2] + (op16 >> 8);
+  uip_acc32[1] = op32[1];
+  uip_acc32[0] = op32[0];
+
+  if(uip_acc32[2] < (op16 >> 8)) {
+    ++uip_acc32[1];
+    if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
+      ++uip_acc32[0];
+    }
+  }
+
+
+  if(uip_acc32[3] < (op16 & 0xff)) {
+    ++uip_acc32[2];
+    if(uip_acc32[2] == 0) {
+      ++uip_acc32[1];
+      if(uip_acc32[1] == 0) {
+	++uip_acc32[0];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+}
+
+#endif /* UIP_ARCH_ADD32 */
+
+#if ! UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static u16_t
+chksum(u16_t sum, const u8_t *data, u16_t len)
+{
+  u16_t t;
+  const u8_t *dataptr;
+  const u8_t *last_byte;
+
+  dataptr = data;
+  last_byte = data + len - 1;
+
+  while(dataptr < last_byte) {	/* At least two more bytes */
+    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + dataptr[1];
+    sum += t;
+    if(sum < t) {
+      sum++;		/* carry */
+    }
+    dataptr += 2;
+  }
+
+  if(dataptr == last_byte) {
+    t = (dataptr[0] << 8) + 0;
+    sum += t;
+    if(sum < t) {
+      sum++;		/* carry */
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Return sum in host byte order. */
+  return sum;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+uip_chksum(u16_t *data, u16_t len)
+{
+  return htons(chksum(0, (u8_t *)data, len));
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#ifndef UIP_ARCH_IPCHKSUM
+u16_t
+uip_ipchksum(void)
+{
+  u16_t sum;
+
+  sum = chksum(0, &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_IPH_LEN);
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip_ipchksum: sum 0x%04x\n", sum);
+  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
+}
+#endif
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static u16_t
+upper_layer_chksum(u8_t proto)
+{
+  u16_t upper_layer_len;
+  u16_t sum;
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  upper_layer_len = (((u16_t)(BUF->len[0]) << 8) + BUF->len[1]) - UIP_IPH_LEN;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* First sum pseudo-header. */
+
+  /* IP protocol and length fields. This addition cannot carry. */
+  sum = upper_layer_len + proto;
+  /* Sum IP source and destination addresses. */
+  sum = chksum(sum, (u8_t *)&BUF->srcipaddr, 2 * sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+
+  /* Sum TCP header and data. */
+  sum = chksum(sum, &uip_buf[UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN],
+	       upper_layer_len);
+
+  return (sum == 0) ? 0xffff : htons(sum);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+u16_t
+uip_icmp6chksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_ICMP6);
+
+}
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+uip_tcpchksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_TCP);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+u16_t
+uip_udpchksum(void)
+{
+  return upper_layer_chksum(UIP_PROTO_UDP);
+}
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+#endif /* UIP_ARCH_CHKSUM */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_init(void)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    uip_listenports[c] = 0;
+  }
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+  }
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+  lastport = 1024;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    uip_udp_conns[c].lport = 0;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+
+  /* IPv4 initialization. */
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR == 0
+  /*  uip_hostaddr[0] = uip_hostaddr[1] = 0;*/
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+struct uip_conn *
+uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
+{
+  register struct uip_conn *conn, *cconn;
+
+  /* Find an unused local port. */
+ again:
+  ++lastport;
+
+  if(lastport >= 32000) {
+    lastport = 4096;
+  }
+
+  /* Check if this port is already in use, and if so try to find
+     another one. */
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    conn = &uip_conns[c];
+    if(conn->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
+       conn->lport == htons(lastport)) {
+      goto again;
+    }
+  }
+
+  conn = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    cconn = &uip_conns[c];
+    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
+      conn = cconn;
+      break;
+    }
+    if(cconn->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
+      if(conn == 0 ||
+	 cconn->timer > conn->timer) {
+	conn = cconn;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(conn == 0) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+
+  conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_SENT;
+
+  conn->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
+  conn->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
+  conn->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
+  conn->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
+
+  conn->initialmss = conn->mss = UIP_TCP_MSS;
+
+  conn->len = 1;   /* TCP length of the SYN is one. */
+  conn->nrtx = 0;
+  conn->timer = 1; /* Send the SYN next time around. */
+  conn->rto = UIP_RTO;
+  conn->sa = 0;
+  conn->sv = 16;   /* Initial value of the RTT variance. */
+  conn->lport = htons(lastport);
+  conn->rport = rport;
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
+
+  return conn;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if UIP_UDP
+struct uip_udp_conn *
+uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport)
+{
+  register struct uip_udp_conn *conn;
+
+  /* Find an unused local port. */
+ again:
+  ++lastport;
+
+  if(lastport >= 32000) {
+    lastport = 4096;
+  }
+
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == htons(lastport)) {
+      goto again;
+    }
+  }
+
+
+  conn = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_UDP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_udp_conns[c].lport == 0) {
+      conn = &uip_udp_conns[c];
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(conn == 0) {
+    return 0;
+  }
+
+  conn->lport = HTONS(lastport);
+  conn->rport = rport;
+  if(ripaddr == NULL) {
+    memset(&conn->ripaddr, 0, sizeof(uip_ipaddr_t));
+  } else {
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&conn->ripaddr, ripaddr);
+  }
+  conn->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+
+  return conn;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_unlisten(u16_t port)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_listenports[c] == port) {
+      uip_listenports[c] = 0;
+      return;
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_listen(u16_t port)
+{
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_listenports[c] == 0) {
+      uip_listenports[c] = port;
+      return;
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* XXX: IP fragment reassembly: not well-tested. */
+
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN)
+static u8_t uip_reassbuf[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE];
+static u8_t uip_reassbitmap[UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE / (8 * 8)];
+static const u8_t bitmap_bits[8] = {0xff, 0x7f, 0x3f, 0x1f,
+				    0x0f, 0x07, 0x03, 0x01};
+static u16_t uip_reasslen;
+static u8_t uip_reassflags;
+#define UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG 0x01
+static u8_t uip_reasstmr;
+
+#define IP_MF   0x20
+
+static u8_t
+uip_reass(void)
+{
+  u16_t offset, len;
+  u16_t i;
+
+  /* If ip_reasstmr is zero, no packet is present in the buffer, so we
+     write the IP header of the fragment into the reassembly
+     buffer. The timer is updated with the maximum age. */
+  if(uip_reasstmr == 0) {
+    memcpy(uip_reassbuf, &BUF->vhl, UIP_IPH_LEN);
+    uip_reasstmr = UIP_REASS_MAXAGE;
+    uip_reassflags = 0;
+    /* Clear the bitmap. */
+    memset(uip_reassbitmap, 0, sizeof(uip_reassbitmap));
+  }
+
+  /* Check if the incoming fragment matches the one currently present
+     in the reasembly buffer. If so, we proceed with copying the
+     fragment into the buffer. */
+  if(BUF->srcipaddr[0] == FBUF->srcipaddr[0] &&
+     BUF->srcipaddr[1] == FBUF->srcipaddr[1] &&
+     BUF->destipaddr[0] == FBUF->destipaddr[0] &&
+     BUF->destipaddr[1] == FBUF->destipaddr[1] &&
+     BUF->ipid[0] == FBUF->ipid[0] &&
+     BUF->ipid[1] == FBUF->ipid[1]) {
+
+    len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] - (BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4;
+    offset = (((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) << 8) + BUF->ipoffset[1]) * 8;
+
+    /* If the offset or the offset + fragment length overflows the
+       reassembly buffer, we discard the entire packet. */
+    if(offset > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE ||
+       offset + len > UIP_REASS_BUFSIZE) {
+      uip_reasstmr = 0;
+      goto nullreturn;
+    }
+
+    /* Copy the fragment into the reassembly buffer, at the right
+       offset. */
+    memcpy(&uip_reassbuf[UIP_IPH_LEN + offset],
+	   (char *)BUF + (int)((BUF->vhl & 0x0f) * 4),
+	   len);
+
+    /* Update the bitmap. */
+    if(offset / (8 * 8) == (offset + len) / (8 * 8)) {
+      /* If the two endpoints are in the same byte, we only update
+	 that byte. */
+
+      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
+	     bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7] &
+	     ~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
+    } else {
+      /* If the two endpoints are in different bytes, we update the
+	 bytes in the endpoints and fill the stuff in-between with
+	 0xff. */
+      uip_reassbitmap[offset / (8 * 8)] |=
+	bitmap_bits[(offset / 8 ) & 7];
+      for(i = 1 + offset / (8 * 8); i < (offset + len) / (8 * 8); ++i) {
+	uip_reassbitmap[i] = 0xff;
+      }
+      uip_reassbitmap[(offset + len) / (8 * 8)] |=
+	~bitmap_bits[((offset + len) / 8 ) & 7];
+    }
+
+    /* If this fragment has the More Fragments flag set to zero, we
+       know that this is the last fragment, so we can calculate the
+       size of the entire packet. We also set the
+       IP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG flag to indicate that we have received
+       the final fragment. */
+
+    if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & IP_MF) == 0) {
+      uip_reassflags |= UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG;
+      uip_reasslen = offset + len;
+    }
+
+    /* Finally, we check if we have a full packet in the buffer. We do
+       this by checking if we have the last fragment and if all bits
+       in the bitmap are set. */
+    if(uip_reassflags & UIP_REASS_FLAG_LASTFRAG) {
+      /* Check all bytes up to and including all but the last byte in
+	 the bitmap. */
+      for(i = 0; i < uip_reasslen / (8 * 8) - 1; ++i) {
+	if(uip_reassbitmap[i] != 0xff) {
+	  goto nullreturn;
+	}
+      }
+      /* Check the last byte in the bitmap. It should contain just the
+	 right amount of bits. */
+      if(uip_reassbitmap[uip_reasslen / (8 * 8)] !=
+	 (u8_t)~bitmap_bits[uip_reasslen / 8 & 7]) {
+	goto nullreturn;
+      }
+
+      /* If we have come this far, we have a full packet in the
+	 buffer, so we allocate a pbuf and copy the packet into it. We
+	 also reset the timer. */
+      uip_reasstmr = 0;
+      memcpy(BUF, FBUF, uip_reasslen);
+
+      /* Pretend to be a "normal" (i.e., not fragmented) IP packet
+	 from now on. */
+      BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
+      BUF->len[0] = uip_reasslen >> 8;
+      BUF->len[1] = uip_reasslen & 0xff;
+      BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+      BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+
+      return uip_reasslen;
+    }
+  }
+
+ nullreturn:
+  return 0;
+}
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static void
+uip_add_rcv_nxt(u16_t n)
+{
+  uip_add32(uip_conn->rcv_nxt, n);
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+  uip_conn->rcv_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_process(u8_t flag)
+{
+  register struct uip_conn *uip_connr = uip_conn;
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(flag == UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN) {
+    goto udp_send;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
+
+  /* Check if we were invoked because of a poll request for a
+     particular connection. */
+  if(flag == UIP_POLL_REQUEST) {
+    if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED &&
+       !uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+	UIP_APPCALL();
+	goto appsend;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+
+    /* Check if we were invoked because of the periodic timer firing. */
+  } else if(flag == UIP_TIMER) {
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
+    if(uip_reasstmr != 0) {
+      --uip_reasstmr;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+    /* Increase the initial sequence number. */
+    if(++iss[3] == 0) {
+      if(++iss[2] == 0) {
+	if(++iss[1] == 0) {
+	  ++iss[0];
+	}
+      }
+    }
+
+    /* Reset the length variables. */
+    uip_len = 0;
+    uip_slen = 0;
+
+    /* Check if the connection is in a state in which we simply wait
+       for the connection to time out. If so, we increase the
+       connection's timer and remove the connection if it times
+       out. */
+    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT ||
+       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_FIN_WAIT_2) {
+      ++(uip_connr->timer);
+      if(uip_connr->timer == UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT) {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+      }
+    } else if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED) {
+      /* If the connection has outstanding data, we increase the
+	 connection's timer and see if it has reached the RTO value
+	 in which case we retransmit. */
+      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	if(uip_connr->timer-- == 0) {
+	  if(uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXRTX ||
+	     ((uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_SENT ||
+	       uip_connr->tcpstateflags == UIP_SYN_RCVD) &&
+	      uip_connr->nrtx == UIP_MAXSYNRTX)) {
+	    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+
+	    /* We call UIP_APPCALL() with uip_flags set to
+	       UIP_TIMEDOUT to inform the application that the
+	       connection has timed out. */
+	    uip_flags = UIP_TIMEDOUT;
+	    UIP_APPCALL();
+
+	    /* We also send a reset packet to the remote host. */
+	    BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+	    goto tcp_send_nodata;
+	  }
+
+	  /* Exponential back-off. */
+	  uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO << (uip_connr->nrtx > 4?
+					 4:
+					 uip_connr->nrtx);
+	  ++(uip_connr->nrtx);
+
+	  /* Ok, so we need to retransmit. We do this differently
+	     depending on which state we are in. In ESTABLISHED, we
+	     call upon the application so that it may prepare the
+	     data for the retransmit. In SYN_RCVD, we resend the
+	     SYNACK that we sent earlier and in LAST_ACK we have to
+	     retransmit our FINACK. */
+	  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rexmit);
+	  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
+	  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
+	    /* In the SYN_RCVD state, we should retransmit our
+               SYNACK. */
+	    goto tcp_send_synack;
+
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+	  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
+	    /* In the SYN_SENT state, we retransmit out SYN. */
+	    BUF->flags = 0;
+	    goto tcp_send_syn;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+	  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
+	    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application
+               to do the actual retransmit after which we jump into
+               the code for sending out the packet (the apprexmit
+               label). */
+	    uip_flags = UIP_REXMIT;
+	    UIP_APPCALL();
+	    goto apprexmit;
+
+	  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
+	  case UIP_CLOSING:
+	  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
+	    /* In all these states we should retransmit a FINACK. */
+	    goto tcp_send_finack;
+
+	  }
+	}
+      } else if((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_ESTABLISHED) {
+	/* If there was no need for a retransmission, we poll the
+           application for new data. */
+	uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+	UIP_APPCALL();
+	goto appsend;
+      }
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(flag == UIP_UDP_TIMER) {
+    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0) {
+      uip_conn = NULL;
+      uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+      uip_len = uip_slen = 0;
+      uip_flags = UIP_POLL;
+      UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
+      goto udp_send;
+    } else {
+      goto drop;
+    }
+  }
+#endif
+
+  /* This is where the input processing starts. */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.recv);
+
+  /* Start of IP input header processing code. */
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
+  if((BUF->vtc & 0xf0) != 0x60)  { /* IP version and header length. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ipv6: invalid version.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* Check validity of the IP header. */
+  if(BUF->vhl != 0x45)  { /* IP version and header length. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.vhlerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: invalid version or header length.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* Check the size of the packet. If the size reported to us in
+     uip_len is smaller the size reported in the IP header, we assume
+     that the packet has been corrupted in transit. If the size of
+     uip_len is larger than the size reported in the IP packet header,
+     the packet has been padded and we set uip_len to the correct
+     value.. */
+
+  if((BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1] <= uip_len) {
+    uip_len = (BUF->len[0] << 8) + BUF->len[1];
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    uip_len += 40; /* The length reported in the IPv6 header is the
+		      length of the payload that follows the
+		      header. However, uIP uses the uip_len variable
+		      for holding the size of the entire packet,
+		      including the IP header. For IPv4 this is not a
+		      problem as the length field in the IPv4 header
+		      contains the length of the entire packet. But
+		      for IPv6 we need to add the size of the IPv6
+		      header (40 bytes). */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  } else {
+    UIP_LOG("ip: packet shorter than reported in IP header.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Check the fragment flag. */
+  if((BUF->ipoffset[0] & 0x3f) != 0 ||
+     BUF->ipoffset[1] != 0) {
+#if UIP_REASSEMBLY
+    uip_len = uip_reass();
+    if(uip_len == 0) {
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#else /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.fragerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: fragment dropped.");
+    goto drop;
+#endif /* UIP_REASSEMBLY */
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+    /* If we are configured to use ping IP address configuration and
+       hasn't been assigned an IP address yet, we accept all ICMP
+       packets. */
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_ICMP) {
+      UIP_LOG("ip: possible ping config packet received.");
+      goto icmp_input;
+    } else {
+      UIP_LOG("ip: packet dropped since no address assigned.");
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+  } else {
+    /* If IP broadcast support is configured, we check for a broadcast
+       UDP packet, which may be destined to us. */
+#if UIP_BROADCAST
+    DEBUG_PRINTF("UDP IP checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
+    if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP &&
+       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr))
+	{
+		if (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr))
+		  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr);
+
+		goto udp_input;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_BROADCAST */
+
+    /* Check if the packet is destined for our IP address. */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+    /* For IPv6, packet reception is a little trickier as we need to
+       make sure that we listen to certain multicast addresses (all
+       hosts multicast address, and the solicited-node multicast
+       address) as well. However, we will cheat here and accept all
+       multicast packets that are sent to the ff02::/16 addresses. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr) &&
+       BUF->destipaddr.u16[0] != HTONS(0xff02)) {
+      UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+      goto drop;
+    }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  }
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  if(uip_ipchksum() != 0xffff) { /* Compute and check the IP header
+				    checksum. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_TCP) { /* Check for TCP packet. If so,
+				       proceed with TCP input
+				       processing. */
+    goto tcp_input;
+  }
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  if(BUF->proto == UIP_PROTO_UDP) {
+    goto udp_input;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* ICMPv4 processing code follows. */
+  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP) { /* We only allow ICMP packets from
+					here. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
+ icmp_input:
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
+
+  /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only change
+     the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and adjust the ICMP
+     checksum before we return the packet. */
+  if(ICMPBUF->type != ICMP_ECHO) {
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
+    UIP_LOG("icmp: not icmp echo.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* If we are configured to use ping IP address assignment, we use
+     the destination IP address of this ping packet and assign it to
+     yourself. */
+#if UIP_PINGADDRCONF
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_hostaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+    uip_hostaddr = BUF->destipaddr;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_ECHO_REPLY;
+
+  if(ICMPBUF->icmpchksum >= HTONS(0xffff - (ICMP_ECHO << 8))) {
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8) + 1;
+  } else {
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum += HTONS(ICMP_ECHO << 8);
+  }
+
+  /* Swap IP addresses. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
+  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+
+  /* End of IPv4 input header processing code. */
+#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* This is IPv6 ICMPv6 processing code. */
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("icmp6_input: length %d\n", uip_len);
+
+  if(BUF->proto != UIP_PROTO_ICMP6) { /* We only allow ICMPv6 packets from
+					 here. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.protoerr);
+    UIP_LOG("ip: neither tcp nor icmp6.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.recv);
+
+  /* If we get a neighbor solicitation for our address we should send
+     a neighbor advertisement message back. */
+  if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_SOLICITATION) {
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ICMPBUF->icmp6data, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+
+      if(ICMPBUF->options[0] == ICMP6_OPTION_SOURCE_LINK_ADDRESS) {
+	/* Save the sender's address in our neighbor list. */
+	uip_neighbor_add(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &(ICMPBUF->options[2]));
+      }
+
+      /* We should now send a neighbor advertisement back to where the
+	 neighbor solicitation came from. */
+      ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_NEIGHBOR_ADVERTISEMENT;
+      ICMPBUF->flags = ICMP6_FLAG_S; /* Solicited flag. */
+
+      ICMPBUF->reserved1 = ICMPBUF->reserved2 = ICMPBUF->reserved3 = 0;
+
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->destipaddr, &ICMPBUF->srcipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ICMPBUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+      ICMPBUF->options[0] = ICMP6_OPTION_TARGET_LINK_ADDRESS;
+      ICMPBUF->options[1] = 1;  /* Options length, 1 = 8 bytes. */
+      memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->options[2]), &uip_ethaddr, sizeof(uip_ethaddr));
+      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+      ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
+
+      goto send;
+
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  } else if(ICMPBUF->type == ICMP6_ECHO) {
+    /* ICMP echo (i.e., ping) processing. This is simple, we only
+       change the ICMP type from ECHO to ECHO_REPLY and update the
+       ICMP checksum before we return the packet. */
+
+    ICMPBUF->type = ICMP6_ECHO_REPLY;
+
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+    uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+    ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_icmp6chksum();
+
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.sent);
+    goto send;
+  } else {
+    DEBUG_PRINTF("Unknown icmp6 message type %d\n", ICMPBUF->type);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.icmp.typeerr);
+    UIP_LOG("icmp: unknown ICMP message.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* End of IPv6 ICMP processing. */
+
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+  /* UDP input processing. */
+ udp_input:
+  /* UDP processing is really just a hack. We don't do anything to the
+     UDP/IP headers, but let the UDP application do all the hard
+     work. If the application sets uip_slen, it has a packet to
+     send. */
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum != 0 && uip_udpchksum() != 0xffff) {
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.udp.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("udp: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+#else /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+  uip_len = uip_len - UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+
+  /* Demultiplex this UDP packet between the UDP "connections". */
+  for(uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[0];
+      uip_udp_conn < &uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+      ++uip_udp_conn) {
+    /* If the local UDP port is non-zero, the connection is considered
+       to be used. If so, the local port number is checked against the
+       destination port number in the received packet. If the two port
+       numbers match, the remote port number is checked if the
+       connection is bound to a remote port. Finally, if the
+       connection is bound to a remote IP address, the source IP
+       address of the packet is checked. */
+    if(uip_udp_conn->lport != 0 &&
+       UDPBUF->destport == uip_udp_conn->lport &&
+       (uip_udp_conn->rport == 0 ||
+        UDPBUF->srcport == uip_udp_conn->rport) &&
+       (uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) ||
+	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&uip_udp_conn->ripaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr) ||
+	uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr))) {
+      goto udp_found;
+    }
+  }
+  UIP_LOG("udp: no matching connection found");
+#if UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH && !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* Copy fields from packet header into payload of this ICMP packet. */
+  memcpy(&(ICMPBUF->payload[0]), ICMPBUF, UIP_IPH_LEN + 8);
+
+  /* Set the ICMP type and code. */
+  ICMPBUF->type = ICMP_DEST_UNREACHABLE;
+  ICMPBUF->icode = ICMP_PORT_UNREACHABLE;
+
+  /* Calculate the ICMP checksum. */
+  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = 0;
+  ICMPBUF->icmpchksum = ~uip_chksum((u16_t *)&(ICMPBUF->type), 36);
+
+  /* Set the IP destination address to be the source address of the
+     original packet. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+
+  /* Set our IP address as the source address. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  /* The size of the ICMP destination unreachable packet is 36 + the
+     size of the IP header (20) = 56. */
+  uip_len = 36 + UIP_IPH_LEN;
+  ICMPBUF->len[0] = 0;
+  ICMPBUF->len[1] = (u8_t)uip_len;
+  ICMPBUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+  ICMPBUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_ICMP;
+
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
+  goto drop;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_ICMP_DEST_UNREACH */
+
+ udp_found:
+  uip_conn = NULL;
+  uip_flags = UIP_NEWDATA;
+  uip_sappdata = uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN];
+  uip_slen = 0;
+  UIP_UDP_APPCALL();
+
+ udp_send:
+  if(uip_slen == 0) {
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  uip_len = uip_slen + UIP_IPUDPH_LEN;
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+     length. */
+  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  BUF->ttl = uip_udp_conn->ttl;
+  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_UDP;
+
+  UDPBUF->udplen = HTONS(uip_slen + UIP_UDPH_LEN);
+  UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0;
+
+  BUF->srcport  = uip_udp_conn->lport;
+  BUF->destport = uip_udp_conn->rport;
+
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_udp_conn->ripaddr);
+
+  uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPTCPH_LEN];
+
+#if UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+  /* Calculate UDP checksum. */
+  UDPBUF->udpchksum = ~(uip_udpchksum());
+  if(UDPBUF->udpchksum == 0) {
+    UDPBUF->udpchksum = 0xffff;
+  }
+#endif /* UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS */
+
+  goto ip_send_nolen;
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+  /* TCP input processing. */
+ tcp_input:
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.recv);
+
+  /* Start of TCP input header processing code. */
+
+  if(uip_tcpchksum() != 0xffff) {   /* Compute and check the TCP
+				       checksum. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.drop);
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.chkerr);
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: bad checksum.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  /* Demultiplex this segment. */
+  /* First check any active connections. */
+  for(uip_connr = &uip_conns[0]; uip_connr <= &uip_conns[UIP_CONNS - 1];
+      ++uip_connr) {
+    if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED &&
+       BUF->destport == uip_connr->lport &&
+       BUF->srcport == uip_connr->rport &&
+       uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr)) {
+      goto found;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If we didn't find and active connection that expected the packet,
+     either this packet is an old duplicate, or this is a SYN packet
+     destined for a connection in LISTEN. If the SYN flag isn't set,
+     it is an old packet and we send a RST. */
+  if((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) != TCP_SYN) {
+    goto reset;
+  }
+
+  tmp16 = BUF->destport;
+  /* Next, check listening connections. */
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_LISTENPORTS; ++c) {
+    if(tmp16 == uip_listenports[c]) {
+      goto found_listen;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* No matching connection found, so we send a RST packet. */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.synrst);
+
+ reset:
+  /* We do not send resets in response to resets. */
+  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
+    goto drop;
+  }
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.rst);
+
+  BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
+  BUF->tcpoffset = 5 << 4;
+
+  /* Flip the seqno and ackno fields in the TCP header. */
+  c = BUF->seqno[3];
+  BUF->seqno[3] = BUF->ackno[3];
+  BUF->ackno[3] = c;
+
+  c = BUF->seqno[2];
+  BUF->seqno[2] = BUF->ackno[2];
+  BUF->ackno[2] = c;
+
+  c = BUF->seqno[1];
+  BUF->seqno[1] = BUF->ackno[1];
+  BUF->ackno[1] = c;
+
+  c = BUF->seqno[0];
+  BUF->seqno[0] = BUF->ackno[0];
+  BUF->ackno[0] = c;
+
+  /* We also have to increase the sequence number we are
+     acknowledging. If the least significant byte overflowed, we need
+     to propagate the carry to the other bytes as well. */
+  if(++BUF->ackno[3] == 0) {
+    if(++BUF->ackno[2] == 0) {
+      if(++BUF->ackno[1] == 0) {
+	++BUF->ackno[0];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Swap port numbers. */
+  tmp16 = BUF->srcport;
+  BUF->srcport = BUF->destport;
+  BUF->destport = tmp16;
+
+  /* Swap IP addresses. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+  /* And send out the RST packet! */
+  goto tcp_send_noconn;
+
+  /* This label will be jumped to if we matched the incoming packet
+     with a connection in LISTEN. In that case, we should create a new
+     connection and send a SYNACK in return. */
+ found_listen:
+  /* First we check if there are any connections available. Unused
+     connections are kept in the same table as used connections, but
+     unused ones have the tcpstate set to CLOSED. Also, connections in
+     TIME_WAIT are kept track of and we'll use the oldest one if no
+     CLOSED connections are found. Thanks to Eddie C. Dost for a very
+     nice algorithm for the TIME_WAIT search. */
+  uip_connr = 0;
+  for(c = 0; c < UIP_CONNS; ++c) {
+    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_CLOSED) {
+      uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
+      break;
+    }
+    if(uip_conns[c].tcpstateflags == UIP_TIME_WAIT) {
+      if(uip_connr == 0 ||
+	 uip_conns[c].timer > uip_connr->timer) {
+	uip_connr = &uip_conns[c];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  if(uip_connr == 0) {
+    /* All connections are used already, we drop packet and hope that
+       the remote end will retransmit the packet at a time when we
+       have more spare connections. */
+    UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.syndrop);
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: found no unused connections.");
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  uip_conn = uip_connr;
+
+  /* Fill in the necessary fields for the new connection. */
+  uip_connr->rto = uip_connr->timer = UIP_RTO;
+  uip_connr->sa = 0;
+  uip_connr->sv = 4;
+  uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+  uip_connr->lport = BUF->destport;
+  uip_connr->rport = BUF->srcport;
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_connr->ripaddr, &BUF->srcipaddr);
+  uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_SYN_RCVD;
+
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = iss[0];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = iss[1];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = iss[2];
+  uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = iss[3];
+  uip_connr->len = 1;
+
+  /* rcv_nxt should be the seqno from the incoming packet + 1. */
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
+  uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
+  uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+
+  /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
+  if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
+    for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
+      opt = uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
+      if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
+	/* End of options. */
+	break;
+      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
+	++c;
+	/* NOP option. */
+      } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
+		uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
+	/* An MSS option with the right option length. */
+	tmp16 = ((u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
+	  (u16_t)uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
+	uip_connr->initialmss = uip_connr->mss =
+	  tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
+
+	/* And we are done processing options. */
+	break;
+      } else {
+	/* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
+	   can skip past them. */
+	if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
+	  /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
+	     and we don't process them further. */
+	  break;
+	}
+	c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Our response will be a SYNACK. */
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+ tcp_send_synack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+
+ tcp_send_syn:
+  BUF->flags |= TCP_SYN;
+#else /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+ tcp_send_synack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+  /* We send out the TCP Maximum Segment Size option with our
+     SYNACK. */
+  BUF->optdata[0] = TCP_OPT_MSS;
+  BUF->optdata[1] = TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
+  BUF->optdata[2] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) / 256;
+  BUF->optdata[3] = (UIP_TCP_MSS) & 255;
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN;
+  BUF->tcpoffset = ((UIP_TCPH_LEN + TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) / 4) << 4;
+  goto tcp_send;
+
+  /* This label will be jumped to if we found an active connection. */
+ found:
+  uip_conn = uip_connr;
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  /* We do a very naive form of TCP reset processing; we just accept
+     any RST and kill our connection. We should in fact check if the
+     sequence number of this reset is within our advertised window
+     before we accept the reset. */
+  if(BUF->flags & TCP_RST) {
+    uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+    UIP_LOG("tcp: got reset, aborting connection.");
+    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
+    UIP_APPCALL();
+    goto drop;
+  }
+  /* Calculate the length of the data, if the application has sent
+     any data to us. */
+  c = (BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) << 2;
+  /* uip_len will contain the length of the actual TCP data. This is
+     calculated by subtracing the length of the TCP header (in
+     c) and the length of the IP header (20 bytes). */
+  uip_len = uip_len - c - UIP_IPH_LEN;
+
+  /* First, check if the sequence number of the incoming packet is
+     what we're expecting next. If not, we send out an ACK with the
+     correct numbers in. */
+  if(!(((uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) == UIP_SYN_SENT) &&
+       ((BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)))) {
+    if((uip_len > 0 || ((BUF->flags & (TCP_SYN | TCP_FIN)) != 0)) &&
+       (BUF->seqno[0] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] ||
+	BUF->seqno[1] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] ||
+	BUF->seqno[2] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] ||
+	BUF->seqno[3] != uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3])) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* Next, check if the incoming segment acknowledges any outstanding
+     data. If so, we update the sequence number, reset the length of
+     the outstanding data, calculate RTT estimations, and reset the
+     retransmission timer. */
+  if((BUF->flags & TCP_ACK) && uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+    uip_add32(uip_connr->snd_nxt, uip_connr->len);
+
+    if(BUF->ackno[0] == uip_acc32[0] &&
+       BUF->ackno[1] == uip_acc32[1] &&
+       BUF->ackno[2] == uip_acc32[2] &&
+       BUF->ackno[3] == uip_acc32[3]) {
+      /* Update sequence number. */
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[0] = uip_acc32[0];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[1] = uip_acc32[1];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[2] = uip_acc32[2];
+      uip_connr->snd_nxt[3] = uip_acc32[3];
+
+      /* Do RTT estimation, unless we have done retransmissions. */
+      if(uip_connr->nrtx == 0) {
+	signed char m;
+	m = uip_connr->rto - uip_connr->timer;
+	/* This is taken directly from VJs original code in his paper */
+	m = m - (uip_connr->sa >> 3);
+	uip_connr->sa += m;
+	if(m < 0) {
+	  m = -m;
+	}
+	m = m - (uip_connr->sv >> 2);
+	uip_connr->sv += m;
+	uip_connr->rto = (uip_connr->sa >> 3) + uip_connr->sv;
+
+      }
+      /* Set the acknowledged flag. */
+      uip_flags = UIP_ACKDATA;
+      /* Reset the retransmission timer. */
+      uip_connr->timer = uip_connr->rto;
+
+      /* Reset length of outstanding data. */
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+    }
+
+  }
+
+  /* Do different things depending on in what state the connection is. */
+  switch(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_TS_MASK) {
+    /* CLOSED and LISTEN are not handled here. CLOSE_WAIT is not
+	implemented, since we force the application to close when the
+	peer sends a FIN (hence the application goes directly from
+	ESTABLISHED to LAST_ACK). */
+  case UIP_SYN_RCVD:
+    /* In SYN_RCVD we have sent out a SYNACK in response to a SYN, and
+       we are waiting for an ACK that acknowledges the data we sent
+       out the last time. Therefore, we want to have the UIP_ACKDATA
+       flag set. If so, we enter the ESTABLISHED state. */
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
+      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      if(uip_len > 0) {
+        uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+        uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+      }
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto appsend;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+#if UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN
+  case UIP_SYN_SENT:
+    /* In SYN_SENT, we wait for a SYNACK that is sent in response to
+       our SYN. The rcv_nxt is set to sequence number in the SYNACK
+       plus one, and we send an ACK. We move into the ESTABLISHED
+       state. */
+    if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) &&
+       (BUF->flags & TCP_CTL) == (TCP_SYN | TCP_ACK)) {
+
+      /* Parse the TCP MSS option, if present. */
+      if((BUF->tcpoffset & 0xf0) > 0x50) {
+	for(c = 0; c < ((BUF->tcpoffset >> 4) - 5) << 2 ;) {
+	  opt = uip_buf[UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + c];
+	  if(opt == TCP_OPT_END) {
+	    /* End of options. */
+	    break;
+	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_NOOP) {
+	    ++c;
+	    /* NOP option. */
+	  } else if(opt == TCP_OPT_MSS &&
+		    uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == TCP_OPT_MSS_LEN) {
+	    /* An MSS option with the right option length. */
+	    tmp16 = (uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 2 + c] << 8) |
+	      uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 3 + c];
+	    uip_connr->initialmss =
+	      uip_connr->mss = tmp16 > UIP_TCP_MSS? UIP_TCP_MSS: tmp16;
+
+	    /* And we are done processing options. */
+	    break;
+	  } else {
+	    /* All other options have a length field, so that we easily
+	       can skip past them. */
+	    if(uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c] == 0) {
+	      /* If the length field is zero, the options are malformed
+		 and we don't process them further. */
+	      break;
+	    }
+	    c += uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN + 1 + c];
+	  }
+	}
+      }
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_ESTABLISHED;
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0] = BUF->seqno[0];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1] = BUF->seqno[1];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2] = BUF->seqno[2];
+      uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3] = BUF->seqno[3];
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CONNECTED | UIP_NEWDATA;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      uip_len = 0;
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto appsend;
+    }
+    /* Inform the application that the connection failed */
+    uip_flags = UIP_ABORT;
+    UIP_APPCALL();
+    /* The connection is closed after we send the RST */
+    uip_conn->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+    goto reset;
+#endif /* UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+  case UIP_ESTABLISHED:
+    /* In the ESTABLISHED state, we call upon the application to feed
+    data into the uip_buf. If the UIP_ACKDATA flag is set, the
+    application should put new data into the buffer, otherwise we are
+    retransmitting an old segment, and the application should put that
+    data into the buffer.
+
+    If the incoming packet is a FIN, we should close the connection on
+    this side as well, and we send out a FIN and enter the LAST_ACK
+    state. We require that there is no outstanding data; otherwise the
+    sequence numbers will be screwed up. */
+
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
+      if(uip_outstanding(uip_connr)) {
+	goto drop;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1 + uip_len);
+      uip_flags |= UIP_CLOSE;
+      if(uip_len > 0) {
+	uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+      }
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      uip_connr->len = 1;
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_LAST_ACK;
+      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+    tcp_send_finack:
+      BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
+      goto tcp_send_nodata;
+    }
+
+    /* Check the URG flag. If this is set, the segment carries urgent
+       data that we must pass to the application. */
+    if((BUF->flags & TCP_URG) != 0) {
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+      uip_urglen = (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
+      if(uip_urglen > uip_len) {
+	/* There is more urgent data in the next segment to come. */
+	uip_urglen = uip_len;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_urglen);
+      uip_len -= uip_urglen;
+      uip_urgdata = uip_appdata;
+      uip_appdata += uip_urglen;
+    } else {
+      uip_urglen = 0;
+#else /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+      uip_appdata = ((char *)uip_appdata) + ((BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1]);
+      uip_len -= (BUF->urgp[0] << 8) | BUF->urgp[1];
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+    }
+
+    /* If uip_len > 0 we have TCP data in the packet, and we flag this
+       by setting the UIP_NEWDATA flag and update the sequence number
+       we acknowledge. If the application has stopped the dataflow
+       using uip_stop(), we must not accept any data packets from the
+       remote host. */
+    if(uip_len > 0 && !(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)) {
+      uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+
+    /* Check if the available buffer space advertised by the other end
+       is smaller than the initial MSS for this connection. If so, we
+       set the current MSS to the window size to ensure that the
+       application does not send more data than the other end can
+       handle.
+
+       If the remote host advertises a zero window, we set the MSS to
+       the initial MSS so that the application will send an entire MSS
+       of data. This data will not be acknowledged by the receiver,
+       and the application will retransmit it. This is called the
+       "persistent timer" and uses the retransmission mechanism.
+    */
+    tmp16 = ((u16_t)BUF->wnd[0] << 8) + (u16_t)BUF->wnd[1];
+    if(tmp16 > uip_connr->initialmss ||
+       tmp16 == 0) {
+      tmp16 = uip_connr->initialmss;
+    }
+    uip_connr->mss = tmp16;
+
+    /* If this packet constitutes an ACK for outstanding data (flagged
+       by the UIP_ACKDATA flag, we should call the application since it
+       might want to send more data. If the incoming packet had data
+       from the peer (as flagged by the UIP_NEWDATA flag), the
+       application must also be notified.
+
+       When the application is called, the global variable uip_len
+       contains the length of the incoming data. The application can
+       access the incoming data through the global pointer
+       uip_appdata, which usually points UIP_IPTCPH_LEN + UIP_LLH_LEN
+       bytes into the uip_buf array.
+
+       If the application wishes to send any data, this data should be
+       put into the uip_appdata and the length of the data should be
+       put into uip_len. If the application don't have any data to
+       send, uip_len must be set to 0. */
+    if(uip_flags & (UIP_NEWDATA | UIP_ACKDATA)) {
+      uip_slen = 0;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+
+    appsend:
+
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_ABORT) {
+	uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_RST | TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_nodata;
+      }
+
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE) {
+	uip_slen = 0;
+	uip_connr->len = 1;
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_1;
+	uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_FIN | TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_nodata;
+      }
+
+      /* If uip_slen > 0, the application has data to be sent. */
+      if(uip_slen > 0) {
+
+	/* If the connection has acknowledged data, the contents of
+	   the ->len variable should be discarded. */
+	if((uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) != 0) {
+	  uip_connr->len = 0;
+	}
+
+	/* If the ->len variable is non-zero the connection has
+	   already data in transit and cannot send anymore right
+	   now. */
+	if(uip_connr->len == 0) {
+
+	  /* The application cannot send more than what is allowed by
+	     the mss (the minumum of the MSS and the available
+	     window). */
+	  if(uip_slen > uip_connr->mss) {
+	    uip_slen = uip_connr->mss;
+	  }
+
+	  /* Remember how much data we send out now so that we know
+	     when everything has been acknowledged. */
+	  uip_connr->len = uip_slen;
+	} else {
+
+	  /* If the application already had unacknowledged data, we
+	     make sure that the application does not send (i.e.,
+	     retransmit) out more than it previously sent out. */
+	  uip_slen = uip_connr->len;
+	}
+      }
+      uip_connr->nrtx = 0;
+    apprexmit:
+      uip_appdata = uip_sappdata;
+
+      /* If the application has data to be sent, or if the incoming
+         packet had new data in it, we must send out a packet. */
+      if(uip_slen > 0 && uip_connr->len > 0) {
+	/* Add the length of the IP and TCP headers. */
+	uip_len = uip_connr->len + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
+	/* We always set the ACK flag in response packets. */
+	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK | TCP_PSH;
+	/* Send the packet. */
+	goto tcp_send_noopts;
+      }
+      /* If there is no data to send, just send out a pure ACK if
+	 there is newdata. */
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA) {
+	uip_len = UIP_TCPIP_HLEN;
+	BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+	goto tcp_send_noopts;
+      }
+    }
+    goto drop;
+  case UIP_LAST_ACK:
+    /* We can close this connection if the peer has acknowledged our
+       FIN. This is indicated by the UIP_ACKDATA flag. */
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSED;
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+    }
+    break;
+
+  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_1:
+    /* The application has closed the connection, but the remote host
+       hasn't closed its end yet. Thus we do nothing but wait for a
+       FIN from the other side. */
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
+      if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+	uip_connr->timer = 0;
+	uip_connr->len = 0;
+      } else {
+	uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_CLOSING;
+      }
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    } else if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_FIN_WAIT_2;
+      uip_connr->len = 0;
+      goto drop;
+    }
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+
+  case UIP_FIN_WAIT_2:
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(uip_len);
+    }
+    if(BUF->flags & TCP_FIN) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+      uip_connr->timer = 0;
+      uip_add_rcv_nxt(1);
+      uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE;
+      UIP_APPCALL();
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    if(uip_len > 0) {
+      goto tcp_send_ack;
+    }
+    goto drop;
+
+  case UIP_TIME_WAIT:
+    goto tcp_send_ack;
+
+  case UIP_CLOSING:
+    if(uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA) {
+      uip_connr->tcpstateflags = UIP_TIME_WAIT;
+      uip_connr->timer = 0;
+    }
+  }
+  goto drop;
+
+  /* We jump here when we are ready to send the packet, and just want
+     to set the appropriate TCP sequence numbers in the TCP header. */
+ tcp_send_ack:
+  BUF->flags = TCP_ACK;
+
+ tcp_send_nodata:
+  uip_len = UIP_IPTCPH_LEN;
+
+ tcp_send_noopts:
+  BUF->tcpoffset = (UIP_TCPH_LEN / 4) << 4;
+
+  /* We're done with the input processing. We are now ready to send a
+     reply. Our job is to fill in all the fields of the TCP and IP
+     headers before calculating the checksum and finally send the
+     packet. */
+ tcp_send:
+  BUF->ackno[0] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[0];
+  BUF->ackno[1] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[1];
+  BUF->ackno[2] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[2];
+  BUF->ackno[3] = uip_connr->rcv_nxt[3];
+
+  BUF->seqno[0] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[0];
+  BUF->seqno[1] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[1];
+  BUF->seqno[2] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[2];
+  BUF->seqno[3] = uip_connr->snd_nxt[3];
+
+  BUF->proto = UIP_PROTO_TCP;
+
+  BUF->srcport  = uip_connr->lport;
+  BUF->destport = uip_connr->rport;
+
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->srcipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->destipaddr, &uip_connr->ripaddr);
+
+  if(uip_connr->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED) {
+    /* If the connection has issued uip_stop(), we advertise a zero
+       window so that the remote host will stop sending data. */
+    BUF->wnd[0] = BUF->wnd[1] = 0;
+  } else {
+    BUF->wnd[0] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) >> 8);
+    BUF->wnd[1] = ((UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW) & 0xff);
+  }
+
+ tcp_send_noconn:
+  BUF->ttl = UIP_TTL;
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* For IPv6, the IP length field does not include the IPv6 IP header
+     length. */
+  BUF->len[0] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = ((uip_len - UIP_IPH_LEN) & 0xff);
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->len[0] = (uip_len >> 8);
+  BUF->len[1] = (uip_len & 0xff);
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  BUF->urgp[0] = BUF->urgp[1] = 0;
+
+  /* Calculate TCP checksum. */
+  BUF->tcpchksum = 0;
+  BUF->tcpchksum = ~(uip_tcpchksum());
+
+ ip_send_nolen:
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  BUF->vtc = 0x60;
+  BUF->tcflow = 0x00;
+  BUF->flow = 0x00;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  BUF->vhl = 0x45;
+  BUF->tos = 0;
+  BUF->ipoffset[0] = BUF->ipoffset[1] = 0;
+  ++ipid;
+  BUF->ipid[0] = ipid >> 8;
+  BUF->ipid[1] = ipid & 0xff;
+  /* Calculate IP checksum. */
+  BUF->ipchksum = 0;
+  BUF->ipchksum = ~(uip_ipchksum());
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("uip ip_send_nolen: checksum 0x%04x\n", uip_ipchksum());
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.tcp.sent);
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+ send:
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  DEBUG_PRINTF("Sending packet with length %d (%d)\n", uip_len,
+	       (BUF->len[0] << 8) | BUF->len[1]);
+
+  UIP_STAT(++uip_stat.ip.sent);
+  /* Return and let the caller do the actual transmission. */
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  return;
+
+ drop:
+  uip_len = 0;
+  uip_flags = 0;
+  return;
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+u16_t
+htons(u16_t val)
+{
+  return HTONS(val);
+}
+
+u32_t
+htonl(u32_t val)
+{
+  return HTONL(val);
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_send(const void *data, int len)
+{
+  int copylen;
+#define MIN(a,b) ((a) < (b)? (a): (b))
+  copylen = MIN(len, UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN -
+		(int)((char *)uip_sappdata - (char *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]));
+  if(copylen > 0) {
+    uip_slen = copylen;
+    if(data != uip_sappdata) {
+      memcpy(uip_sappdata, (data), uip_slen);
+    }
+  }
+}
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/** @} */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7b87a2c77c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip.h
@@ -0,0 +1,2130 @@
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Header file for the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ * \author  Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ * \author  Julien Abeille <jabeille@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
+ * \author  Mathilde Durvy <mdurvy@cisco.com> (IPv6 related code)
+ *
+ * The uIP TCP/IP stack header file contains definitions for a number
+ * of C macros that are used by uIP programs as well as internal uIP
+ * structures, TCP/IP header structures and function declarations.
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip.h,v 1.24 2009/04/06 13:18:50 nvt-se Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_H__
+#define __UIP_H__
+
+#include "uipopt.h"
+
+/**
+ * Representation of an IP address.
+ *
+ */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+typedef union uip_ip6addr_t {
+  u8_t  u8[16];			/* Initialiser, must come first!!! */
+  u16_t u16[8];
+} uip_ip6addr_t;
+
+typedef uip_ip6addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+typedef union uip_ip4addr_t {
+  u8_t  u8[4];			/* Initialiser, must come first!!! */
+  u16_t u16[2];
+#if 0
+  u32_t u32;
+#endif
+} uip_ip4addr_t;
+typedef uip_ip4addr_t uip_ipaddr_t;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** \brief 16 bit 802.15.4 address */
+struct uip_802154_shortaddr {
+  u8_t addr[2];
+};
+/** \brief 64 bit 802.15.4 address */
+struct uip_802154_longaddr {
+  u8_t addr[8];
+};
+
+/** \brief 802.11 address */
+struct uip_80211_addr {
+  u8_t addr[6];
+};
+
+/** \brief 802.3 address */
+struct uip_eth_addr {
+  u8_t addr[6];
+};
+
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
+/** \brief 802.15.4 address */
+typedef struct uip_802154_longaddr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_802154_SHORTADDR_LEN 2
+#define UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN  8
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN UIP_802154_LONGADDR_LEN
+#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_80211
+/** \brief 802.11 address */
+typedef struct uip_80211_addr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
+#else /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
+/** \brief Ethernet address */
+typedef struct uip_eth_addr uip_lladdr_t;
+#define UIP_LLADDR_LEN 6
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_80211*/
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* First, the functions that should be called from the
+ * system. Initialization, the periodic timer, and incoming packets are
+ * handled by the following three functions.
+ */
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipconffunc uIP configuration functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The uIP configuration functions are used for setting run-time
+ * parameters in uIP such as IP addresses.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Set the IP address of this host.
+ *
+ * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
+ * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
+ * array.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+
+ uip_ipaddr_t addr;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,1,2);
+ uip_sethostaddr(&addr);
+
+ \endcode
+ * \param addr A pointer to an IP address of type uip_ipaddr_t;
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_sethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_hostaddr, (addr))
+
+/**
+ * Get the IP address of this host.
+ *
+ * The IP address is represented as a 4-byte array where the first
+ * octet of the IP address is put in the first member of the 4-byte
+ * array.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t hostaddr;
+
+ uip_gethostaddr(&hostaddr);
+ \endcode
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the currently configured IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_gethostaddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_hostaddr)
+
+/**
+ * Set the default router's IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
+ * address of the default router.
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_draddr, (addr))
+
+/**
+ * Set the netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable containing the IP
+ * address of the netmask.
+ *
+ * \sa uip_ipaddr()
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy(&uip_netmask, (addr))
+
+
+/**
+ * Get the default router's IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the IP address of the default router.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_getdraddr(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_draddr)
+
+/**
+ * Get the netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the value of the netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_getnetmask(addr) uip_ipaddr_copy((addr), &uip_netmask)
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipinit uIP initialization functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The uIP initialization functions are used for booting uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * uIP initialization function.
+ *
+ * This function should be called at boot up to initialize the uIP
+ * TCP/IP stack.
+ */
+void uip_init(void);
+
+/**
+ * uIP initialization function.
+ *
+ * This function may be used at boot time to set the initial ip_id.
+ */
+void uip_setipid(u16_t id);
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipdevfunc uIP device driver functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These functions are used by a network device driver for interacting
+ * with uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Process an incoming packet.
+ *
+ * This function should be called when the device driver has received
+ * a packet from the network. The packet from the device driver must
+ * be present in the uip_buf buffer, and the length of the packet
+ * should be placed in the uip_len variable.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, there may be an outbound packet placed
+ * in the uip_buf packet buffer. If so, the uip_len variable is set to
+ * the length of the packet. If no packet is to be sent out, the
+ * uip_len variable is set to 0.
+ *
+ * The usual way of calling the function is presented by the source
+ * code below.
+ \code
+ uip_len = devicedriver_poll();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_input();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
+ * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
+ * Ethernet, you will need to call the uIP ARP code before calling
+ * this function:
+ \code
+ #define BUF ((struct uip_eth_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+ uip_len = ethernet_devicedrver_poll();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP)) {
+ uip_arp_ipin();
+ uip_input();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ } else if(BUF->type == HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP)) {
+ uip_arp_arpin();
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_input()        uip_process(UIP_DATA)
+
+
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a connection identified by its number.
+ *
+ * This function does the necessary periodic processing (timers,
+ * polling) for a uIP TCP connection, and should be called when the
+ * periodic uIP timer goes off. It should be called for every
+ * connection, regardless of whether they are open of closed.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, it may have an outbound packet waiting
+ * for service in the uIP packet buffer, and if so the uip_len
+ * variable is set to a value larger than zero. The device driver
+ * should be called to send out the packet.
+ *
+ * The usual way of calling the function is through a for() loop like
+ * this:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
+ uip_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note If you are writing a uIP device driver that needs ARP
+ * (Address Resolution Protocol), e.g., when running uIP over
+ * Ethernet, you will need to call the uip_arp_out() function before
+ * calling the device driver:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_CONNS; ++i) {
+ uip_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param conn The number of the connection which is to be periodically polled.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if UIP_TCP
+#define uip_periodic(conn) do { uip_conn = &uip_conns[conn];    \
+    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
+
+/**
+ *
+ *
+ */
+#define uip_conn_active(conn) (uip_conns[conn].tcpstateflags != UIP_CLOSED)
+
+/**
+ * Perform periodic processing for a connection identified by a pointer
+ * to its structure.
+ *
+ * Same as uip_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual uip_conn
+ * struct instead of an integer as its argument. This function can be
+ * used to force periodic processing of a specific connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
+ * be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;   \
+    uip_process(UIP_TIMER); } while (0)
+
+/**
+ * Request that a particular connection should be polled.
+ *
+ * Similar to uip_periodic_conn() but does not perform any timer
+ * processing. The application is polled for new data.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn struct for the connection to
+ * be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_poll_conn(conn) do { uip_conn = conn;       \
+    uip_process(UIP_POLL_REQUEST); } while (0)
+
+#endif /* UIP_TCP */
+
+#if UIP_UDP
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by its number.
+ *
+ * This function is essentially the same as uip_periodic(), but for
+ * UDP connections. It is called in a similar fashion as the
+ * uip_periodic() function:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
+ uip_udp_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \note As for the uip_periodic() function, special care has to be
+ * taken when using uIP together with ARP and Ethernet:
+ \code
+ for(i = 0; i < UIP_UDP_CONNS; i++) {
+ uip_udp_periodic(i);
+ if(uip_len > 0) {
+ uip_arp_out();
+ ethernet_devicedriver_send();
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param conn The number of the UDP connection to be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_periodic(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = &uip_udp_conns[conn]; \
+    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Periodic processing for a UDP connection identified by a pointer to
+ * its structure.
+ *
+ * Same as uip_udp_periodic() but takes a pointer to the actual
+ * uip_conn struct instead of an integer as its argument. This
+ * function can be used to force periodic processing of a specific
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn struct for the connection
+ * to be processed.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_periodic_conn(conn) do { uip_udp_conn = conn;   \
+    uip_process(UIP_UDP_TIMER); } while(0)
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+/** \brief Abandon the reassembly of the current packet */
+void uip_reass_over(void);
+
+/**
+ * The uIP packet buffer.
+ *
+ * The uip_buf array is used to hold incoming and outgoing
+ * packets. The device driver should place incoming data into this
+ * buffer. When sending data, the device driver should read the link
+ * level headers and the TCP/IP headers from this buffer. The size of
+ * the link level headers is configured by the UIP_LLH_LEN define.
+ *
+ * \note The application data need not be placed in this buffer, so
+ * the device driver must read it from the place pointed to by the
+ * uip_appdata pointer as illustrated by the following example:
+ \code
+ void
+ devicedriver_send(void)
+ {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[0], UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ if(uip_len <= UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN) {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], uip_len - UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ } else {
+ hwsend(&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN], UIP_TCPIP_HLEN);
+ hwsend(uip_appdata, uip_len - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN - UIP_LLH_LEN);
+ }
+ }
+ \endcode
+*/
+extern u8_t uip_buf[UIP_BUFSIZE+2];
+
+
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* Functions that are used by the uIP application program. Opening and
+ * closing connections, sending and receiving data, etc. is all
+ * handled by the functions below.
+ */
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipappfunc uIP application functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * Functions used by an application running of top of uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Start listening to the specified port.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
+ * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_listen(HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ */
+void uip_listen(u16_t port);
+
+/**
+ * Stop listening to the specified port.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function expects the port number in network byte
+ * order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_unlisten(HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ */
+void uip_unlisten(u16_t port);
+
+/**
+ * Connect to a remote host using TCP.
+ *
+ * This function is used to start a new connection to the specified
+ * port on the specified host. It allocates a new connection identifier,
+ * sets the connection to the SYN_SENT state and sets the
+ * retransmission timer to 0. This will cause a TCP SYN segment to be
+ * sent out the next time this connection is periodically processed,
+ * which usually is done within 0.5 seconds after the call to
+ * uip_connect().
+ *
+ * \note This function is available only if support for active open
+ * has been configured by defining UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN to 1 in uipopt.h.
+ *
+ * \note Since this function requires the port number to be in network
+ * byte order, a conversion using HTONS() or htons() is necessary.
+ *
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
+ uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
+ *
+ * \param port A 16-bit port number in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \return A pointer to the uIP connection identifier for the new connection,
+ * or NULL if no connection could be allocated.
+ *
+ */
+struct uip_conn *uip_connect(uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t port);
+
+
+
+/**
+ * \internal
+ *
+ * Check if a connection has outstanding (i.e., unacknowledged) data.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_conn structure for the connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_outstanding(conn) ((conn)->len)
+
+/**
+ * Send data on the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function is used to send out a single segment of TCP
+ * data. Only applications that have been invoked by uIP for event
+ * processing can send data.
+ *
+ * The amount of data that actually is sent out after a call to this
+ * function is determined by the maximum amount of data TCP allows. uIP
+ * will automatically crop the data so that only the appropriate
+ * amount of data is sent. The function uip_mss() can be used to query
+ * uIP for the amount of data that actually will be sent.
+ *
+ * \note This function does not guarantee that the sent data will
+ * arrive at the destination. If the data is lost in the network, the
+ * application will be invoked with the uip_rexmit() event being
+ * set. The application will then have to resend the data using this
+ * function.
+ *
+ * \param data A pointer to the data which is to be sent.
+ *
+ * \param len The maximum amount of data bytes to be sent.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+void uip_send(const void *data, int len);
+
+/**
+ * The length of any incoming data that is currently available (if available)
+ * in the uip_appdata buffer.
+ *
+ * The test function uip_data() must first be used to check if there
+ * is any data available at all.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+/*void uip_datalen(void);*/
+#define uip_datalen()       uip_len
+
+/**
+ * The length of any out-of-band data (urgent data) that has arrived
+ * on the connection.
+ *
+ * \note The configuration parameter UIP_URGDATA must be set for this
+ * function to be enabled.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_urgdatalen()    uip_urglen
+
+/**
+ * Close the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function will close the current connection in a nice way.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_close()         (uip_flags = UIP_CLOSE)
+
+/**
+ * Abort the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function will abort (reset) the current connection, and is
+ * usually used when an error has occurred that prevents using the
+ * uip_close() function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_abort()         (uip_flags = UIP_ABORT)
+
+/**
+ * Tell the sending host to stop sending data.
+ *
+ * This function will close our receiver's window so that we stop
+ * receiving data for the current connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_stop()          (uip_conn->tcpstateflags |= UIP_STOPPED)
+
+/**
+ * Find out if the current connection has been previously stopped with
+ * uip_stop().
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_stopped(conn)   ((conn)->tcpstateflags & UIP_STOPPED)
+
+/**
+ * Restart the current connection, if is has previously been stopped
+ * with uip_stop().
+ *
+ * This function will open the receiver's window again so that we
+ * start receiving data for the current connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_restart()         do { uip_flags |= UIP_NEWDATA;    \
+    uip_conn->tcpstateflags &= ~UIP_STOPPED;                    \
+  } while(0)
+
+
+/* uIP tests that can be made to determine in what state the current
+   connection is, and what the application function should do. */
+
+/**
+ * Is the current connection a UDP connection?
+ *
+ * This function checks whether the current connection is a UDP connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ *
+ */
+#define uip_udpconnection() (uip_conn == NULL)
+
+/**
+ * Is new incoming data available?
+ *
+ * Will reduce to non-zero if there is new data for the application
+ * present at the uip_appdata pointer. The size of the data is
+ * available through the uip_len variable.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_newdata()   (uip_flags & UIP_NEWDATA)
+
+/**
+ * Has previously sent data been acknowledged?
+ *
+ * Will reduce to non-zero if the previously sent data has been
+ * acknowledged by the remote host. This means that the application
+ * can send new data.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_acked()   (uip_flags & UIP_ACKDATA)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection just been connected?
+ *
+ * Reduces to non-zero if the current connection has been connected to
+ * a remote host. This will happen both if the connection has been
+ * actively opened (with uip_connect()) or passively opened (with
+ * uip_listen()).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_connected() (uip_flags & UIP_CONNECTED)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection been closed by the other end?
+ *
+ * Is non-zero if the connection has been closed by the remote
+ * host. The application may then do the necessary clean-ups.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_closed()    (uip_flags & UIP_CLOSE)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection been aborted by the other end?
+ *
+ * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted (reset) by the
+ * remote host.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_aborted()    (uip_flags & UIP_ABORT)
+
+/**
+ * Has the connection timed out?
+ *
+ * Non-zero if the current connection has been aborted due to too many
+ * retransmissions.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_timedout()    (uip_flags & UIP_TIMEDOUT)
+
+/**
+ * Do we need to retransmit previously data?
+ *
+ * Reduces to non-zero if the previously sent data has been lost in
+ * the network, and the application should retransmit it. The
+ * application should send the exact same data as it did the last
+ * time, using the uip_send() function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_rexmit()     (uip_flags & UIP_REXMIT)
+
+/**
+ * Is the connection being polled by uIP?
+ *
+ * Is non-zero if the reason the application is invoked is that the
+ * current connection has been idle for a while and should be
+ * polled.
+ *
+ * The polling event can be used for sending data without having to
+ * wait for the remote host to send data.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_poll()       (uip_flags & UIP_POLL)
+
+/**
+ * Get the initial maximum segment size (MSS) of the current
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_initialmss()             (uip_conn->initialmss)
+
+/**
+ * Get the current maximum segment size that can be sent on the current
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * The current maximum segment size that can be sent on the
+ * connection is computed from the receiver's window and the MSS of
+ * the connection (which also is available by calling
+ * uip_initialmss()).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_mss()             (uip_conn->mss)
+
+/**
+ * Set up a new UDP connection.
+ *
+ * This function sets up a new UDP connection. The function will
+ * automatically allocate an unused local port for the new
+ * connection. However, another port can be chosen by using the
+ * uip_udp_bind() call, after the uip_udp_new() function has been
+ * called.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t addr;
+ struct uip_udp_conn *c;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&addr, 192,168,2,1);
+ c = uip_udp_new(&addr, HTONS(12345));
+ if(c != NULL) {
+ uip_udp_bind(c, HTONS(12344));
+ }
+ \endcode
+ * \param ripaddr The IP address of the remote host.
+ *
+ * \param rport The remote port number in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \return The uip_udp_conn structure for the new connection or NULL
+ * if no connection could be allocated.
+ */
+struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_new(const uip_ipaddr_t *ripaddr, u16_t rport);
+
+/**
+ * Removed a UDP connection.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the connection.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_remove(conn) (conn)->lport = 0
+
+/**
+ * Bind a UDP connection to a local port.
+ *
+ * \param conn A pointer to the uip_udp_conn structure for the
+ * connection.
+ *
+ * \param port The local port number, in network byte order.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_bind(conn, port) (conn)->lport = port
+
+/**
+ * Send a UDP datagram of length len on the current connection.
+ *
+ * This function can only be called in response to a UDP event (poll
+ * or newdata). The data must be present in the uip_buf buffer, at the
+ * place pointed to by the uip_appdata pointer.
+ *
+ * \param len The length of the data in the uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_udp_send(len) uip_send((char *)uip_appdata, len)
+
+/** @} */
+
+/* uIP convenience and converting functions. */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipconvfunc uIP conversion functions
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These functions can be used for converting between different data
+ * formats used by uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Convert an IP address to four bytes separated by commas.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ printf("ipaddr=%d.%d.%d.%d\n", uip_ipaddr_to_quad(&ipaddr));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param a A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t.
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr_to_quad(a) (a)->u8[0],(a)->u8[1],(a)->u8[2],(a)->u8[3]
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IP address from four bytes.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IP address of the type that uIP handles
+ * internally from four bytes. The function is handy for specifying IP
+ * addresses to use with e.g. the uip_connect() function.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ struct uip_conn *c;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 192,168,1,2);
+ c = uip_connect(&ipaddr, HTONS(80));
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr A pointer to a uip_ipaddr_t variable that will be
+ * filled in with the IP address.
+ *
+ * \param addr0 The first octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr1 The second octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The third octet of the IP address.
+ * \param addr3 The forth octet of the IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3) do {  \
+    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                              \
+    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                              \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IPv6 address from eight 16-bit words.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ip6addr(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7) do { \
+    (addr)->u16[0] = HTONS(addr0);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[1] = HTONS(addr1);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[2] = HTONS(addr2);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[3] = HTONS(addr3);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[4] = HTONS(addr4);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[5] = HTONS(addr5);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[6] = HTONS(addr6);                                      \
+    (addr)->u16[7] = HTONS(addr7);                                      \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Construct an IPv6 address from sixteen 8-bit words.
+ *
+ * This function constructs an IPv6 address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ip6addr_u8(addr, addr0,addr1,addr2,addr3,addr4,addr5,addr6,addr7,addr8,addr9,addr10,addr11,addr12,addr13,addr14,addr15) do { \
+    (addr)->u8[0] = addr0;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[1] = addr1;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[2] = addr2;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[3] = addr3;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[4] = addr4;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[5] = addr5;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[6] = addr6;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[7] = addr7;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[8] = addr8;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[9] = addr9;                                       \
+    (addr)->u8[10] = addr10;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[11] = addr11;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[12] = addr12;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[13] = addr13;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[14] = addr14;                                     \
+    (addr)->u8[15] = addr15;                                     \
+  } while(0)
+
+
+/**
+ * Copy an IP address to another IP address.
+ *
+ * Copies an IP address from one place to another.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param dest The destination for the copy.
+ * \param src The source from where to copy.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef uip_ipaddr_copy
+#define uip_ipaddr_copy(dest, src) (*(dest) = *(src))
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Compare two IP addresses
+ *
+ * Compares two IP addresses.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1)) {
+ printf("They are the same");
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr1 The first IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The second IP address.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) ((addr1)->u16[0] == (addr2)->u16[0] && \
+				      (addr1)->u16[1] == (addr2)->u16[1])
+#else /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+#define uip_ipaddr_cmp(addr1, addr2) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, sizeof(uip_ip6addr_t)) == 0)
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+/**
+ * Compare two IP addresses with netmasks
+ *
+ * Compares two IP addresses with netmasks. The masks are used to mask
+ * out the bits that are to be compared.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, mask;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&mask, 255,255,255,0);
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr2, 192,16,1,3);
+ if(uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&ipaddr1, &ipaddr2, &mask)) {
+ printf("They are the same");
+ }
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \param addr1 The first IP address.
+ * \param addr2 The second IP address.
+ * \param mask The netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(addr1, addr2, mask)          \
+  (((((u16_t *)addr1)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0]) ==       \
+    (((u16_t *)addr2)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0])) &&      \
+   ((((u16_t *)addr1)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1]) ==       \
+    (((u16_t *)addr2)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1])))
+#else
+#define uip_ipaddr_prefixcmp(addr1, addr2, length) (memcmp(addr1, addr2, length>>3) == 0)
+#endif
+
+
+/**
+ * Check if an address is a broadcast address for a network.
+ *
+ * Checks if an address is the broadcast address for a network. The
+ * network is defined by an IP address that is on the network and the
+ * network's netmask.
+ *
+ * \param addr The IP address.
+ * \param netaddr The network's IP address.
+ * \param netmask The network's netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+/*#define uip_ipaddr_isbroadcast(addr, netaddr, netmask)
+  ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16 & ((uip_ipaddr_t *)(addr)).u16*/
+
+
+
+/**
+ * Mask out the network part of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Masks out the network part of an IP address, given the address and
+ * the netmask.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr1, ipaddr2, netmask;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr1, 192,16,1,2);
+ uip_ipaddr(&netmask, 255,255,255,0);
+ uip_ipaddr_mask(&ipaddr2, &ipaddr1, &netmask);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "ipaddr2" will contain the IP
+ * address 192.168.1.0.
+ *
+ * \param dest Where the result is to be placed.
+ * \param src The IP address.
+ * \param mask The netmask.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr_mask(dest, src, mask) do {                           \
+    ((u16_t *)dest)[0] = ((u16_t *)src)[0] & ((u16_t *)mask)[0];        \
+    ((u16_t *)dest)[1] = ((u16_t *)src)[1] & ((u16_t *)mask)[1];        \
+  } while(0)
+
+/**
+ * Pick the first octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the first octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr1(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 1.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr1(addr) ((addr)->u8[0])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the second octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the second octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr2(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 2.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr2(addr) ((addr)->u8[1])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the third octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the third octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr3(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 3.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr3(addr) ((addr)->u8[2])
+
+/**
+ * Pick the fourth octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Picks out the fourth octet of an IP address.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+ u8_t octet;
+
+ uip_ipaddr(&ipaddr, 1,2,3,4);
+ octet = uip_ipaddr4(&ipaddr);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * In the example above, the variable "octet" will contain the value 4.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_ipaddr4(addr) ((addr)->u8[3])
+
+/**
+ * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
+ *
+ * This macro is primarily used for converting constants from host
+ * byte order to network byte order. For converting variables to
+ * network byte order, use the htons() function instead.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef HTONS
+#   if UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
+#      define HTONS(n) (n)
+#      define HTONL(n) (n)
+#   else /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+#      define HTONS(n) (u16_t)((((u16_t) (n)) << 8) | (((u16_t) (n)) >> 8))
+#      define HTONL(n) (((u32_t)HTONS(n) << 16) | HTONS((u32_t)(n) >> 16))
+#   endif /* UIP_BYTE_ORDER == UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+#else
+#error "HTONS already defined!"
+#endif /* HTONS */
+
+/**
+ * Convert 16-bit quantity from host byte order to network byte order.
+ *
+ * This function is primarily used for converting variables from host
+ * byte order to network byte order. For converting constants to
+ * network byte order, use the HTONS() macro instead.
+ */
+#ifndef htons
+u16_t htons(u16_t val);
+#endif /* htons */
+#ifndef ntohs
+#define ntohs htons
+#endif
+
+#ifndef htonl
+u32_t htonl(u32_t val);
+#endif /* htonl */
+#ifndef ntohl
+#define ntohl htonl
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Pointer to the application data in the packet buffer.
+ *
+ * This pointer points to the application data when the application is
+ * called. If the application wishes to send data, the application may
+ * use this space to write the data into before calling uip_send().
+ */
+extern void *uip_appdata;
+
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+/* u8_t *uip_urgdata:
+ *
+ * This pointer points to any urgent data that has been received. Only
+ * present if compiled with support for urgent data (UIP_URGDATA).
+ */
+extern void *uip_urgdata;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipdrivervars Variables used in uIP device drivers
+ * @{
+ *
+ * uIP has a few global variables that are used in device drivers for
+ * uIP.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The length of the packet in the uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * The global variable uip_len holds the length of the packet in the
+ * uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * When the network device driver calls the uIP input function,
+ * uip_len should be set to the length of the packet in the uip_buf
+ * buffer.
+ *
+ * When sending packets, the device driver should use the contents of
+ * the uip_len variable to determine the length of the outgoing
+ * packet.
+ *
+ */
+extern u16_t uip_len;
+
+/**
+ * The length of the extension headers
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_ext_len;
+/** @} */
+
+#if UIP_URGDATA > 0
+extern u16_t uip_urglen, uip_surglen;
+#endif /* UIP_URGDATA > 0 */
+
+
+/**
+ * Representation of a uIP TCP connection.
+ *
+ * The uip_conn structure is used for identifying a connection. All
+ * but one field in the structure are to be considered read-only by an
+ * application. The only exception is the appstate field whose purpose
+ * is to let the application store application-specific state (e.g.,
+ * file pointers) for the connection. The type of this field is
+ * configured in the "uipopt.h" header file.
+ */
+struct uip_conn {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote host. */
+
+  u16_t lport;        /**< The local TCP port, in network byte order. */
+  u16_t rport;        /**< The local remote TCP port, in network byte
+			 order. */
+
+  u8_t rcv_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that we expect to
+			 receive next. */
+  u8_t snd_nxt[4];    /**< The sequence number that was last sent by
+                         us. */
+  u16_t len;          /**< Length of the data that was previously sent. */
+  u16_t mss;          /**< Current maximum segment size for the
+			 connection. */
+  u16_t initialmss;   /**< Initial maximum segment size for the
+			 connection. */
+  u8_t sa;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
+			 variable. */
+  u8_t sv;            /**< Retransmission time-out calculation state
+			 variable. */
+  u8_t rto;           /**< Retransmission time-out. */
+  u8_t tcpstateflags; /**< TCP state and flags. */
+  u8_t timer;         /**< The retransmission timer. */
+  u8_t nrtx;          /**< The number of retransmissions for the last
+			 segment sent. */
+
+  /** The application state. */
+  uip_tcp_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * Pointer to the current TCP connection.
+ *
+ * The uip_conn pointer can be used to access the current TCP
+ * connection.
+ */
+
+extern struct uip_conn *uip_conn;
+#if UIP_TCP
+/* The array containing all uIP connections. */
+extern struct uip_conn uip_conns[UIP_CONNS];
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uiparch
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * 4-byte array used for the 32-bit sequence number calculations.
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_acc32[4];
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * Representation of a uIP UDP connection.
+ */
+struct uip_udp_conn {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ripaddr;   /**< The IP address of the remote peer. */
+  u16_t lport;        /**< The local port number in network byte order. */
+  u16_t rport;        /**< The remote port number in network byte order. */
+  u8_t  ttl;          /**< Default time-to-live. */
+
+  /** The application state. */
+  uip_udp_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+
+/**
+ * The current UDP connection.
+ */
+extern struct uip_udp_conn *uip_udp_conn;
+extern struct uip_udp_conn uip_udp_conns[UIP_UDP_CONNS];
+
+struct uip_router {
+  int (*activate)(void);
+  int (*deactivate)(void);
+  uip_ipaddr_t *(*lookup)(uip_ipaddr_t *destipaddr, uip_ipaddr_t *nexthop);
+};
+
+#if UIP_CONF_ROUTER
+extern const struct uip_router *uip_router;
+
+/**
+ * uIP routing driver registration function.
+ */
+void uip_router_register(const struct uip_router *router);
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_ROUTER*/
+
+#if UIP_CONF_ICMP6
+struct uip_icmp6_conn {
+  uip_icmp6_appstate_t appstate;
+};
+extern struct uip_icmp6_conn uip_icmp6_conns;
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_ICMP6*/
+
+/**
+ * The uIP TCP/IP statistics.
+ *
+ * This is the variable in which the uIP TCP/IP statistics are gathered.
+ */
+#if UIP_STATISTICS == 1
+extern struct uip_stats uip_stat;
+#define UIP_STAT(s) s
+#else
+#define UIP_STAT(s)
+#endif /* UIP_STATISTICS == 1 */
+
+/**
+ * The structure holding the TCP/IP statistics that are gathered if
+ * UIP_STATISTICS is set to 1.
+ *
+ */
+struct uip_stats {
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t forwarded;/**< Number of forwarded packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped packets at the IP
+			     layer. */
+    uip_stats_t vhlerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP version or header length. */
+    uip_stats_t hblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP length, high byte. */
+    uip_stats_t lblenerr; /**< Number of packets dropped due to wrong
+			     IP length, low byte. */
+    uip_stats_t fragerr;  /**< Number of packets dropped since they
+			     were IP fragments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of packets dropped due to IP
+			     checksum errors. */
+    uip_stats_t protoerr; /**< Number of packets dropped since they
+			     were neither ICMP, UDP nor TCP. */
+  } ip;                   /**< IP statistics. */
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ICMP packets. */
+    uip_stats_t typeerr;  /**< Number of ICMP packets with a wrong
+			     type. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of ICMP packets with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+  } icmp;                 /**< ICMP statistics. */
+#if UIP_TCP
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+    uip_stats_t ackerr;   /**< Number of TCP segments with a bad ACK
+			     number. */
+    uip_stats_t rst;      /**< Number of received TCP RST (reset) segments. */
+    uip_stats_t rexmit;   /**< Number of retransmitted TCP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t syndrop;  /**< Number of dropped SYNs due to too few
+			     connections was available. */
+    uip_stats_t synrst;   /**< Number of SYNs for closed ports,
+			     triggering a RST. */
+  } tcp;                  /**< TCP statistics. */
+#endif
+#if UIP_UDP
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent UDP segments. */
+    uip_stats_t chkerr;   /**< Number of UDP segments with a bad
+			     checksum. */
+  } udp;                  /**< UDP statistics. */
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  struct {
+    uip_stats_t drop;     /**< Number of dropped ND6 packets. */
+    uip_stats_t recv;     /**< Number of received ND6 packets */
+    uip_stats_t sent;     /**< Number of sent ND6 packets */
+  } nd6;
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+};
+
+
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/* All the stuff below this point is internal to uIP and should not be
+ * used directly by an application or by a device driver.
+ */
+/*---------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+
+
+/* u8_t uip_flags:
+ *
+ * When the application is called, uip_flags will contain the flags
+ * that are defined in this file. Please read below for more
+ * information.
+ */
+extern u8_t uip_flags;
+
+/* The following flags may be set in the global variable uip_flags
+   before calling the application callback. The UIP_ACKDATA,
+   UIP_NEWDATA, and UIP_CLOSE flags may both be set at the same time,
+   whereas the others are mutually exclusive. Note that these flags
+   should *NOT* be accessed directly, but only through the uIP
+   functions/macros. */
+
+#define UIP_ACKDATA   1     /* Signifies that the outstanding data was
+			       acked and the application should send
+			       out new data instead of retransmitting
+			       the last data. */
+#define UIP_NEWDATA   2     /* Flags the fact that the peer has sent
+			       us new data. */
+#define UIP_REXMIT    4     /* Tells the application to retransmit the
+			       data that was last sent. */
+#define UIP_POLL      8     /* Used for polling the application, to
+			       check if the application has data that
+			       it wants to send. */
+#define UIP_CLOSE     16    /* The remote host has closed the
+			       connection, thus the connection has
+			       gone away. Or the application signals
+			       that it wants to close the
+			       connection. */
+#define UIP_ABORT     32    /* The remote host has aborted the
+			       connection, thus the connection has
+			       gone away. Or the application signals
+			       that it wants to abort the
+			       connection. */
+#define UIP_CONNECTED 64    /* We have got a connection from a remote
+                               host and have set up a new connection
+                               for it, or an active connection has
+                               been successfully established. */
+
+#define UIP_TIMEDOUT  128   /* The connection has been aborted due to
+			       too many retransmissions. */
+
+
+/**
+ * \brief process the options within a hop by hop or destination option header
+ * \retval 0: nothing to send,
+ * \retval 1: drop pkt
+ * \retval 2: ICMP error message to send
+*/
+/*static u8_t
+uip_ext_hdr_options_process(); */
+
+/* uip_process(flag):
+ *
+ * The actual uIP function which does all the work.
+ */
+void uip_process(u8_t flag);
+
+  /* The following flags are passed as an argument to the uip_process()
+   function. They are used to distinguish between the two cases where
+   uip_process() is called. It can be called either because we have
+   incoming data that should be processed, or because the periodic
+   timer has fired. These values are never used directly, but only in
+   the macros defined in this file. */
+
+#define UIP_DATA          1     /* Tells uIP that there is incoming
+				   data in the uip_buf buffer. The
+				   length of the data is stored in the
+				   global variable uip_len. */
+#define UIP_TIMER         2     /* Tells uIP that the periodic timer
+				   has fired. */
+#define UIP_POLL_REQUEST  3     /* Tells uIP that a connection should
+				   be polled. */
+#define UIP_UDP_SEND_CONN 4     /* Tells uIP that a UDP datagram
+				   should be constructed in the
+				   uip_buf buffer. */
+#if UIP_UDP
+#define UIP_UDP_TIMER     5
+#endif /* UIP_UDP */
+
+/* The TCP states used in the uip_conn->tcpstateflags. */
+#define UIP_CLOSED      0
+#define UIP_SYN_RCVD    1
+#define UIP_SYN_SENT    2
+#define UIP_ESTABLISHED 3
+#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_1  4
+#define UIP_FIN_WAIT_2  5
+#define UIP_CLOSING     6
+#define UIP_TIME_WAIT   7
+#define UIP_LAST_ACK    8
+#define UIP_TS_MASK     15
+
+#define UIP_STOPPED      16
+
+/* The TCP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_tcpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcflow;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPv4 header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* TCP header. */
+  u16_t srcport,
+    destport;
+  u8_t seqno[4],
+    ackno[4],
+    tcpoffset,
+    flags,
+    wnd[2];
+  u16_t tcpchksum;
+  u8_t urgp[2];
+  u8_t optdata[4];
+};
+
+/* The ICMP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_icmpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcf;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPv4 header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* ICMP header. */
+  u8_t type, icode;
+  u16_t icmpchksum;
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  u16_t id, seqno;
+  u8_t payload[1];
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/* The UDP and IP headers. */
+struct uip_udpip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPv6 header. */
+  u8_t vtc,
+    tcf;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IP header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+  /* UDP header. */
+  u16_t srcport,
+    destport;
+  u16_t udplen;
+  u16_t udpchksum;
+};
+
+/*
+ * In IPv6 the length of the L3 headers before the transport header is
+ * not fixed, due to the possibility to include extension option headers
+ * after the IP header. hence we split here L3 and L4 headers
+ */
+/* The IP header */
+struct uip_ip_hdr {
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  /* IPV6 header */
+  u8_t vtc;
+  u8_t tcflow;
+  u16_t flow;
+  u8_t len[2];
+  u8_t proto, ttl;
+  uip_ip6addr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+  /* IPV4 header */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/*
+ * IPv6 extension option headers: we are able to process
+ * the 4 extension headers defined in RFC2460 (IPv6):
+ * - Hop by hop option header, destination option header:
+ *   These two are not used by any core IPv6 protocol, hence
+ *   we just read them and go to the next. They convey options,
+ *   the options defined in RFC2460 are Pad1 and PadN, which do
+ *   some padding, and that we do not need to read (the length
+ *   field in the header is enough)
+ * - Routing header: this one is most notably used by MIPv6,
+ *   which we do not implement, hence we just read it and go
+ *   to the next
+ * - Fragmentation header: we read this header and are able to
+ *   reassemble packets
+ *
+ * We do not offer any means to send packets with extension headers
+ *
+ * We do not implement Authentication and ESP headers, which are
+ * used in IPSec and defined in RFC4302,4303,4305,4385
+ */
+/* common header part */
+struct uip_ext_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* Hop by Hop option header */
+struct uip_hbho_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* destination option header */
+struct uip_desto_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* We do not define structures for PAD1 and PADN options */
+
+/*
+ * routing header
+ * the routing header as 4 common bytes, then routing header type
+ * specific data there are several types of routing header. Type 0 was
+ * deprecated as per RFC5095 most notable other type is 2, used in
+ * RFC3775 (MIPv6) here we do not implement MIPv6, so we just need to
+ * parse the 4 first bytes
+ */
+struct uip_routing_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t len;
+  u8_t routing_type;
+  u8_t seg_left;
+};
+
+/* fragmentation header */
+struct uip_frag_hdr {
+  u8_t next;
+  u8_t res;
+  u16_t offsetresmore;
+  u32_t id;
+};
+
+/*
+ * an option within the destination or hop by hop option headers
+ * it contains type an length, which is true for all options but PAD1
+ */
+struct uip_ext_hdr_opt {
+  u8_t type;
+  u8_t len;
+};
+
+/* PADN option */
+struct uip_ext_hdr_opt_padn {
+  u8_t opt_type;
+  u8_t opt_len;
+};
+
+/* TCP header */
+struct uip_tcp_hdr {
+  u16_t srcport;
+  u16_t destport;
+  u8_t seqno[4];
+  u8_t ackno[4];
+  u8_t tcpoffset;
+  u8_t flags;
+  u8_t  wnd[2];
+  u16_t tcpchksum;
+  u8_t urgp[2];
+  u8_t optdata[4];
+};
+
+/* The ICMP headers. */
+struct uip_icmp_hdr {
+  u8_t type, icode;
+  u16_t icmpchksum;
+#if !UIP_CONF_IPV6
+  u16_t id, seqno;
+#endif /* !UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+};
+
+
+/* The UDP headers. */
+struct uip_udp_hdr {
+  u16_t srcport;
+  u16_t destport;
+  u16_t udplen;
+  u16_t udpchksum;
+};
+
+
+/**
+ * The buffer size available for user data in the \ref uip_buf buffer.
+ *
+ * This macro holds the available size for user data in the \ref
+ * uip_buf buffer. The macro is intended to be used for checking
+ * bounds of available user data.
+ *
+ * Example:
+ \code
+ snprintf(uip_appdata, UIP_APPDATA_SIZE, "%u\n", i);
+ \endcode
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_APPDATA_SIZE (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
+#define UIP_APPDATA_PTR (void *)&uip_buf[UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_TCPIP_HLEN]
+
+#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP  1
+#define UIP_PROTO_TCP   6
+#define UIP_PROTO_UDP   17
+#define UIP_PROTO_ICMP6 58
+
+
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/** @{ */
+/** \brief  extension headers types */
+#define UIP_PROTO_HBHO        0
+#define UIP_PROTO_DESTO       60
+#define UIP_PROTO_ROUTING     43
+#define UIP_PROTO_FRAG        44
+#define UIP_PROTO_NONE        59
+/** @} */
+
+/** @{ */
+/** \brief  Destination and Hop By Hop extension headers option types */
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PAD1  0
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_OPT_PADN  1
+/** @} */
+
+/** @{ */
+/**
+ * \brief Bitmaps for extension header processing
+ *
+ * When processing extension headers, we should record somehow which one we
+ * see, because you cannot have twice the same header, except for destination
+ * We store all this in one u8_t bitmap one bit for each header expected. The
+ * order in the bitmap is the order recommended in RFC2460
+ */
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_HBHO 0x01
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO1 0x02
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ROUTING 0x04
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_FRAG 0x08
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_AH 0x10
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_ESP 0x20
+#define UIP_EXT_HDR_BITMAP_DESTO2 0x40
+/** @} */
+
+
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+
+/* Header sizes. */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+#define UIP_IPH_LEN    40
+#define UIP_FRAGH_LEN  8
+#else /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+#define UIP_IPH_LEN    20    /* Size of IP header */
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_IPV6 */
+
+#define UIP_UDPH_LEN    8    /* Size of UDP header */
+#define UIP_TCPH_LEN   20    /* Size of TCP header */
+#ifdef UIP_IPH_LEN
+#define UIP_ICMPH_LEN   4    /* Size of ICMP header */
+#endif
+#define UIP_IPUDPH_LEN (UIP_UDPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
+                        * UDP
+							   * header */
+#define UIP_IPTCPH_LEN (UIP_TCPH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* Size of IP +
+							   * TCP
+							   * header */
+#define UIP_TCPIP_HLEN UIP_IPTCPH_LEN
+#define UIP_IPICMPH_LEN (UIP_IPH_LEN + UIP_ICMPH_LEN) /* size of ICMP
+                                                         + IP header */
+#define UIP_LLIPH_LEN (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN)    /* size of L2
+                                                        + IP header */
+#if UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/**
+ * The sums below are quite used in ND. When used for uip_buf, we
+ * include link layer length when used for uip_len, we do not, hence
+ * we need values with and without LLH_LEN we do not use capital
+ * letters as these values are variable
+ */
+#define uip_l2_l3_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
+#define uip_l2_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_LLH_LEN + UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
+#define uip_l3_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len)
+#define uip_l3_icmp_hdr_len (UIP_IPH_LEN + uip_ext_len + UIP_ICMPH_LEN)
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDADDR
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
+#else /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+extern uip_ipaddr_t uip_hostaddr, uip_netmask, uip_draddr;
+#endif /* UIP_FIXEDADDR */
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_broadcast_addr;
+extern const uip_ipaddr_t uip_all_zeroes_addr;
+
+#if UIP_FIXEDETHADDR
+extern const uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
+#else
+extern uip_lladdr_t uip_lladdr;
+#endif
+
+
+
+
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/**
+ * \brief Is IPv6 address a the unspecified address
+ * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_unspecified(a)               \
+  ((((a)->u16[0]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                       \
+   (((a)->u16[7]) == 0))
+
+/** \brief Is IPv6 address a the link local all-nodes multicast address */
+#define uip_is_addr_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a)     \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xff) &&                        \
+   (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                        \
+   (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[5]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u16[6]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == 0) &&                          \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == 0x01))
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to unspecified */
+#define uip_create_unspecified(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-nodes multicast address */
+#define uip_create_linklocal_allnodes_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0001)
+
+/** \brief set IP address a to the link local all-routers multicast address */
+#define uip_create_linklocal_allrouters_mcast(a) uip_ip6addr(a, 0xff02, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0x0002)
+
+/**
+ * \brief  is addr (a) a solicited node multicast address, see RFC3513
+ *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_solicited_node(a)           \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF) &&                     \
+  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x02) &&                     \
+  (((a)->u16[1]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[2]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[3]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[4]) == 0) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u16[5]) == 1) &&                       \
+  (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xFF))
+
+/**
+ * \briefput in b the solicited node address corresponding to address a
+ * both a and b are of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ * */
+#define uip_create_solicited_node(a, b)    \
+  (((b)->u8[0]) = 0xFF);                        \
+  (((b)->u8[1]) = 0x02);                        \
+  (((b)->u16[1]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[2]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[3]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u16[4]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u8[10]) = 0);                          \
+  (((b)->u8[11]) = 0x01);                       \
+  (((b)->u8[12]) = 0xFF);                       \
+  (((b)->u8[13]) = ((a)->u8[13]));              \
+  (((b)->u16[7]) = ((a)->u16[7]))
+
+/**
+ * \brief is addr (a) a link local unicast address, see RFC3513
+ *  i.e. is (a) on prefix FE80::/10
+ *  a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ */
+#define uip_is_addr_link_local(a) \
+  ((((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFE) && \
+  (((a)->u8[1]) == 0x80))
+
+/**
+ * \brief was addr (a) forged based on the mac address m
+ * a type is uip_ipaddr_t
+ * m type is uiplladdr_t
+ */
+#if UIP_CONF_LL_802154
+#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
+  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) ^ 0x02)) &&   \
+   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[11]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[12]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[5]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[6]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[7]))
+#else
+
+#define uip_is_addr_mac_addr_based(a, m) \
+  ((((a)->u8[8])  == (((m)->addr[0]) | 0x02)) &&   \
+   (((a)->u8[9])  == (m)->addr[1]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[10]) == (m)->addr[2]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[11]) == 0xff) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[12]) == 0xfe) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[13]) == (m)->addr[3]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[14]) == (m)->addr[4]) &&            \
+   (((a)->u8[15]) == (m)->addr[5]))
+
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_LL_802154*/
+
+/**
+ * \brief is address a multicast address, see RFC 3513
+ * a is of type uip_ipaddr_t*
+ * */
+#define uip_is_addr_mcast(a)                    \
+  (((a)->u8[0]) == 0xFF)
+
+/**
+ * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
+ * the all nodes group-id
+ */
+#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_nodes(a) \
+  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[15])  == 1))
+
+/**
+ * \brief is group-id of multicast address a
+ * the all routers group-id
+ */
+#define uip_is_mcast_group_id_all_routers(a) \
+  ((((a)->u16[1])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[2])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[3])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[4])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[5])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u16[6])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[14])  == 0) &&                 \
+   (((a)->u8[15])  == 2))
+
+
+#endif /*UIP_CONF_IPV6*/
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the Internet checksum over a buffer.
+ *
+ * The Internet checksum is the one's complement of the one's
+ * complement sum of all 16-bit words in the buffer.
+ *
+ * See RFC1071.
+ *
+ * \param buf A pointer to the buffer over which the checksum is to be
+ * computed.
+ *
+ * \param len The length of the buffer over which the checksum is to
+ * be computed.
+ *
+ * \return The Internet checksum of the buffer.
+ */
+u16_t uip_chksum(u16_t *buf, u16_t len);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the IP header checksum of the packet header in uip_buf.
+ *
+ * The IP header checksum is the Internet checksum of the 20 bytes of
+ * the IP header.
+ *
+ * \return The IP header checksum of the IP header in the uip_buf
+ * buffer.
+ */
+u16_t uip_ipchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the TCP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
+ *
+ * The TCP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
+ * TCP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC793.
+ *
+ * \return The TCP checksum of the TCP segment in uip_buf and pointed
+ * to by uip_appdata.
+ */
+u16_t uip_tcpchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the UDP checksum of the packet in uip_buf and uip_appdata.
+ *
+ * The UDP checksum is the Internet checksum of data contents of the
+ * UDP segment, and a pseudo-header as defined in RFC768.
+ *
+ * \return The UDP checksum of the UDP segment in uip_buf and pointed
+ * to by uip_appdata.
+ */
+u16_t uip_udpchksum(void);
+
+/**
+ * Calculate the ICMP checksum of the packet in uip_buf.
+ *
+ * \return The ICMP checksum of the ICMP packet in uip_buf
+ */
+u16_t uip_icmp6chksum(void);
+
+
+#endif /* __UIP_H__ */
+
+
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fcb783b140
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.c
@@ -0,0 +1,432 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uiparp uIP Address Resolution Protocol
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The Address Resolution Protocol ARP is used for mapping between IP
+ * addresses and link level addresses such as the Ethernet MAC
+ * addresses. ARP uses broadcast queries to ask for the link level
+ * address of a known IP address and the host which is configured with
+ * the IP address for which the query was meant, will respond with its
+ * link level address.
+ *
+ * \note This ARP implementation only supports Ethernet.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Implementation of the ARP Address Resolution Protocol.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ *
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip_arp.c,v 1.5 2008/02/07 01:35:00 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+
+#include "uip_arp.h"
+
+#include <string.h>
+
+struct arp_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
+  u16_t hwtype;
+  u16_t protocol;
+  u8_t hwlen;
+  u8_t protolen;
+  u16_t opcode;
+  struct uip_eth_addr shwaddr;
+  uip_ipaddr_t sipaddr;
+  struct uip_eth_addr dhwaddr;
+  uip_ipaddr_t dipaddr;
+};
+
+struct ethip_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_hdr ethhdr;
+  /* IP header. */
+  u8_t vhl,
+    tos,
+    len[2],
+    ipid[2],
+    ipoffset[2],
+    ttl,
+    proto;
+  u16_t ipchksum;
+  uip_ipaddr_t srcipaddr, destipaddr;
+};
+
+#define ARP_REQUEST 1
+#define ARP_REPLY   2
+
+#define ARP_HWTYPE_ETH 1
+
+struct arp_entry {
+  uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+  struct uip_eth_addr ethaddr;
+  u8_t time;
+};
+
+static const struct uip_eth_addr broadcast_ethaddr =
+  {{0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff,0xff}};
+static const u16_t broadcast_ipaddr[2] = {0xffff,0xffff};
+
+static struct arp_entry arp_table[UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE];
+static uip_ipaddr_t ipaddr;
+static u8_t i, c;
+
+static u8_t arptime;
+static u8_t tmpage;
+
+#define BUF   ((struct arp_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+#define IPBUF ((struct ethip_hdr *)&uip_buf[0])
+
+#define DEBUG 0
+#if DEBUG
+#include <stdio.h>
+#define PRINTF(...) printf(__VA_ARGS__)
+#else
+#define PRINTF(...)
+#endif
+
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Initialize the ARP module.
+ *
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_init(void)
+{
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    memset(&arp_table[i].ipaddr, 0, 4);
+  }
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Periodic ARP processing function.
+ *
+ * This function performs periodic timer processing in the ARP module
+ * and should be called at regular intervals. The recommended interval
+ * is 10 seconds between the calls.
+ *
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_timer(void)
+{
+  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+
+  ++arptime;
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr) &&
+       arptime - tabptr->time >= UIP_ARP_MAXAGE) {
+      memset(&tabptr->ipaddr, 0, 4);
+    }
+  }
+
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+static void
+uip_arp_update(uip_ipaddr_t *ipaddr, struct uip_eth_addr *ethaddr)
+{
+  register struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+  /* Walk through the ARP mapping table and try to find an entry to
+     update. If none is found, the IP -> MAC address mapping is
+     inserted in the ARP table. */
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    /* Only check those entries that are actually in use. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+
+      /* Check if the source IP address of the incoming packet matches
+         the IP address in this ARP table entry. */
+      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
+
+	/* An old entry found, update this and return. */
+	memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
+	tabptr->time = arptime;
+
+	return;
+      }
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If we get here, no existing ARP table entry was found, so we
+     create one. */
+
+  /* First, we try to find an unused entry in the ARP table. */
+  for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&tabptr->ipaddr, &uip_all_zeroes_addr)) {
+      break;
+    }
+  }
+
+  /* If no unused entry is found, we try to find the oldest entry and
+     throw it away. */
+  if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
+    tmpage = 0;
+    c = 0;
+    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+      if(arptime - tabptr->time > tmpage) {
+	tmpage = arptime - tabptr->time;
+	c = i;
+      }
+    }
+    i = c;
+    tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+  }
+
+  /* Now, i is the ARP table entry which we will fill with the new
+     information. */
+  uip_ipaddr_copy(&tabptr->ipaddr, ipaddr);
+  memcpy(tabptr->ethaddr.addr, ethaddr->addr, 6);
+  tabptr->time = arptime;
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * ARP processing for incoming IP packets
+ *
+ * This function should be called by the device driver when an IP
+ * packet has been received. The function will check if the address is
+ * in the ARP cache, and if so the ARP cache entry will be
+ * refreshed. If no ARP cache entry was found, a new one is created.
+ *
+ * This function expects an IP packet with a prepended Ethernet header
+ * in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the global
+ * variable uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+#if 0
+void
+uip_arp_ipin(void)
+{
+  uip_len -= sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
+
+  /* Only insert/update an entry if the source IP address of the
+     incoming IP packet comes from a host on the local network. */
+  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0]) !=
+     (uip_hostaddr[0] & uip_netmask[0])) {
+    return;
+  }
+  if((IPBUF->srcipaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1]) !=
+     (uip_hostaddr[1] & uip_netmask[1])) {
+    return;
+  }
+  uip_arp_update(IPBUF->srcipaddr, &(IPBUF->ethhdr.src));
+
+  return;
+}
+#endif /* 0 */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * ARP processing for incoming ARP packets.
+ *
+ * This function should be called by the device driver when an ARP
+ * packet has been received. The function will act differently
+ * depending on the ARP packet type: if it is a reply for a request
+ * that we previously sent out, the ARP cache will be filled in with
+ * the values from the ARP reply. If the incoming ARP packet is an ARP
+ * request for our IP address, an ARP reply packet is created and put
+ * into the uip_buf[] buffer.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, the value of the global variable uip_len
+ * indicates whether the device driver should send out a packet or
+ * not. If uip_len is zero, no packet should be sent. If uip_len is
+ * non-zero, it contains the length of the outbound packet that is
+ * present in the uip_buf[] buffer.
+ *
+ * This function expects an ARP packet with a prepended Ethernet
+ * header in the uip_buf[] buffer, and the length of the packet in the
+ * global variable uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_arpin(void)
+{
+  if(uip_len < sizeof(struct arp_hdr)) {
+    uip_len = 0;
+    return;
+  }
+  uip_len = 0;
+
+  switch(BUF->opcode) {
+  case HTONS(ARP_REQUEST):
+    /* ARP request. If it asked for our address, we send out a
+       reply. */
+    /*    if(BUF->dipaddr[0] == uip_hostaddr[0] &&
+	  BUF->dipaddr[1] == uip_hostaddr[1]) {*/
+    PRINTF("uip_arp_arpin: request for %d.%d.%d.%d (we are %d.%d.%d.%d)\n",
+	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[0], BUF->dipaddr.u8[1],
+	   BUF->dipaddr.u8[2], BUF->dipaddr.u8[3],
+	   uip_hostaddr.u8[0], uip_hostaddr.u8[1],
+	   uip_hostaddr.u8[2], uip_hostaddr.u8[3]);
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      /* First, we register the one who made the request in our ARP
+	 table, since it is likely that we will do more communication
+	 with this host in the future. */
+      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
+
+      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REPLY);
+
+      memcpy(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, BUF->shwaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 6);
+
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &BUF->sipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+
+      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
+      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
+    }
+    break;
+  case HTONS(ARP_REPLY):
+    /* ARP reply. We insert or update the ARP table if it was meant
+       for us. */
+    if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&BUF->dipaddr, &uip_hostaddr)) {
+      uip_arp_update(&BUF->sipaddr, &BUF->shwaddr);
+    }
+    break;
+  }
+
+  return;
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * Prepend Ethernet header to an outbound IP packet and see if we need
+ * to send out an ARP request.
+ *
+ * This function should be called before sending out an IP packet. The
+ * function checks the destination IP address of the IP packet to see
+ * what Ethernet MAC address that should be used as a destination MAC
+ * address on the Ethernet.
+ *
+ * If the destination IP address is in the local network (determined
+ * by logical ANDing of netmask and our IP address), the function
+ * checks the ARP cache to see if an entry for the destination IP
+ * address is found. If so, an Ethernet header is prepended and the
+ * function returns. If no ARP cache entry is found for the
+ * destination IP address, the packet in the uip_buf[] is replaced by
+ * an ARP request packet for the IP address. The IP packet is dropped
+ * and it is assumed that they higher level protocols (e.g., TCP)
+ * eventually will retransmit the dropped packet.
+ *
+ * If the destination IP address is not on the local network, the IP
+ * address of the default router is used instead.
+ *
+ * When the function returns, a packet is present in the uip_buf[]
+ * buffer, and the length of the packet is in the global variable
+ * uip_len.
+ */
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+void
+uip_arp_out(void)
+{
+  struct arp_entry *tabptr = NULL;
+
+  /* Find the destination IP address in the ARP table and construct
+     the Ethernet header. If the destination IP address isn't on the
+     local network, we use the default router's IP address instead.
+
+     If not ARP table entry is found, we overwrite the original IP
+     packet with an ARP request for the IP address. */
+
+  /* First check if destination is a local broadcast. */
+  if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_broadcast_addr)) {
+    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, broadcast_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+  } else {
+    /* Check if the destination address is on the local network. */
+    if(!uip_ipaddr_maskcmp(&IPBUF->destipaddr, &uip_hostaddr, &uip_netmask)) {
+      /* Destination address was not on the local network, so we need to
+	 use the default router's IP address instead of the destination
+	 address when determining the MAC address. */
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &uip_draddr);
+    } else {
+      /* Else, we use the destination IP address. */
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&ipaddr, &IPBUF->destipaddr);
+    }
+
+    for(i = 0; i < UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE; ++i) {
+      tabptr = &arp_table[i];
+      if(uip_ipaddr_cmp(&ipaddr, &tabptr->ipaddr)) {
+	break;
+      }
+    }
+
+    if(i == UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE) {
+      /* The destination address was not in our ARP table, so we
+	 overwrite the IP packet with an ARP request. */
+
+      memset(BUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, 0xff, 6);
+      memset(BUF->dhwaddr.addr, 0x00, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+      memcpy(BUF->shwaddr.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->dipaddr, &ipaddr);
+      uip_ipaddr_copy(&BUF->sipaddr, &uip_hostaddr);
+      BUF->opcode = HTONS(ARP_REQUEST); /* ARP request. */
+      BUF->hwtype = HTONS(ARP_HWTYPE_ETH);
+      BUF->protocol = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
+      BUF->hwlen = 6;
+      BUF->protolen = 4;
+      BUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP);
+
+      uip_appdata = &uip_buf[UIP_TCPIP_HLEN + UIP_LLH_LEN];
+
+      uip_len = sizeof(struct arp_hdr);
+      return;
+    }
+
+    /* Build an ethernet header. */
+    memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.dest.addr, tabptr->ethaddr.addr, 6);
+  }
+  memcpy(IPBUF->ethhdr.src.addr, uip_ethaddr.addr, 6);
+
+  IPBUF->ethhdr.type = HTONS(UIP_ETHTYPE_IP);
+
+  uip_len += sizeof(struct uip_eth_hdr);
+}
+/*-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..4e78ce7b77
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uip_arp.h
@@ -0,0 +1,146 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uiparp
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Macros and definitions for the ARP module.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ */
+
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uip_arp.h,v 1.2 2006/08/26 23:58:45 oliverschmidt Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIP_ARP_H__
+#define __UIP_ARP_H__
+
+#include "uip.h"
+
+
+extern struct uip_eth_addr uip_ethaddr;
+
+/**
+ * The Ethernet header.
+ */
+struct uip_eth_hdr {
+  struct uip_eth_addr dest;
+  struct uip_eth_addr src;
+  u16_t type;
+};
+
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_ARP  0x0806
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IP   0x0800
+#define UIP_ETHTYPE_IPV6 0x86dd
+
+
+/* The uip_arp_init() function must be called before any of the other
+   ARP functions. */
+void uip_arp_init(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_ipin() function should be called whenever an IP packet
+   arrives from the Ethernet. This function refreshes the ARP table or
+   inserts a new mapping if none exists. The function assumes that an
+   IP packet with an Ethernet header is present in the uip_buf buffer
+   and that the length of the packet is in the uip_len variable. */
+/*void uip_arp_ipin(void);*/
+#define uip_arp_ipin()
+
+/* The uip_arp_arpin() should be called when an ARP packet is received
+   by the Ethernet driver. This function also assumes that the
+   Ethernet frame is present in the uip_buf buffer. When the
+   uip_arp_arpin() function returns, the contents of the uip_buf
+   buffer should be sent out on the Ethernet if the uip_len variable
+   is > 0. */
+void uip_arp_arpin(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_out() function should be called when an IP packet
+   should be sent out on the Ethernet. This function creates an
+   Ethernet header before the IP header in the uip_buf buffer. The
+   Ethernet header will have the correct Ethernet MAC destination
+   address filled in if an ARP table entry for the destination IP
+   address (or the IP address of the default router) is present. If no
+   such table entry is found, the IP packet is overwritten with an ARP
+   request and we rely on TCP to retransmit the packet that was
+   overwritten. In any case, the uip_len variable holds the length of
+   the Ethernet frame that should be transmitted. */
+void uip_arp_out(void);
+
+/* The uip_arp_timer() function should be called every ten seconds. It
+   is responsible for flushing old entries in the ARP table. */
+void uip_arp_timer(void);
+
+/** @} */
+
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uipconffunc
+ * @{
+ */
+
+
+/**
+ * Specifiy the Ethernet MAC address.
+ *
+ * The ARP code needs to know the MAC address of the Ethernet card in
+ * order to be able to respond to ARP queries and to generate working
+ * Ethernet headers.
+ *
+ * \note This macro only specifies the Ethernet MAC address to the ARP
+ * code. It cannot be used to change the MAC address of the Ethernet
+ * card.
+ *
+ * \param eaddr A pointer to a struct uip_eth_addr containing the
+ * Ethernet MAC address of the Ethernet card.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define uip_setethaddr(eaddr) do {uip_ethaddr.addr[0] = eaddr.addr[0]; \
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[1] = eaddr.addr[1];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[2] = eaddr.addr[2];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[3] = eaddr.addr[3];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[4] = eaddr.addr[4];\
+                              uip_ethaddr.addr[5] = eaddr.addr[5];} while(0)
+
+/** @} */
+
+
+#endif /* __UIP_ARP_H__ */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..520c03f25e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Lib/uip/uipopt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,740 @@
+/**
+ * \addtogroup uip
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipopt Configuration options for uIP
+ * @{
+ *
+ * uIP is configured using the per-project configuration file
+ * "uipopt.h". This file contains all compile-time options for uIP and
+ * should be tweaked to match each specific project. The uIP
+ * distribution contains a documented example "uipopt.h" that can be
+ * copied and modified for each project.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * \file
+ * Configuration options for uIP.
+ * \author Adam Dunkels <adam@dunkels.com>
+ *
+ * This file is used for tweaking various configuration options for
+ * uIP. You should make a copy of this file into one of your project's
+ * directories instead of editing this example "uipopt.h" file that
+ * comes with the uIP distribution.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Adam Dunkels.
+ * All rights reserved.
+ *
+ * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without
+ * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions
+ * are met:
+ * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
+ * 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright
+ *    notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the
+ *    documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
+ * 3. The name of the author may not be used to endorse or promote
+ *    products derived from this software without specific prior
+ *    written permission.
+ *
+ * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS
+ * OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
+ * WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE
+ * ARE DISCLAIMED.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY
+ * DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
+ * DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE
+ * GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
+ * INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY,
+ * WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING
+ * NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS
+ * SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
+ *
+ * This file is part of the uIP TCP/IP stack.
+ *
+ * $Id: uipopt.h,v 1.11 2009/04/10 00:37:48 adamdunkels Exp $
+ *
+ */
+
+#ifndef __UIPOPT_H__
+#define __UIPOPT_H__
+
+#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+#ifndef UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+#define UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN  3412
+#endif /* UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN */
+#ifndef UIP_BIG_ENDIAN
+#define UIP_BIG_ENDIAN     1234
+#endif /* UIP_BIG_ENDIAN */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptstaticconf Static configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ * These configuration options can be used for setting the IP address
+ * settings statically, but only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is set to 1. The
+ * configuration options for a specific node includes IP address,
+ * netmask and default router as well as the Ethernet address. The
+ * netmask, default router and Ethernet address are applicable only
+ * if uIP should be run over Ethernet.
+ *
+ * This options are meaningful only for the IPv4 code.
+ *
+ * All of these should be changed to suit your project.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if uIP should use a fixed IP address or not.
+ *
+ * If uIP should use a fixed IP address, the settings are set in the
+ * uipopt.h file. If not, the macros uip_sethostaddr(),
+ * uip_setdraddr() and uip_setnetmask() should be used instead.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_FIXEDADDR    0
+
+/**
+ * Ping IP address assignment.
+ *
+ * uIP uses a "ping" packets for setting its own IP address if this
+ * option is set. If so, uIP will start with an empty IP address and
+ * the destination IP address of the first incoming "ping" (ICMP echo)
+ * packet will be used for setting the hosts IP address.
+ *
+ * \note This works only if UIP_FIXEDADDR is 0.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
+#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF
+#else /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
+#define UIP_PINGADDRCONF 0
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_PINGADDRCONF */
+
+
+/**
+ * Specifies if the uIP ARP module should be compiled with a fixed
+ * Ethernet MAC address or not.
+ *
+ * If this configuration option is 0, the macro uip_setethaddr() can
+ * be used to specify the Ethernet address at run-time.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#define UIP_FIXEDETHADDR 0
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptip IP configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+/**
+ * The IP TTL (time to live) of IP packets sent by uIP.
+ *
+ * This should normally not be changed.
+ */
+#define UIP_TTL         64
+
+/**
+ * The maximum time an IP fragment should wait in the reassembly
+ * buffer before it is dropped.
+ *
+ */
+#define UIP_REASS_MAXAGE 60 /*60s*/
+
+/**
+ * Turn on support for IP packet reassembly.
+ *
+ * uIP supports reassembly of fragmented IP packets. This features
+ * requires an additional amount of RAM to hold the reassembly buffer
+ * and the reassembly code size is approximately 700 bytes.  The
+ * reassembly buffer is of the same size as the uip_buf buffer
+ * (configured by UIP_BUFSIZE).
+ *
+ * \note IP packet reassembly is not heavily tested.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
+#define UIP_REASSEMBLY UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY
+#else /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
+#define UIP_REASSEMBLY 0
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_REASSEMBLY */
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptipv6 IPv6 configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ */
+
+/** The maximum transmission unit at the IP Layer*/
+#define UIP_LINK_MTU 1280
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6
+/** Do we use IPv6 or not (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6                 0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT
+/** Do we do per %neighbor queuing during address resolution (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_QUEUE_PKT       0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS
+/** Do we do IPv6 consistency checks (highly recommended, default: yes) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_CHECKS          1
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY
+/** Do we do IPv6 fragmentation (default: no) */
+#define UIP_CONF_IPV6_REASSEMBLY      0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES
+/** Default number of IPv6 addresses associated to the node's interface */
+#define UIP_CONF_NETIF_MAX_ADDRESSES  3
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES
+/** Default number of IPv6 prefixes associated to the node's interface */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_PREFIXES     3
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS
+/** Default number of neighbors that can be stored in the %neighbor cache */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_NEIGHBORS    4
+#endif
+
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS
+/** Minimum number of default routers */
+#define UIP_CONF_ND6_MAX_DEFROUTERS   2
+#endif
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptudp UDP configuration options
+ * @{
+ *
+ * \note The UDP support in uIP is still not entirely complete; there
+ * is no support for sending or receiving broadcast or multicast
+ * packets, but it works well enough to support a number of vital
+ * applications such as DNS queries, though
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles whether UDP support should be compiled in or not.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP
+#define UIP_UDP UIP_CONF_UDP
+#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+#define UIP_UDP           1
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles if UDP checksums should be used or not.
+ *
+ * \note Support for UDP checksums is currently not included in uIP,
+ * so this option has no function.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS UIP_CONF_UDP_CHECKSUMS
+#else
+#define UIP_UDP_CHECKSUMS 0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum amount of concurrent UDP connections.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
+#define UIP_UDP_CONNS UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS
+#else /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
+#define UIP_UDP_CONNS    10
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_UDP_CONNS */
+
+/**
+ * The name of the function that should be called when UDP datagrams arrive.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipopttcp TCP configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * Toggles whether TCP support should be compiled in or not.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP
+#define UIP_TCP UIP_CONF_TCP
+#else /* UIP_CONF_TCP */
+#define UIP_TCP           1
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_TCP */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if support for opening connections from uIP should be
+ * compiled in.
+ *
+ * If the applications that are running on top of uIP for this project
+ * do not need to open outgoing TCP connections, this configuration
+ * option can be turned off to reduce the code size of uIP.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
+#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN 1
+#else /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+#define UIP_ACTIVE_OPEN UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_ACTIVE_OPEN */
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of simultaneously open TCP connections.
+ *
+ * Since the TCP connections are statically allocated, turning this
+ * configuration knob down results in less RAM used. Each TCP
+ * connection requires approximately 30 bytes of memory.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
+#define UIP_CONNS       10
+#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
+#define UIP_CONNS UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_CONNECTIONS */
+
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of simultaneously listening TCP ports.
+ *
+ * Each listening TCP port requires 2 bytes of memory.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
+#define UIP_LISTENPORTS 20
+#else /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
+#define UIP_LISTENPORTS UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_MAX_LISTENPORTS */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if support for TCP urgent data notification should be
+ * compiled in.
+ *
+ * Urgent data (out-of-band data) is a rarely used TCP feature that
+ * very seldom would be required.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_URGDATA)
+#define UIP_URGDATA      0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The initial retransmission timeout counted in timer pulses.
+ *
+ * This should not be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_RTO)
+#define UIP_RTO         3
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of times a segment should be retransmitted
+ * before the connection should be aborted.
+ *
+ * This should not be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_MAXRTX)
+#define UIP_MAXRTX      8
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum number of times a SYN segment should be retransmitted
+ * before a connection request should be deemed to have been
+ * unsuccessful.
+ *
+ * This should not need to be changed.
+ */
+#if !defined(UIP_MAXSYNRTX)
+#define UIP_MAXSYNRTX      5
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The TCP maximum segment size.
+ *
+ * This is should not be to set to more than
+ * UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN.
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
+#define UIP_TCP_MSS UIP_CONF_TCP_MSS
+#else
+#define UIP_TCP_MSS     (UIP_BUFSIZE - UIP_LLH_LEN - UIP_TCPIP_HLEN)
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The size of the advertised receiver's window.
+ *
+ * Should be set low (i.e., to the size of the uip_buf buffer) if the
+ * application is slow to process incoming data, or high (32768 bytes)
+ * if the application processes data quickly.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
+#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_TCP_MSS
+#else
+#define UIP_RECEIVE_WINDOW UIP_CONF_RECEIVE_WINDOW
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * How long a connection should stay in the TIME_WAIT state.
+ *
+ * This configuration option has no real implication, and it should be
+ * left untouched.
+ */
+#define UIP_TIME_WAIT_TIMEOUT 120
+
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptarp ARP configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The size of the ARP table.
+ *
+ * This option should be set to a larger value if this uIP node will
+ * have many connections from the local network.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
+#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE UIP_CONF_ARPTAB_SIZE
+#else
+#define UIP_ARPTAB_SIZE 8
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * The maximum age of ARP table entries measured in 10ths of seconds.
+ *
+ * An UIP_ARP_MAXAGE of 120 corresponds to 20 minutes (BSD
+ * default).
+ */
+#define UIP_ARP_MAXAGE 120
+
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptmac layer 2 options (for ipv6)
+ * @{
+ */
+
+#define UIP_DEFAULT_PREFIX_LEN 64
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptsics 6lowpan options (for ipv6)
+ * @{
+ */
+/**
+ * Timeout for packet reassembly at the 6lowpan layer
+ * (should be < 60s)
+ */
+#ifdef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
+#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAXAGE
+#else
+#define SICSLOWPAN_REASS_MAXAGE 20
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Do we compress the IP header or not (default: no)
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_COMPRESSION 0
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * If we use IPHC compression, how many address contexts do we support
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_MAX_ADDR_CONTEXTS 1
+#endif
+
+/**
+ * Do we support 6lowpan fragmentation
+ */
+#ifndef SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG
+#define SICSLOWPAN_CONF_FRAG  0
+#endif
+
+/** @} */
+
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptgeneral General configuration options
+ * @{
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The size of the uIP packet buffer.
+ *
+ * The uIP packet buffer should not be smaller than 60 bytes, and does
+ * not need to be larger than 1514 bytes. Lower size results in lower
+ * TCP throughput, larger size results in higher TCP throughput.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
+#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_LINK_MTU + UIP_LLH_LEN
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
+#define UIP_BUFSIZE UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE */
+
+
+/**
+ * Determines if statistics support should be compiled in.
+ *
+ * The statistics is useful for debugging and to show the user.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
+#define UIP_STATISTICS  0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
+#define UIP_STATISTICS UIP_CONF_STATISTICS
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_STATISTICS */
+
+/**
+ * Determines if logging of certain events should be compiled in.
+ *
+ * This is useful mostly for debugging. The function uip_log()
+ * must be implemented to suit the architecture of the project, if
+ * logging is turned on.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_LOGGING
+#define UIP_LOGGING     0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
+#define UIP_LOGGING     UIP_CONF_LOGGING
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_LOGGING */
+
+/**
+ * Broadcast support.
+ *
+ * This flag configures IP broadcast support. This is useful only
+ * together with UDP.
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ *
+ */
+#ifndef UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
+#define UIP_BROADCAST 0
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
+#define UIP_BROADCAST UIP_CONF_BROADCAST
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BROADCAST */
+
+/**
+ * Print out a uIP log message.
+ *
+ * This function must be implemented by the module that uses uIP, and
+ * is called by uIP whenever a log message is generated.
+ */
+void uip_log(char *msg);
+
+/**
+ * The link level header length.
+ *
+ * This is the offset into the uip_buf where the IP header can be
+ * found. For Ethernet, this should be set to 14. For SLIP, this
+ * should be set to 0.
+ *
+ * \note we probably won't use this constant for other link layers than
+ * ethernet as they have variable header length (this is due to variable
+ * number and type of address fields and to optional security features)
+ * E.g.: 802.15.4 -> 2 + (1/2*4/8) + 0/5/6/10/14
+ *       802.11 -> 4 + (6*3/4) + 2
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
+#define UIP_LLH_LEN UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN
+#else /* UIP_LLH_LEN */
+#define UIP_LLH_LEN     14
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_LLH_LEN */
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptcpu CPU architecture configuration
+ * @{
+ *
+ * The CPU architecture configuration is where the endianess of the
+ * CPU on which uIP is to be run is specified. Most CPUs today are
+ * little endian, and the most notable exception are the Motorolas
+ * which are big endian. The BYTE_ORDER macro should be changed to
+ * reflect the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
+ */
+
+/**
+ * The byte order of the CPU architecture on which uIP is to be run.
+ *
+ * This option can be either UIP_BIG_ENDIAN (Motorola byte order) or
+ * UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN (Intel byte order).
+ *
+ * \hideinitializer
+ */
+#ifdef UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
+#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER
+#else /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
+#define UIP_BYTE_ORDER     UIP_LITTLE_ENDIAN
+#endif /* UIP_CONF_BYTE_ORDER */
+
+/** @} */
+/*------------------------------------------------------------------------------*/
+
+#include <ff.h>
+#include <stdbool.h>
+#include <stdint.h>
+
+#include "timer.h"
+
+typedef uint8_t u8_t;
+typedef uint16_t u16_t;
+typedef uint32_t u32_t;
+typedef uint32_t uip_stats_t;
+
+/**
+ * \defgroup uipoptapp Application specific configurations
+ * @{
+ *
+ * An uIP application is implemented using a single application
+ * function that is called by uIP whenever a TCP/IP event occurs. The
+ * name of this function must be registered with uIP at compile time
+ * using the UIP_APPCALL definition.
+ *
+ * uIP applications can store the application state within the
+ * uip_conn structure by specifying the type of the application
+ * structure by typedef:ing the type uip_tcp_appstate_t and uip_udp_appstate_t.
+ *
+ * The file containing the definitions must be included in the
+ * uipopt.h file.
+ *
+ * The following example illustrates how this can look.
+ \code
+
+ void httpd_appcall(void);
+ #define UIP_APPCALL     httpd_appcall
+
+ struct httpd_state {
+ u8_t state;
+ u16_t count;
+ char *dataptr;
+ char *script;
+ };
+ typedef struct httpd_state uip_tcp_appstate_t
+ \endcode
+*/
+#define UIP_UDP_APPCALL uIPManagement_UDPCallback
+void UIP_UDP_APPCALL(void);
+
+/**
+ * \var #define UIP_APPCALL
+ *
+ * The name of the application function that uIP should call in
+ * response to TCP/IP events.
+ *
+ */
+#define UIP_APPCALL     uIPManagement_TCPCallback
+void UIP_APPCALL(void);
+
+/**
+ * \var typedef uip_tcp_appstate_t
+ *
+ * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
+ * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
+ * application state information.
+ */
+typedef union
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  CurrentState;
+		uint8_t  NextState;
+
+		char     FileName[MAX_URI_LENGTH];
+		FIL      FileHandle;
+		bool     FileOpen;
+		uint32_t ACKedFilePos;
+		uint16_t SentChunkSize;
+	} HTTPServer;
+
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t  CurrentState;
+		uint8_t  NextState;
+
+		uint8_t  IssuedCommand;
+	} TELNETServer;
+} uip_tcp_appstate_t;
+
+/**
+ * \var typedef uip_udp_appstate_t
+ *
+ * The type of the application state that is to be stored in the
+ * uip_conn structure. This usually is typedef:ed to a struct holding
+ * application state information.
+ */
+typedef union
+{
+	struct
+	{
+		uint8_t      CurrentState;
+		struct timer Timeout;
+
+		struct
+		{
+			uint8_t AllocatedIP[4];
+			uint8_t Netmask[4];
+			uint8_t GatewayIP[4];
+			uint8_t ServerIP[4];
+		} DHCPOffer_Data;
+	} DHCPClient;
+} uip_udp_appstate_t;
+/** @} */
+
+#endif /* __UIPOPT_H__ */
+/** @} */
+/** @} */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..b2c6b39094
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.c
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
+ *  manage the USB Mass Storage device mode.
+ */
+
+#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
+
+/** Message buffer for RNDIS messages processed by the RNDIS device class driver. */
+static uint8_t RNDIS_Message_Buffer[192];
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.AdapterVendorDescription       = "LUFA RNDIS Adapter",
+				.AdapterMACAddress              = {{0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00, 0x02, 0x00}},
+				.MessageBuffer                  = RNDIS_Message_Buffer,
+				.MessageBufferLength            = sizeof(RNDIS_Message_Buffer),
+			},
+	};
+
+/** LUFA Mass Storage Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all Mass Storage Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t Disk_MS_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.InterfaceNumber                = INTERFACE_ID_MassStorage,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_IN_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = MASS_STORAGE_OUT_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = MASS_STORAGE_IO_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.TotalLUNs                 = 1,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** USB device mode management task. This function manages the Mass Storage Device class driver when the device is
+ *  initialized in USB device mode.
+ */
+void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Device)
+	  return;
+
+	uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
+
+	RNDIS_Device_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
+	MS_Device_USBTask(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uIPManagement_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	ConfigSuccess &= RNDIS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
+	ConfigSuccess &= MS_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	RNDIS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device);
+	MS_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&Disk_MS_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Mass Storage class driver callback function the reception of SCSI commands from the host, which must be processed.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] MSInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the Mass Storage class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	bool CommandSuccess;
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_BUSY);
+	CommandSuccess = SCSI_DecodeSCSICommand(MSInterfaceInfo);
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+
+	return CommandSuccess;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..fe584e5644
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBDeviceMode.h
@@ -0,0 +1,62 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBDeviceMode.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
+#define _USBDEVICEMODE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Webserver.h"
+		#include "Descriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
+		#include "Lib/SCSI.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Device_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Device;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void USBDeviceMode_USBTask(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+
+		bool CALLBACK_MS_Device_SCSICommandReceived(USB_ClassInfo_MS_Device_t* const MSInterfaceInfo);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f4179e5ef0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.c
@@ -0,0 +1,172 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Host Mode management functions and variables. This file contains the LUFA code required to
+ *  manage the USB RNDIS host mode.
+ */
+
+#include "USBHostMode.h"
+
+/** LUFA RNDIS Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all RNDIS Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.DataINPipe             =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 1),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTPipe            =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_OUT | 2),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationPipe       =
+					{
+						.Address        = (PIPE_DIR_IN  | 3),
+						.Banks          = 1,
+					},
+				.HostMaxPacketSize      = UIP_CONF_BUFFER_SIZE,
+			},
+	};
+
+
+/** USB host mode management task. This function manages the RNDIS Host class driver and uIP stack when the device is
+ *  initialized in USB host mode.
+ */
+void USBHostMode_USBTask(void)
+{
+	if (USB_CurrentMode != USB_MODE_Host)
+	  return;
+
+	uIPManagement_ManageNetwork();
+
+	RNDIS_Host_USBTask(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceAttached event. This indicates that a device has been attached to the host, and
+ *  starts the library USB task to begin the enumeration and USB management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceUnattached event. This indicates that a device has been removed from the host, and
+ *  stops the library USB task management process.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationComplete event. This indicates that a device has been successfully
+ *  enumerated by the host and is now ready to be used by the application.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+
+	uint16_t ConfigDescriptorSize;
+	uint8_t  ConfigDescriptorData[512];
+
+	if (USB_Host_GetDeviceConfigDescriptor(1, &ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData,
+	                                       sizeof(ConfigDescriptorData)) != HOST_GETCONFIG_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_ConfigurePipes(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host,
+	                              ConfigDescriptorSize, ConfigDescriptorData) != RNDIS_ENUMERROR_NoError)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(1) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_InitializeDevice(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	uint32_t PacketFilter = (REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_DIRECTED | REMOTE_NDIS_PACKET_BROADCAST);
+	if (RNDIS_Host_SetRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_GEN_CURRENT_PACKET_FILTER,
+	                                &PacketFilter, sizeof(PacketFilter)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	if (RNDIS_Host_QueryRNDISProperty(&Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host, OID_802_3_CURRENT_ADDRESS,
+	                                  &MACAddress, sizeof(MACAddress)) != HOST_SENDCONTROL_Successful)
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+		USB_Host_SetDeviceConfiguration(0);
+		return;
+	}
+
+	/* Initialize uIP stack */
+	uIPManagement_Init();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_HostError event. This indicates that a hardware error occurred while in host mode. */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode)
+{
+	USB_Disable();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+	for(;;);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the USB_DeviceEnumerationFailed event. This indicates that a problem occurred while
+ *  enumerating an attached USB device.
+ */
+void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode, const uint8_t SubErrorCode)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..be4eddbbbb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/USBHostMode.h
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USBHostMode.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USBHOSTMODE_H_
+#define _USBHOSTMODE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Webserver.h"
+		#include "Lib/uIPManagement.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern USB_ClassInfo_RNDIS_Host_t Ethernet_RNDIS_Interface_Host;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void USBHostMode_USBTask(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_HostError(const uint8_t ErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceAttached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceUnattached(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationFailed(const uint8_t ErrorCode,
+		                                            const uint8_t SubErrorCode);
+		void EVENT_USB_Host_DeviceEnumerationComplete(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..caa372b943
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.c
@@ -0,0 +1,77 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the Webserver project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "Webserver.h"
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine configures the hardware required by the application, then
+ *  enters a loop to run the application tasks in sequence.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (USB_CurrentMode == USB_MODE_Host)
+		  USBHostMode_USBTask();
+		else
+		  USBDeviceMode_USBTask();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	Dataflash_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	USB_Init(USB_MODE_UID);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..5879ff3ec1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.h
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for Webserver.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _WEBSERVER_H_
+#define _WEBSERVER_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/Dataflash.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Peripheral/SPI.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+		#include "USBDeviceMode.h"
+		#include "USBHostMode.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY          LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING      (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED2)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY             LEDS_LED2
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR            (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3)
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_BUSY             (LEDS_LED1 | LEDS_LED3 | LEDS_LED4)
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..10aa716528
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/Webserver.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,126 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage uIP Powered Webserver Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li Series 7 USB AVRs (AT90USBxxx7)
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Dual Mode Host/Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Communications Device Class (CDC) \n
+ *        Mass Storage Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Remote NDIS (Microsoft Proprietary CDC Class Networking Standard) \n
+ *        Bulk-Only Transport</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Microsoft RNDIS Specification \n
+ *        USBIF Mass Storage Standard \n
+ *        USB Bulk-Only Transport Standard \n
+ *        SCSI Primary Commands Specification \n
+ *        SCSI Block Commands Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  Simple HTTP webserver project. This project combines the LUFA library with the uIP TCP/IP full network stack and FatFS
+ *  library to create a RNDIS host capable of serving out HTTP web pages to multiple hosts simultaneously. This project
+ *  demonstrates how the libraries can be combined into a robust network enabled application, with the addition of a RNDIS
+ *  network device.
+ *
+ *  To use this project, plug the USB AVR into a computer, so that it enumerates as a standard Mass Storage and RNDIS composite
+ *  device. Load HTML files onto the disk, so that they can be served out to clients -- the default file to serve should be called
+ *  <i>index.htm</i>. Filenames must be in 8.3 format for them to be retrieved correctly by the webserver, and the total
+ *  requested file path must be equal to or less than the maximum URI length (\see \ref Sec_Options). Supply the included INF
+ *  file when requested on Windows machines to enable the RNDIS interface, and allow the files to be viewed on a standard web-browser
+ *  using the IP address 10.0.0.2.
+ *
+ *  When attached to a RNDIS class device, such as a USB (desktop) modem, the system will enumerate the device, set the
+ *  appropriate parameters needed for connectivity and begin listening for new HTTP connections on port 80 and TELNET
+ *  connections on port 23. The device IP, netmask and default gateway IP must be set to values appropriate for the RNDIS
+ *  device being used for this project to work if the DHCP client is disabled (see \ref Sec_Options) - otherwise, the device
+ *  will query the network's DHCP server for these parameters automatically.
+ *
+ *  When properly configured, the webserver can be accessed from any HTTP web browser by typing in the device's statically or
+ *  dynamically allocated IP address. The TELNET client can be accessed via any network socket app by connecting to the device
+ *  on port 23 on the device's statically or dynamically allocated IP address.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_TELNET_SERVER</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the TELNET server in addition to the HTTP webserver, which listens for incoming connections
+ *        and processes user commands.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP client for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings from a DHCP server.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>ENABLE_DHCP_SERVER</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>When defined, this enables the DHCP server for dynamic IP allocation of the network settings to a DHCP client.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_IP_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>IP address that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_NETMASK</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Netmask that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>DEVICE_GATEWAY</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Default routing gateway that the webserver should use when connected to a RNDIS device (when ENABLE_DHCP_CLIENT
+ *        is not defined).</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>MAX_URI_LENGTH</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Maximum length of a URI for the Webserver. This is the maximum file path, including subdirectories and separators.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>SERVER_MAC_ADDRESS</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>MAC address of the server used when sending Ethernet packets onto the bus.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ea6b4c66f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="RNDIS Webserver" id="lufa.projects.webserver.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.webserver"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.webserver" caption="RNDIS Webserver">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		RNDIS Webserver project, using the open source uIP network stack.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Dual Role"/>

+			<keyword value="RNDIS Class"/>

+			<keyword value="Mass Storage Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="Webserver.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA Webserver RNDIS.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Webserver.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="USBDeviceMode.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="USBHostMode.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Descriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Webserver.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USBDeviceMode.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USBHostMode.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Descriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DataflashManager.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DataflashManager.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPClientApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPCommon.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/DHCPServerApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/HTTPServerApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SCSI.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SCSI.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/TELNETServerApp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uIPManagement.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uIPManagement.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/FATFs/"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ff.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/diskio.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/ffconf.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/FATFs/integer.h"/>

+

+		<build type="include-path" value="Lib/uip/"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/clock.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/clock.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/timer.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/timer.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip_arp.h"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uip-split.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/uip/uipopt.h"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.dataflash"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.peripheral.spi"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..419cf11fd0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2365 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - uIP Powered Webserver Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       = */uip/* \
+                         */FATFs/*
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..2a7bb37a47
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/Webserver/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,41 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = USBKEY
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = Webserver
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Descriptors.c USBDeviceMode.c USBHostMode.c Lib/SCSI.c Lib/DataflashManager.c \
+               Lib/uIPManagement.c Lib/DHCPCommon.c Lib/DHCPClientApp.c Lib/DHCPServerApp.c Lib/HTTPServerApp.c \
+               Lib/TELNETServerApp.c Lib/uip/uip.c Lib/uip/uip_arp.c Lib/uip/timer.c Lib/uip/clock.c \
+               Lib/uip/uip-split.c Lib/FATFs/diskio.c Lib/FATFs/ff.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -ILib/uip/ -ILib/FATFs/
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7163fc9c03
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/AppConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief Application Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This is a header file which is be used to configure some of
+ *  the application's compile time options, as an alternative to
+ *  specifying the compile time constants supplied through a
+ *  makefile or build system.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the
+ *  \ref Sec_Options section of the application documentation.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _APP_CONFIG_H_
+#define _APP_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#define AUX_LINE_PORT              PORTB
+	#define AUX_LINE_PIN               PINB
+	#define AUX_LINE_DDR               DDRB
+	#define AUX_LINE_MASK              (1 << 4)
+
+//	#define ENABLE_ISP_PROTOCOL
+	#define ENABLE_XPROG_PROTOCOL
+
+	#define VTARGET_ADC_CHANNEL        2
+	#define VTARGET_REF_VOLTS          3.3
+	#define VTARGET_SCALE_FACTOR       2
+//	#define VTARGET_USE_INTERNAL_REF
+//	#define NO_VTARGET_DETECT
+//	#define XCK_RESCUE_CLOCK_ENABLE
+//	#define INVERTED_ISP_MISO
+
+//	#define LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT
+//	#define RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT
+//	#define FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR     0x11
+
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..ec38aa6476
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Config/LUFAConfig.h
@@ -0,0 +1,93 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *  \brief LUFA Library Configuration Header File
+ *
+ *  This header file is used to configure LUFA's compile time options,
+ *  as an alternative to the compile time constants supplied through
+ *  a makefile.
+ *
+ *  For information on what each token does, refer to the LUFA
+ *  manual section "Summary of Compile Tokens".
+ */
+
+#ifndef _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+#define _LUFA_CONFIG_H_
+
+	#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+
+		/* Non-USB Related Configuration Tokens: */
+//		#define DISABLE_TERMINAL_CODES
+
+		/* USB Class Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HID_HOST_BOOT_PROTOCOL_ONLY
+//		#define HID_STATETABLE_STACK_DEPTH       {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_USAGE_STACK_DEPTH            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_COLLECTIONS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORTITEMS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HID_MAX_REPORT_IDS               {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_CLASS_DRIVER_AUTOFLUSH
+
+		/* General USB Driver Related Tokens: */
+		#define ORDERED_EP_CONFIG
+		#define USE_STATIC_OPTIONS               (USB_DEVICE_OPT_FULLSPEED | USB_OPT_REG_ENABLED | USB_OPT_AUTO_PLL)
+		#define USB_DEVICE_ONLY
+//		#define USB_HOST_ONLY
+//		#define USB_STREAM_TIMEOUT_MS            {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_LIMITED_CONTROLLER_CONNECT
+		#define NO_SOF_EVENTS
+
+		/* USB Device Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define USE_RAM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_FLASH_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define USE_EEPROM_DESCRIPTORS
+//		#define NO_INTERNAL_SERIAL
+		#define FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE      16
+		#define DEVICE_STATE_AS_GPIOR            0
+		#define FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS         1
+//		#define CONTROL_ONLY_DEVICE
+//		#define INTERRUPT_CONTROL_ENDPOINT
+		#define NO_DEVICE_REMOTE_WAKEUP
+		#define NO_DEVICE_SELF_POWER
+
+		/* USB Host Mode Driver Related Tokens: */
+//		#define HOST_STATE_AS_GPIOR              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define USB_HOST_TIMEOUT_MS              {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define HOST_DEVICE_SETTLE_DELAY_MS	     {Insert Value Here}
+//		#define NO_AUTO_VBUS_MANAGEMENT
+//		#define INVERTED_VBUS_ENABLE_LINE
+
+	#else
+
+		#error Unsupported architecture for this LUFA configuration file.
+
+	#endif
+#endif
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..45840e8bf0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+;************************************************************
+; Windows USB CDC ACM Setup File
+; Copyright (c) 2000 Microsoft Corporation
+;************************************************************
+
+[DefaultInstall]
+CopyINF="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf"
+
+[Version]
+Signature="$Windows NT$"
+Class=Ports
+ClassGuid={4D36E978-E325-11CE-BFC1-08002BE10318}
+Provider=%MFGNAME%
+DriverVer=7/1/2012,10.0.0.0
+
+[Manufacturer]
+%MFGNAME%=DeviceList, NTx86, NTamd64, NTia64
+
+[SourceDisksNames]
+
+[SourceDisksFiles]
+
+[DestinationDirs]
+DefaultDestDir=12
+
+[DriverInstall]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+CopyFiles=FakeModemCopyFileSection
+AddReg=DriverInstall.AddReg
+
+[DriverInstall.Services]
+Include=mdmcpq.inf
+AddService=usbser, 0x00000002, LowerFilter_Service_Inst
+
+[DriverInstall.AddReg]
+HKR,,EnumPropPages32,,"msports.dll,SerialPortPropPageProvider"
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  Vendor and Product ID Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+; When developing your USB device, the VID and PID used in the PC side
+; application program and the firmware on the microcontroller must match.
+; Modify the below line to use your VID and PID.  Use the format as shown below.
+; Note: One INF file can be used for multiple devices with different VID and PIDs.
+; For each supported device, append ",USB\VID_xxxx&PID_yyyy" to the end of the line.
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[DeviceList]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTx86]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTamd64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+[DeviceList.NTia64]
+%DESCRIPTION%=DriverInstall, USB\VID_03EB&PID_204B
+
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;  String Definitions
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+;Modify these strings to customize your device
+;------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+[Strings]
+MFGNAME="http://www.lufa-lib.org"
+DESCRIPTION="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge"
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..0290ca2045
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.c
@@ -0,0 +1,156 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Software UART for both data transmission and reception. This
+ *  code continuously monitors the ring buffers set up by the main
+ *  project source file and reads/writes data as it becomes available.
+ */
+
+#include "SoftUART.h"
+
+/** Total number of bits remaining to be sent in the current frame */
+static uint8_t TX_BitsRemaining;
+
+/** Temporary data variable to hold the byte being transmitted as it is shifted out */
+static uint8_t TX_Data;
+
+/** Total number of bits remaining to be received in the current frame */
+static uint8_t RX_BitsRemaining;
+
+/** Temporary data variable to hold the byte being received as it is shifted in */
+static uint8_t RX_Data;
+
+
+/** Initializes the software UART, ready for data transmission and reception into the global ring buffers. */
+void SoftUART_Init(void)
+{
+	/* Set TX pin to output high, enable RX pull-up */
+	STXPORT |= (1 << STX);
+	STXDDR  |= (1 << STX);
+	SRXPORT |= (1 << SRX);
+
+	/* Enable INT0 for the detection of incoming start bits that signal the start of a byte */
+	EICRA  = (1 << ISC01);
+	EIMSK  = (1 << INT0);
+
+	/* Set the transmission and reception timer compare values for the default baud rate */
+	SoftUART_SetBaud(9600);
+
+	/* Setup reception timer compare ISR */
+	TIMSK1 = (1 << OCIE1A);
+
+	/* Setup transmission timer compare ISR and start the timer */
+	TIMSK3 = (1 << OCIE3A);
+	TCCR3B = ((1 << CS30) | (1 << WGM32));
+}
+
+/** ISR to detect the start of a bit being sent to the software UART. */
+ISR(INT0_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Reset the number of reception bits remaining counter */
+	RX_BitsRemaining = 8;
+
+	/* Reset the bit reception timer to -(1/2) of the total bit time, so that the first data bit is
+	 * sampled mid way through the total bit time, making reception more robust.
+	 */
+	TCNT1 = -(OCR1A >> 1);
+
+	/* Check to see that the pin is still low (prevents glitches from starting a frame reception) */
+	if (!(SRXPIN & (1 << SRX)))
+	{
+		/* Disable start bit detection ISR while the next byte is received */
+		EIMSK = 0;
+
+		/* Start the reception timer */
+		TCCR1B = ((1 << CS10) | (1 << WGM12));
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the reception of bits to the software UART. */
+ISR(TIMER1_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Cache the current RX pin value for later checking */
+	uint8_t SRX_Cached = (SRXPIN & (1 << SRX));
+
+	/* Check if reception has finished */
+	if (RX_BitsRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Shift the current received bit mask to the next bit position */
+		RX_Data >>= 1;
+		RX_BitsRemaining--;
+
+		/* Store next bit into the received data variable */
+		if (SRX_Cached)
+		  RX_Data |= (1 << 7);
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		/* Disable the reception timer as all data has now been received, re-enable start bit detection ISR */
+		TCCR1B = 0;
+		EIFR   = (1 << INTF0);
+		EIMSK  = (1 << INT0);
+
+		/* Reception complete, store the received byte if stop bit valid */
+		if (SRX_Cached)
+		  RingBuffer_Insert(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, RX_Data);
+	}
+}
+
+/** ISR to manage the transmission of bits via the software UART. */
+ISR(TIMER3_COMPA_vect, ISR_BLOCK)
+{
+	/* Check if transmission has finished */
+	if (TX_BitsRemaining)
+	{
+		/* Set the TX line to the value of the next bit in the byte to send */
+		if (TX_Data & (1 << 0))
+		  STXPORT &= ~(1 << STX);
+		else
+		  STXPORT |=  (1 << STX);
+
+		/* Shift the transmission byte to move the next bit into position and decrement the bits remaining counter */
+		TX_Data >>= 1;
+		TX_BitsRemaining--;
+	}
+	else if (!(RX_BitsRemaining) && !(RingBuffer_IsEmpty(&USBtoUART_Buffer)))
+	{
+		/* Start bit - TX line low */
+		STXPORT &= ~(1 << STX);
+
+		/* Transmission complete, get the next byte to send (if available) */
+		TX_Data          = ~RingBuffer_Remove(&USBtoUART_Buffer);
+		TX_BitsRemaining = 9;
+	}
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..59a2d9c29c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/Lib/SoftUART.h
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2010  David Prentice (david.prentice [at] farming [dot] uk)
+  Copyright 2010  Peter Danneger
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for SoftUART.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _SOFT_UART_
+#define _SOFT_UART_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <stdbool.h>
+
+		#include "../XPLAINBridge.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		#define SRX        PD0
+		#define SRXPIN     PIND
+		#define SRXPORT    PORTD
+
+		#define STX        PD1
+		#define STXPORT    PORTD
+		#define STXDDR     DDRD
+
+	/* Inline Functions: */
+		static inline void SoftUART_SetBaud(const uint32_t Baud)
+		{
+			uint16_t BitTime = ((F_CPU / Baud) - 1);
+
+			OCR1A = BitTime;
+			OCR3A = BitTime;
+		}
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SoftUART_Init(void);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..439a5f58ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.c
@@ -0,0 +1,245 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  USB Device Descriptors, for library use when in USB device mode. Descriptors are special
+ *  computer-readable structures which the host requests upon device enumeration, to determine
+ *  the device's capabilities and functions.
+ */
+
+#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
+
+
+/** Device descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the overall
+ *  device characteristics, including the supported USB version, control endpoint size and the
+ *  number of device configurations. The descriptor is read out by the USB host when the enumeration
+ *  process begins.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_Device_t PROGMEM USART_DeviceDescriptor =
+{
+	.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t), .Type = DTYPE_Device},
+
+	.USBSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+	.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+	.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificSubclass,
+	.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoSpecificProtocol,
+
+	.Endpoint0Size          = FIXED_CONTROL_ENDPOINT_SIZE,
+
+	.VendorID               = 0x03EB,
+	.ProductID              = 0x204B,
+	.ReleaseNumber          = VERSION_BCD(0,0,1),
+
+	.ManufacturerStrIndex   = USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer,
+	.ProductStrIndex        = USART_STRING_ID_Product,
+	.SerialNumStrIndex      = USE_INTERNAL_SERIAL,
+
+	.NumberOfConfigurations = FIXED_NUM_CONFIGURATIONS
+};
+
+/** Configuration descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, describes the usage
+ *  of the device in one of its supported configurations, including information about any device interfaces
+ *  and endpoints. The descriptor is read out by the USB host during the enumeration process when selecting
+ *  a configuration so that the host may correctly communicate with the USB device.
+ */
+const USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t PROGMEM USART_ConfigurationDescriptor =
+{
+	.Config =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t), .Type = DTYPE_Configuration},
+
+			.TotalConfigurationSize = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t),
+			.TotalInterfaces        = 2,
+
+			.ConfigurationNumber    = 1,
+			.ConfigurationStrIndex  = NO_DESCRIPTOR,
+
+			.ConfigAttributes       = USB_CONFIG_ATTR_RESERVED,
+
+			.MaxPowerConsumption    = USB_CONFIG_POWER_MA(100)
+		},
+
+	.CDC_CCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 1,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_ACMSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_ATCommandProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Header =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Header,
+
+			.CDCSpecification       = VERSION_BCD(1,1,0),
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_ACM =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_ACM,
+
+			.Capabilities           = 0x06,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_Functional_Union =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t), .Type = DTYPE_CSInterface},
+			.Subtype                = CDC_DSUBTYPE_CSInterface_Union,
+
+			.MasterInterfaceNumber  = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+			.SlaveInterfaceNumber   = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+		},
+
+	.CDC_NotificationEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_INTERRUPT | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0xFF
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DCI_Interface =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Interface_t), .Type = DTYPE_Interface},
+
+			.InterfaceNumber        = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI,
+			.AlternateSetting       = 0,
+
+			.TotalEndpoints         = 2,
+
+			.Class                  = CDC_CSCP_CDCDataClass,
+			.SubClass               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataSubclass,
+			.Protocol               = CDC_CSCP_NoDataProtocol,
+
+			.InterfaceStrIndex      = NO_DESCRIPTOR
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataOutEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		},
+
+	.CDC_DataInEndpoint =
+		{
+			.Header                 = {.Size = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t), .Type = DTYPE_Endpoint},
+
+			.EndpointAddress        = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+			.Attributes             = (EP_TYPE_BULK | ENDPOINT_ATTR_NO_SYNC | ENDPOINT_USAGE_DATA),
+			.EndpointSize           = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+			.PollingIntervalMS      = 0x05
+		}
+};
+
+/** Language descriptor structure. This descriptor, located in FLASH memory, is returned when the host requests
+ *  the string descriptor with index 0 (the first index). It is actually an array of 16-bit integers, which indicate
+ *  via the language ID table available at USB.org what languages the device supports for its string descriptors.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_LanguageString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR_ARRAY(LANGUAGE_ID_ENG);
+
+/** Manufacturer descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the manufacturer's details in human readable
+ *  form, and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ManufacturerString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"Dean Camera");
+
+/** Product descriptor string. This is a Unicode string containing the product's details in human readable form,
+ *  and is read out upon request by the host when the appropriate string ID is requested, listed in the Device
+ *  Descriptor.
+ */
+const USB_Descriptor_String_t PROGMEM USART_ProductString = USB_STRING_DESCRIPTOR(L"LUFA XPLAIN Bridge");
+
+/** Descriptor retrieval function for the USART Bridge descriptors. This function is in turn called by the GetDescriptor
+ *  callback function in the main source file, to retrieve the device's descriptors when in USART bridge mode.
+ */
+uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                             const uint8_t wIndex,
+                             const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+                             uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorType   = (wValue >> 8);
+	const uint8_t  DescriptorNumber = (wValue & 0xFF);
+
+	const void* Address = NULL;
+	uint16_t    Size    = NO_DESCRIPTOR;
+
+	*DescriptorMemorySpace = MEMSPACE_FLASH;
+
+	switch (DescriptorType)
+	{
+		case DTYPE_Device:
+			Address = &USART_DeviceDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USB_Descriptor_Device_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_Configuration:
+			Address = &USART_ConfigurationDescriptor;
+			Size    = sizeof(USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t);
+			break;
+		case DTYPE_String:
+			switch (DescriptorNumber)
+			{
+				case USART_STRING_ID_Language:
+					Address = &USART_LanguageString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_LanguageString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer:
+					Address = &USART_ManufacturerString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ManufacturerString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+				case USART_STRING_ID_Product:
+					Address = &USART_ProductString;
+					Size    = pgm_read_byte(&USART_ProductString.Header.Size);
+					break;
+			}
+
+			break;
+	}
+
+	*DescriptorAddress = Address;
+	return Size;
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..c77931cf91
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/USARTDescriptors.h
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for USARTDescriptors.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+#define _USART_DESCRIPTORS_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/pgmspace.h>
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR        (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 2)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC device-to-host data IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_TX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_IN  | 3)
+
+		/** Endpoint address of the CDC host-to-device data OUT endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_RX_EPADDR                  (ENDPOINT_DIR_OUT | 4)
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC device-to-host notification IN endpoint. */
+		#define CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE        8
+
+		/** Size in bytes of the CDC data IN and OUT endpoints. */
+		#define CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE                16
+
+	/* Type Defines: */
+		/** Type define for the device configuration descriptor structure. This must be defined in the
+		 *  application code, as the configuration descriptor contains several sub-descriptors which
+		 *  vary between devices, and which describe the device's usage to the host.
+		 */
+		typedef struct
+		{
+			USB_Descriptor_Configuration_Header_t    Config;
+
+			// CDC Control Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_CCI_Interface;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalHeader_t    CDC_Functional_Header;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalACM_t       CDC_Functional_ACM;
+			USB_CDC_Descriptor_FunctionalUnion_t     CDC_Functional_Union;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_NotificationEndpoint;
+
+			// CDC Data Interface
+			USB_Descriptor_Interface_t               CDC_DCI_Interface;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataOutEndpoint;
+			USB_Descriptor_Endpoint_t                CDC_DataInEndpoint;
+		} USART_USB_Descriptor_Configuration_t;
+
+		/** Enum for the device interface descriptor IDs within the device. Each interface descriptor
+		 *  should have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the
+		 *  interface from other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum USART_InterfaceDescriptors_t
+		{
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI = 0, /**< CDC CCI interface descriptor ID */
+			INTERFACE_ID_CDC_DCI = 1, /**< CDC DCI interface descriptor ID */
+		};
+
+		/** Enum for the device string descriptor IDs within the device. Each string descriptor should
+		 *  have a unique ID index associated with it, which can be used to refer to the string from
+		 *  other descriptors.
+		 */
+		enum USART_StringDescriptors_t
+		{
+			USART_STRING_ID_Language     = 0, /**< Supported Languages string descriptor ID (must be zero) */
+			USART_STRING_ID_Manufacturer = 1, /**< Manufacturer string ID */
+			USART_STRING_ID_Product      = 2, /**< Product string ID */
+		};
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		uint16_t USART_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                             const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                             const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                             uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7c24c973ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.c
@@ -0,0 +1,294 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Main source file for the XPLAINBridge project. This file contains the main tasks of
+ *  the project and is responsible for the initial application hardware configuration.
+ */
+
+#include "XPLAINBridge.h"
+
+/** Current firmware mode, making the device behave as either a programmer or a USART bridge */
+bool CurrentFirmwareMode = MODE_USART_BRIDGE;
+
+/** LUFA CDC Class driver interface configuration and state information. This structure is
+ *  passed to all CDC Class driver functions, so that multiple instances of the same class
+ *  within a device can be differentiated from one another.
+ */
+USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface =
+	{
+		.Config =
+			{
+				.ControlInterfaceNumber         = INTERFACE_ID_CDC_CCI,
+				.DataINEndpoint                 =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_TX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.DataOUTEndpoint                =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_RX_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_TXRX_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+				.NotificationEndpoint           =
+					{
+						.Address                = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPADDR,
+						.Size                   = CDC_NOTIFICATION_EPSIZE,
+						.Banks                  = 1,
+					},
+			},
+	};
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the host before it is sent to the device via the serial port. */
+RingBuffer_t   USBtoUART_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref USBtoUART_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t USBtoUART_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+/** Circular buffer to hold data from the serial port before it is sent to the host. */
+RingBuffer_t   UARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+
+/** Underlying data buffer for \ref UARTtoUSB_Buffer, where the stored bytes are located. */
+static uint8_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data[128];
+
+
+/** Main program entry point. This routine contains the overall program flow, including initial
+ *  setup of all components and the main program loop.
+ */
+int main(void)
+{
+	SetupHardware();
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+	GlobalInterruptEnable();
+
+	for (;;)
+	{
+		if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+		  UARTBridge_Task();
+		else
+		  AVRISP_Task();
+
+		USB_USBTask();
+	}
+}
+
+void AVRISP_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Must be in the configured state for the AVRISP code to process data */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	V2Params_UpdateParamValues();
+
+	Endpoint_SelectEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR);
+
+	/* Check to see if a V2 Protocol command has been received */
+	if (Endpoint_IsOUTReceived())
+	{
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_BUSY);
+
+		/* Pass off processing of the V2 Protocol command to the V2 Protocol handler */
+		V2Protocol_ProcessCommand();
+
+		LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_READY);
+	}
+}
+
+void UARTBridge_Task(void)
+{
+	/* Must be in the configured state for the USART Bridge code to process data */
+	if (USB_DeviceState != DEVICE_STATE_Configured)
+	  return;
+
+	/* Only try to read in bytes from the CDC interface if the transmit buffer is not full */
+	if (!(RingBuffer_IsFull(&USBtoUART_Buffer)))
+	{
+		int16_t ReceivedByte = CDC_Device_ReceiveByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		/* Read bytes from the USB OUT endpoint into the UART transmit buffer */
+		if (!(ReceivedByte < 0))
+		  RingBuffer_Insert(&USBtoUART_Buffer, ReceivedByte);
+	}
+
+	/* Check if the UART receive buffer flush timer has expired or buffer is nearly full */
+	uint16_t BufferCount = RingBuffer_GetCount(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+	if ((TIFR0 & (1 << TOV0)) || (BufferCount > 200))
+	{
+		/* Clear flush timer expiry flag */
+		TIFR0 |= (1 << TOV0);
+
+		/* Read bytes from the USART receive buffer into the USB IN endpoint */
+		while (BufferCount--)
+		{
+			/* Try to send the next byte of data to the host, abort if there is an error without dequeuing */
+			if (CDC_Device_SendByte(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface,
+									RingBuffer_Peek(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer)) != ENDPOINT_READYWAIT_NoError)
+			{
+				break;
+			}
+
+			/* Dequeue the already sent byte from the buffer now we have confirmed that no transmission error occurred */
+			RingBuffer_Remove(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer);
+		}
+	}
+
+	CDC_Device_USBTask(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Configures the board hardware and chip peripherals for the demo's functionality. */
+void SetupHardware(void)
+{
+#if (ARCH == ARCH_AVR8)
+	/* Disable watchdog if enabled by bootloader/fuses */
+	MCUSR &= ~(1 << WDRF);
+	wdt_disable();
+
+	/* Disable clock division */
+	clock_prescale_set(clock_div_1);
+#endif
+
+	/* Disable JTAG debugging */
+	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
+	MCUCR |= (1 << JTD);
+
+	/* Enable pull-up on the JTAG TDI pin so we can use it to select the mode */
+	PORTF |= (1 << 7);
+	Delay_MS(10);
+
+	/* Select the firmware mode based on the JTD pin's value */
+	CurrentFirmwareMode = (PINF & (1 << 7)) ? MODE_USART_BRIDGE : MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER;
+
+	/* Re-enable JTAG debugging */
+	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
+	MCUCR &= ~(1 << JTD);
+
+	/* Hardware Initialization */
+	SoftUART_Init();
+	LEDs_Init();
+	#if defined(RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT)
+	UpdateCurrentCompatibilityMode();
+	#endif
+
+	/* USB Stack Initialization */
+	USB_Init();
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Configuration Changed event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void)
+{
+	bool ConfigSuccess = true;
+
+	/* Configure the device endpoints according to the selected mode */
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	{
+		ConfigSuccess &= CDC_Device_ConfigureEndpoints(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+
+		/* Configure the UART flush timer - run at Fcpu/1024 for maximum interval before overflow */
+		TCCR0B = ((1 << CS02) | (1 << CS00));
+
+		/* Initialize ring buffers used to hold serial data between USB and software UART interfaces */
+		RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&USBtoUART_Buffer, USBtoUART_Buffer_Data, sizeof(USBtoUART_Buffer_Data));
+		RingBuffer_InitBuffer(&UARTtoUSB_Buffer, UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data, sizeof(UARTtoUSB_Buffer_Data));
+
+		/* Start the software USART */
+		SoftUART_Init();
+	}
+	else
+	{
+		ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+		if ((AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK) != (AVRISP_DATA_OUT_EPADDR & ENDPOINT_EPNUM_MASK))
+		  ConfigSuccess &= Endpoint_ConfigureEndpoint(AVRISP_DATA_IN_EPADDR, EP_TYPE_BULK, AVRISP_DATA_EPSIZE, 1);
+
+		/* Configure the V2 protocol packet handler */
+		V2Protocol_Init();
+	}
+
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(ConfigSuccess ? LEDMASK_USB_READY : LEDMASK_USB_ERROR);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Control Request reception event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void)
+{
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	  CDC_Device_ProcessControlRequest(&VirtualSerial_CDC_Interface);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Connection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the library USB Disconnection event. */
+void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void)
+{
+	LEDs_SetAllLEDs(LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY);
+}
+
+/** Event handler for the CDC Class driver Line Encoding Changed event.
+ *
+ *  \param[in] CDCInterfaceInfo  Pointer to the CDC class interface configuration structure being referenced
+ */
+void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo)
+{
+	/* Change the software UART's baud rate to match the new baud rate */
+	SoftUART_SetBaud(CDCInterfaceInfo->State.LineEncoding.BaudRateBPS);
+}
+
+/** This function is called by the library when in device mode, and must be overridden (see library "USB Descriptors"
+ *  documentation) by the application code so that the address and size of a requested descriptor can be given
+ *  to the USB library. When the device receives a Get Descriptor request on the control endpoint, this function
+ *  is called so that the descriptor details can be passed back and the appropriate descriptor sent back to the
+ *  USB host.
+ *
+ *  \param[in]  wValue                 Descriptor type and index to retrieve
+ *  \param[in]  wIndex                 Sub-index to retrieve (such as a localized string language)
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorAddress      Address of the retrieved descriptor
+ *  \param[out] DescriptorMemorySpace  Memory space that the descriptor is stored in
+ *
+ *  \return Length of the retrieved descriptor in bytes, or NO_DESCRIPTOR if the descriptor was not found
+ */
+uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                            uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+{
+	/* Return the correct descriptors based on the selected mode */
+	if (CurrentFirmwareMode == MODE_USART_BRIDGE)
+	  return USART_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress, DescriptorMemorySpace);
+	else
+	  return AVRISP_GetDescriptor(wValue, wIndex, DescriptorAddress, DescriptorMemorySpace);
+}
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..73da4d2ff1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.h
@@ -0,0 +1,104 @@
+/*
+             LUFA Library
+     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+
+  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+           www.lufa-lib.org
+*/
+
+/*
+  Copyright 2014  Dean Camera (dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com)
+
+  Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this
+  software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted
+  without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in
+  all copies and that both that the copyright notice and this
+  permission notice and warranty disclaimer appear in supporting
+  documentation, and that the name of the author not be used in
+  advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the
+  software without specific, written prior permission.
+
+  The author disclaims all warranties with regard to this
+  software, including all implied warranties of merchantability
+  and fitness.  In no event shall the author be liable for any
+  special, indirect or consequential damages or any damages
+  whatsoever resulting from loss of use, data or profits, whether
+  in an action of contract, negligence or other tortious action,
+  arising out of or in connection with the use or performance of
+  this software.
+*/
+
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  Header file for XPLAINBridge.c.
+ */
+
+#ifndef _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
+#define _XPLAIN_BRIDGE_H_
+
+	/* Includes: */
+		#include <avr/io.h>
+		#include <avr/wdt.h>
+		#include <avr/power.h>
+		#include <avr/interrupt.h>
+		#include <util/delay.h>
+
+		#include "USARTDescriptors.h"
+
+		#include "AVRISPDescriptors.h"
+		#include "Lib/V2Protocol.h"
+		#include "Lib/SoftUART.h"
+		#include "Config/AppConfig.h"
+
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Board/LEDs.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/Misc/RingBuffer.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Drivers/USB/USB.h>
+		#include <LUFA/Platform/Platform.h>
+
+	/* Macros: */
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is not ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_NOTREADY     LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is enumerating. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ENUMERATING  LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is ready. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_READY        LEDS_NO_LEDS
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that an error has occurred in the USB interface. */
+		#define LEDMASK_USB_ERROR        LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** LED mask for the library LED driver, to indicate that the USB interface is busy. */
+		#define LEDMASK_BUSY             LEDS_LED1
+
+		/** Firmware mode define for the USART Bridge mode. */
+		#define MODE_USART_BRIDGE        false
+
+		/** Firmware mode define for the AVRISP Programmer mode. */
+		#define MODE_PDI_PROGRAMMER      true
+
+	/* External Variables: */
+		extern bool         CurrentFirmwareMode;
+		extern RingBuffer_t UARTtoUSB_Buffer;
+		extern RingBuffer_t USBtoUART_Buffer;
+
+	/* Function Prototypes: */
+		void SetupHardware(void);
+		void AVRISP_Task(void);
+		void UARTBridge_Task(void);
+
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ConfigurationChanged(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_ControlRequest(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Connect(void);
+		void EVENT_USB_Device_Disconnect(void);
+
+		void EVENT_CDC_Device_LineEncodingChanged(USB_ClassInfo_CDC_Device_t* const CDCInterfaceInfo);
+
+		uint16_t CALLBACK_USB_GetDescriptor(const uint16_t wValue,
+		                                    const uint8_t wIndex,
+		                                    const void** const DescriptorAddress,
+		                                    uint8_t* const DescriptorMemorySpace)
+		                                    ATTR_WARN_UNUSED_RESULT ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(3) ATTR_NON_NULL_PTR_ARG(4);
+
+#endif
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..45557ef976
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/XPLAINBridge.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,109 @@
+/** \file
+ *
+ *  This file contains special DoxyGen information for the generation of the main page and other special
+ *  documentation pages. It is not a project source file.
+ */
+
+/** \mainpage XPLAIN UART Bridge/PDI Programmer Project
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Compat Project Compatibility:
+ *
+ *  The following list indicates what microcontrollers are compatible with this project.
+ *
+ *  \li AT90USB1287
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Info USB Information:
+ *
+ *  The following table gives a rundown of the USB utilization of this project.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Mode:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Device</td>
+ *    <td>2) Device</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Class:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Communications Device Class (CDC)</td>
+ *    <td>2) Vendor Specific Class</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>USB Subclass:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Abstract Control Model (ACM)</td>
+ *    <td>2) N/A</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Relevant Standards:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) USBIF CDC Class Standard</td>
+ *    <td>2) Atmel AVRISP MKII Protocol Specification</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td><b>Supported USB Speeds:</b></td>
+ *    <td>1) Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *    <td>2) Full Speed Mode</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Description Project Description:
+ *
+ *  This project serves a dual purpose. When loaded into the USB AVR on the XPLAIN board, it will act as either a USB to Serial
+ *  converter for the XPLAIN's hardware USART (at a speed of 9600 baud), or an AVRStudio compatible PDI programmer for the XMEGA.
+ *  This project replaces the firmware preloaded onto the XPLAIN's onboard AT90USB1287 microcontroller.
+ *
+ *  When power to the board is applied, the TDI pin (pin 9) of the USB AVR's JTAG port is read. If the pin is left high, the device
+ *  will enumerate as a regular COM port on the host, which can then be opened and data exchanged between the XMEGA and Host as if
+ *  the XMEGA was connected directly to the host's serial port. If the pin is pulled low by shorting it to GND (pin 10), the device
+ *  will enumerate as an AVRISP-MKII to the host, so that the XMEGA can be reprogrammed by AVRStudio or other compatible software
+ *  such as avrdude by connecting to the board as if it was an Atmel AVRISP-MKII programmer.
+ *
+ *  After running this project in serial bridge mode for the first time on a new computer, you will need to supply the .INF file
+ *  located in this project project's directory as the device's driver when running under Windows. This will enable Windows to use
+ *  its inbuilt CDC virtual serial drivers, negating the need for custom drivers for the device. Other Operating Systems should
+ *  automatically use their own inbuilt CDC-ACM drivers.
+ *
+ *  In serial bridge mode, the UART baud rate can be altered through the host terminal software to select a new baud rate - the default
+ *  baud is 9600. Note that parity, data bits and stop bits are fixed at none, eight and one respectively can cannot be altered. Changes
+ *  to the connection's parity, data bits or stop bits are ignored by the firmware. As the serial link between the controllers on the
+ *  XPLAIN is software emulated by the USB AVR, not all baud rates will work correctly.
+ *
+ *  This project relies on files from the LUFA AVRISP-MKII project for compilation.
+ *
+ *  \section Sec_Options Project Options
+ *
+ *  The following defines can be found in this project, which can control the project behaviour when defined, or changed in value.
+ *
+ *  <table>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <th><b>Define Name:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Location:</b></th>
+ *    <th><b>Description:</b></th>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to switch to a non-standard endpoint scheme, breaking compatibility with AVRStudio under Windows but making
+ *        the code compatible with software such as avrdude (all platforms) that use the libUSB driver.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>RESET_TOGGLES_LIBUSB_COMPAT</td>
+ *    <td>Makefile LUFA_OPTS</td>
+ *    <td>Define to make the /RESET line of the AVR toggle between Jungo and libUSB driver compatibility modes. Each time the AVR is
+ *        reset externally via the reset pin, the compatibility mode will be toggled. The compatibility mode is preserved between
+ *        power cycles and is not toggled via other forms of reset such as Watchdog or Brown Out.
+ *
+ *        When this option is enabled, all board LEDs will flash twice on startup for Jungo compatibility mode, and five times for
+ *        libUSB compatibility mode.
+ *
+ *        \note This option is incompatible with \c LIBUSB_DRIVER_COMPAT.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *   <tr>
+ *    <td>FIRMWARE_VERSION_MINOR</td>
+ *    <td>AppConfig.h</td>
+ *    <td>Define to set the minor firmware revision nunber reported to the host on request. By default this will use a firmware version compatible
+ *        with the latest Atmel IDE version, however if desired the reported minor value can be adjusted here.</td>
+ *   </tr>
+ *  </table>
+ */
+
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..7aa2107cc2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/asf.xml
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+<asf xmlversion="1.0">

+	<project caption="XPLAIN Bridge" id="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge.avr8">

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.boards.dummy.avr8"/>

+		<generator value="as5_8"/>

+

+		<device-support value="at90usb1287"/>

+		<config name="lufa.drivers.board.name" value="usbkey"/>

+

+		<build type="define" name="F_CPU" value="8000000UL"/>

+		<build type="define" name="F_USB" value="8000000UL"/>

+	</project>

+

+	<module type="application" id="lufa.projects.xplain_bridge" caption="XPLAIN Bridge">

+		<info type="description" value="summary">

+		Bridge firmware for the original (green) XPLAIN board, for programming and USB virtual serial communications.

+		</info>

+

+ 		<info type="gui-flag" value="move-to-root"/>

+

+		<info type="keyword" value="Technology">

+			<keyword value="Class Driver APIs"/>

+			<keyword value="USB Device"/>

+			<keyword value="CDC Class"/>

+		</info>

+

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_avr8"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_xmega"/>

+		<device-support-alias value="lufa_uc3"/>

+

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="doxyfile"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="XPLAINBridge.txt"/>

+		<build type="distribute" subtype="user-file" value="LUFA XPLAIN Bridge.inf"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="XPLAINBridge.c"/>

+		<build type="c-source" value="USARTDescriptors.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="XPLAINBridge.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="USARTDescriptors.h"/>

+

+		<build type="c-source" value="Lib/SoftUART.c"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Lib/SoftUART.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.projects.avrispmkii_clone.src"/>

+

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="path" value="Config"/>

+		<build type="module-config" subtype="required-header-file" value="AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/AppConfig.h"/>

+		<build type="header-file" value="Config/LUFAConfig.h"/>

+

+		<require idref="lufa.common"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.platform"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.usb"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.misc.ringbuffer"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board"/>

+		<require idref="lufa.drivers.board.leds"/>

+	</module>

+</asf>

diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..f3498adb94
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/doxyfile
@@ -0,0 +1,2364 @@
+# Doxyfile 1.8.8
+
+# This file describes the settings to be used by the documentation system
+# doxygen (www.doxygen.org) for a project.
+#
+# All text after a double hash (##) is considered a comment and is placed in
+# front of the TAG it is preceding.
+#
+# All text after a single hash (#) is considered a comment and will be ignored.
+# The format is:
+# TAG = value [value, ...]
+# For lists, items can also be appended using:
+# TAG += value [value, ...]
+# Values that contain spaces should be placed between quotes (\" \").
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Project related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# This tag specifies the encoding used for all characters in the config file
+# that follow. The default is UTF-8 which is also the encoding used for all text
+# before the first occurrence of this tag. Doxygen uses libiconv (or the iconv
+# built into libc) for the transcoding. See http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv
+# for the list of possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+DOXYFILE_ENCODING      = UTF-8
+
+# The PROJECT_NAME tag is a single word (or a sequence of words surrounded by
+# double-quotes, unless you are using Doxywizard) that should identify the
+# project for which the documentation is generated. This name is used in the
+# title of most generated pages and in a few other places.
+# The default value is: My Project.
+
+PROJECT_NAME           = "LUFA Library - XPLAIN Serial Bridge/PDI Programmer Project"
+
+# The PROJECT_NUMBER tag can be used to enter a project or revision number. This
+# could be handy for archiving the generated documentation or if some version
+# control system is used.
+
+PROJECT_NUMBER         =
+
+# Using the PROJECT_BRIEF tag one can provide an optional one line description
+# for a project that appears at the top of each page and should give viewer a
+# quick idea about the purpose of the project. Keep the description short.
+
+PROJECT_BRIEF          =
+
+# With the PROJECT_LOGO tag one can specify an logo or icon that is included in
+# the documentation. The maximum height of the logo should not exceed 55 pixels
+# and the maximum width should not exceed 200 pixels. Doxygen will copy the logo
+# to the output directory.
+
+PROJECT_LOGO           =
+
+# The OUTPUT_DIRECTORY tag is used to specify the (relative or absolute) path
+# into which the generated documentation will be written. If a relative path is
+# entered, it will be relative to the location where doxygen was started. If
+# left blank the current directory will be used.
+
+OUTPUT_DIRECTORY       = ./Documentation/
+
+# If the CREATE_SUBDIRS tag is set to YES, then doxygen will create 4096 sub-
+# directories (in 2 levels) under the output directory of each output format and
+# will distribute the generated files over these directories. Enabling this
+# option can be useful when feeding doxygen a huge amount of source files, where
+# putting all generated files in the same directory would otherwise causes
+# performance problems for the file system.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CREATE_SUBDIRS         = NO
+
+# If the ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will allow non-ASCII
+# characters to appear in the names of generated files. If set to NO, non-ASCII
+# characters will be escaped, for example _xE3_x81_x84 will be used for Unicode
+# U+3044.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLOW_UNICODE_NAMES    = NO
+
+# The OUTPUT_LANGUAGE tag is used to specify the language in which all
+# documentation generated by doxygen is written. Doxygen will use this
+# information to generate all constant output in the proper language.
+# Possible values are: Afrikaans, Arabic, Armenian, Brazilian, Catalan, Chinese,
+# Chinese-Traditional, Croatian, Czech, Danish, Dutch, English (United States),
+# Esperanto, Farsi (Persian), Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hungarian,
+# Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Japanese-en (Japanese with English messages),
+# Korean, Korean-en (Korean with English messages), Latvian, Lithuanian,
+# Macedonian, Norwegian, Persian (Farsi), Polish, Portuguese, Romanian, Russian,
+# Serbian, Serbian-Cyrillic, Slovak, Slovene, Spanish, Swedish, Turkish,
+# Ukrainian and Vietnamese.
+# The default value is: English.
+
+OUTPUT_LANGUAGE        = English
+
+# If the BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC tag is set to YES doxygen will include brief member
+# descriptions after the members that are listed in the file and class
+# documentation (similar to Javadoc). Set to NO to disable this.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC      = YES
+
+# If the REPEAT_BRIEF tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the brief
+# description of a member or function before the detailed description
+#
+# Note: If both HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS and BRIEF_MEMBER_DESC are set to NO, the
+# brief descriptions will be completely suppressed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REPEAT_BRIEF           = YES
+
+# This tag implements a quasi-intelligent brief description abbreviator that is
+# used to form the text in various listings. Each string in this list, if found
+# as the leading text of the brief description, will be stripped from the text
+# and the result, after processing the whole list, is used as the annotated
+# text. Otherwise, the brief description is used as-is. If left blank, the
+# following values are used ($name is automatically replaced with the name of
+# the entity):The $name class, The $name widget, The $name file, is, provides,
+# specifies, contains, represents, a, an and the.
+
+ABBREVIATE_BRIEF       = "The $name class" \
+                         "The $name widget" \
+                         "The $name file" \
+                         is \
+                         provides \
+                         specifies \
+                         contains \
+                         represents \
+                         a \
+                         an \
+                         the
+
+# If the ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC and REPEAT_BRIEF tags are both set to YES then
+# doxygen will generate a detailed section even if there is only a brief
+# description.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALWAYS_DETAILED_SEC    = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB tag is set to YES, doxygen will show all
+# inherited members of a class in the documentation of that class as if those
+# members were ordinary class members. Constructors, destructors and assignment
+# operators of the base classes will not be shown.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_INHERITED_MEMB  = NO
+
+# If the FULL_PATH_NAMES tag is set to YES doxygen will prepend the full path
+# before files name in the file list and in the header files. If set to NO the
+# shortest path that makes the file name unique will be used
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+FULL_PATH_NAMES        = YES
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the path.
+# Stripping is only done if one of the specified strings matches the left-hand
+# part of the path. The tag can be used to show relative paths in the file list.
+# If left blank the directory from which doxygen is run is used as the path to
+# strip.
+#
+# Note that you can specify absolute paths here, but also relative paths, which
+# will be relative from the directory where doxygen is started.
+# This tag requires that the tag FULL_PATH_NAMES is set to YES.
+
+STRIP_FROM_PATH        =
+
+# The STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH tag can be used to strip a user-defined part of the
+# path mentioned in the documentation of a class, which tells the reader which
+# header file to include in order to use a class. If left blank only the name of
+# the header file containing the class definition is used. Otherwise one should
+# specify the list of include paths that are normally passed to the compiler
+# using the -I flag.
+
+STRIP_FROM_INC_PATH    =
+
+# If the SHORT_NAMES tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate much shorter (but
+# less readable) file names. This can be useful is your file systems doesn't
+# support long names like on DOS, Mac, or CD-ROM.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHORT_NAMES            = YES
+
+# If the JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the
+# first line (until the first dot) of a Javadoc-style comment as the brief
+# description. If set to NO, the Javadoc-style will behave just like regular Qt-
+# style comments (thus requiring an explicit @brief command for a brief
+# description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+JAVADOC_AUTOBRIEF      = NO
+
+# If the QT_AUTOBRIEF tag is set to YES then doxygen will interpret the first
+# line (until the first dot) of a Qt-style comment as the brief description. If
+# set to NO, the Qt-style will behave just like regular Qt-style comments (thus
+# requiring an explicit \brief command for a brief description.)
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QT_AUTOBRIEF           = NO
+
+# The MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF tag can be set to YES to make doxygen treat a
+# multi-line C++ special comment block (i.e. a block of //! or /// comments) as
+# a brief description. This used to be the default behavior. The new default is
+# to treat a multi-line C++ comment block as a detailed description. Set this
+# tag to YES if you prefer the old behavior instead.
+#
+# Note that setting this tag to YES also means that rational rose comments are
+# not recognized any more.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+MULTILINE_CPP_IS_BRIEF = NO
+
+# If the INHERIT_DOCS tag is set to YES then an undocumented member inherits the
+# documentation from any documented member that it re-implements.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INHERIT_DOCS           = YES
+
+# If the SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES tag is set to YES, then doxygen will produce a
+# new page for each member. If set to NO, the documentation of a member will be
+# part of the file/class/namespace that contains it.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES  = NO
+
+# The TAB_SIZE tag can be used to set the number of spaces in a tab. Doxygen
+# uses this value to replace tabs by spaces in code fragments.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 16, default value: 4.
+
+TAB_SIZE               = 4
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of aliases that act as commands in
+# the documentation. An alias has the form:
+# name=value
+# For example adding
+# "sideeffect=@par Side Effects:\n"
+# will allow you to put the command \sideeffect (or @sideeffect) in the
+# documentation, which will result in a user-defined paragraph with heading
+# "Side Effects:". You can put \n's in the value part of an alias to insert
+# newlines.
+
+ALIASES                =
+
+# This tag can be used to specify a number of word-keyword mappings (TCL only).
+# A mapping has the form "name=value". For example adding "class=itcl::class"
+# will allow you to use the command class in the itcl::class meaning.
+
+TCL_SUBST              =
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C tag to YES if your project consists of C sources
+# only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored for C. For
+# instance, some of the names that are used will be different. The list of all
+# members will be omitted, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_FOR_C  = YES
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA tag to YES if your project consists of Java or
+# Python sources only. Doxygen will then generate output that is more tailored
+# for that language. For instance, namespaces will be presented as packages,
+# qualified scopes will look different, etc.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_JAVA   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN tag to YES if your project consists of Fortran
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for Fortran.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_FOR_FORTRAN   = NO
+
+# Set the OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL tag to YES if your project consists of VHDL
+# sources. Doxygen will then generate output that is tailored for VHDL.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+OPTIMIZE_OUTPUT_VHDL   = NO
+
+# Doxygen selects the parser to use depending on the extension of the files it
+# parses. With this tag you can assign which parser to use for a given
+# extension. Doxygen has a built-in mapping, but you can override or extend it
+# using this tag. The format is ext=language, where ext is a file extension, and
+# language is one of the parsers supported by doxygen: IDL, Java, Javascript,
+# C#, C, C++, D, PHP, Objective-C, Python, Fortran (fixed format Fortran:
+# FortranFixed, free formatted Fortran: FortranFree, unknown formatted Fortran:
+# Fortran. In the later case the parser tries to guess whether the code is fixed
+# or free formatted code, this is the default for Fortran type files), VHDL. For
+# instance to make doxygen treat .inc files as Fortran files (default is PHP),
+# and .f files as C (default is Fortran), use: inc=Fortran f=C.
+#
+# Note For files without extension you can use no_extension as a placeholder.
+#
+# Note that for custom extensions you also need to set FILE_PATTERNS otherwise
+# the files are not read by doxygen.
+
+EXTENSION_MAPPING      =
+
+# If the MARKDOWN_SUPPORT tag is enabled then doxygen pre-processes all comments
+# according to the Markdown format, which allows for more readable
+# documentation. See http://daringfireball.net/projects/markdown/ for details.
+# The output of markdown processing is further processed by doxygen, so you can
+# mix doxygen, HTML, and XML commands with Markdown formatting. Disable only in
+# case of backward compatibilities issues.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+MARKDOWN_SUPPORT       = NO
+
+# When enabled doxygen tries to link words that correspond to documented
+# classes, or namespaces to their corresponding documentation. Such a link can
+# be prevented in individual cases by by putting a % sign in front of the word
+# or globally by setting AUTOLINK_SUPPORT to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+AUTOLINK_SUPPORT       = YES
+
+# If you use STL classes (i.e. std::string, std::vector, etc.) but do not want
+# to include (a tag file for) the STL sources as input, then you should set this
+# tag to YES in order to let doxygen match functions declarations and
+# definitions whose arguments contain STL classes (e.g. func(std::string);
+# versus func(std::string) {}). This also make the inheritance and collaboration
+# diagrams that involve STL classes more complete and accurate.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+BUILTIN_STL_SUPPORT    = NO
+
+# If you use Microsoft's C++/CLI language, you should set this option to YES to
+# enable parsing support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CPP_CLI_SUPPORT        = NO
+
+# Set the SIP_SUPPORT tag to YES if your project consists of sip (see:
+# http://www.riverbankcomputing.co.uk/software/sip/intro) sources only. Doxygen
+# will parse them like normal C++ but will assume all classes use public instead
+# of private inheritance when no explicit protection keyword is present.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SIP_SUPPORT            = NO
+
+# For Microsoft's IDL there are propget and propput attributes to indicate
+# getter and setter methods for a property. Setting this option to YES will make
+# doxygen to replace the get and set methods by a property in the documentation.
+# This will only work if the methods are indeed getting or setting a simple
+# type. If this is not the case, or you want to show the methods anyway, you
+# should set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+IDL_PROPERTY_SUPPORT   = YES
+
+# If member grouping is used in the documentation and the DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC
+# tag is set to YES, then doxygen will reuse the documentation of the first
+# member in the group (if any) for the other members of the group. By default
+# all members of a group must be documented explicitly.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+DISTRIBUTE_GROUP_DOC   = NO
+
+# Set the SUBGROUPING tag to YES to allow class member groups of the same type
+# (for instance a group of public functions) to be put as a subgroup of that
+# type (e.g. under the Public Functions section). Set it to NO to prevent
+# subgrouping. Alternatively, this can be done per class using the
+# \nosubgrouping command.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SUBGROUPING            = YES
+
+# When the INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES tag is set to YES, classes, structs and unions
+# are shown inside the group in which they are included (e.g. using \ingroup)
+# instead of on a separate page (for HTML and Man pages) or section (for LaTeX
+# and RTF).
+#
+# Note that this feature does not work in combination with
+# SEPARATE_MEMBER_PAGES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_GROUPED_CLASSES = NO
+
+# When the INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS tag is set to YES, structs, classes, and unions
+# with only public data fields or simple typedef fields will be shown inline in
+# the documentation of the scope in which they are defined (i.e. file,
+# namespace, or group documentation), provided this scope is documented. If set
+# to NO, structs, classes, and unions are shown on a separate page (for HTML and
+# Man pages) or section (for LaTeX and RTF).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SIMPLE_STRUCTS  = NO
+
+# When TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT tag is enabled, a typedef of a struct, union, or
+# enum is documented as struct, union, or enum with the name of the typedef. So
+# typedef struct TypeS {} TypeT, will appear in the documentation as a struct
+# with name TypeT. When disabled the typedef will appear as a member of a file,
+# namespace, or class. And the struct will be named TypeS. This can typically be
+# useful for C code in case the coding convention dictates that all compound
+# types are typedef'ed and only the typedef is referenced, never the tag name.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+TYPEDEF_HIDES_STRUCT   = NO
+
+# The size of the symbol lookup cache can be set using LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE. This
+# cache is used to resolve symbols given their name and scope. Since this can be
+# an expensive process and often the same symbol appears multiple times in the
+# code, doxygen keeps a cache of pre-resolved symbols. If the cache is too small
+# doxygen will become slower. If the cache is too large, memory is wasted. The
+# cache size is given by this formula: 2^(16+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE). The valid range
+# is 0..9, the default is 0, corresponding to a cache size of 2^16=65536
+# symbols. At the end of a run doxygen will report the cache usage and suggest
+# the optimal cache size from a speed point of view.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9, default value: 0.
+
+LOOKUP_CACHE_SIZE      = 0
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Build related configuration options
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the EXTRACT_ALL tag is set to YES doxygen will assume all entities in
+# documentation are documented, even if no documentation was available. Private
+# class members and static file members will be hidden unless the
+# EXTRACT_PRIVATE respectively EXTRACT_STATIC tags are set to YES.
+# Note: This will also disable the warnings about undocumented members that are
+# normally produced when WARNINGS is set to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ALL            = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PRIVATE tag is set to YES all private members of a class will
+# be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PRIVATE        = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_PACKAGE tag is set to YES all members with package or internal
+# scope will be included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_PACKAGE        = NO
+
+# If the EXTRACT_STATIC tag is set to YES all static members of a file will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_STATIC         = YES
+
+# If the EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES tag is set to YES classes (and structs) defined
+# locally in source files will be included in the documentation. If set to NO
+# only classes defined in header files are included. Does not have any effect
+# for Java sources.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_CLASSES  = YES
+
+# This flag is only useful for Objective-C code. When set to YES local methods,
+# which are defined in the implementation section but not in the interface are
+# included in the documentation. If set to NO only methods in the interface are
+# included.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_LOCAL_METHODS  = NO
+
+# If this flag is set to YES, the members of anonymous namespaces will be
+# extracted and appear in the documentation as a namespace called
+# 'anonymous_namespace{file}', where file will be replaced with the base name of
+# the file that contains the anonymous namespace. By default anonymous namespace
+# are hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXTRACT_ANON_NSPACES   = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented members inside documented classes or files. If set to NO these
+# members will be included in the various overviews, but no documentation
+# section is generated. This option has no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_MEMBERS     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all
+# undocumented classes that are normally visible in the class hierarchy. If set
+# to NO these classes will be included in the various overviews. This option has
+# no effect if EXTRACT_ALL is enabled.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_CLASSES     = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide all friend
+# (class|struct|union) declarations. If set to NO these declarations will be
+# included in the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_FRIEND_COMPOUNDS  = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS tag is set to YES, doxygen will hide any
+# documentation blocks found inside the body of a function. If set to NO these
+# blocks will be appended to the function's detailed documentation block.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_IN_BODY_DOCS      = NO
+
+# The INTERNAL_DOCS tag determines if documentation that is typed after a
+# \internal command is included. If the tag is set to NO then the documentation
+# will be excluded. Set it to YES to include the internal documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INTERNAL_DOCS          = NO
+
+# If the CASE_SENSE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will only generate file
+# names in lower-case letters. If set to YES upper-case letters are also
+# allowed. This is useful if you have classes or files whose names only differ
+# in case and if your file system supports case sensitive file names. Windows
+# and Mac users are advised to set this option to NO.
+# The default value is: system dependent.
+
+CASE_SENSE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES tag is set to NO then doxygen will show members with
+# their full class and namespace scopes in the documentation. If set to YES the
+# scope will be hidden.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES tag is set to YES then doxygen will put a list of
+# the files that are included by a file in the documentation of that file.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_INCLUDE_FILES     = YES
+
+# If the SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC tag is set to YES then Doxygen will add for each
+# grouped member an include statement to the documentation, telling the reader
+# which file to include in order to use the member.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SHOW_GROUPED_MEMB_INC  = NO
+
+# If the FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES tag is set to YES then doxygen will list include
+# files with double quotes in the documentation rather than with sharp brackets.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FORCE_LOCAL_INCLUDES   = NO
+
+# If the INLINE_INFO tag is set to YES then a tag [inline] is inserted in the
+# documentation for inline members.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+INLINE_INFO            = YES
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBER_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (detailed) documentation of file and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SORT_MEMBER_DOCS       = YES
+
+# If the SORT_BRIEF_DOCS tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the brief
+# descriptions of file, namespace and class members alphabetically by member
+# name. If set to NO the members will appear in declaration order. Note that
+# this will also influence the order of the classes in the class list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BRIEF_DOCS        = NO
+
+# If the SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the
+# (brief and detailed) documentation of class members so that constructors and
+# destructors are listed first. If set to NO the constructors will appear in the
+# respective orders defined by SORT_BRIEF_DOCS and SORT_MEMBER_DOCS.
+# Note: If SORT_BRIEF_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting brief
+# member documentation.
+# Note: If SORT_MEMBER_DOCS is set to NO this option is ignored for sorting
+# detailed member documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_MEMBERS_CTORS_1ST = NO
+
+# If the SORT_GROUP_NAMES tag is set to YES then doxygen will sort the hierarchy
+# of group names into alphabetical order. If set to NO the group names will
+# appear in their defined order.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_GROUP_NAMES       = NO
+
+# If the SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME tag is set to YES, the class list will be sorted by
+# fully-qualified names, including namespaces. If set to NO, the class list will
+# be sorted only by class name, not including the namespace part.
+# Note: This option is not very useful if HIDE_SCOPE_NAMES is set to YES.
+# Note: This option applies only to the class list, not to the alphabetical
+# list.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SORT_BY_SCOPE_NAME     = NO
+
+# If the STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING option is enabled and doxygen fails to do proper
+# type resolution of all parameters of a function it will reject a match between
+# the prototype and the implementation of a member function even if there is
+# only one candidate or it is obvious which candidate to choose by doing a
+# simple string match. By disabling STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING doxygen will still
+# accept a match between prototype and implementation in such cases.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+STRICT_PROTO_MATCHING  = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TODOLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# todo list. This list is created by putting \todo commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TODOLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_TESTLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the
+# test list. This list is created by putting \test commands in the
+# documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_TESTLIST      = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_BUGLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO) the bug
+# list. This list is created by putting \bug commands in the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_BUGLIST       = NO
+
+# The GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST tag can be used to enable ( YES) or disable ( NO)
+# the deprecated list. This list is created by putting \deprecated commands in
+# the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_DEPRECATEDLIST= YES
+
+# The ENABLED_SECTIONS tag can be used to enable conditional documentation
+# sections, marked by \if <section_label> ... \endif and \cond <section_label>
+# ... \endcond blocks.
+
+ENABLED_SECTIONS       =
+
+# The MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES tag determines the maximum number of lines that the
+# initial value of a variable or macro / define can have for it to appear in the
+# documentation. If the initializer consists of more lines than specified here
+# it will be hidden. Use a value of 0 to hide initializers completely. The
+# appearance of the value of individual variables and macros / defines can be
+# controlled using \showinitializer or \hideinitializer command in the
+# documentation regardless of this setting.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 30.
+
+MAX_INITIALIZER_LINES  = 30
+
+# Set the SHOW_USED_FILES tag to NO to disable the list of files generated at
+# the bottom of the documentation of classes and structs. If set to YES the list
+# will mention the files that were used to generate the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_USED_FILES        = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_FILES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Files page. This
+# will remove the Files entry from the Quick Index and from the Folder Tree View
+# (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_FILES             = YES
+
+# Set the SHOW_NAMESPACES tag to NO to disable the generation of the Namespaces
+# page. This will remove the Namespaces entry from the Quick Index and from the
+# Folder Tree View (if specified).
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+SHOW_NAMESPACES        = YES
+
+# The FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program or script that
+# doxygen should invoke to get the current version for each file (typically from
+# the version control system). Doxygen will invoke the program by executing (via
+# popen()) the command command input-file, where command is the value of the
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER tag, and input-file is the name of an input file provided
+# by doxygen. Whatever the program writes to standard output is used as the file
+# version. For an example see the documentation.
+
+FILE_VERSION_FILTER    =
+
+# The LAYOUT_FILE tag can be used to specify a layout file which will be parsed
+# by doxygen. The layout file controls the global structure of the generated
+# output files in an output format independent way. To create the layout file
+# that represents doxygen's defaults, run doxygen with the -l option. You can
+# optionally specify a file name after the option, if omitted DoxygenLayout.xml
+# will be used as the name of the layout file.
+#
+# Note that if you run doxygen from a directory containing a file called
+# DoxygenLayout.xml, doxygen will parse it automatically even if the LAYOUT_FILE
+# tag is left empty.
+
+LAYOUT_FILE            =
+
+# The CITE_BIB_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more bib files containing
+# the reference definitions. This must be a list of .bib files. The .bib
+# extension is automatically appended if omitted. This requires the bibtex tool
+# to be installed. See also http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX for more info.
+# For LaTeX the style of the bibliography can be controlled using
+# LATEX_BIB_STYLE. To use this feature you need bibtex and perl available in the
+# search path. See also \cite for info how to create references.
+
+CITE_BIB_FILES         =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to warning and progress messages
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The QUIET tag can be used to turn on/off the messages that are generated to
+# standard output by doxygen. If QUIET is set to YES this implies that the
+# messages are off.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+QUIET                  = YES
+
+# The WARNINGS tag can be used to turn on/off the warning messages that are
+# generated to standard error ( stderr) by doxygen. If WARNINGS is set to YES
+# this implies that the warnings are on.
+#
+# Tip: Turn warnings on while writing the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARNINGS               = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED tag is set to YES, then doxygen will generate
+# warnings for undocumented members. If EXTRACT_ALL is set to YES then this flag
+# will automatically be disabled.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_UNDOCUMENTED   = YES
+
+# If the WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR tag is set to YES, doxygen will generate warnings for
+# potential errors in the documentation, such as not documenting some parameters
+# in a documented function, or documenting parameters that don't exist or using
+# markup commands wrongly.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+WARN_IF_DOC_ERROR      = YES
+
+# This WARN_NO_PARAMDOC option can be enabled to get warnings for functions that
+# are documented, but have no documentation for their parameters or return
+# value. If set to NO doxygen will only warn about wrong or incomplete parameter
+# documentation, but not about the absence of documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+WARN_NO_PARAMDOC       = YES
+
+# The WARN_FORMAT tag determines the format of the warning messages that doxygen
+# can produce. The string should contain the $file, $line, and $text tags, which
+# will be replaced by the file and line number from which the warning originated
+# and the warning text. Optionally the format may contain $version, which will
+# be replaced by the version of the file (if it could be obtained via
+# FILE_VERSION_FILTER)
+# The default value is: $file:$line: $text.
+
+WARN_FORMAT            = "$file:$line: $text"
+
+# The WARN_LOGFILE tag can be used to specify a file to which warning and error
+# messages should be written. If left blank the output is written to standard
+# error (stderr).
+
+WARN_LOGFILE           =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the input files
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The INPUT tag is used to specify the files and/or directories that contain
+# documented source files. You may enter file names like myfile.cpp or
+# directories like /usr/src/myproject. Separate the files or directories with
+# spaces.
+# Note: If this tag is empty the current directory is searched.
+
+INPUT                  = ./
+
+# This tag can be used to specify the character encoding of the source files
+# that doxygen parses. Internally doxygen uses the UTF-8 encoding. Doxygen uses
+# libiconv (or the iconv built into libc) for the transcoding. See the libiconv
+# documentation (see: http://www.gnu.org/software/libiconv) for the list of
+# possible encodings.
+# The default value is: UTF-8.
+
+INPUT_ENCODING         = UTF-8
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank the
+# following patterns are tested:*.c, *.cc, *.cxx, *.cpp, *.c++, *.java, *.ii,
+# *.ixx, *.ipp, *.i++, *.inl, *.idl, *.ddl, *.odl, *.h, *.hh, *.hxx, *.hpp,
+# *.h++, *.cs, *.d, *.php, *.php4, *.php5, *.phtml, *.inc, *.m, *.markdown,
+# *.md, *.mm, *.dox, *.py, *.f90, *.f, *.for, *.tcl, *.vhd, *.vhdl, *.ucf,
+# *.qsf, *.as and *.js.
+
+FILE_PATTERNS          = *.h \
+                         *.c \
+                         *.txt
+
+# The RECURSIVE tag can be used to specify whether or not subdirectories should
+# be searched for input files as well.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+RECURSIVE              = YES
+
+# The EXCLUDE tag can be used to specify files and/or directories that should be
+# excluded from the INPUT source files. This way you can easily exclude a
+# subdirectory from a directory tree whose root is specified with the INPUT tag.
+#
+# Note that relative paths are relative to the directory from which doxygen is
+# run.
+
+EXCLUDE                = Documentation/
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS tag can be used to select whether or not files or
+# directories that are symbolic links (a Unix file system feature) are excluded
+# from the input.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMLINKS       = NO
+
+# If the value of the INPUT tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXCLUDE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard patterns to exclude
+# certain files from those directories.
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories for example use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_PATTERNS       =
+
+# The EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS tag can be used to specify one or more symbol names
+# (namespaces, classes, functions, etc.) that should be excluded from the
+# output. The symbol name can be a fully qualified name, a word, or if the
+# wildcard * is used, a substring. Examples: ANamespace, AClass,
+# AClass::ANamespace, ANamespace::*Test
+#
+# Note that the wildcards are matched against the file with absolute path, so to
+# exclude all test directories use the pattern */test/*
+
+EXCLUDE_SYMBOLS        = __* \
+                         INCLUDE_FROM_*
+
+# The EXAMPLE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain example code fragments that are included (see the \include
+# command).
+
+EXAMPLE_PATH           =
+
+# If the value of the EXAMPLE_PATH tag contains directories, you can use the
+# EXAMPLE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard pattern (like *.cpp and
+# *.h) to filter out the source-files in the directories. If left blank all
+# files are included.
+
+EXAMPLE_PATTERNS       = *
+
+# If the EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE tag is set to YES then subdirectories will be
+# searched for input files to be used with the \include or \dontinclude commands
+# irrespective of the value of the RECURSIVE tag.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+EXAMPLE_RECURSIVE      = NO
+
+# The IMAGE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more files or directories
+# that contain images that are to be included in the documentation (see the
+# \image command).
+
+IMAGE_PATH             =
+
+# The INPUT_FILTER tag can be used to specify a program that doxygen should
+# invoke to filter for each input file. Doxygen will invoke the filter program
+# by executing (via popen()) the command:
+#
+# <filter> <input-file>
+#
+# where <filter> is the value of the INPUT_FILTER tag, and <input-file> is the
+# name of an input file. Doxygen will then use the output that the filter
+# program writes to standard output. If FILTER_PATTERNS is specified, this tag
+# will be ignored.
+#
+# Note that the filter must not add or remove lines; it is applied before the
+# code is scanned, but not when the output code is generated. If lines are added
+# or removed, the anchors will not be placed correctly.
+
+INPUT_FILTER           =
+
+# The FILTER_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify filters on a per file pattern
+# basis. Doxygen will compare the file name with each pattern and apply the
+# filter if there is a match. The filters are a list of the form: pattern=filter
+# (like *.cpp=my_cpp_filter). See INPUT_FILTER for further information on how
+# filters are used. If the FILTER_PATTERNS tag is empty or if none of the
+# patterns match the file name, INPUT_FILTER is applied.
+
+FILTER_PATTERNS        =
+
+# If the FILTER_SOURCE_FILES tag is set to YES, the input filter (if set using
+# INPUT_FILTER ) will also be used to filter the input files that are used for
+# producing the source files to browse (i.e. when SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES).
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_FILES    = NO
+
+# The FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS tag can be used to specify source filters per file
+# pattern. A pattern will override the setting for FILTER_PATTERN (if any) and
+# it is also possible to disable source filtering for a specific pattern using
+# *.ext= (so without naming a filter).
+# This tag requires that the tag FILTER_SOURCE_FILES is set to YES.
+
+FILTER_SOURCE_PATTERNS =
+
+# If the USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE tag refers to the name of a markdown file that
+# is part of the input, its contents will be placed on the main page
+# (index.html). This can be useful if you have a project on for instance GitHub
+# and want to reuse the introduction page also for the doxygen output.
+
+USE_MDFILE_AS_MAINPAGE =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to source browsing
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set to YES then a list of source files will be
+# generated. Documented entities will be cross-referenced with these sources.
+#
+# Note: To get rid of all source code in the generated output, make sure that
+# also VERBATIM_HEADERS is set to NO.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+SOURCE_BROWSER         = NO
+
+# Setting the INLINE_SOURCES tag to YES will include the body of functions,
+# classes and enums directly into the documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+INLINE_SOURCES         = NO
+
+# Setting the STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS tag to YES will instruct doxygen to hide any
+# special comment blocks from generated source code fragments. Normal C, C++ and
+# Fortran comments will always remain visible.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+STRIP_CODE_COMMENTS    = YES
+
+# If the REFERENCED_BY_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented
+# function all documented functions referencing it will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCED_BY_RELATION = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_RELATION tag is set to YES then for each documented function
+# all documented entities called/used by that function will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+REFERENCES_RELATION    = NO
+
+# If the REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE tag is set to YES and SOURCE_BROWSER tag is set
+# to YES, then the hyperlinks from functions in REFERENCES_RELATION and
+# REFERENCED_BY_RELATION lists will link to the source code. Otherwise they will
+# link to the documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+REFERENCES_LINK_SOURCE = NO
+
+# If SOURCE_TOOLTIPS is enabled (the default) then hovering a hyperlink in the
+# source code will show a tooltip with additional information such as prototype,
+# brief description and links to the definition and documentation. Since this
+# will make the HTML file larger and loading of large files a bit slower, you
+# can opt to disable this feature.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+SOURCE_TOOLTIPS        = YES
+
+# If the USE_HTAGS tag is set to YES then the references to source code will
+# point to the HTML generated by the htags(1) tool instead of doxygen built-in
+# source browser. The htags tool is part of GNU's global source tagging system
+# (see http://www.gnu.org/software/global/global.html). You will need version
+# 4.8.6 or higher.
+#
+# To use it do the following:
+# - Install the latest version of global
+# - Enable SOURCE_BROWSER and USE_HTAGS in the config file
+# - Make sure the INPUT points to the root of the source tree
+# - Run doxygen as normal
+#
+# Doxygen will invoke htags (and that will in turn invoke gtags), so these
+# tools must be available from the command line (i.e. in the search path).
+#
+# The result: instead of the source browser generated by doxygen, the links to
+# source code will now point to the output of htags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SOURCE_BROWSER is set to YES.
+
+USE_HTAGS              = NO
+
+# If the VERBATIM_HEADERS tag is set the YES then doxygen will generate a
+# verbatim copy of the header file for each class for which an include is
+# specified. Set to NO to disable this.
+# See also: Section \class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+VERBATIM_HEADERS       = NO
+
+# If the CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING tag is set to YES, then doxygen will use the
+# clang parser (see: http://clang.llvm.org/) for more accurate parsing at the
+# cost of reduced performance. This can be particularly helpful with template
+# rich C++ code for which doxygen's built-in parser lacks the necessary type
+# information.
+# Note: The availability of this option depends on whether or not doxygen was
+# compiled with the --with-libclang option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING = NO
+
+# If clang assisted parsing is enabled you can provide the compiler with command
+# line options that you would normally use when invoking the compiler. Note that
+# the include paths will already be set by doxygen for the files and directories
+# specified with INPUT and INCLUDE_PATH.
+# This tag requires that the tag CLANG_ASSISTED_PARSING is set to YES.
+
+CLANG_OPTIONS          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the alphabetical class index
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ALPHABETICAL_INDEX tag is set to YES, an alphabetical index of all
+# compounds will be generated. Enable this if the project contains a lot of
+# classes, structs, unions or interfaces.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ALPHABETICAL_INDEX     = YES
+
+# The COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX tag can be used to specify the number of columns in
+# which the alphabetical index list will be split.
+# Minimum value: 1, maximum value: 20, default value: 5.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+COLS_IN_ALPHA_INDEX    = 5
+
+# In case all classes in a project start with a common prefix, all classes will
+# be put under the same header in the alphabetical index. The IGNORE_PREFIX tag
+# can be used to specify a prefix (or a list of prefixes) that should be ignored
+# while generating the index headers.
+# This tag requires that the tag ALPHABETICAL_INDEX is set to YES.
+
+IGNORE_PREFIX          =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the HTML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate HTML output
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTML          = YES
+
+# The HTML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the HTML docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_OUTPUT            = html
+
+# The HTML_FILE_EXTENSION tag can be used to specify the file extension for each
+# generated HTML page (for example: .htm, .php, .asp).
+# The default value is: .html.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FILE_EXTENSION    = .html
+
+# The HTML_HEADER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML header file for
+# each generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a
+# standard header.
+#
+# To get valid HTML the header file that includes any scripts and style sheets
+# that doxygen needs, which is dependent on the configuration options used (e.g.
+# the setting GENERATE_TREEVIEW). It is highly recommended to start with a
+# default header using
+# doxygen -w html new_header.html new_footer.html new_stylesheet.css
+# YourConfigFile
+# and then modify the file new_header.html. See also section "Doxygen usage"
+# for information on how to generate the default header that doxygen normally
+# uses.
+# Note: The header is subject to change so you typically have to regenerate the
+# default header when upgrading to a newer version of doxygen. For a description
+# of the possible markers and block names see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_HEADER            =
+
+# The HTML_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a user-defined HTML footer for each
+# generated HTML page. If the tag is left blank doxygen will generate a standard
+# footer. See HTML_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default
+# footer and what special commands can be used inside the footer. See also
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the default footer
+# that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_FOOTER            =
+
+# The HTML_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify a user-defined cascading style
+# sheet that is used by each HTML page. It can be used to fine-tune the look of
+# the HTML output. If left blank doxygen will generate a default style sheet.
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the style
+# sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# Note: It is recommended to use HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET instead of this tag, as
+# it is more robust and this tag (HTML_STYLESHEET) will in the future become
+# obsolete.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_STYLESHEET        =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET tag can be used to specify additional user-defined
+# cascading style sheets that are included after the standard style sheets
+# created by doxygen. Using this option one can overrule certain style aspects.
+# This is preferred over using HTML_STYLESHEET since it does not replace the
+# standard style sheet and is therefor more robust against future updates.
+# Doxygen will copy the style sheet files to the output directory.
+# Note: The order of the extra stylesheet files is of importance (e.g. the last
+# stylesheet in the list overrules the setting of the previous ones in the
+# list). For an example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET  =
+
+# The HTML_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the HTML output directory. Note
+# that these files will be copied to the base HTML output directory. Use the
+# $relpath^ marker in the HTML_HEADER and/or HTML_FOOTER files to load these
+# files. In the HTML_STYLESHEET file, use the file name only. Also note that the
+# files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_EXTRA_FILES       =
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE tag controls the color of the HTML output. Doxygen
+# will adjust the colors in the stylesheet and background images according to
+# this color. Hue is specified as an angle on a colorwheel, see
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hue for more information. For instance the value
+# 0 represents red, 60 is yellow, 120 is green, 180 is cyan, 240 is blue, 300
+# purple, and 360 is red again.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 359, default value: 220.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_HUE    = 220
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT tag controls the purity (or saturation) of the colors
+# in the HTML output. For a value of 0 the output will use grayscales only. A
+# value of 255 will produce the most vivid colors.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 255, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_SAT    = 100
+
+# The HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA tag controls the gamma correction applied to the
+# luminance component of the colors in the HTML output. Values below 100
+# gradually make the output lighter, whereas values above 100 make the output
+# darker. The value divided by 100 is the actual gamma applied, so 80 represents
+# a gamma of 0.8, The value 220 represents a gamma of 2.2, and 100 does not
+# change the gamma.
+# Minimum value: 40, maximum value: 240, default value: 80.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_COLORSTYLE_GAMMA  = 80
+
+# If the HTML_TIMESTAMP tag is set to YES then the footer of each generated HTML
+# page will contain the date and time when the page was generated. Setting this
+# to NO can help when comparing the output of multiple runs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_TIMESTAMP         = NO
+
+# If the HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS tag is set to YES then the generated HTML
+# documentation will contain sections that can be hidden and shown after the
+# page has loaded.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_DYNAMIC_SECTIONS  = YES
+
+# With HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES one can control the preferred number of entries
+# shown in the various tree structured indices initially; the user can expand
+# and collapse entries dynamically later on. Doxygen will expand the tree to
+# such a level that at most the specified number of entries are visible (unless
+# a fully collapsed tree already exceeds this amount). So setting the number of
+# entries 1 will produce a full collapsed tree by default. 0 is a special value
+# representing an infinite number of entries and will result in a full expanded
+# tree by default.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 9999, default value: 100.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+HTML_INDEX_NUM_ENTRIES = 100
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCSET tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated that can be used as input for Apple's Xcode 3 integrated development
+# environment (see: http://developer.apple.com/tools/xcode/), introduced with
+# OSX 10.5 (Leopard). To create a documentation set, doxygen will generate a
+# Makefile in the HTML output directory. Running make will produce the docset in
+# that directory and running make install will install the docset in
+# ~/Library/Developer/Shared/Documentation/DocSets so that Xcode will find it at
+# startup. See http://developer.apple.com/tools/creatingdocsetswithdoxygen.html
+# for more information.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_DOCSET        = NO
+
+# This tag determines the name of the docset feed. A documentation feed provides
+# an umbrella under which multiple documentation sets from a single provider
+# (such as a company or product suite) can be grouped.
+# The default value is: Doxygen generated docs.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_FEEDNAME        = "Doxygen generated docs"
+
+# This tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify the documentation
+# set bundle. This should be a reverse domain-name style string, e.g.
+# com.mycompany.MyDocSet. Doxygen will append .docset to the name.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_BUNDLE_ID       = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID tag specifies a string that should uniquely identify
+# the documentation publisher. This should be a reverse domain-name style
+# string, e.g. com.mycompany.MyDocSet.documentation.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_ID    = org.doxygen.Publisher
+
+# The DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME tag identifies the documentation publisher.
+# The default value is: Publisher.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCSET is set to YES.
+
+DOCSET_PUBLISHER_NAME  = Publisher
+
+# If the GENERATE_HTMLHELP tag is set to YES then doxygen generates three
+# additional HTML index files: index.hhp, index.hhc, and index.hhk. The
+# index.hhp is a project file that can be read by Microsoft's HTML Help Workshop
+# (see: http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/download/details.aspx?id=21138) on
+# Windows.
+#
+# The HTML Help Workshop contains a compiler that can convert all HTML output
+# generated by doxygen into a single compiled HTML file (.chm). Compiled HTML
+# files are now used as the Windows 98 help format, and will replace the old
+# Windows help format (.hlp) on all Windows platforms in the future. Compressed
+# HTML files also contain an index, a table of contents, and you can search for
+# words in the documentation. The HTML workshop also contains a viewer for
+# compressed HTML files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_HTMLHELP      = NO
+
+# The CHM_FILE tag can be used to specify the file name of the resulting .chm
+# file. You can add a path in front of the file if the result should not be
+# written to the html output directory.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_FILE               =
+
+# The HHC_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location (absolute path
+# including file name) of the HTML help compiler ( hhc.exe). If non-empty
+# doxygen will try to run the HTML help compiler on the generated index.hhp.
+# The file has to be specified with full path.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+HHC_LOCATION           =
+
+# The GENERATE_CHI flag controls if a separate .chi index file is generated (
+# YES) or that it should be included in the master .chm file ( NO).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_CHI           = NO
+
+# The CHM_INDEX_ENCODING is used to encode HtmlHelp index ( hhk), content ( hhc)
+# and project file content.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+CHM_INDEX_ENCODING     =
+
+# The BINARY_TOC flag controls whether a binary table of contents is generated (
+# YES) or a normal table of contents ( NO) in the .chm file. Furthermore it
+# enables the Previous and Next buttons.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+BINARY_TOC             = NO
+
+# The TOC_EXPAND flag can be set to YES to add extra items for group members to
+# the table of contents of the HTML help documentation and to the tree view.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTMLHELP is set to YES.
+
+TOC_EXPAND             = YES
+
+# If the GENERATE_QHP tag is set to YES and both QHP_NAMESPACE and
+# QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER are set, an additional index file will be generated that
+# can be used as input for Qt's qhelpgenerator to generate a Qt Compressed Help
+# (.qch) of the generated HTML documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_QHP           = NO
+
+# If the QHG_LOCATION tag is specified, the QCH_FILE tag can be used to specify
+# the file name of the resulting .qch file. The path specified is relative to
+# the HTML output folder.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QCH_FILE               =
+
+# The QHP_NAMESPACE tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt Help
+# Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Namespace
+# (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#namespace).
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_NAMESPACE          = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# The QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER tag specifies the namespace to use when generating Qt
+# Help Project output. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Virtual
+# Folders (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#virtual-
+# folders).
+# The default value is: doc.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_VIRTUAL_FOLDER     = doc
+
+# If the QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME tag is set, it specifies the name of a custom
+# filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_NAME   =
+
+# The QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes of the
+# custom filter to add. For more information please see Qt Help Project / Custom
+# Filters (see: http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#custom-
+# filters).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_CUST_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS tag specifies the list of the attributes this
+# project's filter section matches. Qt Help Project / Filter Attributes (see:
+# http://qt-project.org/doc/qt-4.8/qthelpproject.html#filter-attributes).
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHP_SECT_FILTER_ATTRS  =
+
+# The QHG_LOCATION tag can be used to specify the location of Qt's
+# qhelpgenerator. If non-empty doxygen will try to run qhelpgenerator on the
+# generated .qhp file.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_QHP is set to YES.
+
+QHG_LOCATION           =
+
+# If the GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP tag is set to YES, additional index files will be
+# generated, together with the HTML files, they form an Eclipse help plugin. To
+# install this plugin and make it available under the help contents menu in
+# Eclipse, the contents of the directory containing the HTML and XML files needs
+# to be copied into the plugins directory of eclipse. The name of the directory
+# within the plugins directory should be the same as the ECLIPSE_DOC_ID value.
+# After copying Eclipse needs to be restarted before the help appears.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP   = NO
+
+# A unique identifier for the Eclipse help plugin. When installing the plugin
+# the directory name containing the HTML and XML files should also have this
+# name. Each documentation set should have its own identifier.
+# The default value is: org.doxygen.Project.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_ECLIPSEHELP is set to YES.
+
+ECLIPSE_DOC_ID         = org.doxygen.Project
+
+# If you want full control over the layout of the generated HTML pages it might
+# be necessary to disable the index and replace it with your own. The
+# DISABLE_INDEX tag can be used to turn on/off the condensed index (tabs) at top
+# of each HTML page. A value of NO enables the index and the value YES disables
+# it. Since the tabs in the index contain the same information as the navigation
+# tree, you can set this option to YES if you also set GENERATE_TREEVIEW to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+DISABLE_INDEX          = YES
+
+# The GENERATE_TREEVIEW tag is used to specify whether a tree-like index
+# structure should be generated to display hierarchical information. If the tag
+# value is set to YES, a side panel will be generated containing a tree-like
+# index structure (just like the one that is generated for HTML Help). For this
+# to work a browser that supports JavaScript, DHTML, CSS and frames is required
+# (i.e. any modern browser). Windows users are probably better off using the
+# HTML help feature. Via custom stylesheets (see HTML_EXTRA_STYLESHEET) one can
+# further fine-tune the look of the index. As an example, the default style
+# sheet generated by doxygen has an example that shows how to put an image at
+# the root of the tree instead of the PROJECT_NAME. Since the tree basically has
+# the same information as the tab index, you could consider setting
+# DISABLE_INDEX to YES when enabling this option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_TREEVIEW      = YES
+
+# The ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE tag can be used to set the number of enum values that
+# doxygen will group on one line in the generated HTML documentation.
+#
+# Note that a value of 0 will completely suppress the enum values from appearing
+# in the overview section.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 20, default value: 4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+ENUM_VALUES_PER_LINE   = 1
+
+# If the treeview is enabled (see GENERATE_TREEVIEW) then this tag can be used
+# to set the initial width (in pixels) of the frame in which the tree is shown.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1500, default value: 250.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+TREEVIEW_WIDTH         = 250
+
+# When the EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW option is set to YES doxygen will open links to
+# external symbols imported via tag files in a separate window.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+EXT_LINKS_IN_WINDOW    = NO
+
+# Use this tag to change the font size of LaTeX formulas included as images in
+# the HTML documentation. When you change the font size after a successful
+# doxygen run you need to manually remove any form_*.png images from the HTML
+# output directory to force them to be regenerated.
+# Minimum value: 8, maximum value: 50, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_FONTSIZE       = 10
+
+# Use the FORMULA_TRANPARENT tag to determine whether or not the images
+# generated for formulas are transparent PNGs. Transparent PNGs are not
+# supported properly for IE 6.0, but are supported on all modern browsers.
+#
+# Note that when changing this option you need to delete any form_*.png files in
+# the HTML output directory before the changes have effect.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+FORMULA_TRANSPARENT    = YES
+
+# Enable the USE_MATHJAX option to render LaTeX formulas using MathJax (see
+# http://www.mathjax.org) which uses client side Javascript for the rendering
+# instead of using prerendered bitmaps. Use this if you do not have LaTeX
+# installed or if you want to formulas look prettier in the HTML output. When
+# enabled you may also need to install MathJax separately and configure the path
+# to it using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+USE_MATHJAX            = NO
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you can set the default output format to be used for
+# the MathJax output. See the MathJax site (see:
+# http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details.
+# Possible values are: HTML-CSS (which is slower, but has the best
+# compatibility), NativeMML (i.e. MathML) and SVG.
+# The default value is: HTML-CSS.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_FORMAT         = HTML-CSS
+
+# When MathJax is enabled you need to specify the location relative to the HTML
+# output directory using the MATHJAX_RELPATH option. The destination directory
+# should contain the MathJax.js script. For instance, if the mathjax directory
+# is located at the same level as the HTML output directory, then
+# MATHJAX_RELPATH should be ../mathjax. The default value points to the MathJax
+# Content Delivery Network so you can quickly see the result without installing
+# MathJax. However, it is strongly recommended to install a local copy of
+# MathJax from http://www.mathjax.org before deployment.
+# The default value is: http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_RELPATH        = http://cdn.mathjax.org/mathjax/latest
+
+# The MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS tag can be used to specify one or more MathJax
+# extension names that should be enabled during MathJax rendering. For example
+# MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS = TeX/AMSmath TeX/AMSsymbols
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_EXTENSIONS     =
+
+# The MATHJAX_CODEFILE tag can be used to specify a file with javascript pieces
+# of code that will be used on startup of the MathJax code. See the MathJax site
+# (see: http://docs.mathjax.org/en/latest/output.html) for more details. For an
+# example see the documentation.
+# This tag requires that the tag USE_MATHJAX is set to YES.
+
+MATHJAX_CODEFILE       =
+
+# When the SEARCHENGINE tag is enabled doxygen will generate a search box for
+# the HTML output. The underlying search engine uses javascript and DHTML and
+# should work on any modern browser. Note that when using HTML help
+# (GENERATE_HTMLHELP), Qt help (GENERATE_QHP), or docsets (GENERATE_DOCSET)
+# there is already a search function so this one should typically be disabled.
+# For large projects the javascript based search engine can be slow, then
+# enabling SERVER_BASED_SEARCH may provide a better solution. It is possible to
+# search using the keyboard; to jump to the search box use <access key> + S
+# (what the <access key> is depends on the OS and browser, but it is typically
+# <CTRL>, <ALT>/<option>, or both). Inside the search box use the <cursor down
+# key> to jump into the search results window, the results can be navigated
+# using the <cursor keys>. Press <Enter> to select an item or <escape> to cancel
+# the search. The filter options can be selected when the cursor is inside the
+# search box by pressing <Shift>+<cursor down>. Also here use the <cursor keys>
+# to select a filter and <Enter> or <escape> to activate or cancel the filter
+# option.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_HTML is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE           = NO
+
+# When the SERVER_BASED_SEARCH tag is enabled the search engine will be
+# implemented using a web server instead of a web client using Javascript. There
+# are two flavors of web server based searching depending on the EXTERNAL_SEARCH
+# setting. When disabled, doxygen will generate a PHP script for searching and
+# an index file used by the script. When EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled the indexing
+# and searching needs to be provided by external tools. See the section
+# "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SERVER_BASED_SEARCH    = NO
+
+# When EXTERNAL_SEARCH tag is enabled doxygen will no longer generate the PHP
+# script for searching. Instead the search results are written to an XML file
+# which needs to be processed by an external indexer. Doxygen will invoke an
+# external search engine pointed to by the SEARCHENGINE_URL option to obtain the
+# search results.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/).
+#
+# See the section "External Indexing and Searching" for details.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH        = NO
+
+# The SEARCHENGINE_URL should point to a search engine hosted by a web server
+# which will return the search results when EXTERNAL_SEARCH is enabled.
+#
+# Doxygen ships with an example indexer ( doxyindexer) and search engine
+# (doxysearch.cgi) which are based on the open source search engine library
+# Xapian (see: http://xapian.org/). See the section "External Indexing and
+# Searching" for details.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHENGINE_URL       =
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the unindexed
+# search data is written to a file for indexing by an external tool. With the
+# SEARCHDATA_FILE tag the name of this file can be specified.
+# The default file is: searchdata.xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+SEARCHDATA_FILE        = searchdata.xml
+
+# When SERVER_BASED_SEARCH and EXTERNAL_SEARCH are both enabled the
+# EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID tag can be used as an identifier for the project. This is
+# useful in combination with EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS to search through multiple
+# projects and redirect the results back to the right project.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID     =
+
+# The EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS tag can be used to enable searching through doxygen
+# projects other than the one defined by this configuration file, but that are
+# all added to the same external search index. Each project needs to have a
+# unique id set via EXTERNAL_SEARCH_ID. The search mapping then maps the id of
+# to a relative location where the documentation can be found. The format is:
+# EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS = tagname1=loc1 tagname2=loc2 ...
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCHENGINE is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_SEARCH_MAPPINGS  =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the LaTeX output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate LaTeX output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+GENERATE_LATEX         = NO
+
+# The LATEX_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the LaTeX docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_OUTPUT           = latex
+
+# The LATEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the LaTeX command name to be
+# invoked.
+#
+# Note that when enabling USE_PDFLATEX this option is only used for generating
+# bitmaps for formulas in the HTML output, but not in the Makefile that is
+# written to the output directory.
+# The default file is: latex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_CMD_NAME         = latex
+
+# The MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME tag can be used to specify the command name to generate
+# index for LaTeX.
+# The default file is: makeindex.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+MAKEINDEX_CMD_NAME     = makeindex
+
+# If the COMPACT_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact LaTeX
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_LATEX          = NO
+
+# The PAPER_TYPE tag can be used to set the paper type that is used by the
+# printer.
+# Possible values are: a4 (210 x 297 mm), letter (8.5 x 11 inches), legal (8.5 x
+# 14 inches) and executive (7.25 x 10.5 inches).
+# The default value is: a4.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PAPER_TYPE             = a4wide
+
+# The EXTRA_PACKAGES tag can be used to specify one or more LaTeX package names
+# that should be included in the LaTeX output. To get the times font for
+# instance you can specify
+# EXTRA_PACKAGES=times
+# If left blank no extra packages will be included.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+EXTRA_PACKAGES         =
+
+# The LATEX_HEADER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX header for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The header should contain everything until the first
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard header. See
+# section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to let doxygen write the
+# default header to a separate file.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined header if you know what you are doing! The
+# following commands have a special meaning inside the header: $title,
+# $datetime, $date, $doxygenversion, $projectname, $projectnumber,
+# $projectbrief, $projectlogo. Doxygen will replace $title with the empy string,
+# for the replacement values of the other commands the user is refered to
+# HTML_HEADER.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HEADER           =
+
+# The LATEX_FOOTER tag can be used to specify a personal LaTeX footer for the
+# generated LaTeX document. The footer should contain everything after the last
+# chapter. If it is left blank doxygen will generate a standard footer. See
+# LATEX_HEADER for more information on how to generate a default footer and what
+# special commands can be used inside the footer.
+#
+# Note: Only use a user-defined footer if you know what you are doing!
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_FOOTER           =
+
+# The LATEX_EXTRA_FILES tag can be used to specify one or more extra images or
+# other source files which should be copied to the LATEX_OUTPUT output
+# directory. Note that the files will be copied as-is; there are no commands or
+# markers available.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_EXTRA_FILES      =
+
+# If the PDF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the LaTeX that is generated is
+# prepared for conversion to PDF (using ps2pdf or pdflatex). The PDF file will
+# contain links (just like the HTML output) instead of page references. This
+# makes the output suitable for online browsing using a PDF viewer.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+PDF_HYPERLINKS         = YES
+
+# If the USE_PDFLATEX tag is set to YES, doxygen will use pdflatex to generate
+# the PDF file directly from the LaTeX files. Set this option to YES to get a
+# higher quality PDF documentation.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+USE_PDFLATEX           = YES
+
+# If the LATEX_BATCHMODE tag is set to YES, doxygen will add the \batchmode
+# command to the generated LaTeX files. This will instruct LaTeX to keep running
+# if errors occur, instead of asking the user for help. This option is also used
+# when generating formulas in HTML.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BATCHMODE        = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_HIDE_INDICES tag is set to YES then doxygen will not include the
+# index chapters (such as File Index, Compound Index, etc.) in the output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_HIDE_INDICES     = NO
+
+# If the LATEX_SOURCE_CODE tag is set to YES then doxygen will include source
+# code with syntax highlighting in the LaTeX output.
+#
+# Note that which sources are shown also depends on other settings such as
+# SOURCE_BROWSER.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_SOURCE_CODE      = NO
+
+# The LATEX_BIB_STYLE tag can be used to specify the style to use for the
+# bibliography, e.g. plainnat, or ieeetr. See
+# http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/BibTeX and \cite for more info.
+# The default value is: plain.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_LATEX is set to YES.
+
+LATEX_BIB_STYLE        = plain
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the RTF output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate RTF output. The
+# RTF output is optimized for Word 97 and may not look too pretty with other RTF
+# readers/editors.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_RTF           = NO
+
+# The RTF_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the RTF docs will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: rtf.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_OUTPUT             = rtf
+
+# If the COMPACT_RTF tag is set to YES doxygen generates more compact RTF
+# documents. This may be useful for small projects and may help to save some
+# trees in general.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+COMPACT_RTF            = NO
+
+# If the RTF_HYPERLINKS tag is set to YES, the RTF that is generated will
+# contain hyperlink fields. The RTF file will contain links (just like the HTML
+# output) instead of page references. This makes the output suitable for online
+# browsing using Word or some other Word compatible readers that support those
+# fields.
+#
+# Note: WordPad (write) and others do not support links.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_HYPERLINKS         = NO
+
+# Load stylesheet definitions from file. Syntax is similar to doxygen's config
+# file, i.e. a series of assignments. You only have to provide replacements,
+# missing definitions are set to their default value.
+#
+# See also section "Doxygen usage" for information on how to generate the
+# default style sheet that doxygen normally uses.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_STYLESHEET_FILE    =
+
+# Set optional variables used in the generation of an RTF document. Syntax is
+# similar to doxygen's config file. A template extensions file can be generated
+# using doxygen -e rtf extensionFile.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_RTF is set to YES.
+
+RTF_EXTENSIONS_FILE    =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the man page output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_MAN tag is set to YES doxygen will generate man pages for
+# classes and files.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_MAN           = NO
+
+# The MAN_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the man pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it. A directory man3 will be created inside the directory specified by
+# MAN_OUTPUT.
+# The default directory is: man.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_OUTPUT             = man
+
+# The MAN_EXTENSION tag determines the extension that is added to the generated
+# man pages. In case the manual section does not start with a number, the number
+# 3 is prepended. The dot (.) at the beginning of the MAN_EXTENSION tag is
+# optional.
+# The default value is: .3.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_EXTENSION          = .3
+
+# The MAN_SUBDIR tag determines the name of the directory created within
+# MAN_OUTPUT in which the man pages are placed. If defaults to man followed by
+# MAN_EXTENSION with the initial . removed.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_SUBDIR             =
+
+# If the MAN_LINKS tag is set to YES and doxygen generates man output, then it
+# will generate one additional man file for each entity documented in the real
+# man page(s). These additional files only source the real man page, but without
+# them the man command would be unable to find the correct page.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_MAN is set to YES.
+
+MAN_LINKS              = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the XML output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_XML tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an XML file that
+# captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_XML           = NO
+
+# The XML_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the XML pages will be put. If a
+# relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in front of
+# it.
+# The default directory is: xml.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_OUTPUT             = xml
+
+# If the XML_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will dump the program
+# listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing information) to
+# the XML output. Note that enabling this will significantly increase the size
+# of the XML output.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_XML is set to YES.
+
+XML_PROGRAMLISTING     = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the DOCBOOK output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_DOCBOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate Docbook files
+# that can be used to generate PDF.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_DOCBOOK       = NO
+
+# The DOCBOOK_OUTPUT tag is used to specify where the Docbook pages will be put.
+# If a relative path is entered the value of OUTPUT_DIRECTORY will be put in
+# front of it.
+# The default directory is: docbook.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_OUTPUT         = docbook
+
+# If the DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING tag is set to YES doxygen will include the
+# program listings (including syntax highlighting and cross-referencing
+# information) to the DOCBOOK output. Note that enabling this will significantly
+# increase the size of the DOCBOOK output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_DOCBOOK is set to YES.
+
+DOCBOOK_PROGRAMLISTING = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options for the AutoGen Definitions output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF tag is set to YES doxygen will generate an AutoGen
+# Definitions (see http://autogen.sf.net) file that captures the structure of
+# the code including all documentation. Note that this feature is still
+# experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_AUTOGEN_DEF   = NO
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the Perl module output
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the GENERATE_PERLMOD tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a Perl module
+# file that captures the structure of the code including all documentation.
+#
+# Note that this feature is still experimental and incomplete at the moment.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+GENERATE_PERLMOD       = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_LATEX tag is set to YES doxygen will generate the necessary
+# Makefile rules, Perl scripts and LaTeX code to be able to generate PDF and DVI
+# output from the Perl module output.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_LATEX          = NO
+
+# If the PERLMOD_PRETTY tag is set to YES the Perl module output will be nicely
+# formatted so it can be parsed by a human reader. This is useful if you want to
+# understand what is going on. On the other hand, if this tag is set to NO the
+# size of the Perl module output will be much smaller and Perl will parse it
+# just the same.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_PRETTY         = YES
+
+# The names of the make variables in the generated doxyrules.make file are
+# prefixed with the string contained in PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX. This is useful
+# so different doxyrules.make files included by the same Makefile don't
+# overwrite each other's variables.
+# This tag requires that the tag GENERATE_PERLMOD is set to YES.
+
+PERLMOD_MAKEVAR_PREFIX =
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the preprocessor
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the ENABLE_PREPROCESSING tag is set to YES doxygen will evaluate all
+# C-preprocessor directives found in the sources and include files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+ENABLE_PREPROCESSING   = YES
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION tag is set to YES doxygen will expand all macro names
+# in the source code. If set to NO only conditional compilation will be
+# performed. Macro expansion can be done in a controlled way by setting
+# EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF to YES.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+MACRO_EXPANSION        = YES
+
+# If the EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF and MACRO_EXPANSION tags are both set to YES then
+# the macro expansion is limited to the macros specified with the PREDEFINED and
+# EXPAND_AS_DEFINED tags.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF     = YES
+
+# If the SEARCH_INCLUDES tag is set to YES the includes files in the
+# INCLUDE_PATH will be searched if a #include is found.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SEARCH_INCLUDES        = YES
+
+# The INCLUDE_PATH tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain include files that are not input files but should be processed by the
+# preprocessor.
+# This tag requires that the tag SEARCH_INCLUDES is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_PATH           =
+
+# You can use the INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS tag to specify one or more wildcard
+# patterns (like *.h and *.hpp) to filter out the header-files in the
+# directories. If left blank, the patterns specified with FILE_PATTERNS will be
+# used.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_FILE_PATTERNS  =
+
+# The PREDEFINED tag can be used to specify one or more macro names that are
+# defined before the preprocessor is started (similar to the -D option of e.g.
+# gcc). The argument of the tag is a list of macros of the form: name or
+# name=definition (no spaces). If the definition and the "=" are omitted, "=1"
+# is assumed. To prevent a macro definition from being undefined via #undef or
+# recursively expanded use the := operator instead of the = operator.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+PREDEFINED             = __DOXYGEN__ \
+                         PROGMEM
+
+# If the MACRO_EXPANSION and EXPAND_ONLY_PREDEF tags are set to YES then this
+# tag can be used to specify a list of macro names that should be expanded. The
+# macro definition that is found in the sources will be used. Use the PREDEFINED
+# tag if you want to use a different macro definition that overrules the
+# definition found in the source code.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+EXPAND_AS_DEFINED      =
+
+# If the SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS tag is set to YES then doxygen's preprocessor will
+# remove all references to function-like macros that are alone on a line, have
+# an all uppercase name, and do not end with a semicolon. Such function macros
+# are typically used for boiler-plate code, and will confuse the parser if not
+# removed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag ENABLE_PREPROCESSING is set to YES.
+
+SKIP_FUNCTION_MACROS   = YES
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to external references
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# The TAGFILES tag can be used to specify one or more tag files. For each tag
+# file the location of the external documentation should be added. The format of
+# a tag file without this location is as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1 file2 ...
+# Adding location for the tag files is done as follows:
+# TAGFILES = file1=loc1 "file2 = loc2" ...
+# where loc1 and loc2 can be relative or absolute paths or URLs. See the
+# section "Linking to external documentation" for more information about the use
+# of tag files.
+# Note: Each tag file must have a unique name (where the name does NOT include
+# the path). If a tag file is not located in the directory in which doxygen is
+# run, you must also specify the path to the tagfile here.
+
+TAGFILES               =
+
+# When a file name is specified after GENERATE_TAGFILE, doxygen will create a
+# tag file that is based on the input files it reads. See section "Linking to
+# external documentation" for more information about the usage of tag files.
+
+GENERATE_TAGFILE       =
+
+# If the ALLEXTERNALS tag is set to YES all external class will be listed in the
+# class index. If set to NO only the inherited external classes will be listed.
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+ALLEXTERNALS           = NO
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_GROUPS tag is set to YES all external groups will be listed in
+# the modules index. If set to NO, only the current project's groups will be
+# listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_GROUPS        = YES
+
+# If the EXTERNAL_PAGES tag is set to YES all external pages will be listed in
+# the related pages index. If set to NO, only the current project's pages will
+# be listed.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+EXTERNAL_PAGES         = YES
+
+# The PERL_PATH should be the absolute path and name of the perl script
+# interpreter (i.e. the result of 'which perl').
+# The default file (with absolute path) is: /usr/bin/perl.
+
+PERL_PATH              = /usr/bin/perl
+
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+# Configuration options related to the dot tool
+#---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# If the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a class diagram
+# (in HTML and LaTeX) for classes with base or super classes. Setting the tag to
+# NO turns the diagrams off. Note that this option also works with HAVE_DOT
+# disabled, but it is recommended to install and use dot, since it yields more
+# powerful graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+CLASS_DIAGRAMS         = NO
+
+# You can define message sequence charts within doxygen comments using the \msc
+# command. Doxygen will then run the mscgen tool (see:
+# http://www.mcternan.me.uk/mscgen/)) to produce the chart and insert it in the
+# documentation. The MSCGEN_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where
+# the mscgen tool resides. If left empty the tool is assumed to be found in the
+# default search path.
+
+MSCGEN_PATH            =
+
+# You can include diagrams made with dia in doxygen documentation. Doxygen will
+# then run dia to produce the diagram and insert it in the documentation. The
+# DIA_PATH tag allows you to specify the directory where the dia binary resides.
+# If left empty dia is assumed to be found in the default search path.
+
+DIA_PATH               =
+
+# If set to YES, the inheritance and collaboration graphs will hide inheritance
+# and usage relations if the target is undocumented or is not a class.
+# The default value is: YES.
+
+HIDE_UNDOC_RELATIONS   = YES
+
+# If you set the HAVE_DOT tag to YES then doxygen will assume the dot tool is
+# available from the path. This tool is part of Graphviz (see:
+# http://www.graphviz.org/), a graph visualization toolkit from AT&T and Lucent
+# Bell Labs. The other options in this section have no effect if this option is
+# set to NO
+# The default value is: NO.
+
+HAVE_DOT               = NO
+
+# The DOT_NUM_THREADS specifies the number of dot invocations doxygen is allowed
+# to run in parallel. When set to 0 doxygen will base this on the number of
+# processors available in the system. You can set it explicitly to a value
+# larger than 0 to get control over the balance between CPU load and processing
+# speed.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 32, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_NUM_THREADS        = 0
+
+# When you want a differently looking font in the dot files that doxygen
+# generates you can specify the font name using DOT_FONTNAME. You need to make
+# sure dot is able to find the font, which can be done by putting it in a
+# standard location or by setting the DOTFONTPATH environment variable or by
+# setting DOT_FONTPATH to the directory containing the font.
+# The default value is: Helvetica.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTNAME           =
+
+# The DOT_FONTSIZE tag can be used to set the size (in points) of the font of
+# dot graphs.
+# Minimum value: 4, maximum value: 24, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTSIZE           = 10
+
+# By default doxygen will tell dot to use the default font as specified with
+# DOT_FONTNAME. If you specify a different font using DOT_FONTNAME you can set
+# the path where dot can find it using this tag.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_FONTPATH           =
+
+# If the CLASS_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# each documented class showing the direct and indirect inheritance relations.
+# Setting this tag to YES will force the CLASS_DIAGRAMS tag to NO.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CLASS_GRAPH            = NO
+
+# If the COLLABORATION_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a
+# graph for each documented class showing the direct and indirect implementation
+# dependencies (inheritance, containment, and class references variables) of the
+# class with other documented classes.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+COLLABORATION_GRAPH    = NO
+
+# If the GROUP_GRAPHS tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for
+# groups, showing the direct groups dependencies.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GROUP_GRAPHS           = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is set to YES doxygen will generate inheritance and
+# collaboration diagrams in a style similar to the OMG's Unified Modeling
+# Language.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LOOK               = NO
+
+# If the UML_LOOK tag is enabled, the fields and methods are shown inside the
+# class node. If there are many fields or methods and many nodes the graph may
+# become too big to be useful. The UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS threshold limits the
+# number of items for each type to make the size more manageable. Set this to 0
+# for no limit. Note that the threshold may be exceeded by 50% before the limit
+# is enforced. So when you set the threshold to 10, up to 15 fields may appear,
+# but if the number exceeds 15, the total amount of fields shown is limited to
+# 10.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 100, default value: 10.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+UML_LIMIT_NUM_FIELDS   = 10
+
+# If the TEMPLATE_RELATIONS tag is set to YES then the inheritance and
+# collaboration graphs will show the relations between templates and their
+# instances.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+TEMPLATE_RELATIONS     = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDE_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are set to
+# YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing the
+# direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDE_GRAPH          = NO
+
+# If the INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH, ENABLE_PREPROCESSING and SEARCH_INCLUDES tags are
+# set to YES then doxygen will generate a graph for each documented file showing
+# the direct and indirect include dependencies of the file with other documented
+# files.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INCLUDED_BY_GRAPH      = NO
+
+# If the CALL_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a call
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable call graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callgraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALL_GRAPH             = NO
+
+# If the CALLER_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will generate a caller
+# dependency graph for every global function or class method.
+#
+# Note that enabling this option will significantly increase the time of a run.
+# So in most cases it will be better to enable caller graphs for selected
+# functions only using the \callergraph command.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+CALLER_GRAPH           = NO
+
+# If the GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY tag is set to YES then doxygen will graphical
+# hierarchy of all classes instead of a textual one.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GRAPHICAL_HIERARCHY    = NO
+
+# If the DIRECTORY_GRAPH tag is set to YES then doxygen will show the
+# dependencies a directory has on other directories in a graphical way. The
+# dependency relations are determined by the #include relations between the
+# files in the directories.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DIRECTORY_GRAPH        = NO
+
+# The DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT tag can be used to set the image format of the images
+# generated by dot.
+# Note: If you choose svg you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order
+# to make the SVG files visible in IE 9+ (other browsers do not have this
+# requirement).
+# Possible values are: png, jpg, gif and svg.
+# The default value is: png.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT       = png
+
+# If DOT_IMAGE_FORMAT is set to svg, then this option can be set to YES to
+# enable generation of interactive SVG images that allow zooming and panning.
+#
+# Note that this requires a modern browser other than Internet Explorer. Tested
+# and working are Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera.
+# Note: For IE 9+ you need to set HTML_FILE_EXTENSION to xhtml in order to make
+# the SVG files visible. Older versions of IE do not have SVG support.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+INTERACTIVE_SVG        = NO
+
+# The DOT_PATH tag can be used to specify the path where the dot tool can be
+# found. If left blank, it is assumed the dot tool can be found in the path.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_PATH               =
+
+# The DOTFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dot files that are included in the documentation (see the \dotfile
+# command).
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOTFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The MSCFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain msc files that are included in the documentation (see the \mscfile
+# command).
+
+MSCFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# The DIAFILE_DIRS tag can be used to specify one or more directories that
+# contain dia files that are included in the documentation (see the \diafile
+# command).
+
+DIAFILE_DIRS           =
+
+# When using plantuml, the PLANTUML_JAR_PATH tag should be used to specify the
+# path where java can find the plantuml.jar file. If left blank, it is assumed
+# PlantUML is not used or called during a preprocessing step. Doxygen will
+# generate a warning when it encounters a \startuml command in this case and
+# will not generate output for the diagram.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+PLANTUML_JAR_PATH      =
+
+# The DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES tag can be used to set the maximum number of nodes
+# that will be shown in the graph. If the number of nodes in a graph becomes
+# larger than this value, doxygen will truncate the graph, which is visualized
+# by representing a node as a red box. Note that doxygen if the number of direct
+# children of the root node in a graph is already larger than
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES then the graph will not be shown at all. Also note that
+# the size of a graph can be further restricted by MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 10000, default value: 50.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES    = 15
+
+# The MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH tag can be used to set the maximum depth of the graphs
+# generated by dot. A depth value of 3 means that only nodes reachable from the
+# root by following a path via at most 3 edges will be shown. Nodes that lay
+# further from the root node will be omitted. Note that setting this option to 1
+# or 2 may greatly reduce the computation time needed for large code bases. Also
+# note that the size of a graph can be further restricted by
+# DOT_GRAPH_MAX_NODES. Using a depth of 0 means no depth restriction.
+# Minimum value: 0, maximum value: 1000, default value: 0.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+MAX_DOT_GRAPH_DEPTH    = 2
+
+# Set the DOT_TRANSPARENT tag to YES to generate images with a transparent
+# background. This is disabled by default, because dot on Windows does not seem
+# to support this out of the box.
+#
+# Warning: Depending on the platform used, enabling this option may lead to
+# badly anti-aliased labels on the edges of a graph (i.e. they become hard to
+# read).
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_TRANSPARENT        = YES
+
+# Set the DOT_MULTI_TARGETS tag to YES allow dot to generate multiple output
+# files in one run (i.e. multiple -o and -T options on the command line). This
+# makes dot run faster, but since only newer versions of dot (>1.8.10) support
+# this, this feature is disabled by default.
+# The default value is: NO.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_MULTI_TARGETS      = NO
+
+# If the GENERATE_LEGEND tag is set to YES doxygen will generate a legend page
+# explaining the meaning of the various boxes and arrows in the dot generated
+# graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+GENERATE_LEGEND        = YES
+
+# If the DOT_CLEANUP tag is set to YES doxygen will remove the intermediate dot
+# files that are used to generate the various graphs.
+# The default value is: YES.
+# This tag requires that the tag HAVE_DOT is set to YES.
+
+DOT_CLEANUP            = YES
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..68e0a70885
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/XPLAINBridge/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+# --------------------------------------
+#         LUFA Project Makefile.
+# --------------------------------------
+
+# Run "make help" for target help.
+
+AVRISP_PATH  = ../AVRISP-MKII
+
+MCU          = at90usb1287
+ARCH         = AVR8
+BOARD        = XPLAIN
+F_CPU        = 8000000
+F_USB        = $(F_CPU)
+OPTIMIZATION = s
+TARGET       = XPLAINBridge
+SRC          = $(TARGET).c Lib/SoftUART.c USARTDescriptors.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/AVRISPDescriptors.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2Protocol.c \
+               $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/V2ProtocolParams.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPProtocol.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/ISP/ISPTarget.c \
+               $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGProtocol.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XPROGTarget.c $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/XMEGANVM.c \
+               $(AVRISP_PATH)/Lib/XPROG/TINYNVM.c $(LUFA_SRC_USB) $(LUFA_SRC_USBCLASS)
+LUFA_PATH    = ../../LUFA
+CC_FLAGS     = -DUSE_LUFA_CONFIG_HEADER -IConfig/ -I$(AVRISP_PATH)
+LD_FLAGS     =
+
+# Default target
+all:
+
+# Since this project borrows files from the AVRISP-MKII project which may also have an
+# identical OBJDIR directory, we need to enforce the use of this project's object file
+# directory as the one where the build object files are to be stored by pre-pending the
+# absolute path of the current project to the OBJDIR variable.
+ifneq ($(OBJDIR),)
+  override OBJDIR:=$(shell pwd)/$(OBJDIR)
+endif
+
+# Include LUFA build script makefiles
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_core.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_sources.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_build.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_cppcheck.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_doxygen.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_dfu.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_hid.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_avrdude.mk
+include $(LUFA_PATH)/Build/lufa_atprogram.mk
diff --git a/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/makefile b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/makefile
new file mode 100644
index 0000000000..6552c59401
--- /dev/null
+++ b/tmk_core/protocol/lufa/LUFA-git/Projects/makefile
@@ -0,0 +1,47 @@
+#
+#             LUFA Library
+#     Copyright (C) Dean Camera, 2014.
+#
+#  dean [at] fourwalledcubicle [dot] com
+#           www.lufa-lib.org
+#
+
+# Makefile to build all the LUFA Projects. Call with "make all" to
+# rebuild all projects.
+
+# Projects are pre-cleaned before each one is built, to ensure any
+# custom LUFA library build options are reflected in the compiled
+# code.
+
+PROJECT_DIRECTORIES := $(shell ls -d */)
+
+# This makefile is potentially infinitely recursive if something really bad
+# happens when determining the set of project directories - hard-abort if
+# more than 10 levels deep to avoid angry emails.
+ifeq ($(MAKELEVEL), 10)
+   $(error EMERGENCY ABORT: INFINITE RECURSION DETECTED)
+endif
+
+# Need to special-case building without a per-project object directory
+ifeq ($(OBJDIR),)
+   # If no target specified, force "clean all" and disallow parallel build
+   ifeq ($(MAKECMDGOALS),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean all
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+
+   # If one of the targets is to build, force "clean" beforehand and disallow parallel build
+   ifneq ($(findstring all, $(MAKECMDGOALS)),)
+      MAKECMDGOALS := clean $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+      .NOTPARALLEL:
+   endif
+endif
+
+%: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+	@echo . > /dev/null
+
+$(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES):
+	@$(MAKE) -C $@ $(MAKECMDGOALS)
+
+.PHONY: $(PROJECT_DIRECTORIES)
+